Store
 

There are a number of possible causes for such a behavior. This FAQ will help you to find out what is causing the problem in your specific situation. In this FAQ we will be using destination device as a generic term for the device you are trying to connect to. The destination device can be anything from a normal computer, to a server, to a network printer.


1. Are you trying to connect to the destination device using a host name?

If you are using a host name, please try once using its IP address instead. If that works, the problem has to do with DNS resolution. Please make sure DNS is enabled for the VPN connection and correctly configured. Note that using Bonjour or NETBIOS hostnames is generally not possible over VPN.


2. Is the IP address you are connecting to really part of the remote network?

For example, if your remote network is 192.168.13.0/24, you should be able to connect to IPs starting with 192.168.13.x, but connections to IPs starting with 192.168.14.x will not work as they are outside the address range of traffic tunneled through the VPN.


3. Is the local address in VPN Tracker part of the remote network?

Using a local address in VPN Tracker (Basic > Local Address) that is part of the remote network is not possible with most VPN gateways. Please use a local address that is outside all remote networks. For example, if your remote network is 192.168.13.0/24, do not use an address starting with 192.168.13. If you are using an automatic configuration method (e.g. Mode Config, EasyVPN, DHCP over VPN) you may be able to assign a local address to VPN Tracker that is part of the remote network. Refer to the configuration guide for your VPN gateway for more information.


4. Could multiple VPN users use the same local address?

If multiple VPN users exist, pleas make sure no two users are using the same local address (Basic > Local Address), otherwise one of them will not be able to use the tunnel anymore whenever both of them are connected. If that field is empty in your configuration, VPN Tracker will just use the IP address of your primary network interface as local address, and of course, this can also cause an address conflict with another user, that’s why we do not recommend to leave that field empty if there are multiple VPN users.


5. Can you ping the LAN address of the VPN gateway?

You can find a ping tool directly in VPN Tracker under Tools > Ping Host. The LAN address of the VPN gateway is special in the regard that this address doesn’t need to be routed at all. So if you can ping that address but no other remote address, it is most likely a routing issue at the remote end.


6. If you can't ping anything, try re-running the VPN Availability Test

The VPN Availability Test can be found in the menu: Tools > VPN Availability Test. Then try connecting the VPN again. The results of this test depend on the capabilities of your local Internet router/modem or the Internet connection itself and they influence how the VPN tunnel is established. VPN Tracker automatically runs the test for every new Internet connection it is able to detect but even if a connection has been tested before, there are various reasons why the behavior of that connection may have changed in the meantime.


7. Is your VPN gateway the default gateway (router) of its network?

If the VPN gateway is not the default gateway, you will in many cases need a suitable routing setup in order for responses to reach you. Whenever a device doesn’t know how to reach an IP address directly, it forwards its reply to its default gateway and if that isn’t the VPN gateway, it won’t know what to do with that reply data. In that case its important to configure the default gateway to forward replies to VPN users to the VPN gateway.


8. Is your VPN gateway the default gateway (router) of its network?

For more details, we would like to direct you to the following FAQ entry.

The Pre-Shared Key (sometimes called shared secret) is basically a form of password for your VPN gateway which is set up on your device.

Configuring the Pre-Shared Key for a new VPN connection


VPN Tracker provides setup guides for all major gateway manufacturers. In these setup guides, you will also find information on how to set up a secure Pre-Shared Key for your specific device.

You can access all guides on this page.

I have lost my Pre-Shared Key - how can I get it back?


Here are a few tips for you to try and restore your Pre-Shared Key:
  1. Check if you have stored the affected connection in your Personal Safe. If so, you may be able to download the connection again.
  2. Check the Keychain (Applications > Utilities > Keychain Access). The Pre-Shared Key is usually saved here. Enter "Shared Secret" into the search bar to view a list of all your saved PSKs.
  3. Are you using Time Machine Backup? You could try restoring an older connection with the Pre-Shared-Key.
  4. Check your firewall or ask the relevant VPN Administrator. Refer to your device handbook to find out where to obtain this information on your specific firewall.

After upgrading to macOS 15 Sequoia, you might notice that your Mac constantly changes its MAC address, affecting your ability to connect to your VPN. This behavior is due to macOS 15’s new privacy features, which can assign randomized MAC addresses for network connections. However, you can configure your network settings to always use a fixed MAC address, which can resolve issues with VPN connectivity, such as DHCP reservations failing due to MAC address changes.

How to Set a Fixed MAC Address in macOS 15 (Sequoia):

  1. Open System Settings:
    • Click the Apple logo in the top-left corner of your screen.
    • Select System Settings from the dropdown menu.
  2. Go to Wi-Fi Settings:
    • In the left sidebar, click Wi-Fi.
    • Select the Wi-Fi network you usually connect to for VPN access and click on "Details...".
  3. Configure the MAC Address:
    • Look for the option labeled Private Wi-Fi Address.
    • Change this option to "Fixed" to use a fixed MAC address instead of a randomized one.
    • In some cases, the Fixed Setting may still cause issues. If this is the case, change the setting to "Off"
    • Your network will now always connect using the same MAC address, helping maintain your VPN connection stability.
  4. Re-establish VPN Tracker Connection:
    • Once you've set a fixed MAC address, ensure that your VPN’s DHCP reservation or configuration aligns with this MAC address.

This process will restore the VPN Tracker’s ability to connect reliably using a consistent MAC address, resolving issues caused by macOS 15 Sequoia’s default MAC address randomization feature.

  • If you haven't already, you can download VPN Tracker using this link.
  • After the download has completed, launch the app and click the "Login" button in the top left-hand corner of the app home page.
  • Enter your equinux ID and password in the space provided. Hint: This is the login you first created when purchasing VPN Tracker in our online store.

Are you a World Connect User?

You will need to download VPN tracker World Connect. You can do so using this link. VPN Tracker World Connect must be installed using the App Store. Once you've installed the app on your device, sign in with your equinux ID and password.

There are two types of IP addresses:
  • Private IP Addresses, and
  • Public IP Addresses

Private IP addresses can be used by any person or organisation for their private network.

The two most commonly used private network ranges (range of IP Addresses) are:
  • 192.168.0.x, and
  • 192.168.1.x

When for example your home network and your company network both use the same Private IP Range, there will be problems because you will see multiple devices with the same IP Adress and your computer will get confused.

Your Company Network:
When setting up a company network, most companies try to avoid the above listed IP ranges, which is also recommended by us, in order to not cause conflicts with people connecting over VPN. However, there are still some companies that use one of these popular network ranges.

Your Home Network:
A lot of popular home routers like Netgear, Asus, Google, D-Link, TP-Link, Linksys, Trendnet, AVM all use an IP Range of 192.168.0.x.

If your company Network uses the same IP Range as your home network you are going to run into problems.


Here are two possible solutions:
  1. Change your local network to a different range (Preferred)


    Possible Ranges are:
    • 10.250.250.x
    • 172.30.30.x
    • 192.168.250.x

    Advantage: Once you have made this change on your home network, you will never have conflicts in this network.
    Disadvantage: You will need to change the settings on your private network router once, this requires access and can take some time.
    What to do:
    • Login to your home router
    • Find the setup section with “DHCP” settings.
    • Change your router to a different IP adress (for example an address from one of the ranges listed above, for example 172.30.30.1)
    • Change the DHCP Server Settings to the same range of your router (If your router IP is 172.30.30.1, your range could be 172.30.30.10 to 172.30.30.253)

    After you have made these changes, there will be no more conflicts between your home and company network.
  2. Force Traffic over VPN


    There may be situations where it's not possible to use the first option (for example if you're in a coffee shop or hotel) In this case you have the option to force the traffic over your VPN Network, this means your VPN Network (company network) will always win.
    Advantage: This setting is global, meaning no matter what network you are in you will always be able to connect.
    Disadvantage: Once you are connected to your company’s VPN, you can not access local service, like home router, local storages or printers.
    What to do:
    • Configure your VPN Tracker connection
    • Select the "Advanced" Tab at the top
    • In the "Traffic control" section, activate the Checkbox "Force traffic over the VPN if remote networks conflict with local networks"


Download VPN Tracker free

There are multiple passwords that VPN Tracker may require: Your admin password for installation, passwords needed for connecting to your VPN or accessing your Keychain, etc.

This guide shows all password prompts you may encounter in VPN Tracker, explains why they are needed and lets you know which password should be entered.

Administrator password prompts

VPN Tracker will occasionally require you to enter an administrator password - for example during the macOS installation process in order to approve the System Extension needed to allow VPN Tracker to work effectively.

Account + licensing

To log in to VPN Tracker on Mac or iOS, or to log in to your account on my.vpntracker.com, you will need to enter your equinux ID and password. This password gives you access to your VPN Tracker account where your plan, team data, connections and device information is stored.

Pre-Shared Key

Many VPN connections are secured using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) or Shared Secret which is set on the VPN gateway during the configuration process. You need to enter the PSK in VPN Tracker in order to connect to your VPN.

If you are not the administrator of your VPN gateway, contact the admin for assistance. Tip: Admins can share pre-configured VPN connections using TeamCloud to avoid PSK confusion at enduser level.

Extended Authentication (XAUTH)

Most VPNs have a list of permitted VPN users - e.g. members of staff. Each VPN user has their own unique username and password which they need to enter in order to connect to the VPN. These are often the same credentials you use to sign in at the office. If you're not sure, get in touch with your admin who can advise you further.

Such a setup is called “Host to Everywhere” in VPN Tracker. All non-local traffic will be sent through the VPN. For this setup to work, it must be properly configured in VPN Tracker and on the VPN gateway:

  1. The Network Topology must be set to “Host to Everywhere” in VPN Tracker
  2. The VPN gateway must accept an incoming VPN connection with a 0.0.0.0/0 (= everywhere) endpoint

Once these are configured, it should already be possible to establish the VPN connection. However, it is very likely that Internet access will not yet work. For Internet access to work, several more things need to be configured on the VPN gateway:

  1. The VPN gateway must route VPN traffic not destined for its local networks out on the Internet
  2. This traffic must be subject to Network Address Translation (NAT) in order for replies to reach the VPN gateway
  3. In many cases, a suitable remote DNS setup is necessary for DNS resolution to continue to work

Note that not alll VPN gateways can be configured for Host to Everywhere connections. Most devices designed for small office or home networks (e.g. devices by NETGEAR or Linksys) are not capable of dealing with Host to Everywhere connections.

To access volumes and files hosted on a file server, one of several available distributed file system protocols must be used. As of 2018, the most common protocols are SMB/CIFS (default for Windows and macOS 10.9 or newer), AFP (default for macOS prior to 10.9), NFS (default for Linux and most UNIX operating system), WebDAV (based on HTTP, vendor neutral). All these protocols, except for WebDAV, have originally been designed to access files hosted on a file server located in the same network as the client accessing it. This can often lead to issues when using these protocols over a VPN connection.

A VPN connection typically runs over the Internet and the Internet has quite different network characteristics than a company or home network. Local networks typically offer a high amount of symmetric (upload equals download) bandwidth, very low and stable latency, very litte packet loss, almost no data corruption and a rather high and always constant maximum transmission unit size (MTU). Contrary to that, Internet connections offer a lot less bandwidth, usually asymmetric (much more download than upload) and the Internet has a rather high, very fluctuating latency, typically at leas some packet loss, data corruption can happen as well and the maximum transmission unit size can be much lower and is subject to change at any time even during an active transmission. Some of the protocols above can cope better with these conditions than others.

Issues to expect: Slow to very slow directory browsing (because of the large latency), copying a file from remote is slow (limited by the upload of the other side), copying a file to remote is slow (limited by the upload of the local side), directly opening a file directly is even slower (caused by limited upload bandwidth but also large latency and small packet sizes can play a role), and file access failures are possible (caused by packet loss and/or data corruptions). Please note that none of these is the fault of the VPN itself, even when running these protocols over the same Internet line without any VPN, the results would only be marginally better or not better at all.

Unfortunately there is little that can be done about these problems. There is nothing users can do to improve latency. Improving upload bandwidth will always help if such an option does exist as if bandwidth is the problem, it's almost always upload and not download bandwidth. Switching the protocol may help, as especially SMB/CIFS doesn't work very well over Internet lines with bigger latency and if it has to fall back to an older protocol version (one older than SMB 3.0), it will be a catastrophe (up to not working at all anymore). A problem is that SMB and WebDAV are the only protocols that Windows supports natively, whereas macOS supports all the protocols named above natively, thus it's required to resort to third party products to teach Windows alternative protocols. In a pinch one can try to use WebDAV, but WebDAV has a rather poor performance even when used in local networks. Dedicated NAS devices usually support NFS when enabled, which could yield a better performance than SMB.
Opening files over VPN on your Mac is easy with VPN Tracker:
  1. Start your VPN connection in VPN Tracker
  2. Go to the Finder > Go To >Connect to Server
  3. In the Server Address field, enter the name or IP address of the server you want to connect to
  4. Click on the Connect button.

Create a VPN Shortcut:


VPN Tracker offers convenient shortcut options for frequently used connections. You only have to set up the shortcut once. Afterwards you will be able to connect to your VPN and open your files with just one button click.
Find out more: {FQ1859}

VPN Tracker automatically stores a backup of all your VPN connections on your Mac. If you have inadvertently deleted a connection, or wish to revert to an earlier copy of a connection, you can manually restore the backup copy.

1. Turn off Personal Safe syncing

You need to deactivate Personal Safe for the connections you're trying to restore from your backup, to prevent unwanted changes being synced:

  • Open VPN Tracker 365
  • From the menu bar, choose: VPN Tracker 365 > Preferences > Personal Safe
  • Uncheck the connections you want to restore from your backup
  • Quit VPN Tracker 365

2. Restore from your Backup

  • Open Finder and choose "Go" > "Go to Folder…" from the menu bar
  • Enter this path and press Return:
    /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
  • Rename your "etc" folder to "etc-backup" – for safekeeping
  • Go into the "backup" folder

Here you'll see a number of backup folders, all organized and named by date.

  • Move the "etc-date" folder you want to restore up one level into the main "VPN Tracker 365" folder
  • Rename the folder your just moved to just "etc" (deleting the date)
  • Open VPN Tracker 365

All of your connections will now be restored to their backed-up state.

3. Re-activate Personal Safe

  • Choose: VPN Tracker 365 > Preferences > Personal Safe from the menu bar
  • Check your connections, to add them to Personal Safe

Download VPN Tracker free

Setting up a VPN connection to your Sophos XG Firewall is easy with VPN Tracker. The Sophos XG has its own unique device profile in the app with many of the required settings already in place; making configuration super straightforward. Use the Sophos XG configuration guide as a step-by-step walkthrough on how to set up a VPN on your device.

IPsec VPN uses a different protocol (ESP) for the actual data transfer than for establishing the connection (IKE). Since the ESP protocol does not use network ports, NAT (Network Address Translation) routers may have difficulties handling it correctly. Only NAT routers that support "IPSec Passthrough" (sometimes also named "VPN Passthrough" or "ESP Passtrhough") and where this option is also enabled, can handle ESP data packets.

To work around this problem, two alternative tunneling methods exist:

  • NAT-Traversal (old, RFC draft version)
  • NAT-Traversal (new, RFC standard version)

Which of these methods will work with your connection depends on two properties:

  1. Which of these methods allows traffic to pass through your local Internet router.
  2. Which of these methods are supported by your VPN remote gateway.

To test for the first property, VPN Tracker will automatically establish three VPN test connections to a VPN gateway hosted by us whenever it detects a new router that has not been tested before. One connection uses plain ESP, the other two either NAT-T method mentioned above. It will remember the test results for this router and take them into account whenever you start a connection from the network location. The reason we are testing with our own gateway is simply that the test requires a gateway supporting all three methods, with a known configuration and a simply way to verify if traffic did arrive at that gateway.

The second property is not tested in advance, VPN Tracker will become aware of that information when it actually tries to connect to your VPN gateway. VPN Tracker will compare the methods your gateway supports with the stored test results. If there is a match, a method that your gateway supports and that was also working during the test, this method will be used. If there is no match, VPN Tracker will immediately stop and show an appropriate error in the log, explaining the situation.

If you suspect a NAT-Traversal issue or you think the previous test results may be wrong or outdated, simply re-run the test:

‣ Make sure NAT-Traversal (Advanced tab) is set to Automatic
‣ Go to "Tools" > "Test VPN Availability"
‣ Click "Test Again"
‣ Wait until the test has completed, then connect to your VPN

The test dialog also allows you to tell VPN Tracker to not test the current location and forget any previously created test results. This is rarely needed and also not recommended but there might be situation where the test results are wrong because access to our VPN gateway is not possible (e.g. it is blocked) and thus the test result are just bogus and say nothing about the true capabilities of your VPN gateway.

Unable to save your AnyConnect VPN password in the Cisco VPN client?

Here's the fix:


That's it! VPN Tracker will store your login details securely via end-to-end encryption so you can get connected faster – for the best VPN experience on Mac and iOS.

Setting up VPN on your Mac

VPN Tracker is the leading VPN client for macOS and works seamlessly on all the latest macOS operating systems.
You can download and test VPN Tracker here free.

Launching VPN Tracker for Mac

The first time you launch VPN Tracker on your Mac, you may need to grant it permission to create VPN connections for you.

First please make sure VPN Tracker is in your Applications folder and complete these steps locally on the Mac (e.g. not over Screen Sharing, Remote Desktop or other remote access tool).

IMPORTANT: macOS notices when you run remote desktop systems like TeamViewer, Apple Remote Desktop, VNC or similar. and hides these buttons. You MUST be local to the Mac.

Then do this:
‣Open System Preferences
‣Go to Security
‣Click "Allow"

Now you'll be able to set up VPN Tracker.

Troubleshooting VPN Setup on macOS

If the "Allow" button can not be clicked, please make sure you are not using a 3rd party mouse or tablet input device, as these can look like remote desktop software to your Mac. If you are using e.g. a Wacom input tablet or mouse utility tool, try disabling those, reboot your Mac and then try clicking the button again.

In case the button doesn't even appear in the dialog, please note that if your Mac has a MDM profile installed, the MDM profile can forbid users to approve their own System Extensions. In that case the profile itself has to approve our extension. Please see technical notes below.

Technical note for Enterprise Rollouts:
VPN Tracker for Mac uses a System Extension to create a secure VPN tunnel and manage network traffic. macOS High Sierra and newer macOS versions now require users to manually approve all System Extensions. For Enterprise rollouts via MDM, you can also pre-approve the VPN Tracker Kernel Extension using a special profile. Our Team IDs are CPXNXN488S and MJMRT6WJ8S.
Please see Apple's Support Document for more details.

Not using an MDM managed Mac?
If your Mac is not MDM managed, please try rebooting, as macOS occasionally can get tripped up with System Extensions. After the reboot, VPN Tracker should work fine.
If you are trying to establish a VPN connection in VPN Tracker and you are getting a "Hash Mismatch" error, here is what you need to know:

Hash Mismatch usually means that the Pre-Shared Key (PSK) being used is wrong. When you get the "Hash Mismatch" error, the Hash algorithm is being rejected. However, this is not due to choosing an incorrect "Hashing" algorithm for Phase 1. If the Hashing algorithm chosen is actually wrong, then you would receive an error that would say "No Proposal Chosen" rather than a "Hash Mismatch" error. This would suggest that the client and gateway could not agree on common crypto settings. On the other hand, Hash Mismatch actually means that the hash your gateway calculated doesn't match the hash that VPN Tracker calculated (the two hashes are simply not matching). This hash is calculated out of values exchanged between the client and the gateway and the Pre-Shared Key. As all other values have just been exchanged and have been verified by both sides to be correct (so these cannot cause a different hash, not unless either side has a terrible bug). The only value that isn't exchanged and cannot be checked in advanced is the Pre-Shared Key (PSK).

Purchasing through our online store is perfectly safe. All transferred information is encrypted via HTTPS - so it is secured against any potential threats.

Once you have decided which product to purchase, the next step is to proceed to our Online Store and place your order. We accept all major credit cards, PayPal and bank transfers or checks, depending on your country.

After your order has been processed you will receive a confirmation for your purchase. This will confirm the items purchased, and additional payment instructions if you're paying via bank transfer or check (in those cases you will also receive an additonal email confirming your payment when it has been processed.)

In the purchase confirmation email you will also receive additional information like the download links for your purchased apps.

If you have entered information or have started to apply settings in your application demo, those changes will remain unchanged - even after activating the software.

By default, traffic to the remote network cannot be sent through the VPN tunnel if it is using the same network as the local network.

Resolving a Network Conflict using Traffic Control

You can use Traffic Control and VPN Tracker will send non-essential local network traffic over the VPN.

Activate Traffic Control:
> Go to Advanced > Traffic Control
> Check "Force traffic over the VPN if remote networks conflict with local networks"

Note that you will never be able to reach the following addresses over VPN: The IP address of your local router, your DHCP server, and your DNS server(s). If you need to reach those IPs over VPN, you will have to resolve the network conflict instead of using Traffic Control. The same applies for any IPs that you need to reach locally and over VPN.

Resolving a Network Conflict Manually

You have two basic options for resolving a conflict:

  1. Change the local network to use a different network address. In most situations, this will entail changing the LAN settings on the local router (including DHCP settings if DHCP is used).
  2. Change the remote network to use a different network address. With most setups, this entails changing the LAN on the VPN gateway (including DHCP settings if DHCP is used), and changing the IPs used by devices on the VPN gateway's LAN (or triggering a DHCP refresh, if DHCP is used). If the LAN is used in the VPN settings (such as for policies or firewall rules), these will need to be changed as well. Finally, change the remote network in VPN Tracker to match the new settings

If you decide to change the remote network, it makes sense to choose a private network that less commonly used. According to our informal statistics, conflicts are least likely using these networks:

  • Subnets of 172.16.0.0/12
  • Subnets of 192.168.0.0/16, excluding 192.168.0.0/24, 192.168.1.0/24 and 192.168.168.0/24

If these are not an option, use a subnet of 10.0.0.0/8, excluding 10.0.0.0/24, 10.0.1.0/24, 10.1.0.0/24, 10.1.1.0/24. However, since wireless network operators sometimes choose to use the entire 10.0.0.0/8 network, the first two options are preferred.

If you have a more sophisticated VPN gateway, in particular a SonicWALL, you may be able to set up an alternative remote network on the VPN gateway that is mapped 1:1 through Network Address Translation (NAT) onto the actual network. Users can then connect to this network instead if they have a conflict of networks. We have a guide available that describes this approach for SonicWALL devices.

If the conflict is caused by virtual network interfaces (e.g. Parallels, VMware), see here for more information.

This depends on your settings. The most common setup is “Host to Network“, in which case only traffic to the specified remote network(s) will go through the VPN tunnel.

With a “Host to Everywhere” setup, all traffic – except traffic to the local network(s) – goes through the VPN. A Host to Everywhere connection requires a suitable setup on the VPN gateway.

You can retrieve your equinux ID or password using this form.

If you don’t receive the email* containing your information, please note that the email may have mistakenly been marked as spam or junk mail, so be sure to check your email filters.

If you are unable to retrieve your username and password using the retrieval form, please contact the support team for assistance. When contacting us, please provide your old and new email adresses.

* Please note that the email will be sent to the address active on account. If your email address has since changed and you no longer have access to the previous account, you will need to contact the support team for assistance.

By itself, the IPsec protocol does not support usernames. If you were given a username from your network administrator for connecting to your corporate VPN solution, there are generally two possibilities:

  • Your corporate VPN solution uses the term "username" for "identifiers". Please try to use your username as the "Local Identifier" in VPN Tracker.
  • Your corporate VPN solution is using Extended Authentication (XAUTH). You can enable XAUTH in VPN Tracker. The software will then prompt for your username and password when the connection is being established.

VPN Tracker Pro is a great asset if you are a consultant, a system or network administrator, or are working with multiple VPN connections:

  • Export VPN connections for yourself and other users.
  • Scan the remote network for services or to assist users.
  • Connect to multiple VPNs at the same time.
  • Manage a large number of VPNs using search, a condensed layout, and connection groups.
  • Configure your Mac as a router to provide the entire network with a VPN tunnel using Network to Network connections.
You purchased VPN Tracker 365, VPN Tracker World Connect or Mail Designer 365? You can use the app on up to three personal devices per license.

To do so, simply sign in to your account to use your plan on your Macs (or your iOS device where applicable) using just your equinux ID and password.

You may use the software in parallel on one computer per license.

If you want to use the software on multiple devices in parallel, or other family members or colleagues also want to use the software on their computers, you will need a separate license for each person or each parallel use.

A VPN Tracker 10, VPN Tracker 9 or Spot Maps license can be active on one Mac at the same time. If you want to use the Software on multiple devices, you will need an separate license per device.



Yes, as long as your VPN gateway uses Extended Authentication (XAUTH) to request the passcode, you can use any third party token with VPN Tracker.

We ask for your email address in order to track the flow of our downloads and, if selected, send you news and updates about the product you've downloaded.

All information collected by equinux is used internally and will never be shared with any third parties without your permission. For more information about equinux's stance on privacy and security, please refer to the equinux Privacy Policy.

If you do not want to receive our newsletter, just unsubscribe using the link at the bottom of every newsletter you receive.

No, VPN Tracker is designed exclusively for the macOS platform.
Yes, VPN Tracker does support Extended Authentication (XAUTH).
VPN Tracker for Mac is fully compatible with:

  • macOS 15.0 Sequoia
  • macOS 14.0 Sonoma
  • macOS 13.0 Ventura
  • macOS 12.0 Monterey
  • macOS 11.0 Big Sur
  • macOS 10.15 Catalina
  • macOS 10.14 Mojave
  • macOS 10.13 High Sierra



The option "comp-lzo no" is considered depricated and will not be supported by future OpenVPN clientsor servers. Don't use this option on your server.
The recommendation of the OpenVPN developers is to best not use this option at all anymore. It is better toeither activate compression ("comp-lzo yes"), or to not use any compression at all (in this case the option "comp-lzo" should not even appearin the configuration).
The Optiome "comp-lzo no" doesn't mean "no compression", it means "compression only if the server requests it." Because of this the "comp-lzo" option is being replaced by the new option "compress", which partially shows a different behavior and thus is not backward compatible.
The VPN client in macOS supports the "L2TP over IPsec" standard, but it doesn't support the newer IPsec VPN or OpenVPN industry standards found on most third party VPN devices.

VPN Tracker supports IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEV2), L2TP, PPTP, OpenVPN, SSL, SSTP, and WireGuard® VPN and has predefined settings designed to work with the majority of VPN devices on the market. We also offer configuration guides that explain in detailed steps exactly how-to set up your VPN device.

In addition to being compatible with more devices than macOS, VPN Tracker also makes working over VPN much more comfortable: VPN Shortcuts make connecting to the file servers, applications and devices over VPN as easy as working locally.

Since macOS Sierra 10.12 the macOS built in VPN client no longer supports PPTP connections. In order to start a PPTP connection on a Mac running macOS High Sierra or newer, you will need to use an external VPN client like VPN Tracker.

Yes, this is possible. If you set up shared networking for the guest operating system it shares the network connection of your Mac and you can access all network resources that are accessible from OS X.

Note that if you are using remote DNS for your VPN connection, you will need to manually enter the DNS server in your guest operating system in order for it to work – there is no way for VPN Tracker to “transmit” this setting to the guest operating system

For information on how to set up VPN Tracker with Parallels, check out our VPN Tracker with Parallels Configuration Guide.

A couple of years ago, a team of security experts released a paper describing an attack that can break an IKEv1 Aggressive Mode Pre-Shared Key connection using an attack that would not equally have been possible with an IKEv1 Main Mode Pre-Shared Key connection, leading to the incorrect assumption that Aggressive Mode is inherently insecure. This claim, however, is not backed up by objective facts. What most people don't know, part of that attack was the ability to guess the Pre-Shared Key (PSK) using a brute force attack and such a brute force attack can only be successful if the PSK is weak. A PSK is also just a password and as with every password, choosing a weak password always leads to poor security. As long as your PSK is at least 14 characters long (the longer the better), consists out of lower case letters, upper case letters and digits, and was randomly generated, so it's impossible to somehow guess it, and as long as your Phase 1 hash algorithm is at least SHA1 (or better, we recommend SHA-256 if possible), there's absolutely no reason to consider IKEv1 Aggressive Mode with Pre-Shared Key as less secure than IKEv1 Main Mode with Pre-Shared Key. If you want to be even more secure, switch to certificate based authentication instead of PSK if possible as then the attack is not possible at all.

Technical background:

The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) is not a password used for encryption of any data, it's used for authentication, just when you log in to a website using a username and a password. During Phase 1, both sides must prove to each other to know the PSK. This cannot be done by just sending it to the other side, as if the other side didn't know it before, it will know it after receiving it. Instead both sides calculate a number (a hash digest) out of data they exchanged so far (data that will be different every time you start a new connection, which ensures the calculated value will be as well) and the PSK. Only this digest is send to other side. The other side can now verify that digest by performing the same calculations and comparing the result with the digest received. If both are equal, the sender must have used the same PSK in the calculation, which proves knowledge of the PSK. Then the receiver also calculates such a digest, using a slightly different formula as before, leading to an entirely different result, and sends it back in reply to also prove its knowledge.

The differences between Main Mode and Aggressive Mode is simply that in Main Mode the digest is exchanged encrypted because the session key exchange already negotiated a session encryption key when the digest is exchanged, whereas in Aggressive Mode it is exchanged unencrypted as part of the key exchange that will lead to a session key. By snooping the connection establishment of an Aggressive Mode connection, the attackers were able to get the digest as well as all values required to calculate that digest, except for the PSK itself. Please note that this alone doesn't mean the connection is broken already, it only means that the attackers now have enough data to start guessing the PSK using a brute force or dictionary attack. Only if the PSK is too weak to withstand those attacks and the attackers are able to correctly guess it, the connection will be broken. That's why a good, secure PSK is essential.

The same attack is in fact also possible with a Main Mode PSK connection, it just requires some extra work. For a Main Mode connection it's not enough to just snoop the traffic, the attackers would need to perform a so called Man-in-the-Middle (MitM) attack, allowing them to capture and manipulate all traffic exchanged. By performing a MitM attack, attackers can break the key exchange and thus will be able to decrypt all the exchanged packets. Doing so will not make it possible to break into your VPN, they still need to know the PSK for that, otherwise they cannot successfully authenticate to the other side and then Phase 1 will never complete, but that way they can get all the information required to start guessing on the PSK, just as in case of a an Aggressive Mode connection. And if an attacker is already able to snoop on your VPN traffic (which is required to attack Aggressive Mode), it's very likely that attacker is equally possible to perform a MitM attack and in that case using Main Mode will not offer you any additional protection.

A PSK out of 11 random alphanumeric characters offers an entropy of approx. 64 bits, that's 2^64 possible values. Modern high end graphics adapter (as of 2015) can calculate in the order of 1 billion SHA-256 hashes a second. On average one has to try 50% of all possible values to find a match, wich would be about 292 years. Yet if the attackers have an array of 100 such graphics adapters, it would "only" be around 3 years. If the PSK is 14 characters, the entropy is about 80 bits and you are already at 19,154,798 years. Now even having 10,000 graphics adapters would help a lot. Also one must consider the costs of such an attack, which is not so much the cost of buying all these graphics adapters, rather their power consumption when all these graphics adapters run at maximum current 24 hours a day and that for years, decades, or even centuries. The power costs will be billions of dollar and all that to just break one single PSK connection in the entire world. And whenever you change the PSK, an attacker must start all over, so if you change the PSK regularly, let's say once a year, an attacker has at most one year to find it; that's very ambitious, even for a weak PSK.

Symptom

As soon as you connect your VPN tunnel, Skype is not able to make calls any longer, however calls started prior to connecting the VPN continue to work.

Solution

Make sure the field Local Address is not empty. If it is, fill in a private IP address. A private IP address has the following form:

  • 192.168.x.x
  • 10.x.x.x
  • 172.y.x.x

x: A number of the range 0 to 255.
y: A number of the range 16 to 31.

Only rule: It must not be an IP address from a remote network on the other side of the VPN tunnel (must not partially match an entry of the field "Remote Networks"), as choosing such an address will make the tunnel stop working (it will connect, but you cannot really reach anything over it).

Alternate Solutions

If the solution above does not fix your issues, make sure that

  • DNS resolution still works once the VPN tunnel is up.
     
  • Public Internet servers are still reachable once the VPN tunnel is up.
     
  • In case of a Host to Everywhere connection, make sure the VPN gateway does not block any network traffic that is crucial for Skype to work.
     

Explanation

VPN Tracker creates a virtual tunnel interface for every VPN tunnel. Like any network interface, this virtual tunnel interface requires an IP address to be functional as an IP network interface. If your VPN gateway assigns you an IP address, the assigned address is applied to the tunnel interface. If not, the address you put into Local Address will be used. If you leave local address empty, the IP address of your primary network interface will be used.

In the last case, your system ends up with two interfaces with identical IP addresses. This is allowed and usually not a problem, unless a software does “stupid things”, like querying the network interface for a given IP address and then ignoring the order of precedence of the returned results.


Since 2019, Firefox have been rolling out DNS over HTTPS (DoH) by default in several countries, including the USA, Canada, Russia and Ukraine.

What does this mean?


When DoH is enabled, it bypasses your DNS server and instead, domains you enter into your browser are sent via a DoH-compatible DNS server using an encrypted HTTPS connection.

This is intended as a security measure to prevent others (e.g. your ISP) from seeing the websites you are trying to access. However, if you're using a DNS server provided by your VPN gateway, it allows DNS queries to run outside the VPN tunnel. Moreover, if the VPN specifies a DNS server that resolves internal host names, these are either not resolved at all or resolved incorrectly when DoH is enabled.

How to disable DNS over HTTPS in Firefox


To ensure all your DNS queries run via your VPN's DNS, you will need to disable DoH in Firefox. To do so, open your Firefox browser, go to Firefox > Preferences > Network Settings and deselect the checkbox by "Enable DNS over HTTPS":


Click OK to save your changes.
The main reason why the lifetime of IPSec tunnels is limited is security. The longer a tunnel is alive, the more time an attacker has for an attack and the more data is encrypted with the same session key, which reduces the effort for attackers to find the key.

The IKE Phase 1 tunnel is only used to ensure a secure connection between VPN client and VPN gateway, comparable to a TLS connection (i.e. HTTPS instead of HTTP). Only IKE messages are exchanged via the Phase 1 tunnel, which are used to keep the Phase 1 connection alive and to negotiate Phase 2 tunnels if necessary. The Phase 1 tunnel has no influence on the VPN speed, only on the initial connection setup, so there is never any reason why you should not always work with the strongest protection in Phase 1, that both sides can support. Since very little data is ever sent through the Phase 1 tunnel, there is no reason not to choose a very long lifetime.

The Phase 2 tunnels are used to encrypt the actual data traffic, so the settings here directly influence the overhead, latency and speed of the VPN connection and must be weighed against the security. Also, large amounts of data are encrypted via the Phase 2 tunnels, so you should not set their lifetime too high. If possible, it is always recommended to use Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) in Phase 2, which slows down the Phase 2 connection setup a bit, but completely decouples Phase 2 cryptographically from Phase 1, since an independent session key is negotiated and not derived from the session key of Phase 1.

The lifetimes of the two phases are basically independent of each other. A Phase 2 tunnel may continue to exist, even if the Phase 1 tunnel over that it was negotiated no longer exists. Thus, Phase 1 may have a shorter lifetime than Phase 2. VPN Tracker always negotiates new tunnels in time before the lifetime expires, so that the connection is normally never interrupted. With Phase 2, the tunnels are seamlessly connected, meaning that not a single data packet is lost during the exchange. This is why even with a very short lifetime of just a few minutes, the impression of an uninterrupted connection is created. Frequent changes of Phase 2 tunnels only lead to a little more data traffic and a little more computing work on both sides of the connection.

Important Notes


The lifetime of the tunnels is explicitly not negotiated. The standard allows that a tunnel has different lifetimes on both sides of the connection. The side, where the lifetime expires first, determines the further procedure. Only if VPN Tracker is that side, it can determine what happens next, otherwise VPN Tracker can only react passively. The latter will always result in a short interruption or even a complete loss of the connection in case of Phase 1. For Phase 2, it depends on whether the other side wants to actively negotiate new Phase 2 tunnels or only deletes the existing ones; the latter also leads to a short-term connection loss.

It's always best to set VPN Tracker to the same lifetime as the other side, because VPN Tracker will always try to intervene in time to avoid a connection loss.

Since there are also IKE/IPSec implementations that delete all Phase 2 tunnels as soon as the corresponding Phase 1 tunnel is deleted, it's always a good idea to select Phase 1 on devices to match the maximum VPN session time expected.
If you have a TP-Link router for your local internet access and are having trouble connecting to a VPN with a connection that works at other locations, please try the following.
Sign in to your TP-Link router admin webpage
Find the VPN passthrough settings
Uncheck and then re-check all the VPN passthrough options
Apply the settings

This should reset an internal parameter and allow your connection to work as expected.

Unfortunately, we cannot guarantee this. Secure networking is a complex subject. VPN Tracker is extremely reliable and is used by customers around the world. But there are some rare scenarios in which VPN connections cannot be established (e.g. when a firewall is set up to actively block VPN connections).

We recommend using the free trial version to test VPN Tracker with your particular network and usage scenario.

If you require any assistance setting up your VPN connection with VPN Tracker, you can contact equinux support at any time.

Don't worry – it happens to all of us!

Just head on over to our login retrieval page, enter your equinux ID or email address and we'll send you your details.

Recently changed your e-mail address? Send us a message!

With both SMB (Windows File Sharing) and AFP (Apple File Sharing), low latency connections are key to achieving good performance. This is of course assuming that you already have a connection with reasonable bandwidth in between the two VPN endpoints (this can be easily verified by transferring a larger file through HTTP or FTP).

Using SSL VPN? Switch to IPSec

In comparison to SSL VPN, IPSec is able to offer much faster connection speeds as it runs on the network layer – level 3 of the OSI – meaning it’s much closer to the physical hardware. This will give you a faster VPN performance.

Learn more in this blog post.

Finder Settings

If you are using the Finder and the issue is mostly with listing folders (but not so much when actually copying files), try turning off icons/icon previews in the Finder's View Options (Cmd-J).

Reducing Latency

If you experience performance issues both when listing folders and when transferring files, your aim should be to reduce latency. Some ways to reduce latency include:

  • Avoid high-latency Internet uplinks (e.g. satellite, some types of wireless providers, line aggregation, ...).
  • When using a DSL line, see with your ISP if you can get "fast path" enabled (= interleaving turned off). ISPs sometimes market this as an option for online gaming, but it's also very helpful for AFP/SMB or connecting to some types of database backends.
  • Make sure VPN traffic is appropriately prioritized in order not to be slowed down by someone else using the same Internet connection.

To measure latency between the two endpoints of the VPN, use ping to a host on the other end of the connection (or, when pinging from the client end, ping the VPN gateway). For your convenience, VPN Tracker has a ping utility built right in, it can be found in the Tools menu.

To measure latency of each endpoint's individual uplink, it's often helpful to do a ping the local router (to make sure there are no unnecessary latencies introduced in the local network) and the ISP's first router (to get an idea if enabling fast path or switching ISPs may be a suitable measure to decrease latency).

If you cannot reduce latency any further:

If you are in a situation where you cannot reduce latency any further (or where the base latency from the distance between the two endpoints itself is so large local measures won't make much difference), consider switching to a file transfer protocol that is less vulnerable to latency, e.g. WebDAV or FTP, or use measures such as reducing the number of files and folders in a hierarchy to increase performance.

Setting up Shortcuts to your most important services in VPN Tracker 365 is easy and will drastically improve your workflow.

To get started, go to "File" > "New" > "VPN Shortcuts"

Open the Shortcuts Dock by clicking on the arrow to reveal all available Shortcuts in VPN Tracker 365. Then, drag out the icon for the application or service you would like to configure (e.g. internal website).



Now configure your Shortcut by filling in all the requested information as prompted by VPN Tracker 365. If you are unsure of any details, your network admin or a member of our support team will be able to help you get set up.



Continue this process until you have built up a collection of Shortcuts for all your most-used external services. Then, exit the editing mode by clicking again on the arrow at the bottom of the window to close the Shortcuts Dock:



To test your Shortcut, simply click on the icon. This should launch your VPN connection and instantly start up your service.

Want to see Shortcuts in action? This 2 minute video tutorial shows you how to set up VPN Shortcuts in VPN Tracker 365:




Current Firmware (Fireware XTM)

WatchGuard Firebox X Edge e-Series devices with Fireware XTM (Fireware 11) are fully supported in current versions of VPN Tracker. For details please see our configuration guide.

Older Firmware

Devices running an older firmware may often work using the following setup. Please note however that we can't guarantee that this setup will work in all cases.

Start by creating a new user on the Firebox Edge and then configure MUVPN support for this user.

In VPN Tracker, use a "Custom Connection" device profile as the basis for your new connection.

Map the WatchGuard settings to your VPN Tracker configuration as shown in the table below:

WatchguardVPN Tracker
Account NameLocal Identifier
Shared KeyPreshared Key
Virtual IP AddressLocal Address
Authentication AlgorithmPhase 1 and Phase 2 Hash/Authentication Algorithms
Encryption AlgorithmPhase 1 and Phase 2 Encryption Algorithms
Key expiration in hoursPhase 1 and Phase 2 Lifetime

The following settings are independent of your specific MUVPN configuration:

  • Local Identifier Type: Email (even if it is a name and not an email address)
  • Exchange Mode: Aggressive
  • Phase 1 Diffie-Hellman Group: Group 2 (1024 bit)
  • Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS): off

Finally make sure the that VPN Tracker's "Network" setting is set to "Host to Network", and the correct Remote Network (i.e. the network that you want connect to through the VPN) is used (e.g. 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0).

VPN Tracker for Mac fully supports all the latest macOS versions, including macOS Sequoia

Starting from macOS 11, Apple have made some key changes to the macOS security architecture. VPN Tracker for Mac offers full support for all the latest macOS versions. This includes support for: IPsec VPN, IKEv2 (Beta), OpenVPN, L2TP VPN, PPTP VPN, SonicWall SSL VPN, Fortinet SSL VPN, Windows SSTP VPN, Cisco AnyConnect VPN and WireGuard® VPN.

Tip: Sign up for VPN Tracker Insider Updates to get Beta releases as soon as they are available.

WireGuard® is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenefeld.

Migrating an existing Windows PPTP VPN connection to a Mac may sound daunting, but with VPN Tracker 365 the process is quick and easy. By the end, you will be able to connect your Mac to your PPTP VPN connection and continue working as normal.

Here's how it works:
  1. Find your PPTP VPN connection settings in the Control Panel of your Windows PC
  2. Start VPN Tracker 365 on your Mac and click the "+" to create a new PPTP connection
  3. Copy the connection settings from the first step into the configuration window
  4. Finally, start up your PPTP connection to test


You can now use your Windows PPTP VPN connection on your Mac, thanks to VPN Tracker 365. If you require a more detailed walkthrough, please check out this step-by-step PDF guide: Migrating a Windows PPTP VPN Configuration

Find out more about PPTP VPN under macOS Big Sur
Sie können mit VPN Tracker 365 Ihre VPN Verbindung so konfigurieren, dass nur Verbindungen ihr Ihr Netzwerk darüber geht. Normales Surfen im Web nutzt dann Ihre ganze normale Internetverbindung.

Sie können mit unserer VPN Wizard App für FritzBox eine neue Verbindung entsprechend konfigurieren.



Ihre neue VPN Verbindung für Fritzbox können es mit der kostenlosen VPN Tracker 365 Demo testen:
http://www.vpntracker.com/de/download.html#vpnt365

If your OpenVPN connection drops after a while, it may be due to the rekeying period. Test whether extending the period can solve the problem.

Proceed as follows:

  • Edit your OpenVPN connection in VPN Tracker
  • Navigate to "Advanced Settings > Phase 2"
  • Change the Lifetime value to 28800 (which corresponds to a period of 8 hours)

If this doesn't resolve your issues, may also want to check your interoperability keep-alive, activity, and dead peer detection settings.

If you continue to have problems with your VPN connection, please send us a TSR report.

The XAUTH password is generally your company login. It is NOT your equinux ID. Your XAUTH is stored on your VPN gateway or on some remote server your VPN gateway asks for authentication (LDAP server, RADIUS server, Active Directory Server, etc.). If you do not know it, or need to reset it, ask your System Admin for help on this.

VPN Tracker or equinux have nothing to do with this password. Your VPN gateway just tells VPN Tracker "Ask the user for a username and a password and tell me what the user has entered" and that is what VPN Tracker does and in respond to the information the gateway replies "Sorry, but that is not valid username-password-combination, I can't let you in, bye".
In VPN Tracker you can just click on the blue label next to the XAUTH setting and the XAUTH dialog will appear; just overwrite the existing values with new values.
See page 16 in our manual

Setting up an OpenVPN connection to your NETGEAR Nighthawk device on Mac, iPhone or iPad is easy with VPN Tracker. VPN Tracker has a device profile specifically set up to work with the NETGEAR Nighthawk range, which means configuration is super straightforward.

With the help of this configuration guide, you'll be up and running with your NETGEAR Nighthawk in no time.
To connect to a WireGuard® VPN server - e.g. in order to remotely connect to your home network -, you need a VPN client app. VPN Tracker supports WireGuard® VPN connections on Mac, iPhone and iPad!

To get connected, follow these 3 steps:
  1. Open VPN Tracker and add a new WireGuard® connection
  2. Upload your WireGuard® configuration file or scan your QR code
  3. Save your connection to your account using secure end-to-end encryption



You can now connect to your WireGuard® VPN server on Mac, iPhone or iPad.

→ More information on connecting to WireGuard® VPN in VPN Tracker

WireGuard® is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.
If you need to force quit your software for any reason (e.g. your screen has frozen or the app is not responding) please do one of the following:
  • If the app you want to quit is in your dock, hold the "Option" (⌥) key and right-click on the app icon, then, select "Force Quit" from the menu.
  • You can also hold down "Option" (⌥) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "Esc" which will trigger a window with a list of apps you have running. To force quit one or more of these apps, simply select it from the list and click the "Force Quit" button.

If you are an existing VPN Tracker customer and want to upgrade to VPN Tracker 365, you can simply install VPN Tracker 365 and your connections will automatically be imported:

Download VPN Tracker 365

Once you have VPN Tracker 365, you can purchase a VPN Tracker 365 plan.

Your equinux ID is your personal account at equinux. You can use it to purchase and activate products & licenses.

The first time you shop in our online store, you'll be asked to create an equinux ID. After your purchase, software licenses are automatically linked to your equinux ID and can be activated by simply entering the same equinux ID and password you used during purchase.

Retail boxes and certain products may still require an Activation Code. Once entered, the product will be linked to your equinux ID.

If you have forgotten your equinux ID and/or password, use our login & password retrieval form.

If you need to transfer a license to another equinux ID, you can easily do this yourself at my equinux.

‣ First log in with your equinux ID and password: http://my.equinux.com
‣ Click the checkboxes for each product that you want to transfer
‣ Click the "Transfer" button below and enter the equinux ID or email address of the new license owner and click next.       
‣ Finally click "Confirm" to complete the transfer. The system will transfer the license, display a message and email both the old and new license owner that the license has been transferred.

VPN Tracker 365 Plans cannot be transfered to another equinux ID. However, under https://my.vpntracker.com you can assign a plan to a colleague so they can use one of the VPN Tracker 365 plans that are connected to your account.
This is especially useful if you are the admin of all VPN Tracker licenses in your company and want to manage who can use one of the purchased plans.

SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning with VPN Tracker is available with all SonicWALLs running SonicOS 4.0 or newer and all editions of VPN Tracker.

If you are still using VPN Tracker 6 or earlier, Professional or Player Edition is required.

If you are working from home and need to connect to VPN, your admin will send you a connection file which you can import into the VPN Tracker 365 app.



This is the pre-configured VPN connection that you need in order to connect your Mac to your office network and access your internal services.

Here's how it works:

  • Double click the connection file to import into VPN Tracker 365.
  • Enter the import password - your network admin will give this to you.
  • Now, click the toggle switch to connect to your VPN. Note: If you are asked to enter user credentials, your admin will tell you which login you need to use.


This video tutorial shows you how to get started with your company VPN:



Activation codes are only used for older products like VPN Tracker 8 or lower or for retail products during the first activation. For current products, the software is exclusively activated using your equinux ID.

Please refer to the following FAQ for more information on how to activate without an activationcode:
  • {FQ317}


When connecting via SonicWall SCP or SonicWall IKEv1 with DHCP, VPN Tracker 365 for Mac requests an IP address from the SonicWall gateway using the DHCP protocol. For this request, VPN Tracker 365 modifies the MAC address slightly, making it different from the actual MAC address of your device. This allows administrators to assign a fixed IP address when your Mac is connected via LAN or WiFi and a different IP when it’s connected through VPN.

This modification sets a specific bit in the MAC address, marking it as a self-assigned address rather than a factory-assigned one.

Example:
Original MAC address: 00:1B:63:B7:42:23
VPN Tracker MAC address: 02:1B:63:B7:42:23

Starting with macOS 15 Sequoia, Apple defaults to using a rotating MAC address for WiFi connections, labeled as a “Private Wi-Fi Address” in System Settings. To prevent connectivity issues related to this feature, VPN Tracker 365 reports the actual hardware address (with the minor modification described above) instead of the one used in “Rotating” or “Fixed” modes.

On iOS, VPN Tracker cannot retrieve a MAC address directly. Instead, it generates a random value once and stores it for future use. VPN Tracker for iOS then uses this stored value as the MAC address.

Importing a pre-existing VPN connection from your Mac to use in VPN Tracker 365 is straightforward.

Open the VPN Tracker 365 app, then go to File > Import > System VPN Connections.



VPN Tracker will scan your Mac for VPN connections that are compatible with VPN Tracker 365. You can then select and import the connections you want.
Please note that only compatible connections can be imported.
Nightly builds are exclusive early preview versions of cutting edge, new features that the development team has been working on. We release these to give experienced IT admins the chance to work alongside us and test our latest work even before the beta release.

If you would like access to Nightly builds, you need to activate access to early release versions in the app.
  1. Open the VPN Tracker 365 app and go to "VPN Tracker 365" > "Preferences"
  2. Next to "Update", check the box "Get early access to Pre-Release versions"
  3. From the drop down menu, select "Nightly Builds"



Tip: Next to "Update" you can also check "Automatically check for updates". This way, VPN Tracker 365 will inform you whenever a new Nightly build is available for testing.

Not sure you're up for Nightly testing? If you want to test a more ready-to-launch version of VPN Tracker before it goes live, our beta testing program is another great alternative.

If you run into issues on a Nightly version and want to get back to an older build, you can always find our latest official release on the version history page. Please also note that you can deactivate Nightly testing at any time by unchecking the box in your app preferences.
Importing your Windows SSTP connection into VPN Tracker 365 to use on your Mac? VPN Tracker 365 supports all the custom configuration options you need to use your VPN flexibly.

Don't want to run all your traffic through the VPN? You can configure the connection to "Host to Network" to only send network-relevant traffic through the VPN.

Once you have selected "Host to network", you can connect and VPN Tracker 365 will automatically set a route to just send data for the network behind your VPN and route all other traffic (i.e. personal traffic) separately through your normal internet connection.



Note, this will give you the same behaviour as unchecking the "use default gateway on remote network" option on Windows.

Configuration guides for configuring VPN Tracker with Cisco devices are available here.

Configuration guides for Cisco Small Business (Linksys) devices are available here.


Import of Cisco IPsec VPN Client Configuration Files (.pcf)

Cisco VPN Client configuration files that use group password authentication can be imported into VPN Tracker:

‣ "File" > "Import 3rd Party Configuration" > "Cisco .pcf"
If you use a dynamic DNS service (e.g. DynDNS, NoIP, DynU, FreeDNS) and your VPN gateway is not responding, please check that your DynDNS service has updated with your current IP address.

If it is not up-to-date, please check the dynamic DNS configuration on your VPN gateway.
VPN Tracker for Mac, iPhone and iPad support all major VPN-Protocols, including:
  • IPsec
  • IKEv2 (Beta)
  • L2TP (only macOS)
  • PPTP (only macOS)
  • OpenVPN
  • SSTP VPN
  • Cisco AnyConnect SSL VPN
  • SonicWall SSL VPN
  • Fortinet SSL VPN
  • WireGuard® VPN
Note that protocol support may vary by edition, check our online store for details.

Testing VPN throughput using a remote file share is usually not a good idea for two reasons:

The first reason is the file sharing protocol itself. File sharing protocols like SMB, AFP, or NFS have been designed for local networks that are fast, reliable, and have a very low latency. The Internet on the other hand is slow (at least the connection to it), unreliable and has a very high latency. For realistic results, you need to use a protocol that was optimized for such a situation, like HTTP or FTP.

The second reason is the implementation of the file sharing protocol. Today most file shares use SMB, the Windows file sharing protocol. Apple has its own implementation of that protocol but this implementation is anything but good. While the SMB 3.x implementation is already poor, the SMB 1.x/2.x implementation (compatibility mode) is horrible, and for several reasons macOS will often fall back into that compatibility mode. When testing with a local NAS file share, we got 28 MBps using SMB 3 and only 18 MBps using SMB 1, compared to 50 MBps using AFP.

If you have a Mac at the remote side, it’s pretty easy to setup a benchmark HTTP server. All you need is to open the standard application “Terminal” (use spotlight to find it) and then run the following set of commands (every command is confirmed by Return/Enter):

mkdir /tmp/www-bench
cd /tmp/www-bench
dd count=1048576 bs=1024 if=/dev/random of=1GiB.dat
php -S 0.0.0.0:8080

The First command creates a new directory, the second one enters that directory, the third one creates a 1 GiB data file filled with random data, the last one starts a primitive HTTP server that serves the content of the current directory at port 8080. Now your VPN users can just open this address in Safari (or any other browser):

http://a.b.c.d:8080/1GiB.dat

Where “a.b.c.d” is the IP address of the Mac where you just typed the commands above. By watching the transfer speed in browser, you get a good idea of how capable your VPN is. Of course, this is limited by many factors, like the speed of your local Internet connection, the speed of the remote Internet connection, and the CPU power of the VPN gateway (which is usually far less than the CPU power of a Mac).

To clean up after the test, activate the terminal window again and hit CTRL+C to stop the HTTP server, and finally run the following two commands:

cd
rm -r /tmp/www-bench

VPN Tracker strictly follows Apple’s recommendation regarding where to place its files, so you will find VPN Tracker files only in standard system locations where they belong. Depending on the fact if these are system-wide or per-user files, they are either found in /Library (system-wide) or ~/Library (per-user), where ~ is a placeholder meaning "home of the current active user".

To access the system-wide library folder:

    ‣ In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..." 
    ‣ Enter /Library

To access the user library folder:

    ‣ In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..." 
    ‣ Enter ~/Library
To Remove VPN Tracker, remove the following files and folders:

  • /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
     
  • ~/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
     
  • /Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
     
  • ~/Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
     
  • /Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent
     
  • /Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/com.vpntracker.365mac.connectiond
     
  • /Library/LaunchDaemons/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
     
  • All system extensions are found in the folder /Library/Extensions/com.vpntracker.365mac.*
     
  • Tip: Also remember to check your Keychain for VPN Tracker items (search for "VPN Tracker")

    Note: Some of these files may be currently loaded by the system, and some may be cached. To make your system as clean as if VPN Tracker had never been installed on it, you will also need to uninstall the application itself and then reboot your system. After the reboot, the system will automatically remove any remaining VPN Tracker components not mentioned above, as those reference the application itself and will vanish as soon as the application is gone (some of those can otherwise not be deleted).

    Recently, root certificates for "Let's Encrypt" expired. Apple has decided not to update root certificates for OS X versions older than macOS 10.12. This means that when apps or Safari on your Mac access websites using Let's Encrypt root certificates, they will not load correctly.

    Note: this is a general OS X issue that you will want to address to ensure you can access all websites and services.

    This issue also affects the secure communication between VPN Tracker and the my.vpntracker.com account service.

    How to fix this issue
    1. Download the latest VPN Tracker version for your system:

    2. Install the root certificate fix

    3. Re-launch VPN Tracker and sign in again

    If you are still experiencing the same problem, please try this:

    • Open Safari
    • Go to Preferences > Privacy > Manage website data
    • Search for 'equinux' and 'vpntracker' and choose 'Remove all'

    VPN Tracker 9 & VPN Tracker 10

    Older VPN Tracker versions may also have issues due to certifcates as described above. As these versions are end-of-life, we can no longer offer support for them. The steps above should also apply to these versions. For support and to use VPN Tracker on the latest macOS versions, please switch to a new VPN Tracker plan.

    A certificate is like an identity document; you send it to the other party to identify yourself as authorized or to confirm your identity. However, since anyone can create a certificate with any content on their computer, it is important that a trustworthy CA confirms the information in the certificate by signing the certificate. This also prevents the certificate from being changed later. The CA certificate is only needed to be able to later check the validity of this signature and to see which CA is responsible for this information, so that I can decide whether I want to trust this CA.

    Each certificate has a private key. This serves as proof that you are the owner of the certificate or are authorized to identify yourself with this certificate, since only authorized people are ever allowed to have access to the private key, while the certificate can and often is accessible to everyone. So I can easily get the certificate of any web server or OpenVPN gateway, because both send me the certificate when I try to connect to them, but without a private key I cannot identify myself with the certificate .

    If an attacker wants to pretend to be a specific OpenVPN gateway, e.g. to get passwords from users, then he has to set up his own OpenVPN gateway and redirect his victim's data traffic there, both of which are quite possible. But then he has a problem: he also has to identify himself as the correct gateway. However, if the client does not check whether the gateway address is in the certificate, it can simply use a user certificate from a VPN user, because this is also signed with the same CA as the gateway certificate.

    It is much easier to get a user certificate and its private key than the gateway certificate.

    To get the gateway certificate, you have to hack into the gateway directly, but if I have unrestricted access to the gateway, then I no longer need the certificate because then I can intercept passwords directly at the gateway and have full access immediately to all private networks behind it.

    Gateways are of course designed to be as difficult to attack as possible, in contrast to users' work computers, which can be much more easily foisted with a Trojan. And it's even easier if a VPN user wants to act as a hacker himself, because he has regular access to a valid user certificate including a matching private key and can thus get other users' passwords, which may grant him extensive access rights Passwords are often managed centrally and the same password is also used for other company services.

    That's why it's not enough that a certificate is valid and signed with the appropriate CA, it also has to be ensured that the gateway certificate is really the gateway certificate and also matches the gateway you're currently talking to, anything else undermines the whole thing Security concept of certificates.
    In order to get OpenVPN connections from Ubiquiti Unifi to work correctly with VPN Tracker, the following change must be made to the config file before importing it into VPN Tracker:

    - Download the OpenVPN configuration file from the Unifi console.
    - Open the configuration file with a text editor.
    - Identify this line:
    Cipher AES-256-CBC
    - Change the line to:
    AES-256-GCM
    - Save the file.
    - Import the file into VPN Tracker
    Two-factor authentication (also known as 2FA or Multi-Factor authentication or MFA) is a way to increase login security.

    Once 2FA has been enabled on the VPN gateway, VPN Tracker will automatically respond to the request when connecting:
    Most VPN connections will automatically prompt you to enter your 2FA code in a separate step after the username and password have been verified.

    In some cases, you may need to add your 2FA code directly after your regular password. There's an option under Configure > Advanced to tell VPN Tracker to always prompt you for the XAUTH username and password dialog, instead of attempting to automatically sign in with your saved credentials.

    VPN Tracker Personal Safe is secure encrypted cloud storage for your personal VPN connections and shortcuts.

    How to save a connection in Personal Safe

    Not sure if your VPN connection is backed up? The safe icon in the connection list indicates whether a connection has been stored in your Personal Safe:

    To add a connection to your Personal Safe, simply right click the connection and select 'Add to Personal Safe' for access across all your devices.

    Why should I use Personal Safe?
    VPN Tracker Personal Safe makes using VPN more reliable and secure:

    Security
    Personal Safe adds an additional level of security to your connections: all your connection details are encrypted using a highly-secure key (Argon3 + PKTNY) that only you can unlock.

    Backup
    Lost iPhone? Broken Mac? Personal Safe keeps your connections safe, so you can instantly get them on your replacement device. Sign in with your secure key and they are instantly downloaded and ready to go.

    Use your connections on all your devices
    iMac at home and iPad for the road? Your Personal Safe keeps your connections synced across all your devices – securely and effortlessly.


    How are connections stored?
    When you add a connection to your Personal Safe, it is encrypted using your personal encryption keys and then uploaded to a secure cloud storage location. It can only be accessed with your user credentials and encryption key.


    Is Personal Safe secure?
    Personal Safe has been designed from scratch for VPN connections. Unlike other storage systems that rely on passwords and leave files unencrypted, Personal Safe encrypts all your connections with keys that only you can use.

    That means connections are

    • Encrypted on your device and
    • Stored on encrypted storage at my.vpntracker.com that only you can access

    Even if someone could get access to your Personal Safe, the key-based security means they can't access the encrypted connection information without your password.

    We've designed the system so no-one (including the VPN Tracker team) can access or unlock your connections.

    Mit Hilfe von VPN Tracker 365 können Sie sich mit Ihrem Telekom Digitalisierungsbox über VPN verbinden. Die Telekom Digitalisierungsbox Firewall hat ein eigenes Geräte-Profil in der App. Dies bedeutet, dass es vereinfachte Konfigurationseinstellungen gibt die bereits auf das Gerät vorkonfiguriert sind. Für weitere Hilfe mit der Konfiguration, sehen Sie sich Telekom Digitalisierungsbox Konfigurationsanleitungan.

    A Technical Support Report contains your VPN Tracker settings and relevant network and system settings that our technical support team needs to be able to assist you quickly. Confidential data (e.g passwords, pre-shared keys, private keys) are not included in a Technical Support Report (TSR).

    How to create a Technical Support Report on a Mac:

    ‣ Click on your VPN connection in VPN Tracker 365.
    ‣ In the bottom right corner under the "Status" tab, you will see the TSR button.
    ‣ Click the button to generate the report and follow the instructions to send to our support team.
    How to create a Technical Support Report on an iPhone/iPad:
    ‣ Tap on the connection. The connection card appears.
    ‣ Tap on “Feedback”
    ‣ Provide a short description of the connection problem
    ‣ Tap on Send

    If you have an issue connecting to the VPN in the first place, please make a connection attempt right before creating the Technical Support Report, then create the Technical Support Report as soon as the connection attempt has failed.

    If you can connect to the VPN, but something is not working right after the connection has been established, please establish the VPN connection, then create the Technical Support Report while the VPN is connected.

    You can either email the report directly to our support team from VPN Tracker 365, or save it to email later or from a different computer, or to upload it using the contact form on our website:

    Whenever possible, also include screenshots of the VPN setup on your VPN gateway.



    Sonicwall has been experiencing various issues with its iOS and Mac VPN client ("„Sonicwall Mobile Connect") recently.

    An error message appears during setup:
    'Your Sonicwall' is either currently unreachable or is not a valid SonicWall appliance. Would you like to save this connection anyway?

    When starting the connection, the following appears:
    Connection Error
    'Your Sonicwall' is not a SonicWall SSL VPN server.

    In such cases, we recommend switching to VPN Tracker. VPN Tracker is available for both Mac and iOS. An added advantage is that once a connection is set up, it’s immediately available on both devices, as VPN Tracker securely syncs the settings through the Personal Safe.

    Update September 2024: SonicWall has introduced another update with SonicOS 6.5.4.15-116n, which has rendered SSL VPN functionality non-operational for many SonicWall devices.

    Update November 2024: This issue seems to be addressed by the SonicOS 6.5.4.15-117n update. For more information, please visit:
    https://www.sonicwall.com/support/knowledge-base/mobile-connect-breaks-after-upgrade-to-sonicos-6-5-4-15/240903132324983

    You can view a copy of all your invoices in our Online Store:

    You will find the invoices for your VPN Tracker 365 purchases in the section "Invoices", here:

    http://my.vpntracker.com

    You work in accounting and need access to the VPN Tracker invoices for your company? Please ask your VPN Tracker Team manager to invite you to you company's team with the role "Accounting". Afterwards you will receive emails as soon as a new invoice is available and you can dowload this from the web portal


    You will find the invoices for your Mail Designer 365 purchases in the section "Orders", here:

    https://my.maildesigner365.com

    You will find the invoices for your tizi products in the section "Orders", here:

    http://my.tizi.tv

    Other invoices can be found at http://www.equinux.com/goto/invoice
    ‣ If you would like to save a PDF copy of your invoice, then do the following:
     Press "Command + P"  
     Choose "PDF" > "Save as PDF"

    When connected to a VPN, your network shares won't show up in the Finder sidebar menu:


    To access your file server via VPN, you have two options...

    Option 1: Manual Access:

    1. Open Finder.
    2. Open the "Go" menu.
    3. Choose "Connect to Server..."
    4. Enter the IP address (e.g."192.168...")
    5. Click "Connect".



    That's it! Now you have access to your files in Finder for this session. Please note, you will have to carry out these steps each time you need to connect.


    Option 2: Creating a Shortcut:
    You can also create a shortcut to your server within the VPN Tracker app, meaning it will be saved for whenever you need to access the server.

    1. Go to "VPN Shortcuts" in the app menu.

    2. In the shortcuts section, click on the bottom menu and drag out the File Server icon.

    3. Choose a VPN connection and a server to create your shortcut. If your chosen server does not appear on the list you can also enter it manually.


    After you have completed these steps your connection will be saved in the shortcuts section for whenever you need to use it.

    This video tutorial shows you how to quickly create a VPN Shortcut to a file server...





    VPN Tracker is the #1 VPN software client for Macs. It’ll allow you to connect securely to your home or office network over the internet.
    In order to set up a VPN Tunnel under Mac OS X, you will need the following:
    • VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    • An internet connection
    • A VPN Router/Gateway


    Create a new connection


    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:

    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"


    Choose your VPN Router


    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile."
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.

    Your configuration guide


    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:



    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop


    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.

    To renew your expired VPN Tracker plan, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • In the Teams view under "Subscriptions", you will see a list of both your active and your expired plans
    • To renew an expired plan, please click on: “Reactivate license
    • You will then be shown your available plan options

    Please note:
    • Grandfathering pricing is exclusively available for customers using the automatic renewal option. If your plan has expired, you can re-obtain VPN Tracker for the current price tier
    • After starting your new plan, you will regain full access to your account including your Personal Safe and Team Management features.

    In some circumstances, VPN Tracker may not be able to store your account login credentials in your Keychain.

    To fix this issue, please try the following:

    • Quit VPN Tracker
    • Open Keychain Access from Applications > Utilities
    • Select your login keychain
    • Choose File > Lock Keychain “login”
    • Then choose File > Unlock Keychain “login”

    On newer macOS releases, you may not see the option to lock/unlock your Keychain. In that case, please enter the following command via the Terminal:

    security lock-keychain ~/Library/Keychains/login.keychain
    
    Once it has been locked, you can then unlock your Keychain again:
    security lock-keychain ~/Library/Keychains/login.keychain
    
    (You will need to enter your macOS login password to confirm).

    Now re-open VPN Tracker and try signing in again.

    If the problem still pops up, try this:

    • Quit VPN Tracker
    • Go back to Keychain Access
    • In the search box enter “VPN Tracker User Auth”
    • Delete the VPN Tracker User Auth Token entry

    Now re-open VPN Tracker and try signing in again.

    Last resort: Reset your keychain

    If none of the tips above work, macOS has an option to reset your Keychain. Note that this should only be tried as a last resort, as it completely resets your login Keychain:

    • Open Keychain Access
    • Go to Keychain > Preferences
    • Choose "Reset Default Keychains…"
    Afterwards, open VPN Tracker 365 and try signing in again.

    If there are any further issues, please contact our support team and include the application logs from this location:
    /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365/var/log.

    If you need internet on your Mac while traveling, you can activate the personal hotspot feature on your iPhone or Android smartphone in order to share a 4G/LTE/5G mobile connection with your Mac.

    In general, this will work fine for the majority of VPN connections. However, there are a few points to be aware of:

    • PPTP VPN connections are not supported, as iOS and Android do not support PPTP passthrough
    • For IPsec VPN connections, it's possible you may have to adjust your settings for NAT-T.
    Beta versions are soon to be released versions of VPN Tracker 365. We like to release beta versions to allow users to give us feedback on new features we've been developing before we roll them out to the general public.

    If you would like to become part of our beta testing program, you will need to activate access to early release versions in the app.
    1. Open the VPN Tracker 365 app and go to "VPN Tracker 365" > "Preferences"
    2. Next to "Update", check the box "Get early access to Pre-Release versions"
    3. From the drop down menu, select "Beta versions"



    Tip: Next to "Update" you can also check "Automatically check for updates". This way, VPN Tracker 365 will inform you whenever a new beta version is available for testing.

    Are you an experienced IT admin wanting to take things one step further? Check out our Nightly builds...

    If you run into issues on a beta version and want to get back to an older build, you can always find our latest official release on the version history page. Please also note that you can deactivate beta testing at any time by unchecking the box in your app preferences.
    This message in VPN Tracker means that the VPN gateway isn't willing to accept any of the proposals that VPN Tracker has offered.

    As the proposals have not changed since the last successful connect (VPN Tracker always keeps record of the last successful settings, so we were able to compare your current settings to them), somebody must have changed the settings on the gateway side and now your client settings don't match any longer.

    No proposal chosen means that your VPN gateway could not agree to any of the Phase 1 proposals that VPN Tracker sent to it. Phase 1 proposals include:
    - Exchange mode (main/aggressive)
    - Encryption (3DES, AES-128, etc.)
    - Hashing (SHA-1, SHA-256, etc.)
    - Diffie-Hellman Group (Group 2, Group 5, etc.)

    Please double check which values are currently set on the VPN gateway. You need to offer at least the same values in VPN Tracker for Phase 1.

    Also please double check your local identifier in VPN Tracker. If a VPN gateway supports multiple VPN tunnels and your client settings are correct for tunnel A, however the gateway thinks you want to connect to tunnel B, then this can also explain a configuration mismatch. With aggressive mode connection, the local identifier in VPN Tracker is used to select a remote tunnel, so in case there are multiple remote tunnels, please ensure you are targeting the correct one at the moment. The local identifier in VPN Tracker must match the tunnel name or remote identifier on the VPN gateway (remote as local and remote swap roles on the gateway side - for the gateway you are remote).
    You can change the language of all equinux Software products by changing the language settings of your device. For instance, on the Mac, you can do the following:
    ‣ Open "System Preferences."
    ‣ Click "Language & Region."

    ‣ Change to your preferred language by dragging your selected language to the top of the list.

    ‣ Close your software. For example, with VPN Tracker, you can do so by choosing "VPN Tracker" > "Quit VPN Tracker."

    ‣ Reopen the software.


    If your credit card is being refused, please check the following information, for possible mistakes or mismatches :

    • Please check the credit card number you have entered carefully for possible typos
    • Make sure the expiration date entered is correct
    • Check whether the security code you entered matches the code on your card: American Express cardholders can find the 4-digit code on the front of their card, other cardholders can usually find a 3-digit code on the back.
    • Try another credit card, if you have access to one
    • If you are certain your information is correct and your card is still not being accepted, it might be due to a technical issue with our credit card gateway. Please try again later.

    VPN Tracker is aimed at making a complex technical matter like Virtual Private Networks (VPN) simple and user-friendly. The software is distributed with device profiles and configuration guides for many popular IPSec VPN gateways. These resources should provide all you need to establish a VPN tunnel successfully. You can find a list of devices and configuration guides here:

    http://www.vpntracker.com/interop

    For a general introduction to computer networking, VPNs and IPsec, there are several excellent introductions available online or as books, see for example here.

    If you experience specific configuration problems, our technical engineers are happy to provide support for setting up VPN connections with VPN Tracker. In many cases, connection problems are related to misconfiguration of either VPN Tracker or the VPN gateway.

    If you provide

    • A problem description and information on what you've already tried
    • A Technical Support Report from VPN Tracker ("Help" > "Generate Technical Support Report")
    • Screenshots of the VPN gateway configuration
    • A log from the VPN gateway

    we can usually quickly spot the cause for a problem and provide advice on how to resolve it.

    As there are several factors unrelated to VPN Tracker or the VPN gateway that can influence connectivity (e.g. firewalls/routers in between VPN Tracker and the VPN gateway), we cannot guarantee that a connection can be established under any circumstances.

    While we try our best, our support options may be limited if

    • you use a device which we did not test ourselves (most devices work just fine with VPN Tracker, though, and we're happy to take a look even at issues with untested VPN gateways)
    • you do not provide the information we need in order to assist you (see above)
    • your network administrator does not cooperate
    • you change connection parameters while we're trying to debug the settings
    An established VPN connection causes your system to obtain a new virtual network interface. All traffic sent over this network interface arrives at the other side of the VPN tunnel and all traffic sent back arrives at that interface. Like any interface, this interface needs an IP address to be functional. Either the VPN gateway assigns you an IP address using a client provisioning method or you need to assign one to yourself. In the later case, the IP address of the field "Local Address" is used as IP address for the virtual interface or, in case that field is left blank, the IP address of your primary network interface is used, since it is allowed to assign the same IP address to more than one interface.

    Basically you are free to assign yourself any IP address you like, albeit it should usually be a private IP address and you need to make sure it does not conflict with the IP address other VPN users are using. There is just one exception to that rule: Usually you cannot assign yourself an IP address that lies within the remote network itself, as if you do, the connection may come up but it cannot be used productively.

    The reason for that is very simple. If you assign yourself an IP address from within the remote network, servers and hosts at the remote side will think you are also a local host whenever they see a packet from you. So they will try to contact you directly over the local network but that cannot work, as in fact, you are not a local host. The only way to contact you is by going over the VPN gateway and remote hosts won't try to do that for hosts they consider local.

    To make such a configuration possible, the VPN gateway must support ARP Proxying and most gateways will only support that, if they themselves have assigned the IP address to the client. If you assign IP addresses using a form of client provisioning, then some gateways will allow you to assign IP addresses that lie within one of the remote networks and the connection will wok normally.
    The L2TP protocol standard officially only supports username & password authentication, so 2-factor is not supported. Some vendors have added non-standard L2TP authentication variants, but these are not supported by VPN Tracker at this time.

    Are you seeing a 'Server certificate' error message whilst activating your equinux software?

    One likely cause is your system's date & time: Make sure your system clock is set correctly by checking 'Set date & time automatically' under System Preferences > Date & Time.

    We also use a fairly new security certificate to protect your data. However, older versions of OS X might not immediately recognize the certificate.

    To make sure OS X will recognize the certificate, you could try one of the following two fixes:

    Run Software Update

      ‣ Go to the System Preferences and select "Software Update"
      ‣ Install any available system updates 
      ‣ Afterwards, restart and try activating again

    Disable your firewall

    Please make sure you are not running any firewalls which may block access to our activations server. Applications you may wish to disable temporarily include:

    • Mac OS X Firewall
    • LittleSnitch (Litte Snitch Configuration - Preferences … - General - Stop)
    • Intego NetBarrier

    Disable your proxy

    In some cases the use of proxies may interfere with certain certificates stored in your Keychain.

      ‣ Open System Preferences
      ‣ Go to the "Network" section
      ‣ Choose your network connection and click "Advanced…"
      ‣ Uncheck any proxies you may have configured and click "Ok"

    Check your Keychain

      ‣ Open: "Application" > "Utilities" > "Keychain Access" 
      ‣ Select "Keychain Access" > "Keychain First Aid"
      ‣ Enter your OS X account password, select Repair on the right and hit Start

    Install the root certificate manually

    • Download the latest Let's Encrypt root certificates
    • Double-click to add the certificate to your Mac's keychain
      Tip: If you have multiple users on the Mac, add it to the 'System' keychain to fix this problem for all users
    • Double-click the new entry "ISRG Root X1" to open the trust settings



    • Under "Trust", choose "Always trust"



    • Close the window and confirm with your Mac user password

    You should now be able to activate your software using your equinux ID and password.

    VPN Tracker 9 & VPN Tracker 10

    Older VPN Tracker versions may also have issues due to certifcates as described above. As these versions are end-of-life, we can no longer offer support for them. The steps above should also apply to these versions. For support and to use VPN Tracker on the latest macOS versions, please switch to a new VPN Tracker plan.
    In some versions of macOS (10.14 and 10.15), Apple’s support for SMB network shares may send packets over a VPN tunnel interface that can trigger this warning. These packets have the same source and destination address which is what triggers the LAND attack warning.

    These messages can be ignored, or, if you have the option, you can disable the NetBIOS daemon that is sending out these packets on the Mac using the following command:
    launchctl unload -w /System/Library/LaunchDaemons/com.apple.netbiosd.plist

    Please note that disabling the NetBIOS daemon may affect your network file shares.

    Yes, VPN Tracker supports IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), L2TP (Mac only), PPTP (Mac only), OpenVPN, SonicWALL SSL VPN, Cisco AnyConnect SSL VPN, Fortinet SSL VPN, SSTP VPN, and WireGuard® VPN (Beta - learn more). Additional protocols are on our roadmap.

    WireGuard is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.

    VPN Tracker 365 makes it really easy to set up a SonicWALL SSL VPN connection on your Mac. Just enter the Host name and VPN Domain into the VPN Tracker settings - and you are ready to go! Please check our Configuration Guide for more detailed instructions.
    You can add two-factor authentication to your equinux ID at id.equinux.com.

    Visit our step-by-step guide to 2FA for more details.

    To sign-in to your equinux ID with two-factor authentication, please make sure you're using the latest version of VPN Tracker for Mac or VPN Tracker for iPhone & iPad.
    The private key of your personal certificate could be located in the systems keychain instead of your personal keychain. The personal certificate as well as the corresponding private key has to be located in your login keychain to get constant access. Please try to drag and drop both to your login keychain or delete them and import them to the login keychain.

    You need to enter your equinux ID and password to activate most equinux applications. However sometimes applications will also require you to enter your Mac OS X user password in order to access certain required system components.

    So if you see a window like the one below, you'll need to enter the username and password of an Administrator account on your Mac to proceed, not your equinux ID and password.

    In our online store we accept a variety of payment methods:

    • Visa
    • Mastercard
    • American Express
    • PayPal*
    • Personal/Business Checks* (US Orders Only)
    • Bank Transfers* (European Union Only)

    * License will be emailed to you once your payment has cleared.

    When paying my check or bank transfer, you will receive an email with additional payment details once you have placed your order. Bank Transfer and Check orders are currently not available for Mail Designer Purchases

    Technical Support Report (TSR) is generally not encrypted. The data transmission is preformed directly from your computer to our internal servers and will never be shared with third parties.

    The TSR contains connection logs, application logs, screenshots of the app and information on installing and configuring VPN Tracker. In addition, the current system and network configuration of the computer, as well as precise filtered log messages from the console and a heavily filtered system profile, but always only information that is relevant for VPN use or use of VPN Tracker itself. In addition, there may be crash logs of the VPN Tracker system components, if available.

    The TSR does not contain any passwords (pre-shared key, key file, XAUTH or other login data), even if they have been saved in the connection. It does not contain any keys or certificates of connections. It does not contain an unfiltered system log with log messages of irrelevant applications. It does not contain a complete system profile and no file content, except for files that VPN Tracker has created and managed itself. It is not possible to set up a VPN tunnel with the data from a TSR alone, since all the security-relevant information that would be required for this is not available.

    What does Extended Diagnostics mean?


    If you activate extended diagnostics, you give us permission to request additional TSRs for the duration of the permission. This has the same security parameters as described abobve. With this option selected, we can check if reported problems still exist and provide faster support without additional user interaction.

    To send us a TSR, open the VPN Tracker App and choose "Help">"Contact Support" in the top menu bar.
    First of all, make sure phase 1 and phase 2 lifetimes in VPN Tracker (Advanced > Phase ...) match the values selected on the VPN gateway.  Please also check, that no session time limit is configured on the Cisco device.

    Please follow these steps, to prevent idle timeouts with split-tunneling, and to generally increase connection reliability:

    1. Uncheck the option "Establish a separate phase 2 tunnel for each remote network" (Advanced > Phase 2)
    2. Afterwards, check the box "Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split-tunneling" (Advanced > Interoperability > Cisco)
    For security reasons, VPN Tracker only permits you to log in to the software via a direct connection between your computer and our server.

    This error message advises you that another program is blocking communication between your computer and our server. Here are some examples of programs which could cause this:

    • Security software (e.g. virus scanners, Malware blockers)
    • Malware or Adware

    If you need to add the domains used by VPN Tracker to your security solution, please add vpntracker.com (plus its subdomains) and equinux.com (plus its subdomains).

    Following this, you should be able to log in to VPN Tracker with no problems at all.

    Tip: A known cause for this error is:
    • Kaspersky

    To establish a VPN connection to a certain location (such as your office), you will need a VPN gateway at that location. This gateway could be a hardware VPN gateway device (see our compatibility page for compatible devices and setup guides).

    The VPN gateway needs to be connected to the Internet (e.g. to a DSL modem or similar), preferably with a static IP address or it should be capable of using a service like DynDNS.org to map its dynamic IP to a hostname. Configuration is easiest if the VPN gateway is also the router (default gateway) of its network. If the VPN gateway is not the router of its network, a suitable routing setup may be necessary for traffic over the VPN to be routed correctly.

    Configuration details can be found in the configuration guides for specific devices.

    Please go to"Configure" > "Advanced" > "Additional Settings"
    and make sure
    • Always prompt for XAUTH credentials is not checked.
      If this option is checked, VPN Tracker will in fact always prompt you, whether it finds credentials in your keychain or not.
       
    • Use stored XAUTH password as passcode is not checked.
      If this option is checked, VPN Tracker assumes that the password stored in keychain is in fact a passcode and it will only hand it out to the gateway if the gateway asks for a passcode. If it asks for a password instead, VPN Tracker doesn’t have any such info and thus asks you to please provide one.
    Currently, VPN Tracker does not support creating a custom password. We are planning on adding this feature in the future.

    Please note that your equinux password is not directly used as your VPN Tracker password. Instead, VPN Tracker automatically creates a strong password using key derivation for your added security.

    Please refer to the following pages for further information on VPN Tracker Personal Safe (formerly known as Connection Safe):



    SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning enables VPN Tracker to automatically retrieve the settings for the VPN connection from supported SonicWALL VPN gateways. For most users, it is only necessary to configure the SonicWALL's WAN IP address in VPN Tracker – everything else happens automatically.

    For a list of supported SonicWALL devices, please refer to this FAQ.

    For the configuration of a VPN connection under Mac OS X, you will need the following:
    • VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    • An internet connection
    • A VPN Router/Gateway

    Create a new connection

    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:
    
    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"

    Choose your VPN Router

    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile." 
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.
    

    Your configuration guide

    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:

    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop

    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.

    You can manage all of your VPN Tracker plans after logging in to our website https://my.vpntracker.com using your existing equinux ID and password.

    Here you will find all information about your subscriptions and payments and can manage your colleagues' VPN Tracker plans.

    Please check if it is possible to open the address https://my.vpntracker.com in Safari. This Problem tends to ocurr if our Website is blocked through the firewall or another content filter.

    If you're sure that your time with us is at an end then we've made it nice and easy to remove all your info from our database so that you don't need to wait for us to do it.

    Just log in at your License Manager, click 'Edit your Account' on the left hand navigation panel and, after a tearful farewell, click 'Delete Account'.

    If you do leave then we'd like to say thank you, bye and come back soon!

    We offer a free trial version of all available VPN Tracker plans so you can test your VPN connections with VPN Tracker before purchasing. VPN Tracker Mac Trial licenses are valid for 7 days and offer the exact feature set of the appropriate plan so you can fully test all features of the plan. You're able to test all connections and protocols to ensure your connections works before purchasing. If you are happy with VPN Tracker, you won't need to do anything to continue using it. All your created connections and settings will remain in the app and the trial license will convert to a paid license after the trial period. Otherwise you can cancel your trial license up to 24 hours before the end of the trial period.

    Get the free VPN Tracker trial

    If you have a charge from equinux on your credit card that you do not recognize, it may be for one of the following products offered through the equinux Online Store:

    • VPN Tracker (VPN software for Mac, iPhone and iPad)
    • Mail Designer 365 (email newsletter design software for Macs)
    • tizi (iPhone and iPad accessories)

    Common scenarios

    Auto-renewing products

    VPN Tracker and Mail Designer 365 are offered as subscriptions. When a plan has been configured to auto-renew, the associated payment method will automatically be charged.

    Additional team-members added

    If multiple employees are using one of our products, they may have configured team billing. This means the associated credit card may have been charged, in order to add a new team member to an account.

    Invoices and other questions

    You can download your invoices from our website:

    If you have checked with your team and still have additional questions regarding a charge, please contact our support team. Be sure to include the details from your credit card statement and the last 4 digits of your card.

    Some kinds of software may cause issues with VPN Tracker:

    1. Personal Firewalls / Desktop Firewalls
    2. Protection Software (e.g Virus Scanners, Malware Protection)
    3. Other VPN Clients / VPN Software (for example NCP Client)

    Personal Firewalls usually ask the user, if an app should be allowed to send network traffic. It’s important to grant VPN Tracker full network access. If you have already added rules for VPN Tracker, please whitelist VPN Tracker.

    Protection Software often sees VPN traffic as a potential source of threat, as it isn’t able to analyze that traffic because of its very strong encryption. Please ensure VPN Tracker is ignored by any protection software running on your Mac and allow VPN traffic to pass through.

    Other VPN clients should not be a problem, if they are designed to co-exist with othe VPN apps. Unfortunately, not all other clients are and some capture all VPN traffic as soon as they are installed, even if the app is not running.
    In these situations, you may need to uninstall the VPN client - we also suggest asking the vendor to improve its “cooperation” with other VPN apps.

    Here are some common examples of the types of apps mentioned above. If you are uncertain whether any of these applications may be installed on your system, try the following:

    • Open the app “Terminal”
    • Copy and paste the following command: kextstat | grep -v com.apple

    You’ll get a list of all kernel extensions that are not from Apple. Just compare that list with the identifiers in parenthesis below:

    • Little Snitch
      (at.obdev.nke.LittleSnitch)
       
    • TripMode
      (ch.tripmode.TripModeNKE)
       
    • Sophos Anti Virus
      (com.sophos.kext.oas, com.sophos.nke.swi)
       
    • Symantec Endpoint Protection / Norton AntiVirus
      (com.symantec.kext.SymAPComm, com.symantec.kext.internetSecurity, com.symantec.kext.ips, com.symantec.kext.ndcengine, com.symantec.SymXIPS)
       
    • Kaspersky Internet/Total Security
      (com.kaspersky.nke ,com.kaspersky.kext.kimul, com.kaspersky.kext.klif, com.kaspersky.kext.mark)
       
    • Intego Mac Internet Security
      (com.intego.netbarrier.kext.network, com.intego.virusbarrier.kext.realtime, com.intego.netbarrier.kext.process, com.intego.netbarrier.kext.monitor)
       
    • Fortinet FortiClient
      (com.fortinet.fct.kext.avkern2, com.fortinet.fct.kext.fctapnke)
       
    • Cisco Advanced Malware Protection (AMP)
      (com.cisco.amp.nke, com.cisco.amp.fileop)
       
    • TUN/TAP based VPN Clients
      (net.sf.tuntaposx.tap, net.sf.tuntaposx.tun)
       
    • eset Security Products
      (com.eset.kext.esets-kac, com.eset.kext.esets-mac und com.eset.kext.esets-pfw)
       
    For a faster VPN connection that is just as secure, we recommended changing from SSL VPN to IPSec VPN.
    In comparison to SSL VPN, IPSec is able to offer you much faster connection speeds as it runs on the network layer – level 3 of the OSI model – meaning it’s much closer to the physical hardware.

    Check out this post to find out more about how to improve your VPN performance.

    VPN Tracker is licensed per user. That means each person using VPN Tracker needs their own license.

    To prevent security issues, account sign-ins are checked by an automatic system. There are multiple possible causes that can trigger an account lock:

    • Sharing one account with other people
    • The account is being used as a "generic" account (e.g. "Lab computer 1"), instead of being personalized for one person
    To fix a locked account being shared with other people
    • Go to my.vpntracker.com
    • Sign in with your equinux ID
    • Go to "My Subscriptions" and choose "Add plans…"
    • Add additional licenses for each person that needs VPN access and complete your order
    • Once you have the correct number of licenses for your team, assign the new licenses to your co-workers – check out our Team Setup Guide for step-by-step instructions

    Once you have completed these steps, please contact our support team and include your equinux ID and order confirmation number. A team member will review your details and will be able to lift the restrictions on your account.

    For any other questions, please reach out to our Account Security Team.

    VPN Tracker has three settings that can speed up connecting to Cisco devices and improve compatibility.

    • Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split-tunneling
    • Send Cisco firewall attribute
    • Use ... as the application version during Mode Config

    Note: All settings described on this page require VPN Tracker 6.2 or newer.
     

    Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split-tunneling

    What does this setting do?
    In a split-tunneling setup using EasyVPN, VPN Tracker will no longer establish an IPsec Security Association (SA) to each remote network, but establish a single SA to 0.0.0.0/0. Split-tunneling is achieved only through an appropriate routing setup. This can speed up the connection processes significantly for connections with multiple remote networks.

    When should I use this setting?
    The setting works with most Cisco devices that use EasyVPN and a split-tunneling setup.

    How can I try it?

    1. On the Advanced tab, uncheck the box “Establish a separate tunnel for each remote network” (see screenshot)
    2. Make sure the box “Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split tunneling” is checked (see screenshot)

    If your connection does not work with this new setting, simply revert back to your previous setup by checking the box “Establish a separate tunnel for each remote network”.

    Send Cisco firewall attribute

    What does this setting do?
    This setting causes VPN Tracker to send a special attribute during EasyVPN indicating the presence of a firewall.

    When should I use this setting?
    You can try enabling this setting if your current EasyVPN-based connection to a Cisco device gets dropped at phase 2 (“The VPN gateway asked VPN Tracker to disconnect...” error).

    Use ... as the application version during Mode Config

    What does this setting do?
    This setting causes VPN Tracker to send a different application version than the default “VPN Tracker 6” during EasyVPN and Mode Config.

    When should I use this setting?
    You can try setting a different application version, e.g. “Cisco Systems VPN Client 4.8.0:Linux” if your current EasyVPN-based connection to a Cisco device gets dropped at phase 2 (“The VPN gateway asked VPN Tracker to disconnect...” error).



    For a list of tested ZyXEL devices, please refer to this page VPN Tracker may also work with additional IPsec capable devices from ZyXEL, please contact support if you have any questions.

    Our activation process requires that your Mac accepts cookies.

    ‣ To check this, please open up Safari. 
    ‣ Click on "Safari" in the main menu at the very top of the screen.
    ‣ Choose "Preferences." 
    ‣ Select the "Privacy" tab and verify that cookies are always accepted. 
    ‣ Make sure JavaScript at "Security" is also activated. 
    ‣ Please close Safari.
    ‣ Restart the application and retry the activation.
    To set up a connection to a remote server via PPTP VPN on your Mac, please carry out the following steps:

    • Open the VPN Tracker Connection Creator for PPTP VPN
    • Enter the IP address or Host Name of the PPTP server you want to connect to, then follow the remaining steps in the setup wizard
    • Save your new VPN connection in your account using secue end-to-end encryption to start using on your Mac

    New Mac? No problem. The latest version of VPN Tracker for Mac offers full support for Macs with M2 chips, as well as compatibility with the latest macOS versions, including macOS 15 Sequoia.

    Download the latest version here.
    VPN Tracker is designed as a user license. One license can be used by only one person.

    A company counts as a group of users. Each user of the VPN Tracker software needs their own personal VPN Tracker user account as well as their own user license. The information about the VPN Tracker account, may only be used by the owner of the account. A sharing of login and password (for example between members of an organization or others) is not permitted.

    Managing multiple users in an organization via team management
    Employees or users in an organization are managed using VPN Tracker Team Management. With this, an administrator can assign VPN Tracker user licenses to individual VPN Tracker user accounts and also withdraw them. Usage of the team management is mandatory for the use of VPN Tracker in organizations. It is designed to meet the security demands in organizations.

    Team Management Guide →

    Accounts with suspicious behavior
    VPN systems are security systems which regulate confidential access on a personal level. The sharing of logins and passwords will inadvertently lead to an insecurity in the entire system, for example when an employee leaves the company. An ex-employee would still be able to gain full access to the VPN Tracker main account. Accounts which display suspicious behavior may be automatically blocked by our system. This is to safeguard the security of your account.
    You can connect to the following 21 countries:
    1. Germany
    2. Austria
    3. United States
    4. Australia
    5. Brazil
    6. Canada
    7. France
    8. Japan
    9. Luxembourg
    10. Netherlands
    11. New Zealand
    12. Singapore
    13. Spain
    14. Sweden
    15. Switzerland
    16. United Kingdom

    To choose the country you want to connect to, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "File" > "New" > "World Connect Destination"

    ‣ Then, choose "World Connect" and "Countries"

    ‣ Check your country of choice:



    We use analytics in VPN Tracker 365 to help us improve the app and your overall VPN experience. All measurements are completely anonymous and we never evaluate any personal information or any data going through your connection.

    What is measured

    • Generic connection settings (e.g. what type of connection it is, which options are being used etc.)
    • Which features are used (e.g. is auto-connect enabled, are any actions configured etc.)
    • How many connections you have

    Your data, your privacy

    • Your authentication details and credentials are never read, captured or transmitted
    • Your VPN traffic is never analyzed, captured or accessible

    You’re in control

    If you’d prefer not to share any anonymous usage information with equinux, you can deactivate this option at any time in VPN Tracker’s preferences by unchecking 'Share diagnostics data'.

    If you keep getting a dialog “VPN Tracker can't verify the identity of the VPN gateway [your host]”, the certificate of the gateway is probably not set up correctly. Since it's important for your privacy and security, VPN Tracker does not connect to VPN gateways with invalid certificates by default.

    There are two ways to ignore certificate verification:

    1. Trust the certificate in VPN Tracker manually

    You can make VPN Tracker always accept the certificate if you know that the certificate belongs to your device and are willing to accept the risk: in the warning dialog, click on “Show certificate” and verify that the certificate is the one you expect. Then check the “Alway trust …” checkbox and press “Continue”. Subsequent connection attempts should then skip this dialog.




    2. Turn off the certificate warning in the connection settings

    If you are rolling out a connection to a team and you want to avoid each user having to trust the certificate manually, you can deactivate the verification in the connection settings.

    To do this, edit the connection, navigate to the “Advanced Options” section, expand the “Certificates” section and uncheck “Verify Remote Certificate”. Then save the connection and restart it.
    Configuring VPN Shortcuts allows you and your team members to use VPN Tracker 365 to get quick and easy access to your most important internal services, including:
    • File Servers
    • Company intranet & internal websites
    • Company email accounts
    • Internal databases
    • Remote Desktop
    • Internal calendars

    When you click on a Shortcut in VPN Tracker 365, your VPN will connect automatically and your chosen service will be launched:



    To learn how to set up VPN Shortcuts in VPN Tracker 365, check out this 2 minute video tutorial:




    We offer a free 30-day demo of VPN Tracker 365, no credit card required.

    To get started, you just need to

    Then, once you have configured your connection, you'll see a free demo option in the store window that pops up.

    Note: If you don't see the free demo option, please click the account popover at the top left of your screen to verify your email address first.

    VPN Tracker is the best choice for professionals looking to connect a Mac or MacBook remotely to the company network. As well as the highest security standards, VPN Tracker offers a complete service specifically tailored to the needs of business users.

    This guide tells you all you need to know about getting VPN Tracker set up for remote work on your Mac.

    P.S. VPN Tracker now also works on iOS so you can connect to your company VPN on the go on iPhone and iPad! Find out more.
    Your VPN connections are initially arranged by creation date. You can easily sort and rearrange them by dragging and dropping.


    It’s also possible to create Groups of VPN Connections by clicking on the plus symbol in the lower right and selecting “New Group”. Just drag your connections into the appropriate group.

    To deactivate your VPN Tracker renewal, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to you your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • Go to "My Plans and Billing" in the sidebar, where you will see your current active plan(s), in case your plan is a team plan, please go to "Team Plans and Billing" in the sidebar
    • To deactivate your renewal, flip the switch from blue to grey
    • After deactivating auto renewal, you will receive an email confirming the deactivation.

    Please be aware that by deactivating automatic renewals you will lose pricing benefits. The possibility of grandfathering pricing is exclusively available for customers who keep automatic renewals activated at my.vpntracker.com once this option has been deactivated, any associated pricing benefits (e.g. discounts, special offers, etc.) will be lost.



    In order to install VPN Tracker on newer macOS versions, you need to "allow" the app in System Preferences under "Security".

    To do this:
    - Make sure the VPN Tracker app is in the Applications folder
    - You will need to complete this step locally on the Mac. It is not possible to do this step over Remote Desktop or Screen Sharing tools.

    Tip: If you have Full keyboard access enabled, you may be able to use the tab key (↹) to highlight "Allow" and then confirm it with the Space bar.
    If you see this error: "LCP timeout" or "LCP: timeout sending Config-Requests", here are two things to check:
    1. To use PPTP behind a NAT router, your router must support "PPTP Passthrough" and this option also needs to be enabled.

    Please ensure that your router supports "PPTP Passthrough" and please ensure it is also enabled. Check your router's manual. If your router has no support for it, you may have to replace it if you require to use PPTP.

    2. Please also check if your ISP is running "DS Lite" connection to you. With "DS Lite", users only get private IP addresses that are network address translated at the provider and this is usually incompatible with PPTP. You require a public IPv4 address or switch to a different VPN protocol. Call your ISP and ask for "a public IPv4 address".
    Note: Setting up connections on my.vpntracker is currently in beta and coming to more accounts later this year.

    You can create and edit connections right inside my.vpntracker.com using any browser. Thanks to advanced engineering, this works with the same data security you know from VPN Tracker on the Mac.

    It works like this

    • Choose your device brand and model
    • Enter your connection details
    Here's the key: None of this information is transferred over the internet. It's only being entered locally in your browser, on your device.

    To save your new connection:

    • You enter your equinux ID password
    • Your encrypted secure master key is fetched from my.vpntracker

    Now a program is run locally on your device through your browser that handles encryption:

    • The local encryption program decrypts the master key on your device
    • Then it uses your master key to encrypt the new connection data
    • The fully encrypted connection is then uploaded to your Personal Safe or TeamCloud on my.vpntracker
    • Your Mac, iPhone or iPad can then fetch the encrypted connection, ready for you to connect

    So there you have it. Integrated connection editing on my.vpntracker with the full security and end-to-end encryption you know from VPN Tracker for Mac.

    In certain circumstances, due to a bug in macOS, the Kernel Extension required by VPN Tracker may not be installed correctly by your System.

    If that happens, you may see the error above.

    To fix the problem, please try this:

    • Go to Macintosh HD/Library/Extensions and delete the file com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    • Then open the Terminal app (under Applications > Utilities) and enter the following command:
      sudo kextcache --clear-staging
    • Then reboot your Mac and try launching VPN Tracker 365 again

    If the problem is not fixed, please try this:

    • Restart your Mac and hold down Command+R to boot into Recovery Mode
    • Choose "Disk Utility"
    • Choose your harddrive and click "Mount"
    • Exit Disk Utility
    • Go to the menu bar and choose "Utilities > Terminal"
    • Enter the following commands:
      cd /Volumes/Macintosh\ HD/Library/StagedExtensions/Library/Extensions/
      rm -rf com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    • Restart your Mac and try launching VPN Tracker 365 again
    As an admin in your company you can manage all VPN Tracker plans for your team members.

    You can assign a plan to a new member and also revoke a plan if a colleague leaves your team.

    To do so visit my.vpntracker.com and log in using your equinux ID and password.

    In the "Team Management" section you can create a team, invite new team members and change VPN Tracker plans for each colleague.

    Get step-by-step instructions for this in our Team Management Guide.
    Great news: WireGuard® VPN support is available in VPN Tracker for Mac, iPhone and iPad!

    WireGuard® is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.
    VPN Tracker fully supports SonicWall VPN connections on Mac, iPhone and iPad, allowing you to securely connect to your SonicWall IPsec or SSL VPN from macOS or iOS devices. Download VPN Tracker to get started.
    If you are still using VPN Tracker 6 or older and run the VPN Availability Test, you may get an incorrect test result, which can block your VPN connection.

    To fix the problem, please tell VPN Tracker to ignore the test result:
    - Go to Tools > Test VPN Availability
    - Check the box marked "Ignore Test result"
    - Close the window without starting a new test

    Now your connection will connect again.

    If you travel a lot and need a tool that can check VPN availability, we recommend upgrading to a Mac that can run VPN Tracker 365, which includes Connection Checker – a fast and modern solution for frequent travelers and remote workers.

    VPN Tracker is licensed per user. That means each person using VPN Tracker needs their own license.

    If colleagues or other team-members also need to use VPN Tracker, you can upgrade your subscription with additional licenses and assign these using Team Management.

    For a certificate to be available in the "Local Certificate" list, it must be present in the Mac OS X Keychain with its corresponding private key.

    You can easily check this in the Keychain Access application: If a certificate is listed under "My Certificates" (and not just "Certificates"), its private key is available and you will be able to select it in VPN Tracker as the "Local Certificate".

    Important note for CheckPoint VPN users:

    The Mac OS X Keychain Access application currently does not understand how to read private keys from some CheckPoint generated certificates.

    To properly import the certificate into the Mac OS X Keychain, first convert it using the openssl command line tool:

    1. Open a Terminal ("Applications" > "Utilities" > "Terminal")

    2. Convert the certificate to PEM format:
        openssl pkcs12 -in /Users/joe/Desktop/MyCheckPointCert.p12 -out /tmp/out.pem
      

      Replace /Users/joe/Desktop/MyCheckPointCert.p12 with the path to the actual certificate that you want to convert.

      You will first be asked for the password that the certificate is encrypted with. If you do not know it, please ask the administrator who has created your certificate for you. You will then be asked twice for the password that will be used to protect the exported PEM file. You can use the same password that the original certificte was encrypted with. Note that no characters will appear on screen while you type in your passwords. Simply type the password and press the return key.

    3. Convert the PEM file back to PKCS#12 (.p12) format:
        openssl pkcs12 -in /tmp/out.pem -export -out ~/Desktop/MyFixedCheckPointCert.p12
      

      Replace /Users/joe/Desktop/MyFixedCheckPointCert.p12 with the path where you want the fixed certificate to be stored.

      You will first be asked for the password that you have just used for exporting to the PEM file, and then for a password to protect the fixed .p12 file with. You can again use the same password for everything.

    Now double-click your fixed certificate file to import it into the Mac OS X keychain.

    VPN Tracker is fully optimized for both small teams and larger enterprise teams. You can set up and manage your team at my.vpntracker.com.

    Our extensive Team Management Guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for the following team-related topics:
    • Creating a VPN Tracker team
    • Inviting team members
    • Assigning VPN Tracker plans to team members
    • Using the package installer and onboarding tools
    • Sharing VPN connections
    • Managing billing and invoices for your team
    VPN Tracker offers complete support for SSL VPN connections - including SonicWALL SSL, Cisco AnyConnect SSL, and Fortinet SSL, as well as for OpenVPN, IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), PPTP (Mac only), L2TP (Mac only), SSTP, and WireGuard®.

    To find out how to set up an SonicWALL SSL VPN connection, please refer to our SonicWALL SSL VPN configuration guide.

    Find out more about our VPN Tracker plan options here

    WireGuard is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.

    If you use Shimo and have found that it has stopped working, check out VPN Tracker.

    Alternative to Shimo 5

    VPN Tracker supports many of the same VPN protocols as Shimo, but is built to support new Macs and macOS releases, including macOS Sonoma and new macOS Sequoia.

    Fix your VPN - download VPN Tracker free

    Install the free VPN Tracker 365 trial and set up your VPN connection. Once you're connected, choose a VPN Tracker plan for ongoing updates, compatibility with the latest macOS releases and professional support.

    Need help setting up your VPN? How to move your Shimo VPN connection to VPN Tracker

    First, start VPN Tracker and create a new free user account to start your trial. Now we can set up your VPN connection:

    • In VPN Tracker, go to File > New > Company Connection
    • Choose your VPN gateway manufacturer and device model
    • or
    • Go to Protocols and select your VPN protocol

    Now you have a connection, you'll need to enter the connection details. You can look up some connection details in your Mac's Keychain:

    • Go to Applications > Utilities > Keychain Access
    • Search for "Shimo" in the top right corner
    • You'll find entries named "Shimo: vpn.example.com" – where "vpn.example.com" is your VPN's gateway address
    • Double-click the entry to open its details
    • To find your pre-shared key: Locate the Shimo entry with an "Account" label ending with "groupPassword"
    • To find your login password: Locate a Shimo Keychain entry with the account label ending in "userPassword"
    • Click "Show password" and enter your macOS account password to reveal the password (note you may be prompted twice for it)
    Enter the details into VPN Tracker

    Choose "Configure" from the top right corner of your connection and put the details for your VPN connection in:

    • For VPN gateway address, enter the gateway hostname from the Keychain entry names ("vpn.example.com" in our example)
    • For the pre-shared key, enter the password from the Keychain labeled "groupPassword"
    • Enter your username and password
    • Start your connection and see if you're able to connect

    Choose your authentication options

    Information about certificates

    Please keep in mind that, as well as the public part of the certificate, you also need to export the private key.

    Important: Private keys cannot be imported into the Keychain alone and can only be imported together with the corresponding certificate. For this to occur, the certificate and private keys need to be in PKCS12 format. You can generate this format by entering the following command into the Terminal:

    openssl pkcs12 -export -in (example.com).user.crt -inkey (example.com).user.key -out (example.com).user.p12

    Following this, (example.com).user.p12 can be imported by a double click. When generating your keys, you will be asked to enter a password, as private keys in PKCS12 format are always encrypted. This can be a password of your choice but please be aware you will need to enter it again during the import.

    Troubleshooting

    What to do if you can't connect?

    You may need additional details that your VPN admin might have given you when you first set up your VPN connection. Check your emails (tip: try searching for the VPN gateway address).

    Are you using virtualization software, such as VMware, Parallels or VirtualBox? These software products create network interfaces for their internal networking needs, and sometimes the network addresses they choose happen to conflict with the remote network of a VPN connection. Even if you are not currently using this software (but have it installed or not completely uninstalled) their network interfaces exist and can cause conflicts.

    To find out which network interface is causing the conflict:

    1. Attempt to connect to your VPN (so the error message appears in the VPN Tracker log)
    2. Set the log level in VPN Tracker to “verbose”
    3. Look for a line that says
      Remote network ... conflicts with local network ... of interface ...

    This is the network interface that is causing the problem. On most Macs, “en0” will correspond to the Ethernet interface and “en1” to the AirPort interface. Any other enX interfaces are either from virtualization software, or from additional network hardware (e.g. USB network adapters/modems). Network interfaces whose names start with “vboxnet” generally belong to VirtualBox and network interfaces starting with “vmnet” to VMware.

    • If the network interface is a "real" interface, see this FAQ for more information.
    • If the interface is virtual, change the network address(es) used by the virtualization software. More information can be found in this FAQ.
    Just purchased a new Mac and want to wipe your old device? VPN Tracker 365 makes it easy to move all your existing connections over so you continue connecting seamlessly:
    1. Make sure your connections are stored in your Personal Safe or in TeamCloud (look for the safe or cloud icons in the Status tab)



    2. Sign out of VPN Tracker 365 on your old Mac (choose "VPN Tracker 365 > Sign out… " from the menu bar)
    3. Sign in to VPN Tracker 365 on your new Mac with your equinux ID and password

    Give your connections a test and once you're satisfied, you can go ahead and wipe your old Mac.
    Considering upgrading to a brand new MacBook Pro with M1 Pro or M1 Max? VPN Tracker 365 is fully compatible with the next generation of Macs - meaning you can continue working productively with your VPN on your new device.

    Don’t have a VPN Tracker 365 plan yet? Find an overview of all licensing options here.
    All VPN Tracker 365 plans are available with a yearly commitment.
    When activating the Personal Safe feature, VPN Tracker generates a Personal Safe key which is encrypted with your equinux ID password and securely stored on our servers. When creating your safe, you are given a Recovery Key, which you should store and keep in a safe place.

    If you change your equinux ID password later on, VPN Tracker can no longer decrypt your Personal Safe. You will need to re-enter your original password so VPN Tracker can re-encrypt your connections.

    If you have forgotten your original password, you have the option of entering your recovery key, instead of the original password.

    If you have forgotten both your original password and your recovery key, the only way to gain access to your Personal Safe is by resetting it on the server.

    Note: Please check your keychain (possibly also on an old computer or a backup) to see if your original password is possibly saved there.

    Important: Please be aware that, as a security measure, you will lose all of your stored connections if you perform a server reset. This FAQ instructs you how to perform a reset of your Personal Safe if required.

    For a list of compatible devices, please refer to this page.

    If you router is not in the list please refer to this FAQ and the VPN Tracker manual for help determining compatibility.

    Please note that the local router (i.e. the router at the location where your Mac with VPN Tracker is) in most cases does not have to be specifically compatible with VPN or VPN Tracker. Almost all routers work fine with VPN Tracker.

    A purchasing account is an account which is solely used for purchasing and distributing licesnes. This type of account cannot be used for the activation of software. Purchasing accounts are the only accounts which are not personalised and may in this form be managed by multiple people within one company.

    You can assign different roles to Team members, which give them access to certain features.

    Note: Roles are currently being rolled out – if you do not see the role dropdown option in your Team, please reach out and we can set your team up.

    You can assign the following roles:

    Manager Organizer Member Billing
    Purchase and manage subscriptions Yes - - Coming soon
    Invite and remove Team members Yes Yes - -
    Change roles Yes - - -
    Add, edit and remove TeamCloud connections Yes Yes - -
    Receive TeamCloud connections Yes Yes Yes -
    Download invoices Yes - - Yes
    Please note that you cannot use nslookup to test if VPN Tracker has set DNS correctly, as nslookup talks directly to DNS servers and doesn’t use the standard system APIs.

    To verify your VPN is pushing DNS settings correctly, run "scutil --dns" in the Terminal once your VPN connection is up. The first resolver in the list (#1) is the primary resolver your system will usually query first; only if it receives no reply, the other resolvers are queried in order, unless there is a resolver specific to the domain you want to resolve (e.g. to resolve test.example.net the resolver with the domain example.net would be queried first).

    There are three possible causes for this:

    1. equinux is constantly improving VPN Tracker 365 and as a result VPN Tracker has a high update frequency. Especially if you don’t use VPN Tracker on a daily basis, it’s not unlikely that we already released an update since the last time you were using VPN Tracker. Sometimes there are less than 24 hours between updates, especially with security fixes where it's critical they are released as soon as possible.
       
    2. If you were using an older VPN Tracker version, it may be required to install an intermediate update first before you are be able to install the most up-to-date version. In that case you may install an update and directly on next launch VPN Tracker may offer another update.
       
    3. You might have multiple copies of VPN Tracker installed on your system. For technical reasons updates to VPN Tracker 36517.0.6 and below have to be installed using the system installer and if multiple copies of VPN Tracker exist on your system, the installer may choose to update the wrong copy. To solve that problem:
       
        ‣ Place a copy of VPN Tracker into a dedicated folder (we recommend the Applications folder).
          ‣ Use Spotlight to find copies in other folders.
        (Hold down the CMD key in Spotlight to quickly see the location of a hit)
          ‣ Delete all copies that are not in the dedicated folder.
          ‣ Finally start VPN Tracker from the dedicated folder and re-apply the update.
         

       

    When you share a connection using TeamCloud, it is encrypted and then shared with members of your VPN Tracker Team.

    General Security Information
    • TeamCloud uses strong encryption to protect all data
    • The connection is encrypted using end-to-end encryption for each Team member individually
    • End-to-end encryption means that we can never access your encrypted connection

    Here's a brief overview of how the following security settings are handled by TeamCloud:

    Pre-Shared Key
    • Pre-shared keys for a connection are automatically included, so your team members can connect right away
    • The pre-shared key will not be added to a team member's Keychain, so they cannot access it
    XAUTH
    • Your username and password are not shared with your team, they are removed before the connection is shared
    • Each Team member can enter their own username and password
    • These can be stored inside their Keychain and additionally will be added as user-specific credentials to TeamCloud (only available to that team member)
    Security
    • Remote Connection Wipe: By removing a team member from your Team, their access to TeamCloud is also immediately revoked. Any connections they have on their Macs will be removed automatically.
    • Don't allow settings to be changed prevents users that aren't Team managers or owners from editing a connection
    VPN Shortcuts
    • VPN Shortcuts can be shared to TeamCloud directly

    If you have any feedback regarding these settings, please get in touch and let us know your requirements.

    Renewals can be canceled up until 10 days before their renewal date. The cancelation will take effect on the next possible renewal date. You can continue to use the software until the end of your term, at which point your subscription will end.



    If you're running FortiOS 3, please make sure you are running at least MR6 patch 2. Previous firmware releases have an issue that will cause the device to respond incorrectly to VPN Tracker's attempts to use XAUTH in combination with an Aggressive Mode based connection.

    By default Zyxel creates firewall policies to allow traffic to flow from SSL VPN to LAN zone and from LAN to SSL VPN zone. Those rules are required to allow VPN traffic flow once the connection has been established. But there is no policy that actually allows VPN management traffic at the WAN port, client requests arriving at the WAN port are discarded by the firewall.

    To allow an OpenVPN connection on the WAN port, you first have to create an own policy. In the main navigation, select Security Policy > Policy Control, click on the + Add button and create a policy that allows traffic for the service SSLVPN to flow from WAN to ZyWALL. Please see screenshot below.

    When you choose your VPN device in VPN Tracker, you'll see the configuration options and features supported by that VPN gateway when we tested it.

    If you would like to choose other values, you can switch to a generic profile to reveal all the options VPN Tracker supports.
    Note: By doing so you will be able to select options that your VPN gateway may not support, so be sure to carefully check the settings match your VPN gateway's configuration.

    To see all options:

    • Go to Configure > Basic
    • Click on the currently selected Profile under "Connection based on"
    • Choose "IPsec/L2TP/OpenVPN/SSL/PPTP"
    • Choose your VPN protocol from the list and click Apply
    • Choose "Don't overwrite" to preserve the default settings for your device





    You'll now be able to choose all options supported by VPN Tracker 365 for your VPN protocol.

    SonicWalls distribute IP addresses using the DHCP protocol. Once the VPN tunnel itself has already been established, the VPN client must perform a DHCP exchange to obtain an IP address and use this IP address for all traffic sent over the VPN tunnel. There are two reasons why this can fail:

    1. The SonicWall never received your DHCP request (DHCP-Discover). That would be the case if there is an issue with the VPN tunnel itself not working properly.

      Try these:
      • Re-run the VPN Tracker Connection Checker from the "Tools" menu. Then try connecting the VPN again. This will let VPN Tracker automatically detect the best settings for your internet connection.
         
      • Make sure that you have no software installed that blocks VPN traffic in general. Please see this FAQ entry for more details.
         
    2. The SonicWall doesn’t want to reply to your DHCP request. The DHCP protocol is designed in such a way that there can be multiple DHCP servers per network and only those who think they can fulfill a request will also respond to it, all others will stay silent (there is no “negative” response for discover requests).

      Try these:
      • Try rebooting the SonicWall. SonicWalls are pretty stable but we’ve seen it a couple of times that the DHCP server is acting strange, as if all IP addresses are reserved, yet that’s not what you will see in the web interface. Rebooting will fix that behavior at once.
         
      • Make sure you have sufficient addresses left in the address pool. If the pool is too small and all addresses are in use or reserved, it is expected behavior that the SonicWall doesn’t respond.
         
    Managing your VPN Tracker account is easy!
    • Go to my.vpntracker.com and sign in with your equinux ID and password.
    • Under "My Subscriptions" in the sidebar menu, you'll see a list of your current VPN Tracker 365 plans.
    • Activate automatic renewals to ensure your license is renewed at your current rate.
    • Alternatively, you can let your current license expire and then purchase a new plan at the new customers rate from our online store.
    We generally recommend leaving auto-renewal enabled to prevent any disruption to your VPN service: Our system always sends a reminder before your plan will auto-renew to give you plenty of time to deactivate auto-renewal if it's no longer required.
    Just visit my.vpntracker.com to adjust your renewal options. Please note that you may lose pricing benefits ("grandfathered pricing") if you choose to deactivate auto-renewals.

    No, you currently cannot undo remote connection wipe. However, you can reinstate a team member. Remember, you will need to redistribute your team’s VPN connections to the new user before they will be able to connect.

    Please try this:

    Open the Terminal app (from Applications → Utilities → Terminal) and paste in this command:

    sudo launchctl enable system/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent

    Confirm it with your password (note you won't see the password being typed).

    The problem should be resolved.

    SonicWALL listed a known issue in the release notes of 6.5.4.13:

    An established IPSEC VPN tunnel intermittently fails in a NAT environment. (GEN6-2296)

    Please contact Sonicwall for more information on when Sonicwall plans to fix this issue.
    As the best VPN client for Mac, iPhone and iPad, VPN Tracker makes it really straightforward for you to set up an OpenVPN connection on your device. Thanks to support for .ovpn files, you can conveniently upload your device's unique OpenVPN settings into VPN Tracker and be up and running with your OpenVPN connection in no time.

    For more detailed instructions, check out the OpenVPN setup guide.
    Viruses that infect existing applications are very rare on macOS, but they do exist. However, warnings that VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 are infected are very likely false-positives, meaning the tool has incorrectly identified malware in these apps that is actually not there.

    Parallels

    Go to "Preferences" > "Network" in Parallels and change the DHCP ranges for Shared and/or Host-Only Networking so they no longer conflict with your VPN's remote network.

    VMware Fusion

    A PDF with instructions can be downloaded from the VMware community forums:

    We'll send you an email with all of the details two weeks before your plan is due for renewal. When your plan renews, your preferred payment method will be be billed and we'll send you an email with your invoice.

    Your VPN Tracker 365 app will just continue working as before and any plans that are assigned to team-members will remain assigned as well. Simple, automatic, secure.
    VPN Tracker offers complete support for OpenVPN connections, as well as IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), PPTP, L2TP, SSL (including SonicWALL, Cisco AnyConnect & Fortinet), SSTP (Windows) and WireGuard® (Beta - learn more).

    To find out how to set up an OpenVPN connection on your Mac, iPhone or iPad, please refer to our OpenVPN configuration guide.

    WireGuard is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.

    A VPN Tracker license does not permit the simultaneous use on multiple computers. In this case each computer that is connecting simultaneously will need a unique license. For this we offer the convenient Team store, which allows convenient purchasing for multiple people. Go to Team Store
    VPN Tracker is a modern VPN solution with support for the latest macOS versions, including macOS 15 Sequoia. As a Universal app, VPN Tracker for Mac is also optimized for new Macs with Apple's M1 + M2 Chips.

    Start your free VPN Tracker trial today.

    Learn more about VPN Tracker as an alternative to Shimo
    Yes! When you upgrade to VPN Tracker 365, all of your previous settings and connections will be automatically migrated after you install VPN Tracker 365.
    VPN Tracker is now available on iPhone and iPad! Use brand new VPN Tracker for iOS to securely connect to your SonicWALL SSL VPN on the go on your iPhone or iPad.

    Get early access here.'>Discover VPN Tracker for iOS.
    There are three main ways to take a screenshot on your Mac:
    • Press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "4" then click and drag the mouse cursor to capture a specific area of your screen.
    • Press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "4" and then the space bar to capture a specific window or element on your screen.
    • Alternatively, press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "3" to capture your full screen.
    For detailed information and list of compatible WatchGuard devices, please refer to this page.
    Guides for this router can be found in our Configuration Guides.
    Here is a list of products that are compatible with VPN Tracker:
    Please try this:
    • Open the Terminal app (from Applications → Utilities → Terminal)
    • Paste in this command: sudo rm -f /var/run/vpncontrol.sock
    • Confirm it with your password
    • Then reboot your Mac

    Then try connecting again. The problem caused by the underlying networking components should be resolved.

    VPN Tracker World Connect is an independent product you can use in the VPN Tracker 365 app.
    You can purchase your World Connect Pass independently of an active VPN Tracker 365 plan.

    Haven’t tried the demo yet? Download the VPN Tracker 365 app for free from our website and start your trial.

    There is a known bug in the Watchguard firmware that is causing a lot of trouble. Currently, we still do not know why VPN Tracker is triggering this bug, as the Windows client seems to not trigger it. We talked with Watchguard, but even they could not tell us what we are doing wrong. Basically the tunnel dies internally in the Watchguard (it's still shown as open and established, but traffic arriving over this tunnel is rejected as if the tunnel was closed).

    If you are using a Branch Office VPN at the moment, try switching to a MUVPN if possible. MUVPN works with VPN Tracker as well and usually yields for better results.

    Please refer to the following description.

    The following article describes where VPN Tracker stores its data in case you need to make manual backups instead of using Time Machine.

    VPN Tracker stores all its data files in the standard system locations as recommended by Apple. Depending on the fact if these are system-wide or per-user files, they are either found in /Library (system-wide) or ~/Library (per-user), where ~ is a placeholder meaning "home of the current active user".

    To access the system-wide library folder:

    • In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..."
    • Enter /Library

    To access the user library folder:

    • In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..."
    • Enter ~/Library

    VPN shortcuts, all information related to your equinux ID, accounting data, scanner results, and window positions are per-user settings.

    For a full backup of all your settings, you need to backup the following files and folders:

    • /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
    • /Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
    • ~/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
    • ~/Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist

    Backup your keychain
    Please note that passwords in VPN Tracker are usually not stored in any of the locations named above but in your keychain. If you have no external backup of all your passwords, be sure to also backup your keychains which can be found in ~/Library/Keychains

    License management for Resellers is performed as follows:
    1. Go to my.vpntracker.com and log in with your reseller ID
    2. Navigate to the Reseller section in the left hand menu, here you will see all of your orders and the plans you purchased with each order.
    3. Next to the license(s) you want to Transfer to a customer select "Transfer all..."
      Please note, this button will only appear if the license is available for transfer.
    4. Enter the email address of the customer you are transferring the licenses to and press "Transfer".


    Visit my.vpntracker.com, log in to your account, and go to "Subscriptions" to update your payment method.

    Go to your current subscription and click on "Edit" to change the payment method. Click "Choose another way to pay" to add a new credit card or alternatively, add a PayPal account. This will be used as your new default payment method for your plan.

    Symptom


    When using Personal Safe, a data conflict may arise. E.g. if a connection is altered on machine A and also updated in the safe, and then the same connection is altered on machine B before it had a chance to update the connection from the safe, VPN Tracker has a problem: The connection now exists in two different versions, the version in the safe and the local one.

    Solution


    We decided that at all times, there can only be one “truth”, and as VPN Tracker is not able to tell who’s speaking the truth, it will show a conflict state and ask the user to please resolve it. Three options are available.
    1. Do nothing; the conflict will persist until resolved.
    2. The safe is right; the version from the safe is downloaded.
    3. VPN Tracker is right; the version of VPN Tracker is written to the safe.

    Reasoning


    The reasoning behind that is in fact very simple. You can change option A of a connection without breaking it and that change may also be meaningful. You can also change option A of a connection without breaking it and that change may be meaningful, too. However, changing both of these option may not be meaningful at all, these options may now even contradict with each other and that can easily break the connection. That’s why we decided to never merge individual changes into a single one.
    Although SonicWALL’s Mobile Connect and NetExtender offer great VPN user experience, they are designed to work only with SonicWALL devices. VPN Tracker 365 gives you an opportunity to create and use multiple VPN connections alongside SonicWALL SSL VPN. You can choose from more than 300 gateways of well-known brands, working with the major protocols - OpenVPN, IPSec, L2TP and PPTP.
    If VPN Tracker 365 is in your Downloads folder, your Mac treats it with additional security and may not let it auto-update. In this case, you may receive the following message:

    "VPN Tracker can’t be updated when it’s running from a read-only volume like a disk image or an optical drive. Move VPN Tracker to the Applications folder using Finder, relaunch it from there, and try again."

    To resolve this issue, please download a fresh copy of VPN Tracker 365 directly from our website and then drag the app to your Applications folder.

    SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning requires VPN Tracker to send an initial data packet to the VPN gateway that is so large that it may be split ("fragmented") into two IP packets. Some routers are known to not let these packets pass.

    If a router between VPN Tracker and the SonicWALL is affected by this problem, you (or your SonicWALL's admin) will notice no connection attempt arriving at the SonicWALL when Simple Client Provisioning is turned on (i.e. there will be nothing in the SonicWALL's log, and a packet trace will show no packets from VPN Tracker), but everything will work fine with DHCP over IPsec.

    Routers known to have these problems:

    • AirPort Extreme with firmware versions prior to 7.3.1, works when upgraded to 7.3.1
    In macOS Catalina, a message may be displayed warning you about a Legacy System Extension. This message can be disregarded:

    Since macOS Big Sur, VPN Tracker uses a new System Extension that uses the very latest system APIs and is fully supported by newer macOS versions.

    Due to bugs with the way macOS Catalina loads newer System Extensions, VPN Tracker for Mac will continue to use the legacy System Extension under this and older macOS versions.

    Rest assured that when you choose to upgrade to the latest macOS version, VPN Tracker for Mac is ready with support for the new release.
    Yes! Pre-configuring VPN Shortcuts to share with your team is a productive way to ensure everyone can get connected to crucial internal services such as...
    • Network shares
    • Databases
    • Email accounts & calendars
    • Company intranet
    • Remote Desktop
    ...whilst working via VPN.

    How to share VPN Shortcuts with your team via TeamCloud
    TeamCloud enables you to instantly share pre-configured Shortcuts and VPN connections with your team members: Simply choose a custom Shortcuts collection and click "Share with Team" in the top right corner.

    You can then select your team, review your choice and click to share with everyone:



    Once a Shortcuts collection has been shared, it will be available for all of your team to access with no further action required.

    How to export VPN Shortcuts as a .zip file
    Alternatively, you can also opt to export VPN Shortcuts as a .zip file which users can manually import into VPN Tracker 365.

    Go to the VPN connection where your Shortcuts are configured and click "Configure" to open the configuration settings.

    At the bottom of this window, go to "Export Settings" here you will see a range of different settings for your connection export. Go to "VPN Shortcuts" and check the box next to the Shortcuts Collection you wish to share:



    Close the settings window, then click "Export". Select an export location and enter an import password for better security. Once you're ready, click "Export" to create a .zip file of the connection which you can send to your team members:



    Once a team member receives the file, they can double click it to open the connection in the VPN Tracker 365 app on their Mac, then enter your chosen import password. Following this, the VPN connection, along with all the Shortcuts you configured, will be ready to use straight away.
    First, log in to VPN Tracker with your equinux account. If VPN Tracker still asks you to buy the software, then:

    ‣ Go to "VPN Tracker" > "Refresh My Account"


    Then, try to activate your VPN Tracker again.
    VPN Tracker uses public key pinning for maximum data protection of your Personal Safe. As a consequence only the original certificate as sent by our servers is accepted by VPN Tracker.
    Some firewalls interfere in the exchange of TLS traffic.
    If that cert is replaced by a firewall or an anti-virus software in an attempt to decrypt the TLS traffic, then the replacement cert is negleceted by the system, even if it otherwise correctly validates.

    If you login on a Mac and you do not see your connections update from your Personal Safe, then check
    - if your firewall or anti-virus software is interfering the the TLS traffic to your Mac.
    - ask your administrator if there is any TLS traffic interfering
    To share a connection using TeamCloud
    A note on new users

    The person receiving the connection needs to be a member of your VPN Tracker team and has to have set up their TeamCloud encryption keys.
    This happens automatically when they open VPN Tracker and other Team members are online. If another team member is not available, their TeamCloud setup can also be confirmed by a Team manager under my.vpntracker.com.

    VPN Tracker is generally compatible with Dortania's OCLP project. However, some users report that you have to set the "AMFI" setting to "disable" in order for VPN Tracker to start correctly:
    • Get the latest version of the OCLP:
      OpenCore Legacy Patcher Releases
       
    • Start and click Settings:
    • Check "Disable AMFI":
    • Then select "Post-Install Root Patch" in the main menu and restart the device.
    The downside of disabling AMFI is that some 3rd party applications may no longer be able to access the system camera or microphone. Should you experience such an issue, you can re-enable AMFI after you've started VPN Tracker once and VPN Tracker will continue to work. The AMFI fix seems permanent; at least until you update macOS, in which case you may have to repeat those steps.
    VPN Tracker offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for VPN connections on the Ubiquiti EdgeRouter.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure L2TP VPN connection to a Ubiquiti EdgeRouter on your Mac in VPN Tracker.

    To combine multiple VPN Tracker 365 plans into one so they have the same expiration date, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to your account at my.vpntracker.com and select your team from the sidebar menu
    • Under Subscriptions, you can see an overview of your existing plans
    • At the top of the page you will see a "Merge Subscriptions" button. Press this.
    • Select the plans you would like to combine by clicking on the checkbox on the left side next to each plan
    • Once you have selected all plans, click Combine Subscriptions at the bottom of the window




    On the next page, you can preview the plans which will be merged and also have the option of upgrading to a different license type or adding new licenses, if needed.

    On the right, you will see your new plan. Your new plan will start from today’s date and will run for one year. Your existing licenses will also be renewed.



    The Yearly total is the total price for one year. The Prorating Discount is the remaining value of your existing licenses which gets deducted from the yearly total to make the Amount due now. Check the Terms and Conditions and click Pay now to finalise your changes.

    VPN Tracker supports X.509 certificates (RSA Signatures) and smart cards using X.509 certificates (PKI tokens) for authentication.

    For more information, see the VPN Tracker manual.

    VPN Tracker itself has little to no influence on your throughput speed. It will process data as fast as your system wants to send it out and it will process incoming data as fast as it comes in. The delay the actual data processing adds to the round-trip time is far below 0.1 ms, which is never noticeable.

    In most cases, the factor limiting your connection speed is actually the VPN gateway you are connecting to, as this must handle all VPN connections of all VPN users at the same time as performing other tasks (e.g. keeping the whole network behind the gateway with all its hosts connected to the Internet.)

    How to proceed


    Please verify that the remote side doesn't have any speed issues and then try to reboot your VPN gateway.

    If rebooting didn't help and someone at the remote side can confirm that their internet speed is working as normal, please consider the following two questions:

    1. Are you the only VPN user?
    2. What kind of service/protocol are you using over the VPN? (web, mail, file access, etc.)

    Both of these factors could also be affecting your connection speed.
    You need an active VPN Tracker 365 plan to connect to your VPN. If your plan expires, you can see your connections, but you will need to renew to continue using your VPN connections.
    A VPN (virtual private network) is a communication method between two parties in the internet over a so called VPN tunnel.

    The VPN Tracker Software is a VPN tool, which can be used to create a VPN connection on Apple Mac computers.

    What's the point of a VPN?


    When you are travelling away from home or your office, for example the coffee shop around the corner or you're working from home, a VPN gives you the option to create a secure connection to a private or company network. This gives you access to Servers, Cameras or other services which are usually only accessible in your local network. We call this VPN Tracker Company Connect. With VPN Tracker Company Connect you can move about your company's network as if you are sitting at the desk in your office, no matter if you are in a different country, or visiting a customer a few miles away.

    Secure data


    VPN connections can also be used to generally secure a data connection (for example in a public WIFI network) or to simulate a connection from a different country. We call this VPN Tracker World Connect.

    How do you establish a VPN connection?


    In order to establish a VPN connection, you need a VPN software, also called VPN tool or VPN client. VPN Tracker is the leading VPN software for Apple computers. The VPN Software allows you to configure and establish a VPN connection to the remote network.
    The possibility of grandfathering pricing is exclusively available for customers using the automatic renewal option. In cases where your plan cannot be renewed due to a problem with the payment method (i.e. expired, lost or stolen), the plan will be canceled after a few tries. You are then free to re-obtain your plan at any time you wish for the then current price tier.

    In order to profit from your existing price, please ensure you update your payment method prior to the renewal date.
    If you have a company Mac that has been set up with Mobile Device Management (MDM) software, your IT administrator may have blocked installing System Extensions.

    (VPN Tracker 365 uses a System Extension to create a secure VPN tunnel and manage network traffic)

    Please ask your IT administrator to add the following Kernel and System Extensions to your list of permitted Extensions:

    Team IDs:
    CPXNXN488S
    MJMRT6WJ8S

    Kernel Extensions:
    com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    com.equinux.vpntracker365

    System Extension:
    com.vpntracker.365mac.SysExt

    Please see Apple's Support Document for more details.
    A VPN (virtual private network) is a communication method between two parties in the internet over a so called VPN tunnel.

    The VPN Tracker Software is a VPN tool, which can be used to create a VPN connection on Apple Mac computers.

    What's the point of a VPN?

    When you are travelling away from home or your office, for example the coffee shop around the corner or you're working from home, a VPN gives you the option to create a secure connection to a private or company network. This gives you access to Servers, Cameras or other services which are usually only accessible in your local network. We call this VPN Tracker Company Connect. With VPN Tracker Company Connect you can move about your company's network as if you are sitting at the desk in your office, no matter if you are in a different country, or visiting a customer a few miles away.

    Secure data

    VPN connections can also be used to generally secure a data connection (for example in a public WIFI) or to simulate a connection from a different country. We call this VPN Tracker World Connect.

    How do you establish a VPN connection?

    In order to establish a VPN connection, you need a VPN software, also called VPN tool or VPN client. VPN Tracker is the leading VPN software for Apple computers. The VPN Software allows you to configure and establish a VPN connection to the remote network.
    ‣ Download the app.
    ‣ Go to your downloads folder and find the app.
    ‣ Drag the app that you downloaded and drop it into the Applications folder.


    For the configuration of a VPN connection under Mac OS X, you will need the following:
    1. VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    2. An internet connection
    3. A VPN Router/Gateway


    Create a new connection


    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:

    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"


    Choose your VPN Router


    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile."
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.

    Your configuration guide


    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:



    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop


    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.
    VPN Tracker is available for iOS! Use the brand new VPN Tracker for iOS to securely connect to your Cisco AnyConnect SSL VPN on the go on your iPhone or iPad.

    Discover VPN Tracker for iOS now.

    With VPN Tracker 365 you can create a team under https://my.vpntracker.com and assign each team member a VPN Tracker 365 Plan.
    This will not give each team member access to your equinux ID. The team members will only see their assigned plan in their own equinux ID after logging in to https://my.vpntracker.com. You will stay the only admin of your equinux ID.

    VPN Tracker supports two-factor authentication (2FA) for your equinux ID account, as well as for your VPN connection login.

    2FA for your equinux ID
    You can configure 2FA for your equinux ID to add additional security for your VPN connections. Learn more…

    2FA for your VPN connections
    VPN Tracker offers support for two-factor authentication (2FA) for certain VPN setups. Depending on your VPN gateway and protocol, you may be able to use 2FA based on OTP codes, X.509 certificates, smart cards or PKI tokens, as well as authenticator tokens such as RSA SecurID, CryptoCard, FortiToken etc.

    When you connect to your VPN, VPN Tracker will automatically ask you for your 2-factor code after signing in with your user credentials.
    Downloaded VPN Tracker 365 and want to start setting up your account? You can follow these simple steps to verify your email address and get started with the app:

    1. After you've downloaded and opened VPN Tracker 365, click on Sign in > Create Account



    2. Enter the credentials for your new account (Name, Email, Password) in the space provided.
    3. Next you'll receive an email to the address you used to sign up with:



    4. Click on the link in the email to verify your address. If you can't find the email in your main inbox, make sure to check your spam folder.
    5. Once your address has been verified, you will be able to purchase a VPN Tracker 365 plan and set up your own connections.

    TIP: Add newsletter@equinux.com to your address book to make sure you never miss a message from the VPN Tracker 365 team.
    Using your iPhone's personal hotspot
    Unfortunately, as of iOS 10 or later, iPhone personal hotspots no longer support PPTP VPN connections.

    Can I use an Android phone instead?
    The restriction on PPTP over personal hotspot also applies to many Android phones, though it may vary by manufacturer and OS version. If you have an older Android device around, it might be worth testing with that first (we recommend holding off on any updates, that might disable PPTP support).

    Other options
    As an alternative, you may be able to use a personal WiFi hotspot device ("MiFi"), provided it supports PPTP passthrough. Check your device's specs for "VPN passthrough" or "PPTP passthrough".

    As VPN Tracker has low-level access to your system, it is digitally signed and checks that the app has not been altered in any way every time you launch it. If VPN Tracker it looks as though changes have been made to the VPN Tracker app, you'll see that message.

    What can cause this issue?

    Unfortunately other applications (e.g. Uninstaller/Deinstaller, Clean-Up Tools, and so on), that can cause this problem.

    Should you repeatedly run into that issue, please send us a copy of your VPN Tracker app. Locate VPN Tracker on your harddrive, copy it to your Desktop and create a zip file (CTRL-/right click VPN Tracker, then choose "Compress VPN Tracker"). By comparing the broken copy we can find out what has been changed and offer advice how to prevent it from happening again.

    There are a couple of restrictions in the demo version of VPN Tracker 365. Please keep in mind the following:

    • A demo license is only valid for 30 days.
    • A demo license allows you to use all the Pro Edition features except the export feature.
    • A demo license restricts tunnel traffic up to 500 kb in either direction.
    • Once the 500 kb limit has been reached, a demo license allows you to stay connected for another 3 minutes.

    You can recognize a Personal Safe error by the yellow warning triangle next to a connection

    This means that the local saved version of the connection does not match the version in the cloud. To resolve the conflict, click on the connection in the left menu and open the tab "Personal Safe"
    Click on the button "Fix sync issue".
    A dialogue will open. You have the option to choose which version of the connection you would like to keep. The local version, or the cloud version.

    To keep the local version, please choose: "Upload and overwrite cloud version"
    To keep the Cloud version please choose: "Download and overwrite local version"
    For performance reasons, we would recommend IPsec. L2TP only adds more overhead to the protocol stack for no real benefit.

    In network environments where IPsec won't work, L2TP over IPsec won't work either.
    VPN Tracker offers support for SSTP (secure socket tunneling protocol)! SSTP support is available in all VPN Tracker plans for Mac, iPhone and iPad. Get the latest version here.
    With TLS-Crypt the data is encrypted twice. Once with the connection key, which is renegotiated every connection, and once with a static key, which is part of the config and therefore never changes. In order to better secure this static key, with TLS-Crypt the packets contain an additional timestamp that is otherwise not needed and this causes the problem.

    We therefore recommend turning off TLS crypt on the server. TLS crypt is activated by the following entry in the server config: "tls-crypt ta.key".

    If you remove this, nothing changes except that TLS crypt is no longer used and must also be switched off in VPN Tracker. This still gives you an encrypted connection, it's just no longer double encrypted, but simply encrypted once.

    This makes the connection even faster and not more insecure. TLS-Crypt only serves to make it impossible for attackers to find an OpenVPN server on the network and, if necessary, to paralyze it via a DoS attack, because if the first packet is not correctly encrypted, the server will not respond to the packet at all.

    Without a TLS crypt it would respond and only the negotiation of the key would then fail, but then an attacker would know that an OpenVPN server is running there and could bombard it with requests until it collapses, since it is responsible for every request computing time has to be spent.

    Remote Connection Wipe offers additional security by removing information about your VPN infrastructure. You may also want to use Remote Connection Wipe for compliance purposes or when working with external contractors.

    Remote Connection Wipe also has the added benefit of working with any VPN connection, even those that don’t offer user authentication. This lets you to block VPN access for an individual user without having to distribute a new connection to your entire team.

    An L2TP connection is basically a PPP tunnel over an IPSec connection and the PPP protocol is so old that it predates the existence of subnet masks. When the PPP server at the remote end assigns you an IP address, PPP infers the subnet mask from the assigned IP address:

    If the IP address starts with 192.168. the inferred mask is /24,
    if the IP address starts with 172.16. to 172.31. the inferred mask is /16
    if the IP address starts with 10. the inferred mask is /8.

    Those where the old network classes and this is the official standardized behavior for the PPP protocol. For more information, please see https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classful_network#Classful_addressing_definition

    If you don't like the entire 10.0.0.0/8 network to be routed over VPN, you need to ensure that VPN clients get an IP address from a different address range, for example an address from a 192.168.x.0 network (preferable with x not 0 or 1 as that will often collide with networks users have at home).

    Any additional remote networks you can enter in VPN Tracker are optional and they are "additional" to the network you will gain access anyway derived from the assigned IP address which quite often is the only network required (in which case additional networks can be left blank).

    A plain IPSec connection without PPP tunneling will not have this issue as IPSec is aware of subnet masks but when used for L2TP, IPSec only encrypts the PPP traffic whereas PPP handles the traffic routing.
    To upgrade an existing VPN Tracker license, please log in to your my.vpntracker portal and carry out the following steps...

    • Choose your team or your account in the sidebar menu and click on Subscriptions
    • Choose the plan you wish to upgrade and click on Upgrade edition



    You will then be taken to the checkout page. Here you can choose which edition to upgrade to. On the right hand side under New plan, select a product from the dropdown list (i.e. VPN Tracker VIP) to calculate your upgrade price.

    You can now review your new plan before purchasing. The Prorating Discount is the remaining value of your existing license(s) which is deducted from the yearly total to result in the Amount due now.


    If you are an existing VPN Tracker customer and want to upgrade to VPN Tracker 365, you can simply install VPN Tracker 365 and your connections will automatically be imported:

    Download VPN Tracker 365

    Once you have VPN Tracker 365, you can purchase a VPN Tracker 365 plan.

    VPN Tracker 365 TeamCloud has been designed from the ground up to offer highly secure cloud storage for your team's VPN connections.

    TeamCloud - Key Security Architecture


    • Built using end-to-end encryption - our servers have no access to your connection data
    • Securely encrypted with user-specific encryption keys for additional security
    • Encryption runs locally in your browser

    Managing connections on the web


    my.vpntracker uses sophisticated WebAssembly technology to securely decrypt and encrypt your sensitive connection details locally within your browser - without sending any unencrypted data through the VPN Tracker servers.

    This allows Team Managers to edit connection files and add additional Team Members to TeamCloud on the web, without needing a Mac or VPN Tracker 365 running locally.

    VPN Tracker is now available on iPhone and iPad!

    Connect to your VPN on the go on your iPhone or iPad using the new VPN Tracker for iOS app.

    • Multiprotocol VPN support
    • High speed connections
    • Zero-config VPN - thanks to TeamCloud & Personal Safe technology

    Test VPN Tracker for iPhone and iPad.
    For the simultaneous use on two computers, you will need two licenses of VPN Tracker. A VPN Tracker license does not permit the simultaneous use on multiple computers. In this case each computer that is connecting simultaneously will need a unique license.

    For this we offer the convenient Team store, which allows convenient purchasing multiple licenses. Go to Team Store

    If you're not able to access your team's VPN connection via TeamCloud, please check the following:

    • Make sure you have the latest version of VPN Tracker 365.
    • You'll need to be a member of your company's VPN Tracker Team – contact your IT person if you haven't been added.
    • If you have just been added to your Team, your Team manager will need to launch VPN Tracker or go to my.vpntracker.com to complete your TeamCloud setup.
    • If you see some, but not all of your Team's TeamCloud connections, you may need to upgrade your license to access them all.

    If your question isn't answered above, please get in touch.

    Sure! Just send us a quick message and we'll be happy to adjust your plans for you.

    One of our customers has kindly provided instructions on how to integrate Cisco EasyVPN and VPN Tracker with a DMVPN setup:

    EasyVPN Server and DMVPN Hub on 1 Cisco router tutorial

    Using VPN Tracker 5 with a Cisco Easy VPN Server

    If you are still receiving an unknown download error after clicking "Retry", please try the following steps:
    1. Check if you can reach my.vpntracker.com
    2. If you can access my.vpntracker, try quitting and relaunching the app
    3. If that doesn't help, try again a bit later
    4. If it's still not working after a cup of coffee - reach out
    The Team Management feature is an important security measure put in place to keep your VPN Tracker account safely protected from threat. As the information stored in your VPN Tracker account is highly sensitive, we strongly urge all VPN Tracker admins with licenses for multiple users to set this feature up.

    Here are some of the main security advantages from setting up Team Management:
    • Roll out VPN connections via TeamCloud
    • You can see who has access to your VPN and identify any users who should not have access to the connection.
    • You do not have to share your admin account with any other users.
    • You can easily revoke licenses from team members who pose a potential security risk (i.e. ex employees.)
    • Without Team Management, any of your other VPN Tracker users have the ability to sign in to your admin account and gain access to critical features, including assigning or revoking plans.

    To set up Team Management, please visit my.vpntracker.com

    To learn more, please refer to our Team Management Guide.
    To activate automatic renewal for your VPN Tracker plan, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to you your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • Go to "My Subscriptions" in the sidebar, where you will see your current active plan(s)
    • To activate automatic renewal, flip the switch from grey to green
    • After activating auto renewal, you will receive an email confirming the activation.



    VPN Tracker supports industry standard OpenVPN, IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), L2TP, PPTP, SSL, SSTP, and WireGuard® protocols. This means that it will work with almost all devices supporting these types of VPN connections.

    A list of tested devices is available on our website

    What if my device is not on this list?

    There are hundreds of VPN devices available on the market, and we'd love to offer device profiles for all of them. Unfortunately, it is impossible to test all devices. If your gateway is not in the list, it will probably still work with VPN Tracker.

    Tip: Try out one of our custom protocol profiles to test your VPN connection free in VPN Tracker on Mac, iPhone or iPad.

    To add additional licenses for your team, please follow these steps:

    • Log in to your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • In the Team overview, go to "Licenses". Here you can see all your existing plans
    • Then, click on “Add plans”
    • On the following page enter the number of licenses you would like to add and select the edition. Then click on "Add to plan"
    • Under Checkout you will see your new plan. Your new plan will start from today’s date and will run for one year.
    • The "Yearly total" is the total price for one year
    • If applicable (i.e. if you have merged your plans), the "Prorating Discount" is the remaining value of your existing licenses which gets deducted from the yearly total to make the "Amount due now".
    • Check the Terms and Conditions and click "Pay now"
    • You can now assign your licenses to your team members

    When an IKE server receives a connection request, and there's more than one IKE VPN tunnel configured on that server, the problem arises that the server needs to decide which tunnel this request is targeting and quite often it must base that decision only on the information available in the very fast packet. Knowing the correct tunnel is important as the tunnel configuration defines the cryptographic parameters as well as which pre-shared key or certificates to use. Which information will be available in the very first packet depends on the chosen exchange mode.

    In Main Mode the first packet contains a list of encryption algorithms, hash algorithms, DH groups, the desired kind of authentication (pre-shared key or certificates, but neither the key itself nor any certificates, both are validated at a later time), as well as information whether XAUTH must be performed, may optionally be performed or must not be performed. Further it can see the IP address of the sender from the network packet as well as the IP address to which this packet was sent to (as a gateway may have more than one address). It now needs to decide upon a tunnel only based on this information. Since Main Mode is typically used for static gateway-to-gateway connections and gateways typically have either a fixed IP address or at least a fixed (possibly "dynamic") DNS name, most servers base their decision only on the sender IP address. In case a VPN gateways also allows mobil users to connect using Main Mode, it will either only allow one such connection (this is a fallback connection, that will always be used when the sender IP address doesn't match any other configured Main Mode tunnel) or it allows more than one in which case it will try to guess the right one solely by the connection settings offered in the first packet. If these settings match more than one tunnel, any of these may win, which can easily cause the wrong tunnel to be targeted.

    In Aggressive Mode the same information is available but additional to that the local identifier (type and value) is sent in the first packet. As this identifier can be chosen freely and as it's also easy to make it unique for every tunnel, most gateways will base their decision solely on this identifier in Aggressive Mode. So it's fundamental easier to operate multiple user VPN connections using aggressive mode. All that is required is configuring a unique remote identifier for each of them and then using this remote identifier as local identifier in the client (what is remote for the gateway is local for the client and the other way round).
    Plans that are set to auto-renew may keep pricing benefits ("grandfathered pricing").

    By deactivating the auto-renewal option, you will automatically lose any of your existing price benefits (i.e. promotions or introductory offers.) This action cannot be reversed. Should you then wish to renew your plan at a later point, you will be billed at the regular plan price.

    Please be aware that your plan will also end if your payment method cannot be charged at the time of renewal (i.e. expired, lost or stolen). If you need to update your payment method, you can do so at any time in your my.maildesigner365 or my.vpntracker account.

    We use analytics to help us improve the app and your overall VPN experience. All measurements are completely anonymous and we never evaluate any personal information or any data going through your connection.

    What is measured

    • Generic connection settings (e.g. what type of connection it is, which options are being used etc.)
    • Which features are used (e.g. is auto-connect enabled, are any actions configured etc.)
    • How many connections you have

    Your data, your privacy

    • Your specific network settings or credentials are never read, captured or transmitted
    • Your VPN traffic is never analyzed, captured or accessible

    You’re in control

    If you’d prefer not to share any anonymous usage information with equinux, you can deactivate this option at any time in VPN Tracker’s preferences by unchecking 'Share diagnostics data'.

    No. VPN Tracker licenses are personal and not transferable to others. Each colleague needs his own license. For this we offer the convenient Team store, which allows convenient purchasing for multiple people. Go to Team Store
    Some banks may have trouble processing credit card renewals which can cause your card to be denied.

    Generally, this can be resolved by a quick phone call to your bank. This should be your first port of call.

    Alternatively, you could also try the following:
    - Please try updating your card directly on our store page
    - Try a card issued by another bank (our store supports Mastercard, Visa and American Express)
    - Use PayPal (tip: often a problematic credit card will work when added to PayPal)

    You can manage your payment methods under http://store.equinux.com/storefront/subscriptions/.
    Launch VPN Tracker 365.

    If a new version is available, you will see an update notification right away. Click it to install the update.

    If you don't see an update notification when you start the app, go to "VPN Tracker 365" > "Check for updates..." in the menu.

    Tip: If you're unable to update, you can also download VPN Tracker 365 from the Version History page.
    Luckily, this is an incorrect report.

    The XCSSET malware is a trojan that replicates project files via Xcode; it targets mostly developers. To get it, you would need to download an infected Xcode project and build it. It creates fake apps and also downloads and installs payload (adware and similar things). So it does not infect existing apps.

    An interesting property of XCSSET is that it's mostly implemented in AppleScript. The generated fake apps contain a folder "Contents/Resources/Scripts" in which those AppleScript files reside. You can right-click on VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 in Finder, then click on "Show Package Contents" to check whether this Scripts folder or any AppleScript files (*.scpt) can be found; VPN Tracker 365 and Mail Designer 365 do not contain AppleScript files.
    Test to see if your network or provider is working properly. If it works fine, then this could be a NAT-T/IPSec Passthrough problem.

    Please refer to this FAQ for further assistance on NAT-T/IPSec :
    {FQ509}

    Additionally, please re-run the VPN Tracker Connection Checker and see if this solves the issue.

    If this does not solve the issue, please send us a technical support report:
    {FQ640}
    If you need to enter multiple remote networks, or want to adjust routing for multiple networks with Traffic Control, you can do so by clicking the plus arrow to the left of the configuration:



    Here you can add and remove address fields to use with Traffic Control.

    You can enter the addresses or networks in the following formats:
    • As a single address, e.g. "192.168.10.4",
    • as a single remote network, e.g. "192.168.10.0" (VPN Tracker will use the most typical subnet),
    • in CIDR notation, e.g. "192.168.10.0/24",
    • or with the full subnet, e.g. "192.168.10.0 / 255.255.255.0", which VPN Tracker will then convert to CIDR notation.
    Your TeamCloud storage allowance depends on the type of VPN Tracker plan you have.

    On this page, you can find an overview of TeamCloud storage in each VPN Tracker edition, as well as other significant features.
    When you share a VPN connection via TeamCloud, the connection is made available to your entire team by default.

    Can I share VPN connections only with specific users?
    TeamCloud group support is now available. Use this feature to share connections with just a subset of your team (e.g. only admins or only the marketing department.)

    The VPN Tracker 365 Connection Checker helps determine which VPN protocols your current internet connection supports. This is particularly useful in places like hotels, cafés, or offices, where network restrictions may apply.

    Understanding the Results

    • Green Check Mark: The protocol was successfully tested and is expected to work on your current network.
    • ⚠️ Yellow Exclamation Mark: The test was inconclusive. The protocol may or may not work due to network restrictions or unstable conditions. You can try connecting, but success isn't guaranteed.

    Why is a VPN Protocol Not Working?

    If a protocol gets a ⚠️ yellow exclamation mark, possible reasons include:

    • Network Restrictions – Some Wi-Fi networks (hotels, workplaces) limit or block certain VPN protocols.
    • Firewall Rules – A firewall may be filtering VPN traffic, preventing stable connections.
    • ISP Limitations – Some internet providers restrict or throttle VPN usage.
    • Router Settings – Your router may not allow VPN passthrough for certain protocols (e.g., PPTP, L2TP).
    • Double NAT Issues – If you're behind multiple routers (common in hotels, mobile networks), VPN connections can be disrupted.
    • Unstable Internet Connection – High packet loss or weak connectivity can interfere with VPN protocols.

    Explanations for the VPN Connection Test for IPsec

    For IPsec, at least the ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) or NAT-T (Network Address Translation Traversal) protocol must function to establish a stable VPN connection. Often, ESP is not usable in certain environments, such as due to firewall settings or network configurations. However, as long as NAT-T is available, the connection can still be established.

    What to Do If a Protocol Fails?

    • Switch networks – If possible, test from a different Wi-Fi Network
    • Try a mobile hotspot – Create a hotspot with your mobile phone and test if you get a different result
    • Try a different protocol (e.g., if IKEv2 is unstable, try OpenVPN).
    • Check router settings if you're on a home or office network.
    • Use VPN Tracker's built-in troubleshooting tools for more insights.

    With the VPN Tracker Connection Checker, you can quickly identify network issues and choose the best protocol for a stable connection.


    Once you have set up a personal VPN connection in VPN Tracker 365, it is best practice to back the connection up in your Personal Safe. This way, you will not have to configure the connection again if you get a new Mac.

    To save a connection, right click on the connection in the sidebar and click “Add to Personal Safe ...”

    You can see whether or not a connection has been backed up if the Personal Safe icon appears next to it in the sidebar:


    The VPN connection is now saved to your account and can be accessed on a new Mac and on iPhone and iPad with VPN Tracker for iOS.
    For the protection of our customers, all payments in our store are processed with 3D Secure technology. 3D Secure is an additional security mechanism that works with 2-factor authorization. After entering the card details, the transaction is passed on to the credit card company and must be explicitly approved by the customer. The approval is usually done via SMS, app or email. With the explicit approval before the transaction, we can help prevent credit card fraud.

    In order to use your card with 3D Secure, it needs to be actived for your card. Please contact your bank for this. Registration is often possible on the bank's website or via your banking app. Please see the links below for more details:

    With the 3D Secure procedure, authentication communication takes place directly between your computer and your bank. We have no influence on this. If you have any problems, please contact your bank or try to pay with another card or PayPal.
    • {FAQ_1195}
    • {FAQ_1196}
    • {FAQ_1197}
    • {FAQ_1198}
    • {FAQ_1199}
    OpenVPN Layer 2 (TAP) connections are not supported by VPN Tracker. TAP interface support in macOS is deprecated and will be removed in a future macOS release. We suggest that you activate Layer 3 (TUN) connection support on your router/gateway in order to use OpenVPN with VPN Tracker. If this is not an option for you, we're interested in learning why you cannot use TUN connections, so please don't hesitate to give us feedback on this topic.
    Yes! PPTP connections are included in all VPN Tracker editions. Please note that PPTP VPN is only supported in VPN Tracker for Mac, not on iOS.

    Start your free trial →
    Apple Family sharing is not activated for our products.
    • Send keep-alive ping every

      This option controls whether and how often VPN Tracker sends keep-alive pings. A keep-alive ping is not a normal ping, and is not considered tunnel traffic by the VPN gateway, so it does not keep the connection alive at the gateway. The sole purpose of these pings is to keep the connection alive through firewalls and NAT routers between VPN Tracker and the gateway when no other tunnel traffic is being sent.

    • Disconnect if inactive for

      This option controls if and after how long VPN Tracker will disconnect due to inactivity. Only tunnel traffic is considered activity, keep-alive pings sent from either side and protocol management traffic are not considered tunnel traffic.

    • Consider the peer dead if no sign of liveliness for

      This option controls if and after what time VPN Tracker will disconnect due to no sign of life. Any traffic from the gateway is considered a sign of life, regardless of whether it is tunnel traffic, keep alive ping, or protocol management traffic.

      This option has no effect if the gateway is not configured to send pings (--ping option or ping in the server configuration file), because without pings enabled, there may be no tunnel or management traffic for quite some time, but this is not proof that the gateway is no longer alive, since it won't send anything if there is nothing to send. With ping enabled, the gateway would at least send keep-alive pings in such a situation, and if those don't arrive either, the gateway has most likely dropped the connection or gone offline.

    Don't worry if you accidentally deleted VPN Tracker 365! We understand that these things happen and we've got your back.

    To reinstall VPN Tracker 365, go to our website and click on the "Download" link. Once the app has downloaded onto your Mac, you can log in with your equinux ID and password. When you log back in, you will find all of your preferences saved alongside your secure connections.
    "Connection refused", means that VPN Tracker tried to open a PPTP connection and the server replied "I am not a PPTP server so I refuse your connection".
    This means that either this IP address is not correct, the PPTP server is simply down at the moment, or the traffic is already blocked by some firewall (which sends this reply on behalf of the real server) and thus won't even allow it to reach its real destination.
    Select the connection which VPN Tracker is trying to connect to and go to "Configure". Under "Actions", you will see this option: "Connect this VPN when VPN Tracker is opened". If checked, this will auto-start this connection every time you start the app.



    Note: If this auto start connection has an issue (e.g. no VPN gateway has been entered), you will be prompted with an error message each time you start VPN Tracker. Either solve the issues with the connection or – if you do not need to run the connection – uncheck the option "Connect this VPN when VPN Tracker is opened" to stop the error message from appearing.
    VPN Tracker Team Management features allow you to conveniently manage groups of users, assign licenses and share connections.

    As a Team Manager or Organizer, you can assign available VPN Tracker licenses to your team members via your my.vpntracker portal.

    How to assign licenses:
    • Log in to your my.vpntracker account and select your team in the sidebar
    • Scroll to Team Members. Here you will see a list of the colleagues you have invited to your team and their current license
    • Click Manage to be shown your available licenses and select a product from the list to assign it to a user
    • If you have no available licenses, you can purchase more from the Team Store by clicking Buy licenses



    For more step-by-step information on setting up and managing your VPN Tracker Teams, check out this detailed guide.

    Availability of pre-release testing


    Generally, pre-release testing of Beta and Nightly builds is available to all VPN Tracker users. However, if you are considering updating to a pre-release version, please carefully consider the following information:

    Important information for pre-release testers


    Nightly and Beta versions of VPN Tracker are still in the development stages. The aim of pre-release testing is to identify any possible connection issues experienced by our testers and get these fixed for the final public release. This means we can't guarantee perfect stability and compatibility for existing connections.

    For this reason, we do not recommend an update to a pre-release version for production systems or anyone who requires critical access to their connection. In this case, we advise you stay on the main branch.

    Getting back to the main branch:


    If you've updated to a pre-release version and are experiencing issues with your connection, you can easily switch back to the last stable release.

    VPN Tracker offers a convenient self-service quote tool. Here’s how to get started:
    • Go to the VPN Tracker Store
    • Add the requested licenses to your shopping cart by clicking the Plus Symbol.
    • Be sure to select: “Purchase as new plan”. The quote tool does not currently support the “Add to an existing plan” feature.
    • Once you have added the licenses to your cart click on the blue “Save as quote” button on the right side of the page
    • Your product selection and price will be saved into a quote which will remain valid for seven days after it has been generated.
    • Be sure to log in to your account to see your final price.
    • You can share your quote with others by sending them the URL of your quote.
    • Alternatively, you can export the quote as a PDF or print it.
    • Once you are ready to purchase, just click the “Purchase Now” button and all items from your quote will be directly put back into your shopping cart and you can proceed with your purchase.

    The number of VPN connections you can save in your account depends on your VPN Tracker edition.

    Should you require more storage than you have allocated in your current plan, you can easily cross-upgrade. Your remaining balance will be pro-rated against your new plan.

    Please follow these steps:

    1. Your Mac may not be remotely controlled during installation. Further details can be found here: {FQ1398} Be sure to perform the initial setup locally on the computer.
       
    2. There may be a problem with launchd, which is responsible for installing and starting the background processes of VPN Tracker. In the easiest case, this problem can be solved by just restarting your computer.
       
    3. In case a restart did not solve the problem, start the program Terminal (from Applications → Utilities → Terminal) and perform (copy and paste) the following commands:
       
      sudo launchctl bootout system/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent
      sudo rm /Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent
      sudo rm /Library/LaunchDaemons/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent.plist
      sudo rm /var/run/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent.socket
      Confirm commands with your password when being prompted for it (note you won't see the password being typed). Afterwards, please restart your computer.
       
    4. If none of the above did solve the problem, see if you can locate any crash logs Start the App "Console" ( from Applications → Utilities → Terminal) and open /Library/Logs on the left, then select DiagnosticReports. Search for a current entry of com.vpntracker.365mac.agent. In case there is a new entry for every start of the app, please send us one of these reports for analysis.

    Safari may ask for confirmation the first time you download a file from a website. So when you download an app from our website, choose "Allow" when prompted to start the download.



    Note: All of our apps are digitally signed and verified for security, so you can download with confidence.
    VPN Tracker for iOS supports IPSec (including SonicWALL SCP & DHCP, EasyVPN and Mode Config), IKEv2 (Beta), OpenVPN, SSTP, SonicWALL SSL, Cisco AnyConnect SSL, Fortinet SSL and WireGuard®.

    Get VPN Tracker for iOS here.

    WireGuard® is a registered trademark from Jason A. Donenfeld.
    We publish the SHA-256 checksum of each VPN Tracker download, allowing you to verify the integrity of your download before installing it.

    How to verify the checksum

    • Download the VPN Tracker.zip file
    • Open Terminal and run the following command:
    • shasum -a 256 ~/Downloads/VPN\ Tracker \ 365.zip
      (note the exact path may differ, depending on which version of VPN Tracker you’ve downloaded
    • Compare the calculated checksum to the checksum published on the Version History page.

    Note: Safari automatically unzips files it downloads, so you’ll need to ensure you’re comparing the checksum of the zip file, not the unzipped app.


    Some VPN vendors offer "SSL VPN" as an alternative to IPsec VPN. SSL VPN isn't a single standard, instead each vendor has their own specific kind of "SSL VPN".

    VPN Tracker 365 offers complete support for SonicWALL SSL connections only, but we do plan on supporting some of the other popular SSL VPN variants in future.

    If you have a SSL VPN connection you would like to see support for, please let us know.

    VPN Tracker does not maintain VPN connections when the computer goes to sleep for the following reasons:

    1. Immediately after waking up, the system may have different network settings than when it went to sleep, e.g. because the network cable was replugged while the computer was asleep, or the computer was moved to another location where a different WLAN is available, or a DHCP lease has expired and the DHCP server has to assign a new IP address to the computer after waking up because it has already given the old one to someone else, or the network interface no longer exists, e.g. if a USB network adapter was unplugged. In these cases, not only would the connection immediately stop working after waking up, VPN Tracker would also no longer be able to log off correctly from the remote peer.

      VPN Tracker would also not be directly aware of some of these events, as applications do not receive network events while the system is asleep and would therefore have to compare all network configurations after waking up with those before sleeping and decide whether the connection could still work or not, because with some VPN protocols there is no way to actively test this, with others only if certain options are used (e.g. DPD). A misjudgement leads to a tunnel being kept up that can actually no longer work and the user would then have to restart it manually before it works again.

    2. NAT gateways remember in a table how they map private IP addresses to public ones and how they rewrite ports for a limited time only. Depending on the protocol, this time span can be in the range of seconds or minutes (some gateways only remember this for 20 seconds with UDP). If such a table entry is lost, this does not result in an error, but a new entry is created for the next packet, which often results in a different mapping, which the remote station cannot cope with, because it now looks to them as if someone else is trying to hijack the connection, as the packets are suddenly coming from a different sender. VPN Tracker cannot know or check when it wakes up whether the previous table entry still exists or has already been lost and will not receive an error from the NAT gateway in the latter case, but the connection will still no longer work, which leads to the same problems as in the first case. It does not matter whether a local NAT gateway is used (as in most home routers or modems) or a carrier grade NAT gateway, which is located at the ISP and via which several customers can share a single public IPv4 address. The latter is increasingly the case, as there are no longer any free IPv4 addresses and therefore not every customer can get an own one.

    3. VPN protocols that use some form of Dead Peer Detection (DPD) expect regular data traffic from the other side. If this fails to occur, they send DPD packets and expect these DPD requests to be answered. If they are not answered, the other side considers the connection to be dead and deletes it. VPN Tracker is also unaware of this while the computer is asleep and cannot respond to these requests. After waking up, the connection would again no longer be functional, but even with DPD in use, this would often only be noticed after about a minute and until then the system would try to continue using this connection without the slightest chance of success, so that various applications would run into errors or disconnects.

    4. If a VPN connection is disconnected without the client logging off from the VPN gateway and without the gateway being aware of this, the client may not be able to re-establish this connection immediately or a connection error may occur the first time it is established. In the worst case, the client may even be locked out for a few minutes. This can occur in the first two cases if the network settings have changed after the sleep phase or if a NAT table entry has been lost.

    To prevent all these problems, VPN Tracker immediately terminates all VPN connections as soon as the system reports that it wants to go to sleep, and also logs off correctly from the remote peer. As soon as the system wakes up and reports that the network is fully operational again, VPN Tracker immediately re-establishes all these connections. This avoids all the problems mentioned above and normal applications have no network access while the system is asleep and are also used to the fact that no network is available for a short time after waking up, because this is also the case without VPN, especially if something has changed on the network.

    If you have already purchased a VPN Tracker license but would like to change to a different product, you have two options:

    1. Purchase an upgrade In most cases you can upgrade your existing plan. The VPN Tracker store will automatically pro-rate your purchase based on the remaining value of your current product.

    Go to your my.vpntracker upgrade page to see your upgrade options.

    2. Convert your product to store credit If you purchased with a different account or want to swap to a different product line altogether, you can convert your existing license to store credit and put that towards your new purchase:

    Note: If the value of your old product is greater than the cost of your new product, you'll receive another promocode over the remaining value.

    To configure a VPN connection on macOS, you will need the following:
    1. VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    2. An internet connection
    3. A VPN Router/Gateway


    Create a new connection


    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:

    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"


    Choose your VPN Router


    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile."
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.

    Your configuration guide


    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:



    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop


    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.
    If you wish to remove a payment method from your account - e. g. because it has expired or is no longer valid - please get in touch with our support team.

    Please be aware that all active subscriptions require a linked payment method. Without this, the subscription will end immediately.

    If you are using an older copy of VPN Tracker 9 and a supported macOS version, please update to the last release.

    If you are using a current macOS release, or plan to soon, we recommend moving to VPN Tracker 365. It offers support for new macOS releases, improved security, Connection Safe backup and sync and more.


    → Get VPN Tracker 365
    You can easily deploy VPN Tracker on multiple Macs. By using the VPN Tracker installer package and pre-authorizing the System Extension with an MDM-profile, users will not need to enter an administrator password to start using VPN Tracker.

    Installing VPN Tracker remotely
    Download the Installer package file from our downloads page. This can be installed remotely and takes care of authorizing the components VPN Tracker needs.

    Pre-authorizing the System Extension

    VPN Tracker 365 uses a System Extension to create a secure VPN tunnel and manage network traffic.

    For Enterprise rollouts on MDM-managed Macs, you can pre-approve VPN Tracker's Extension using a special profile.

    Our Team ID is MJMRT6WJ8S.
    (Note: Earlier versions used Team ID CPXNXN488S - these should be replaced with the current version)

    VPN Tracker uses a Kernel Extension (KEXT) on macOS 10.15 Catalina and lower. The following bundle identifiers can be used to pre-authorize the KEXT:
    New (version 21 and later): com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    Older versions: com.equinux.vpntracker365.kext

    Starting with macOS 11 Big Sur, a new System Extension is used:
    com.vpntracker.365mac.SysExt

    Troubleshooting
    If users are still seeing the "Allow System Extension" prompt, please try explicitly listing the System Extension identifier com.vpntracker.365mac.SysExt in your MDM profile (and not just referencing the Team ID).

    To check the status of the System Extension, you can run systemextensionsctl list in Terminal.

    Please see Apple's Support Document for more details.

    The majority of VPN users use their Mac out and about on the go. If a MacBook ever gets lost or stolen, there’s a risk that remote access to your network could fall into the wrong hands. With VPN Tracker, you can prevent unauthorized VPN access by remotely revoking access to the connection.

    The import password is the password with that an exported connection is encrypted on disk. You need to provide it otherwise VPN Tracker won't be able to read the encrypted file. The intention of that password is to prevent that unauthorized users will be able to import or use that connection.

    The unlock password is a password that locks the exported connection from being edited. This password can be set in the export settings of your connection. If no password is entered, the exported connection will be locked for all users and can never be edited. The intention of this password is to prevent unauthorized users from modifying a connection.

    Please see this FAQ for further details: {FQ647}
    If VPN Tracker for Mac is already installed, Tunnelblick connections can be imported directly as follows.

    File > Import > Tunnelblick Connections...

    VPN Tracker then searches the directories

    ~/Library/Application Support/Tunnelblick/Configurations
    and
    /Library/Application Support/Tunnelblick/Shared

    and then offers a file selection for the first directory that contains connections. The selected connection is then imported directly.

    The Remote Connection Wipe functionality is available for all VPN Tracker 365 plans.
    Please note that you will need a VPN Tracker 365 Pro plan to export a VPN connection.

    In our white paper you will find all information to set up Remote Connection Wipe:

    http://equinux.com/goto/vpnt365/whitepaper

    In the following overview, you'll find the end of support dates for older VPN Tracker products with legacy licensing.

    VPN Tracker 10
    Support for VPN Tracker 10 ends on March 31st 2021. VPN Tracker 10 will not receive any updates/support after this date.

    VPN Tracker 9
    Support for VPN Tracker 9 ends on March 31st 2020.
    After March 31st 2020, VPN Tracker 9 will not receive any updates/support after this date.

    VPN Tracker versions 1-8
    These legacy versions are no longer supported.

    How to get support & updates
    If you are still using a older VPN Tracker version, we strongly recommend you move to a modern VPN Tracker 365 plan, which includes ongoing updates and support.

    What happens to unsupported products?
    As they are no longer being updated, they may stop working due to changes on your VPN gateway, server or other technical requirements.
    Yes, you can set up a PCI DSS-compliant connection with VPN Tracker. The PCI DSS Logical Security Requirements (version 2.0) require that connections use the following:
    • Two-factor (2FA) or multi-factor authentication (MFA)
    • Certificate-based authentication
    For IPsec VPN-connections, the additional requirements must also be met:
    • Main Mode exchange
    • 3DES or AES encryption
    • Perfect-Forward-Secrecy needs to be used
    For SSL-based VPN-connections:
    • SSL and TLS 1.0 are probihibited
    You will also need to ensure other logging and timeout requirements are met on the VPN gateway. Please see the full PCI documentation for details.
    TeamCloud is included in all VPN Tracker editions at varying levels. For more specific information about plan options and included features, please refer to the VPN Tracker Store.
    To add a new team member to your VPN Tracker Team follow these steps:
    • Log in to your my.vpntracker.com account
    • Select your team in the top left corner
    • On the left side choose "Team Cloud"
    • In the Invite section at the top, enter your new Team Member's name and company email address, then click "Send invitation".
    • The invited team member will then receive an automatic email invitation with a personalised link to click on and join your team.
    • Tip: Each VPN Tracker 365 user needs their own, personal equinux ID. After the user receives a team invitation from you and clicks the invite link, they can either create a new equinux ID or log in using their existing account.
    • In case the user does not receive the invitation email, you can access the invitation link by clicking on "Details" next to the user name

    • Once a team member has accepted your email invitation, you will be notified via email

    If you are trying to edit a connection that someone else sent to you, please ask the person who sent you the connection for the password.

    In the export settings of the connection it is possible to set a password to prevent users from editing the connections. If this password is set, the imported connection cannot be edited without entering this password.

    Please note, this password is different from the import password.
    When you add licenses through the my.vpntracker.com portal, your new licenses, as well as your exisiting licenses will start with the day of purchase and run for one year. This means effectively your existing plan is canceled and the remainig value is credited towards your new plan. Your new plan, including your new licenses and your existing licenses will renew on the same date, preventing the hassle of multiple billing dates throughout the year.

    Example
    You have 2 licenses with a renewal date of December 4th.
    On July 16th, you add 1 additional license.

    You will receive a credit for the remaining durations of the 2 licenses.
    Your new subscription will have 3 licenses and all will have July 16 as their renewal date. The price will be that of 3 licenses minus the credit for your remaining durations.

    Due to a bug in macOS 13.4 you may encounter a System Extension issue when starting a VPN connection. Please update to VPN Tracker 23.1.4 which mitigates this issue.

    Download latest VPN Tracker version

    Note that in certain cases, you may still experience a System Extension issue when connecting to multiple VPNs. Restarting VPN Tracker will temporarily resolve the issue.

    We are working on an additional update to work around this bug in macOS 13.4.

    VPN Tracker for Mac includes support for the latest versions of macOS, including macOS 13 Ventura and the new macOS 15 Sequoia.
    For the latest news and information on compatibility, including current known issues, please visit our release notes page.
    Your account details such as address and email can be edited in the account management using the following link:
    Edit equinux ID

    As a reseller you can purchase VPN Tracker 365 plans and resell them to your customers.

  • You can purchase plans for customers at your existing discount.
  • Purchased plans will be available for you to re-distribute to your customers.
  • You will be pinged by our system when your customer licenses are due for renewal, allowing you to offer them plan extensions.
  • Once you've purchased a plan, you can transfer it to your customers under https://my.vpntracker.com.
  • If you're working from home and need to connect to your company VPN, your admin invite you to a VPN Tracker team to assign you and your other colleagues a VPN Tracker 365 plan.



    A VPN Tracker 365 plan allows you to connect to your company's VPN from home and securely access the internal services you need.

    Here's how it works:

    • Click the link in the email to accept the invitation.
    • Create an equinux ID with the email address you received the invitation on.
    • Now, download the VPN Tracker 365 app and sign in with your equinux ID. Your admin will assign you a plan.


    You can now get started with importing a connection and connecting to your company VPN.

    Watch this quick video tutorial to learn more about joining a team:


    If you used an earlier VPN Tracker 365 beta, you may run into a Connection Safe sync issue with the following error message:

    Connection could not be downloaded. The operation couldn’'t be completed.
    VPNTHQ.HQConnectionSyncKeyError error 0


    To fix this problem
    • Sign out of VPN Tracker 365
    • Quit VPN Tracker 365
    • Open Applications > Utilities > Keychain Access
    • Search in the top right for VPN Tracker entries mentioning "master key", "sync master key", or "connection safe"
    • Delete these entries (Edit > Delete
    • Launch VPN Tracker
    • Sign in again and wait for your Connection Safe to sync (check under VPN Tracker > Preferences > Connection Safe)
    Whenever a security problem with certificates is discovered, the rules for certificates are adjusted and tightened accordingly. However, the new rules do not apply retroactively, i.e. they only apply to certificates that were created after the new rules have already come into force. Certificates that are older must still be accepted as valid, even if they were created according to older rules.

    The longer an old certificate remains in circulation, the more likely that someone with the appropriate knowledge and skills will come across it and then exploit its security problem. Therefore, you don't want to have long terms, because if a certificate has to be renewed, it must always be renewed in accordance with the current applicable rules and this happens sooner, the shorter its term is. In the past, the runtimes were too long, but this had led to problems several times when RSA was cracked with 768 bits or when a method was found to create SHA-1 collision, which means that signatures based on SHA-1 all at once could be forged. Back then, it took far too long until insecure certificates were no longer in circulation, which resulted in various avoidable attacks.

    By the way, renewing only affects the gateway certificate. User certificates do not need to be renewed if you exchange the certificate at the gateway. Users also do not need a new configuration. In fact, users don't even notice such an exchange. On web servers today, this usually happens automatically and even more often, as web certificates are often only valid for a maximum of 90 days.
    VPN Tracker for iOS is now available!

    Find out more
    In AnyConnect gateways, the case sensitivity of the gateway address can sometimes matter. gateway.example.com and Gateway.example.com are treated differently. Please ensure that the case exactly matches the AnyConnect gateway settings.
    Does your existing VPN product not support the latest macOS release? Not to worry: VPN Tracker supports all major VPN protocols and includes ready-to-go profiles for over 300+ VPN gateways.

    And with full support for macOS Sequoia, you're all set even with the latest releases.

    Start your free VPN Tracker trial today.

    Learn more
    This usually has one of two main causes:
    1. If your VPN connection is configured to be Host to Everywhere, all non-local network traffic is sent over the VPN tunnel once the connection has been established. All non-local traffic includes traffic to public Internet services, as those are non-local, too. Those services will only be reachable if your VPN gateway has been configured to forward Internet traffic sent over VPN to the public Internet and to forward replies back over VPN, otherwise Internet access will stop working.

      A possible workaround is to configure a Host to Network connection instead, where only traffic to configured remote networks will be sent over VPN, whereas all other traffic is sent out like it is when there is no VPN tunnel established at all. In case the remote network are automatically provisioned by the VPN gateway, this has to be configured on the VPN gateway, automatic provisioning has to be disable in VPN Tracker (not possible for all VPN protocols), or the Traffic Control setting has to be used to override the network configuration as provided by the gateway (Traffic Control is currently not available on iOS).

      A Host to Everywhere setup may be desirable for reasons of anonymity or to pretend to be in a different physical location (e.g. a different country), since all your requests will arrive at their final destination with the public IP address of the VPN gateway instead of your own one. Also that way you can benefit from any maleware filters or ad blockers running on the VPN gateway, yet it also means that the gateway can filter what services you have access to in the first place. If Host to Everywhere is desired but not working, this has to be fixed on at the remote site, since what happens to public Internet traffic after being sent over the VPN is beyond VPN Tracker's control.

    2. If the connection is configured to use remote DNS servers without any restrictions, all your DNS queries will be sent over the VPN. Before any Internet service can be contacted, its DNS name must be resolved to an IP address first and if that isn't possible, as the remote DNS server is not working correctly or unable to resolve public Internet domains, the resolving process will fail and this quite often has the same effect in software as if the Internet service is unreachable.

      A possible workaround is to either disable remote DNS altogether, if not required for VPN usage, or to configure it manually, in which case it can be limited to specific domains only ("Search Domains"). By entering a search domain of example.com, only DNS names ending with example.com (such as www.example.com) would be resolved by the remote DNS servers, for all other domains the standard DNS servers will be used as configured in the system network preferences.

      Using a remote DNS server may be desirable to filter out malicious domains, to circumvent DNS blocking of an Internet provider, to hide DNS queries from local DNS operators (since DNS is typically unencrypted), or to allow access to internal remote domains that a public DNS server cannot resolve, as they are not public. For the last case, configuring the internal domains as search domains is sufficient. For all other cases, the issue must be fixed at the remote site, since what happens to DNS queries after being sent over the VPN is beyond VPN Tracker's control.

    To manage and set up VPN connections, VPN Tracker uses a Network Extension, also referred to as a System Extension. This component integrates directly with macOS to provide the necessary system services required by VPN Tracker. Without it, VPN Tracker cannot establish VPN connections.

    When prompted by the system to allow a new network extension, please confirm this action in the system settings, which should automatically open.

    If the system settings do not open automatically, follow these steps based on your macOS version:


    • macOS 15 Sequoia and newer: System Settings > General > Login Items & Extensions, scroll down and click on the ⓘ icon next to “Network Extensions”. Enable the toggle next to VPN Tracker 365 in the dialog that appears.
    • macOS 13 Ventura and macOS 14 Sonoma: System Settings > Privacy & Security, scroll down and choose “Allow” in the confirmation box.
    • macOS 11 Big Sur and macOS 12 Monterey: System Preferences > Security & Privacy, scroll down and choose “Allow” in the confirmation box.
    VPN Tracker 365 offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for the SonicWALL TZ series.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a VPN connection on your SonicWALL device using VPN Tracker 365.

    Please go to VPN Tracker > Preferences and check if you have activated pre-release testing. If you have installed a Nightly or Beta build, it is possible you may encounter some connectivity issues, as these versions are still in the development stages.



    I am having issues with a pre-release version. What can I do?
    Having issues? You can easily get back to the last stable release by visiting our version history overview and downloading the last full VPN Tracker version.

    If you decide you want to deactivate pre-release testing for the future, you can do this in the app preferences.

    Please note that pre-release testing is generally not advised for production systems or users who require critical access to their VPN.

    Need further support?
    If you need help with a certain connection issue, feel free to contact the support team. Remember to also send a TSR (technical support report.)
    When it comes to choosing a VPN client, there are several key questions you need to consider in order to determine which option is the most reliable, and which option will keep your sensitive company data protected.

    Does the Mac VPN client always support the latest operating system updates?
    Following the final release of a new operating system, many Mac VPN client manufacturers take several months to provide their customers with a solution. Do you really want to be locked out of your VPN access because your software vendor can’t get their updates ready in time?
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker is always first when it comes to new operating systems. VPN Tracker is usually compatible with new macOS systems with the first Developer release of an new operating system.

    How good are the team management features for using the Mac VPN client in a larger setting with many users?
    Effective Team Management is a huge part of using a Mac VPN client in a professional setting. Do you really want to be put at risk, by an ex-employee, or would you rather choose the secure solution?
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker offers a professional team management interface, allowing you to add new users and delete old ones easily. You even have the option of removing your company connections from the user’s computer.

    Does the Mac VPN client vendor have sufficient experience in the field?
    Corporate data is a highly sensitive area, and it's very important that your company's data is kept in safe hands. Choosing a vendor with a questionable background in the field could mean you're handing your corporate confidential data to an unknown organization with barely any experience, or even to someone who could possibly sell your data at a later point in time to refinance their efforts.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker is offered by equinux, one of the most experienced software developers for Mac and iOS. VPN Tracker has earned the trust of Mac admins around the world and always treats your confidential data with the utmost security. Through years of experience, we can confidently say “Your data is safe with us!”

    Does the software contain unlicensed code or suffer from poor security architecture?
    Nowadays, many software developers bundle unlicensed third party code and leave your system open to attacks with unsigned network components. This is a risk you really don't want to take when it comes to your data security.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker ONLY contains officially licensed code and has a securely designed security architecture that ensures your VPN connection is protected at all times.

    Is the software code 100% Mac native?
    The effectiveness of any Mac application can only truly be guaranteed if the code that the software is written in is 100% Mac native. A lot of the time, Mac VPN clients tend to use unsigned network components which can open up unwanted vulnerabilities and leave your system open to attacks.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    The code used to create VPN Tracker is 100% Mac native. Every line of code was written with the highest security standards in mind, meaning the app is highly effective and the most reliable choice for protecting your sensitive company data.

    Is the VPN implementation secure and are the Mac VPN client components tamper proof
    A VPN client is a highly specialized piece of software. It must possess a 100% tamper-proof security architecture. Many VPN clients force insecure set ups and will require poor security settings in order to work. Your company's information is valuable, don’t put your data at risk by making the wrong choice.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker does exactly what is required of a reliable Mac VPN client and its components are all 100% tamper-proof.

    Does the manufacturer offer professional technical support?
    Even among the most experienced of IT professionals, VPNs can be a difficult topic and sometimes it's understandable that you need advice or a second opinion. In an ideal world, your VPN client should provide you with this, unfortunately, this is not always the case. Many manufacturers rely on support through forums. This means posting your sensitive VPN data on public forums and hoping someone will reply. Since VPN is the front door to your office, this is essentially the same as leaving your house key underneath the front mat. Not a good idea.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    The technical support VPN Tracker offers is one of the best in the industry. Your technical inquiries will be handled by customer support professionals on a one-on-one basis. The VPN Tracker support team works hard to quickly provide helpful answers and productive solutions to all inquiries, no matter how big or small.

    We are proud to say that VPN Tracker is the market leading VPN client for the Mac and guarantees you complete security for your confidential company data at all times. Download the free trial today to find out why VPN Tracker is the best and most reliable choice for your business.
    VPN Tracker offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for VPN connections on the TP Link SafeStream router.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure VPN connection to your TP-Link SafeStream router and connect on your Mac, iPhone or iPad in VPN Tracker.

    The Blowfish and CAST-128 encryption algorithms have been removed in OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion. They continue to be available when VPN Tracker is running on OS X 10.7 Lion and earlier.

    If you are having trouble accessing your equinux ID account with 2FA, please read on. For support with 2FA for your VPN connection itself, please reach out to your VPN admin who can assist you with resetting your 2FA setup.

    Reset 2FA for your equinux ID

    If you no longer have access to your 2FA device, you can reset 2FA using your recovery codes. Visit the 2FA guide for details.

    I don’t have recovery codes

    If you no longer have your recovery codes, 2FA can be reset by the equinux support team. Please note that for security reasons, manual 2FA reset will take up to 72h to process, to reduce the risk to accounts.

    To proceed, please contact equinux support with your equinux ID and our team will let you know which additional data is required to reset your 2FA setup.
    If you are trying to connect to VPN Tracker and you are getting a "Peer Hangup" error, here is what you need to know:

    "Peer Hangup" or "Peer Hang Up" means that the other side you are connecting to closed the connection and stopped talking to your VPN Tracker in the middle of negotiation. Unfortunately, it's impossible to tell the reason for such a behavior from your side of the connection. The reason can only be found in the log of the device you are trying to connect to by the VPN Protocol (like PPTP or L2TP). There are a number of reasons for this error. For instance, it could potentially be that it is unhappy with some configuration. For those using PPTP, it could be due to the GRE protocol it uses, which requires routers special handling. There could be a router between you (the VPN Tracker user) and the gateway that does not support GRE, causing the connection to time-out.

    Yes you can import your ovpn profile into VPN Tracker. Follow the steps below to get started:

    Step One: Add a connection


    1. Open VPN Tracker 365
    2. Click on File > New > Company Connection
    3. Click on IPSec/L2TP/OpenVPN/SSL/PPTP
    4. Select “Connection based on OpenVPN protocol”
    5. Click “Create”

    Step Two: Configure your VPN connection


    1. Click on “Configure” and go to the “Basic” tab
    2. Drag and drop your ovpn file into the grey space "Drop OpenVPN configuration file here", or click on the space to browse for your file in Finder
    3. Your device’s unique configuration settings will be automatically filled out by VPN Tracker 365
    4. Click “Done” to save your settings

    Connect to your VPN


    1. Check first of all that your internet connection is working as it should be
    2. Use this link as a test: http://www.equinux.com
    3. Start the VPN Tracker 365 app.
    4. Click on the On/Off slider to turn on your connection.

    Done!

    Check out our VPN Tracker OpenVPN Setup Guide for further information and troubleshooting.

    To change the name of your VPN Tracker Team follow these steps:
    • Log in to your my.vpntracker.com account
    • Select your team in the top left corner
    • On the left side choose "Team Cloud"
    • Scroll down to the section "Rename your team"
    • Enter your new Team Name and press "Rename"
    When your IPsec connection is often able to establish a connection, but sometimes times out because there was no response to the first packet, the problem might be due to host name resolution. This is often the case in IPv6-based networks such as cellular connection, e.g. also when using the Personal Hotspot function on the iPhone.

    Some host names can resolve to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, but depending on your current network location and VPN gateway it's possible that only IPv4 addresses work correctly.

    You can enforce resolving to IPv4 addresses only for your connection:

    • Edit your connection.
    • Navigate to the “Advanced Options” section.
    • In “Additional Settings”, change the setting “Connect using IPv4 or IPv6” to “Use IPv4”.
    • Save your connection and start your connection.



    Another way to completely disable IPv6 for Wi-Fi on macOS:

    1. Open the Terminal app from the Utilities folder.
    2. Enter the following command:
    sudo networksetup -setv6off Wi-Fi


    Note: If your Wi-Fi interface has a different name (e.g., `en0`), replace "Wi-Fi" with the correct name. You can check the name of the interface using this command:
    networksetup -listallnetworkservices


    3. After entering the command, you'll be prompted to enter your admin password.

    This will completely disable IPv6 for your Wi-Fi connection.
    Any data you upload to your Personal Safe is strongly encrypted. Nobody, not even us, will be able to access your data.

    Connections and Shortcuts which have been stored in your Personal Safe may be deleted in two different ways:

    1. In the VPN Tracker for Mac App


    In order to delete connections or Shortcuts from your Personal Safe, please follow the following steps:
    ‣ Go to "VPN Tracker" > "Preferences"
    ‣ Select "Personal Safe"
    ‣ Uncheck the connections and/or shortcuts you would like to delete from the list
    ‣ Press update
    ‣ This will delete all connection info from our servers.


    2. In a browser at my.vpntracker.com


    In order to delete connections from your Personal Safe, please follow the following steps:

    ‣ Open my.vpntracker.com  and log in with your equinux ID and password
    ‣ Select "Personal Safe" in the sidebar
    ‣ Here you will see all connections and Shortcuts which are saved in your Personal Safe.
    ‣ When you press the delete button next to any connection, this will instantly be deleted from your Personal Safe

    We have a new function in early beta that allows exchanging an existing license for a promo code with the same value as your existing duration. You can then apply the credit received to a new license purchased on your main account.

    In order to move ahead with the consolidation, please follow these steps:
    • Visit the license transfer page and log into the account which holds the license you would like credit for
    • Select the license you would like to exchange and confirm the license conversion. Your promo code for the remaining durations will be sent to your account’s email address.
      Go to my.vpntracker.com portal and log in with the account you would like to add the license to.
    • Click on “Buy additional licenses or upgrades” and add an additional license. Additional information on adding licenses can be found here: {FQ1803}
    • Apply the promo code to your order at the bottom of the page, check the Terms and Conditions and click "Pay now"


    Note that you can only do one promocode per order, but with the pro-rating you can simply place multiple orders, one for each license you need to add and promocode you wish to redeem.
    Please be aware that License Transfer Codes expire after 14 days and must be redeemed before expiration.
    Each side (i.e. server and client) sets its own rules as to when the connection key must be renegotiated. If connections are frequently lost, it may help to extend the time required to renegotiate the connection key.

    If no lifetime is set in VPN Tracker, VPN Tracker takes one hour (3600 seconds). The connection can be edited in VPN Tracker and this value can be increased. To keep the key valid for 24 hours, you would have to set the value to 86400 seconds.

    The same should be stored on the server side.
    From macOS Big Sur onwards, apps with a System Extension must be installed in your Mac's /Applications folder.

    Please make sure you have the latest version of VPN Tracker for Mac and place it in your Applications folder (under Macintosh HD/Applications).
    VPN Tracker 365 for Mac can also be installed using brew. This is practical if, for example, you only have SSH available when maintaining a computer. The following steps are necessary for this:
    1. Brew must be installed on the computer: https://brew.sh
    2. Enter in the terminal:
      brew install --cask vpn-tracker-365

    The latest release version of VPN Tracker will then be installed.
    You'll need to be signed in with a user account first in order to start VPN Tracker. You can configure your user account to start VPN Tracker directly after logging into your account.
    VPN Tracker offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for VPN on the NETGEAR Nighthawk router.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure VPN connection to your NETGEAR Nighthawk device using VPN Tracker.

    If you are a Team Manager with a VPN Tracker VIP or Consultant license, you can set up Corporate Branding for your team.

    With this in place, team members with an Enterprise, VIP, or Consultant license will see your logo in the app sidebar. This is not only great for adding your corporate identity to VPN Tracker, but also helps consultants distinguish teams and connections.

    How to set up Corporate Branding:
    1. Open VPN Tracker or log in to your my.vpntracker account on the web
    2. In the sidebar, go to Manage Team and scroll down to the Settings area
    3. Under Team Logos, you will see the option to upload a light and a dark version of your team's logo. Select your logo files and click Save to sync the changes for your team



    Want to unlock Corporate Branding and additional VIP featues? View all plan options here.
    1. What are connection drops during rekeying?

      Connection drops during rekeying occur when the VPN connection is interrupted during the key update (rekeying). This causes traffic to not be processed for a short period, which is particularly problematic for stable connections such as video conferences.

    2. Why does the problem occur during rekeying?

      The problem arises because, when using TCP with OpenVPN, the firewall does not accept any traffic during the rekeying process. This leads to an interruption of the traffic.

    3. What impact do connection drops have on a video conference?

      During a video conference, connection drops during rekeying can result in a complete interruption of the traffic. This causes the connection to break, disrupting or even ending the video conference.

    4. Why is TCP susceptible to this problem?

      According to OpenVPN, TCP is problematic for VPN connections because it is more sensitive to traffic congestion during network disruptions or the rekeying process. OpenVPN therefore recommends using UDP instead, as it can better handle rekeying processes.

    5. What solution does VPN Tracker provide for the problem?

      VPN Tracker offers a particularly user-friendly solution: when establishing a connection, VPN Tracker automatically sets the rekeying timer to 24 hours. This significantly minimizes connection drops due to rekeying processes, keeping the connection especially stable. Additionally, VPN Tracker supports switching to UDP, which allows for an even more reliable connection.

    6. Why should the rekeying timer be set to 24 hours?

      A longer rekeying cycle reduces the frequency of connection drops. By setting the timer to 24 hours— as VPN Tracker does by default— the likelihood of the rekeying process being triggered during a critical phase, such as a video conference, is decreased.

    7. What advantages does VPN Tracker have when using UDP over TCP?

      VPN Tracker makes it easy to configure UDP, which offers faster connections and less sensitivity to packet loss. UDP is more efficient and resilient to interruptions during the rekeying process, which is particularly beneficial for bandwidth-intensive applications like video conferencing or streaming.

    8. What recommendations does VPN Tracker provide for companies to optimize their VPN connections?

      For companies relying on stable connections, VPN Tracker offers simple and effective solutions:

      • By default, the rekeying timer is set to 24 hours to minimize connection drops.
      • It is recommended to use UDP instead of TCP whenever possible to further enhance performance.

    Licenses purchased at different times may have different prices. To check the renewal price for a specific plan, check your products overview in my.vpntracker.com.

    To keep any pricing benefits, please ensure that you have automatic renewals turned on. If you forget to renew your license and it expires, you will lose legacy pricing benefits.



    The current, streamlined VPN Tracker lineup offers a simpler set of options. If you previously purchased a different edition, here's the right edition to order going forward:

    Old edition Current edition
    VPN Tracker for Mac / VPN Tracker 365      → VPN Tracker Personal
    VPN Tracker Pro for Mac    → VPN Tracker Pro for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker VIP for Mac    → VPN Tracker VIP for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Team Member → VPN Tracker Personal
    VPN Tracker Team Member Plus → VPN Tracker Executive for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Consultant → VPN Tracker Consultant for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker + → VPN Tracker Executive for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Pro+ → VPN Tracker Pro for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker VIP+ → VPN Tracker VIP for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Consultant+ → VPN Tracker Consultant for Mac & iOS

    You can purchase upgrades for your existing licenses on your my.vpntracker upgrade page, or order new plans through the VPN Tracker Online Store

    When VPN Tracker support asks you to collect system log messages, here's how to get them:
    • Open Console.app, which you can find in Finder in Applications > Utilities.
    • Either press the �Start streaming� text or the �Start� toolbar icon.
    • Start VPN Tracker 365 and reproduce the issue.
    • Switch back to Console.app and click on the �Pause� toolbar icon.
    Unfortunately, there is no direct text export for the collected log messages in Console.app. To save them please follow these steps:
    • In Console.app, click into the log message list and press ?+A to select all messages, then press ?+C to copy them.
    • Open any text editor and create a new file, for example using TextEdit.app.
    • Press ?+V to paste the copied log messages into your text editor.
    • Save the file and send it to our support.

    To safeguard your accounting data against accidental deletion, VPN Tracker keeps rolling backups.

    You can find them under:

    Macintosh HD/Users/YourUser/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker/Accounting/

    (Note that the Library folder may be hidden: Choose "Finder" > "Go" from the menu bar and hold down the option key to open the Library folder).

    Your current Account files are stored in “Accounting.sqlite”. You'll also see all your Accounting backups in the same folder. They will be have a date in the file name.

    To revert to an earlier backup:

      ‣ Rename the “Accounting.sqlite” file to “Accounting-backup.sqlite”
      ‣ Delete the Accounting.sqlite-wal and Accounting.sqlite-shm files 
      ‣ Rename the backup you want to restore to “Accounting.sqlite”

    VPN Tracker is a 100% 64 bit application and runs great on 64 bit systems.

    To use the VPN Tracker 365 Reseller Portal, you'll need separate accounts for your reselling activities and your personal VPN Tracker 365 license(s) and connections.

    Please note: You need to create a separate personal account by July 1st 2021 to continue using VPN Tracker 365.

    If you have VPN Connections and Shortcuts saved in your Personal Safe (formerly known as Connection Safe), you can transfer them over to your new personal account in just a few simple steps.

    Step One: Download a local copy of your Personal Safe connections from your Reseller account

    • Go to VPN Tracker 365 > Preferences > Personal Safe
    • Uncheck the box "Enable Personal Safe" to disable Personal Safe sync for all saved Shortcuts and connections and download a local copy on your Mac:



    • Important: In the dialog, select "Only Remove from Personal Safe"



    • Your connections will be stored locally on your Mac


    Step Two: Set up a new personal account

    • Sign out of your Reseller account via the button in the top left corner:



    • If you have not done so already, you should now create a new personal account.
    • This will be the account you use with your own personal VPN Tracker plan, as well as for internal Team Management (if relevant)


    Step Three: Assign your plan to your new account

    • Log in to my.vpntracker using your original Reseller account
    • Using the Reseller tools, transfer licenses to your new Personal account
    • Sign in to my.vpntracker with your new Personal account and assign yourself the license


    Step Four: Re-sync your connection and shortcuts data to your Personal Safe

    • Sign back in to VPN Tracker 365 with your new personal account
    • Open up your Personal Safe preferences again
    • Check "Enable Personal Safe" to add your connections to Personal Safe


    You can now access all your personal data in your own personal VPN Tracker 365 account and enjoy a much more streamlined and organized overview in your reseller account.

    We don’t offer partial refunds. All of our 365 plans are valid for one year and you can cancel up to 10 days before the end of your term; however, if you do cancel, you will be able to continue using the software the expiration date of your plan.


    VPN Tracker 365 offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for Amazon's AWS VPC Mac VPN client.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure site-to-site VPN connection using AWS Virtual Private Cloud and VPN Tracker 365.

    TeamCloud Groups let you use TeamCloud features with just part of your team, e.g. to share a certain VPN connection with just your IT admins.

    To create and edit Groups, you need

    • Team Manager or Organizer status
    • A VPN Tracker VIP or Consultant plan

    To receive a connection from a TeamCloud Group, you need

    • To be a member of the team
    • A VPN Tracker Executive, VIP, or Consultant plan

    Absolutely! VPN Tracker for iOS is powered by TeamCloud and Personal Safe, meaning your existing VPN connections show up instantly – zero setup required!

    Discover VPN Tracker for iOS now.
    Our goal with the new licensing model was to facilitate the selection of an appropriate license. Instead of a variety of other factors, we now primarily limit licenses based on the number of connections a user has. We have developed the Basic license specifically for individual users who only need access to one VPN connection.

    The license options we offer are as follows:
    • VPN Tracker for Mac BASIC - 1 Connection
    • VPN Tracker for Mac PERSONAL - 10 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS EXECUTIVE - 15 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS PRO - 50 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS VIP - 100 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS CONSULTANT - 400 Connections


    To upgrade your existing licenses, please go to the subscriptions tab in your my.vpntracker.com account and press the "Upgrade" Button. You can then choose a a suitable license from the dropdown link under "New Plan".

    We hope that this licensing model will make the licensing more clear moving forward.

    With one of the more recent firmware updates Secure Computing changed their implementation of the VPN related standards. These changes break VPN Tracker's ability to successfully establish a phase 2.

    The problem has been resolved by Secure Computing in firmware 7.0.0.07. (epatch 7.0.0.06.E35)

    PPTP VPN, or Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol Virtual Private Network, is a widely used protocol for implementing virtual private networks. It enables secure data transfer over the internet by creating a private, encrypted tunnel between your device and a VPN server. Here's a breakdown of key aspects:
    1. Protocol Explanation:
      • Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP): PPTP is a protocol that facilitates the secure transfer of data between a user's device and a VPN server. It creates a tunnel through which data is encapsulated, providing a secure connection.
    2. Encryption and Security:
      • Encryption: PPTP employs various encryption methods to secure the data transmitted through the tunnel, making it difficult for unauthorized parties to intercept or decipher.
    3. Ease of Setup:
      • User-Friendly Setup: PPTP is known for its simplicity and ease of setup. It's often the preferred choice for users who prioritize a straightforward configuration process.
    4. Compatibility:
      • Widespread Compatibility: PPTP is compatible with a wide range of devices and operating systems, including Windows, macOS, Linux, iOS, and Android, making it accessible for users across different platforms.
    5. Speed and Performance:
      • Performance Considerations: PPTP is recognized for its relatively fast connection speeds, making it suitable for activities like streaming and online gaming.
    6. Considerations for Security-Conscious Users:
      • Security Concerns: While PPTP offers a convenient solution for many users, it's important to note that some security experts have raised concerns about its vulnerability to certain types of attacks. Users with high-security requirements may want to explore alternative VPN protocols like OpenVPN or L2TP/IPsec.
    7. Choosing the Right VPN Protocol:
      • Consider Your Needs: When selecting a VPN protocol, it's essential to consider your specific requirements, including the balance between ease of use and the level of security needed for your online activities.

    In summary, PPTP VPN is a widely accessible and user-friendly protocol suitable for various devices. However, users should be mindful of their specific security needs and consider alternative protocols if stronger encryption is a priority.

    Did you know? VPN Tracker is the only VPN Client for Mac for PPTP VPN under macOS Sonoma and macOS Sequoia.
    There can be some problems with the setup in the Fortigate web interface, possibly with certain browsers like Safari. Here are some tips:

    • Check if there is a firmware update for the Fortigate device: Firmware Updates
    • First, set up the new connection in the Fortigate web UI, and then review all fields again by selecting ‘Edit’. This can help, as not all fields may have been visible during the initial setup
    You can see all devices connected to your account in your my.vpntracker.com portal

    To remove a device you can either:
    • Log out of your account in the VPN Tracker App
    • Follow this link and press: "Remove all devices"
    We offer a free trial for VPN Tracker which can be used to test all functionality of the app, helping users identify the best fit for their needs. After this trial period, all sales are final upon subscription, in accordance with our Terms and conditions.
     
    Please be aware that we cannot process refunds in the following scenarios:
    • Non-usage of the app or service
    • Failure to cancel your account within the cancelation period
    • Lack of features or functionality on your subscribed plan
    • Purchases made in error
    • Exceptional circumstances beyond our control
    • Violations to our Terms of Use
    VPN Tracker World Connect allows you to work anywhere in the world, while protecting your corporate data from hackers. With VPN Tracker World Connect, you can stay secure and protect all of your online activities even when you are on business trips. Whenever you are using the wifi at the airport, coffee shop, mall, and other public places, your data is open to anyone else on the wifi network. VPN Tracker World Connect will encrypt your data, which means that you are still protected while using public wifi. Also, VPN Tracker World Connect helps you keep your critical data safe, whether you are accessing documents in the cloud or checking your email. You have the option of choosing "Secure Connection," which will automatically find the closest server to you and secure your connection for you when you activate it.

    You can even use VPN Tracker World Connect to encrypt your internet traffic through a VPN connection via different countries. Here is a list of countries you can connect to with VPN Tracker World Connect: {FQ1308}

    If you get asked by VPN Tracker's support to send the log files, this is how you can get them. Please note that the connection log files are encrypted since they may contain sensitive data.


    • Open Finder and use the menu “Go > Go to Folder…”.
    • A dialog opens. Into this dialog, please copy & paste the following path without quotation marks: “/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365/var” and press Enter.
    • You should see a folder named log. Please drag it to your Desktop, which will copy its content.
    • On your Desktop, right-click (or click while holding down the Control key) on the log folder and select the Compress “log” menu entry.
    • Please send the resulting log.zip file to our support.

    When you start a trail license (e.g. 7 days), we authorize your card for the annual amount of the corresponding license as soon as you start the test (similar to a hotel or rental car deposit).
    If you cancel the trial license within the specified period, your account will not be charged. The pre-authorization then no longer applies.
    The software we sell on our website and the version sold on the App Store offer the same design features and purchase options.

    There are only two differences:

    1. The equinux Online Store will always provide you with a proper purchase invoice, which can be useful for you if claiming the purchase against your taxes.

    2. You can access the beta version when you purchase from the equinux Online Store. When you purchase through the Mac App store, you will not have access to the beta version.

    Convert Your Products into Store Credit

    If you wish to change the number of your licenses, you have the option to convert your existing license into store credit. You can then use this credit for your next purchase:

    Note: If the remaining value of your old product exceeds the amount for the new product, you will receive an additional promo code for the remaining value.


    VPN Tracker for iOS is compatible from iOS 15, including iOS 16.

    Test VPN Tracker for iOS here.
    Fortinet recommends using the IPsec protocol for FortiGate devices and now explicitly highlights this preference (as of November 2024):



    Our experience also shows that IPsec connections are significantly more performant, so we likewise recommend using IPsec.
    For error messages related to a possible faulty internet connection, try the following steps:

    1. Are you connected to the internet? Check your internet connection by opening a website like www.google.com in your browser (e.g. Safari).
    If that works, proceed to Step 2.

    If no page loads, try the following:

    • Check your Wi-Fi connection: Make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on your device and connected to the correct network.
    • Check cable connections: If you are using a wired connection, ensure the cable is securely connected and undamaged.
    • Restart the router: Disconnect the router from the power source for about 30 seconds, then plug it back in. Wait a few minutes for the connection to re-establish.
    • Contact an administrator or provider: If the problem persists, there may be an issue with your internet provider. Contact your administrator or your internet provider's customer service.
    • Use a mobile hotspot: If you have access to mobile data, try setting up a hotspot to test the connection.

    2. If a specific server is mentioned in the error message, try accessing the specified address via your browser (e.g., Safari).

    If that works, proceed to Step 3.

    If it doesn’t work, there may be an issue with the server mentioned in the error message. In this case, please try the action in VPN Tracker that triggered the error message again at a later time.


    3. Check if your current VPN connection or a firewall is blocking access to the internet or a specific site, and disable this block if necessary.

    • You can see and configure if your currently active VPN connection excludes certain internet addresses in the connection configuration: In VPN Tracker, select the connection, choose "Edit," and then "Advanced Settings." In the "Traffic Control" area, there may be internet addresses listed that the VPN restricts access to.
    • To check if your firewall excludes certain internet addresses, temporarily disable your firewall and try again the action in VPN Tracker that triggered the error message.
    • Check your firewall settings for blocked applications or websites. Some firewalls allow specific IP addresses, domains, or applications to be selectively blocked or allowed.
    • If you find that a rule is blocking access, you can adjust this rule or add an exception to allow access to specific websites or services.
    • If you are still unable to gain access to certain areas, contact your firewall manufacturer's support or your IT support.


    VPN Tracker 7 and 8 can be installed on the same Mac. Please note that it is not possible to run them both simultaneously, but once you quit one version of VPN Tracker, the other will work just fine.

    For later versions, VPN Tracker 10 and VPN Tracker 365 can also be installed on the same Mac. They store their data and settings in different places. However, you cannot run different versions at the same time.

    Especially so-called "clean up tools" that also scan for malware can report false-positives. If you suspect VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 to be infected, we recommend to upload your copy of the app to www.virustotal.com which is a free service that scans your uploaded files using several reputable virus scanners. If any of the virus scanners on this site flags the app, please contact us.

    How can I verify that my copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer has not been modified?


    All our apps are properly code-signed by Apple, so macOS can verify that the app has not been tampered with. You can check the integrity by opening Terminal.app and entering the following command:
    spctl --assess "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app"

    Please note that double quotes around the path are required because the path contains spaces. If your copy is in a different location, please replace "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" with the proper path to the app.
    The output may look like this:
    /Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app: accepted
    source=Notarized Developer ID

    If the app has been modified, an error message like this is printed:
    Mail Designer 365.app: invalid signature (code or signature have been modified)

    Please contact us if your copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 has an invalid signature.

    How can I verify that my copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 was signed by equinux?


    All our apps are properly code-signed by Apple, so macOS can verify that the app has not been tampered with. You can review this signature by opening Terminal.app and entering the following command:
      codesign -d -vv "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" 

    Please note that double quotes around the path are required because the path contains spaces. If your copy is in a different location, please replace "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" with the proper path to the app.
    The output may look like this:
    Executable=/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app/Contents/MacOS/VPN Tracker 365
    Identifier=com.vpntracker.365mac
    Format=app bundle with Mach-O universal (x86_64 arm64)
    CodeDirectory v=20500 size=81953 flags=0x10000(runtime) hashes=2550+7 location=embedded
    Signature size=9071
    Authority=Developer ID Application: equinux AG (MJMRT6WJ8S)
    Authority=Developer ID Certification Authority
    Authority=Apple Root CA
    Timestamp=1. Jun 2021 at 17:22:51
    Info.plist entries=42
    TeamIdentifier=MJMRT6WJ8S
    Runtime Version=11.1.0
    Sealed Resources version=2 rules=13 files=684
    Internal requirements count=1 size=216

    The important parts to look out for here are the lines starting with "Authority": They list the chain of trust. The last entry must always be "Apple Root CA", the entry above must either be "Developer ID Certification Authority" or "Apple Worldwide Developer Relations Certification Authority" for App Store versions. The first entry must either be "Developer ID Application: equinux AG" (VPN Tracker 365), "Developer ID Application: Tower One GmbH" (Mail Designer 365 non-App Store), or "Apple Mac OS Application Signing" (Mail Designer 365 App Store).
    Again, if you see a different entry, please contact us.



    If you have received this error message, please carry out the following steps to fix the problem:
    1. Log out of VPN Tracker
    2. Quit and restart the app
    3. Ensure you have an internet connection
    4. Log into VPN Tracker again
    5. Retry downloading the connection

    You should now be able to access your files again.

    This error occurs when VPN Tracker lacks the necessary permissions to configure system VPN settings. Possible causes include:

    • An incomplete installation.
    • macOS reaching its limit on VPN configurations due to existing VPN setups from other apps.

    How to Fix:

    1. Check Existing VPN Configurations:

    • Open System Settings and navigate to the VPN section.
    • Review all listed VPN connections, paying special attention to duplicate or outdated configurations.
    • Remove unnecessary VPNs, particularly those from other apps.
    • If you only have one other VPN configuration listed, remove it.

    2. Restart VPN Tracker and Add the VPN Configuration:

    • Launch VPN Tracker and attempt to add the VPN configuration again.
    • If macOS prompts for permission to modify VPN configurations, click "Allow"—it should not require an admin password at this stage.
    • Try connecting through VPN Tracker again. It should now work without any issues.

    3. Restore Other VPN Connections:

    • Open the other VPN app whose configuration you removed earlier.
    • The app should prompt you to re-add its VPN configuration.

    By following these steps, you should be able to resolve the permission error and successfully establish a VPN connection using VPN Tracker.

    On rare occasions, the VPN Tracker support team might ask you to record the network traffic between your VPN gateway and your Mac. Here's how to do that:

    First, you need to know the hostname or IP address of your VPN gateway. You can see it in the status page of your connection (the hostname is in the third column), or by editing your connection.

    Then, follow these steps:

    • Open Terminal.app, which you can find via Finder in Applications > Utilities.
    • Enter the following command, and replace [hostname] with the hostname or IP adress of your VPN gateway:
      sudo tcpdump -i any host [hostname] -w ~/Desktop/traffic.pcap
    • You will be asked for a password: this is the password of your Mac user account. You get asked for it because recording network traffic requires elevated privileges.
    • After entering the password, the command appears to hang. It is now recording traffic until you press Ctrl+C (but please don't press that yet).
    • If you see the command prompt again you have likely entered the wrong password. Please run the command again (Tip: press the arrow-up key to recall the command).
    • Go back to VPN Tracker and start the connection you might experience trouble with.
    • After you have reproduced the problem (for example, after the connection failed to connect), go back the Terminal.app window in which tcpdump is running.
    • Press Ctrl+C to stop the recording.
    • On you desktop, there's now a file traffic.pcap. Please send this file to equinux support.
      If you are experiencing problems with your FortiSSL connection, it might be related to the “Strict Host Check.” You can try disabling this setting on the gateway.

      Follow these steps:

      To disable the host check on the FortiSSL server side, you can turn off the “Host Check” in the SSL-VPN settings.

      Steps:

      1. Log in to the FortiGate CLI or GUI (Command Line Interface or Graphical User Interface).
      2. Enter the following command in the CLI to disable the host check:

      config vpn ssl settings
      set host-check disable
      end

      This will disable the strict host check for SSL-VPN clients.
      Sometimes decrypting the content can fail due to incompatible keys after a system failure. Try syncing the connection again from the app. If that fails delete the connection and create a new one.
      1. Open the connection in VPN Tracker and go to “Edit > Setup > Advanced Settings”.
      2. Navigate to “Traffic Control” and add the Fritzbox’s IP range, e.g., 192.168.178.0/24, under “Use VPN for the following addresses only”.

      “Use VPN for the following addresses only”
      192.168.178.0/24

      3. If your Fritzbox uses a different IP range, enter the corresponding range instead.
      Some VPN gateways are configured to route all your internet traffic through the VPN, rather than just traffic intended for specific networks. With VPN Tracker 365, you have the flexibility to control which traffic is sent over these VPN connections using a feature called Traffic Control.

      Follow these steps to configure Traffic Control:

      • Edit your connection.
      • Go to Advanced Options.
      • Locate and expand the Traffic Control section.
      • From the drop-down menu, choose “Only use VPN for the following addresses”.
      • In the text field, specify the network you want to access through the VPN. For example, enter 192.168.123.0/24.
      • Save your changes.

      By configuring Traffic Control, you ensure that only the specified traffic is routed through the VPN.

      Yes, you can print to your home printer while connected to VPN Tracker away from home. To ensure a seamless remote printing experience, follow these steps:

      1. Assign a Static IP Address to Your Printer

      • Access your router’s web interface by entering its IP address in a web browser (e.g., 192.168.1.1 or 192.168.0.1).
      • Navigate to the LAN or DHCP settings.
      • Assign a static IP address to your printer (e.g., 192.168.50.100) so it remains consistent.

      2. Configure Your Mac for Remote Printing

      • Connect to your > Printers & Scanners on your Mac.
      • Click "+" to add a new printer.
      • Select the IP tab and enter the static IP address assigned to your printer.
      • Choose the correct printer driver to ensure compatibility.

      3. Avoid Bonjour for Remote Printing

      Apple’s Bonjour service helps detect devices on local networks but does not work reliably over VPN due to its reliance on multicast DNS (mDNS). Instead, always connect to your printer using its static IP address.

      4. Check Firewall & Network Settings

      • Ensure that your firewall allows print traffic over VPN.
      • Verify that the printer and VPN settings do not block remote connections.

      By setting up a static IP address, avoiding Bonjour, and ensuring proper firewall rules, you can print documents remotely via VPN Tracker without issues.

      The VPN Tracker World Connect App from the App Store lets you connect to VPN servers in countries around the world – but cannot connect to company VPNs.

      VPN Tracker from our website (www.vpntracker.com/download) connects to hundreds of VPN devices and gateways in your office – AND also connects to VPN servers globally.

      For the most functionality, download VPN Tracker from our website.
      You can recover a deleted Keychain or missing Keychain data using Time Machine backups if you have them set up. Here’s a step-by-step guide:
      1. Verify Backups Are Available:
      Ensure that Time Machine or another backup system has been configured on your Mac. Without a backup, recovery of deleted data may not be possible.
      2. Locate Keychain Files:
      Keychain data is stored in ~/Library/Keychains/. To access it:
      • Open Finder.
      • Press Shift + Command + G and type ~/Library/Keychains/.
      • Press Return to open the folder.
      3. Launch Time Machine:
      • With the Keychains folder open, click the Time Machine icon in the menu bar or open it from the Applications folder.
      • Navigate through your backups until you locate the version of the Keychain files you want to restore.
      4. Restore Keychain Files:
      • Select the desired Keychain files.
      • Click Restore to place them back into the Keychains folder.
      5. Reintegrate the Keychain:
      After restoring, open Keychain Access (via Spotlight or Applications > Utilities) to verify the recovered Keychain data. If the Keychain doesn’t automatically appear, use the File > Add Keychain option in Keychain Access to manually import it.
      6. Check for iCloud Sync:
      If you use iCloud Keychain, check if your missing passwords have synced back automatically. Ensure iCloud Keychain is enabled under System Settings > Apple ID > iCloud > Passwords and Keychain.
      Certain SonicWall releases have known issues with DHCP IP assignment for clients, which can result in duplicate IP address assignments. To troubleshoot this, try the following:

      1. Connect to the VPN with the computer experiencing the connection problem.
      2. Note its assigned client IP address.
      3. Ping this IP address from within your LAN.
      4. Disconnect the VPN on the problematic computer. You will likely observe that the ping continues, indicating that another device is using this IP address.

      Troubleshooting Steps:

      1. Identify the computer that is using the duplicate IP address. Often, a computer within the LAN is already using an IP address that falls within the DHCP range of the SonicWall.
      2. If step 1 does not resolve the issue, restart the SonicWall.
      The PPTP protocol consists of two components: one using TCP transport (also used for websites) and another using GRE transport. The latter often causes issues.

      If your internet provider or router does not fully support GRE, VPN Tracker can initiate the TCP part but fails to receive a response when the GRE connection starts.

      To check if your network supports PPTP connections, use the VPN Tracker Connection Checker. If the result does not indicate a successful connection, verify your internet setup.

      Some routers require “PPTP Passthrough” to be enabled for GRE to function correctly. Check your router’s manual for instructions.

      Yes, NAT-Traversal is supported by VPN Tracker. VPN Tracker supports the current version of NAT-Traversal that uses UDP encapsulated packets on port 4500 (RFC 3947), as well as previous draft versions that send UDP encapsulated packets on port 500. In addition, Cisco's UDP encapsulation is also supported.

      NAT-Traversal helps to establish VPNs from networks behind routers that perform Network Address Translation (NAT). Such routers can be found in many places: home DSL routers, wireless hotspots, Internet cafes, hotels, airports, etc. Many mobile ISPs (3G modems) also require NAT-Traversal to be used.

      VPN Tracker automatically recognizes if NAT-Traversal is needed, and turns it on and off accordingly. It can even test your local router to see what NAT-Traversal method works best with it.

      SonicWall's SonicOS 6.5.4.15-116n update breaks SSL-VPN connections with SonicWall Mobile Connect and VPN Tracker 365.
      In VPN Tracker's log, you can also see the error message:
      LCP: PPP peer accepted proposal but also modified it which isn't allowed.

      Please update your Sonicwall to at least SonicOS 6.5.4.15-117n to fix this problem. For more information, please visit: https://www.sonicwall.com/support/knowledge-base/mobile-connect-breaks-after-upgrade-to-sonicos-6-5-4-15/240903132324983
      Disclaimer: Please be aware that resetting your Personal Safe will delete all of your VPN connections and passwords. You will need to start from scratch, building up your connections.

      Before you perform this step, please first review the following FAQ for possible restore options: I changed my password and now get an error message when I try to use my Personal Safe

      If you do not have your Personal Safe recovery key or can't retrieve your old equinux ID password, follow the recovery steps in VPN Tracker instead.

      1. If you have connections or Shortcuts on your Mac that are stored in your Personal Safe, deactivate Personal Safe in preferences and create a local copy of your connections
      2. Go to your Personal Safe webpage and delete your user keys: https://my.vpntracker.com/user/sync/keys
      3. Sign out from your VPN Tracker account on your Mac, open Keychain Access, and delete the entry "Connection Safe Master Key."
      4. Then sign back in and add a connection to your safe.
      5. Don't forget to write down the new recovery key and keep it in a safe place. This will enable you to log in if you ever lose your login details.
      With VPN Tracker, you can easily create a dedicated Team for each client. This way, only the connections shared within that team are visible to its members, keeping your personal and other client connections completely private and separate.

      Here's how to set it up →

      If you're having trouble resizing the VPN Tracker window—especially if it seems to “bounce back” when you try to make it smaller—this is likely due to macOS’s built-in window management features.

      Here’s what you can do:

      1. Disable macOS window tiling:
        macOS Sequoia includes automatic window tiling, which can cause a bounce-back effect when resizing, making windows jump back after adjusting their size. This can interfere with custom window resizing. To turn off automatic window tiling:
        • Go to System Settings > Desktop & Dock > Windows
        • Disable the following options:
          • “Drag windows to screen edges to tile”
          • “Drag windows to menu bar to fill screen”
          • “Hold ⌥ key while dragging windows to tile”
          • “Tiled windows have margins”

        After turning off these settings, you should be able to resize the VPN Tracker window more freely.

      2. Alternatively, you can minimize the VPN Tracker window to show only the left sidebar:
        To do this, click the small button at the bottom-right of the window (see screenshot below). This will shrink the window down to just the sidebar.
      All equinux accounts support secure two-factor authentication (2FA) as an additional layer of security for your sensitive data.

      To set up 2FA for your account, log in to id.equinux.com and go to the tab Multifactor Authentication. Here you will find the QR code / authentication key needed to set up 2FA for your equinux account with your OTP solution.




      equinux 2FA supports all major authentication and password apps, including:
      • Google Authenticator
      • Microsoft Authenticator
      • Twilio Authy
      • 1Password
      • FreeOTP
      • Bitwarden

      Dynamic DNS (DynDNS or DDNS) is a service that assigns a fixed domain name (like yourname.dnsprovider.com) to your home internet connection. This is especially useful when your internet provider assigns you a dynamic IP address – meaning your address can change at any time, such as after a router reboot or every 24 hours.

      Why does this matter for remote access?

      If you’re trying to connect to your home network remotely (via VPN, remote desktop, file server, etc.), these changing IP addresses can make it difficult to reach your router reliably. DynDNS solves this problem by keeping track of your current IP and automatically updating your domain name to match.

      In simple terms

      Think of DynDNS like a postal forwarding service when you move — instead of sending your VPN request to an outdated address, it always forwards it to your current one. That way, you can connect to your home network even if your IP has changed, without needing to check or reconfigure anything manually.

      What happens when using Dynamic DNS?

      • You connect using the same hostname every time (e.g. yourname.dnsprovider.com)
      • Your current IP address is updated automatically in the background
      • You avoid connection issues caused by changing IPs
      • Remote access becomes stable and hassle-free
      No, that’s not possible. Due to how WireGuard works, each person needs their own personal connection. Sharing a connection between multiple users is not allowed and will lead to connection issues. Similarly, if an employee wants to use the VPN on more than one device (e.g. Mac and iPhone), they will need a separate connection for each device.

      With my.vpntracker.com, you can manage all your connections centrally: For example, you can create 100 WireGuard connections in advance, upload them, and assign them to employees and their devices as needed (e.g. Mr. Miller/Mac and Mr. Miller/iPhone).

      The WireGuard protocol itself does not support 2-Factor Authentication (2FA) for VPN connections. However, when using WireGuard connections with VPN Tracker, you can enhance your overall security by enabling 2FA for your VPN Tracker account.

      This means your VPN configuration and access are protected with an additional layer of security, while your WireGuard connections remain end-to-end encrypted for maximum protection.

      Using VPN Tracker is the best way to benefit from the performance and security of WireGuard, along with modern account-level protections like 2FA.

      VPN Tracker is a professional VPN client for macOS and iOS, designed for businesses. It provides secure and reliable remote access to internal company networks from any Mac, iPhone and iPad.
      Yes, VPN Tracker supports a wide range of protocols including IPsec, L2TP, Cisco EasyVPN, OpenVPN, IKEv2, and SSL VPNs — fully compatible with most enterprise-grade firewalls and routers.
      Absolutely. VPN Tracker is the macOS alternative to Windows-based VPN clients like Cisco AnyConnect, Shrew Soft VPN, FortiClient, GlobalProtect (Palo Alto Networks), SonicWall Mobile Connect, WatchGuard Mobile VPN, OpenVPN, Check Point Endpoint Security VPN, and F5 BIG-IP Edge Client, and others, with added features tailored for Apple devices.
      Yes, VPN Tracker is fully optimized for Apple Silicon Macs, including M1 and M2 chips, offering high performance and long battery life.
      Yes. VPN Tracker is built for modern IT environments with support for certificate-based authentication, MFA, and integration with enterprise-grade security policies.
      As businesses transition away from Windows 10, many are adopting macOS. VPN Tracker ensures these organizations can maintain secure, enterprise-grade VPN access for remote work, IT administration, and field staff.
      Yes, VPN Tracker offers team management features including configuration deployment, license control, and access auditing for IT admins.
      Usually not. VPN Tracker works with your existing VPN infrastructure. It supports configurations for SonicWall, Fortinet, Cisco, Sophos, and many others out of the box.
      VPN Tracker offers detailed setup guides and import tools to help migrate VPN configurations from Windows clients to Mac quickly and securely.
      Yes, absolutely! Our support team is happy to assist you. Click here to open the contact form.
      No, macOS does not support establishing a VPN tunnel within an existing VPN connection (“tunnel-in-tunnel”). If you’re already connected to a VPN, the system typically prevents setting up a second VPN tunnel through that connection.

      Background:
      This is a limitation of macOS itself, not of VPN Tracker. It affects use cases such as:
      • Trying to connect to a second VPN through an already active VPN tunnel.
      • Attempting to route site-to-site connections through an existing user VPN session.
      Disabling this behavior entirely is not possible. VPN Tracker waits a certain amount of time for a response from the authentication server. If there’s no response, the app cannot know whether the password was incorrect or if the server is simply slow to respond—so it asks for the password again, just in case.

      Possible alleviation of the problem:
      Increase the timeout value to give VPN Tracker more time to wait for a server response. You can adjust this under:
      “Credential Prompt Timeout” (German: Anzeigedauer für Authentifizierungsdialoge).

      This helps reduce unnecessary password prompts when connecting to slow or overloaded servers.

      If you’ve signed up for a free or discounted VPN Tracker trial and don’t wish to continue with a paid subscription, you can cancel it easily from your account.

      How to cancel your VPN Tracker trial:

      1. Log in to your account at my.vpntracker.com.
      2. Go to “My Plans and Billing” in the sidebar.
      3. Locate your active trial plan.
      4. Click “Cancel Trial”.

      Important information about trial cancellations:

      • If you signed up for a free or discounted trial and don’t want to be charged, make sure to cancel at least 24 hours before your trial ends.
      • Canceling your trial will end your access to the trial immediately.

      Once canceled, the plan will no longer renew, and your payment method will not be charged.

      Having trouble with your connection setup?

      We're happy to help you get your connection up and running. Just contact our Support Team

      Load more entries
      FAQ
      Download
      Nachricht senden
      Wenn du eine Veranstaltung planst (z. B. ein Webinar) und dafür einen Kalender-Termin erstellt hast, ist es sinnvoll, diesen mit den entsprechenden Teilnehmern zu teilen, damit sie die Veranstaltung nicht vergessen.

      Dies kannst du per E-Mail machen.

      Unten findest du eine kurze Anleitung, wie du von deinem Mail Designer 365 Design auf einen Google, Apple oder Outlook Kalender-Termin verlinken kannst.

      Google Kalender


      Um ein Google Kalender-Event mit deinen Subscribern zu teilen, musst du zuerst einen Link für das Event erstellen, den du in der Mail verwenden kannst.

      So geht's:

      1. Füge die Veranstaltung deinem Google Kalender hinzu.
      2. Klicke auf "Optionen" > "Termin veröffentlichen"
      3. Kopiere den Event-Link, um ihn in deiner Mail zu verwenden. Wichtig: Achte darauf, dass der entsprechende Kalender öffentlich ist, damit alle Empfänger das Event sehen können.





      Jetzt kannst du den Link in deine Mail Designer 365 Vorlage einfügen - entweder als Text-Link oder als Button:


      Apple und Outlook Kalender


      Für Apple und Outlook Kalender musst du eine .ics Datei für das Event erstellen.

      Ziehe das Event per Drag & Drop aus dem Kalender auf deinen Schreibtisch, um die Datei zu erstellen:



      Lade die Datei zu einem Online-File-Hosting-Dienst hoch (z. B. Google Drive). Erstelle mit einem Rechtsklick auf die Datei einen Link, den du in deinem E-Mail-Design nutzen kannst:



      Nicht vergessen - die Datei muss öffentlich verfügbar sein, damit auch andere Leute sie öffnen und runterladen können:



      Jetzt kannst du einen Link auf die .ics Datei an deine Subscriber schicken, den sie anklicken können, um die Datei herunterzuladen und das Event zur ihrem eigenen Kalender hinzuzufügen.

      Tip: Dieser Tool bietet noch einen Weg, um eigene Kalender-Links für deine E-Mails zu erstellen. Gib deine Event-Informationen ein und wähle deinen bevorzugten Kalender-Dienst (z. B. Google, Outlook, Office 365, Yahoo) aus. Nun wird gleich einen einzigartigen Link für dein Event erstellt, den du in deinem Mail Designer 365 Design verwenden kannst.
      Das Hinzufügen von abgerundeten Ecken zum Hintergrund eines Textbereichs wird nicht direkt unterstützt. Um diesen Effekt trotzdem herbeizuführen, ziehen Sie ein Viereck in einen Bildbereich. Diese Form finden Sie unter der Kategorie "Grundformen".


      Passen Sie die Größe des Bildbereichs sowie die Größe der Form an Ihre Bedürfnisse an. Sie können auch die Farbe der Form ändern. Auf der rechten Seite können Sie die Ecken anpassen, indem Sie die Rundung bewegen.


      Ziehen Sie dann ein Textobjekt in den Bildbereich, um einen Textfeld-Effekt zu erstellen. Sie finden Textobjekte unter dem "T" -Symbol innerhalb der Registerkarte "Inhalt". Positionieren Sie das Textfeld und ändern Sie dessen Schriftart, Schriftartdicke, Schriftartgröße, Schriftfarbe, etc., nach Ihrem belieben.


      Bitte beachten Sie die folgende Seite für weitere Informationen, wie Sie den Effekt von abgerundeten Textfeld-Ecken erstellen können:


      Wir haben es so einfach wie möglich gemacht, deine Domain und E-Mail-Adresse für den Versand von Mailings über Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub einzurichten.

      Während des Setups sind einige technische Schritte erforderlich. Der Einrichtungsprozess wurde aber benutzerfreundlich gestaltet und stellt dadurch sicher, dass du die obligatorischen Sicherheitsmechanismen DKIM, SPF und DMARC mit möglichst wenigem Aufwand konfigurieren kannst. Wir empfehlen dir, alle drei Verfahren an deiner Domain zu hinterlegen, damit deine Mails bei allen Empfängern ankommen.

      Falls du bei der Einrichtung Hilfe benötigst, kannst du dich an dein IT-Admin-Team wenden oder Kontakt zu unserem Support Team aufnehmen.

      Ready? Los geht's!

      Schritt 1: E-Mail-Adresse hinzufügen und bestätigen

      Bevor du loslegst, achte darauf, dass du bereits ein Mail Designer 365 Team eingerichtet hast. Wenn du noch kein Team erstellt hast, kannst du der Anleitung in dieser FAQ folgen.

      • Gehe zu Einstellungen > „Absenderadressen“.
      • Füge auf dieser Seite einen neuen Absender hinzu, indem du den Absendernamen und die E-Mail-Adresse eingibst, von der deine Kampagnen gesendet werden sollen.


      • In Kürze erhältst du eine E-Mail mit einem Verifizierungslink für die eingegebene E-Mail-Adresse. Klicke auf den Link, um deine Adresse für den Versand zu verifizieren:




      Schritt 2: Damit deine Mails nicht im Spam landen: DKIM einrichten

      Der nächste wichtige Schritt ist die Erstellung eines DNS-Eintrags für DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail). DKIM solltest du unbedingt einrichten, wenn du vermeiden willst, dass deine Mailings im Spam Ordner landen. Weitere Informationen zu DKIM und warum es wichtig ist, finden Sie in diesem Artikel.

      • In den Projekt Einstellungen sollte unter „Absenderadressen“ im Abschnitt „Domain-Verifizierung“ deine Domain bereits sichtbar sein.
      • Falls du nicht der technische Ansprechpartner für die Domain Konfiguration bist:
        • Klicke in der Spalte „Domain verifiziert“ auf das „DKIM“-Symbol:
        • In dem Fenster das sich öffnet, kannst du unten die Domain Einstellungen an deinen Domain Admin weiterleiten. Hierfür einfach die Email Adresse eingeben und abschicken.
        • Dein Domain Admin erhält dann eine detaillierte Anleitung per Email.
      • Falls du der technische Ansprechpartner für die Domain Konfiguration bist:
        • Bestimme den DNS-Anbieter für deine Domain. Höchstwahrscheinlich hat unser System den Anbieter bereits identifiziert und ihn als „Möglicher Anbieter“ angezeigt, zusammen mit einem Link zum Leitfaden des Anbieters. Wir haben in diesem Artikel auch eine Liste mit Links zu Einrichtungsanleitungen für gängige Anbieter zusammengestellt.
        • Klicke in der Spalte „Domain verifiziert“ auf das „DKIM“-Symbol:


        • Der Wizard generiert einen DKIM-Eintrag für deine Domain und zeigt den erforderlichen Typ, Namen und Wert des Eintrags an. Bitte verwende exakt die angezeigten Daten, um den DNS-Eintrag einzurichten.


        • Abhängig von deinem DNS-Anbieter kann es bis zu 48 Stunden dauern, bis die Änderungen auf unser System und andere Systeme übertragen werden, die diese Informationen abfragen. Wir führen automatisch regelmäßige Prüfungen auf Existenz und Gültigkeit des Datensatzes durch. Du kannst die Prüfung jedoch auch manuell durchführen, indem du auf „Aktualisieren“ klickst:


        • Wenn du die Einrichtung abgeschlossen hast und die Überprüfung erfolgreich ist, wird neben dem DKIM-Symbol ein grünes Häkchen angezeigt:


        Schritt 3: Damit deine Mails nicht im Spam landen: SPF einrichten

        Stellen wir nun sicher, dass deine E-Mails ordnungsgemäß mit SPF (Sender Policy Framework) authentifiziert sind. SPF hilft, E-Mail-Spoofing zu verhindern, indem es angibt, welche Server berechtigt sind, E-Mails in deinem Namen zu versenden. In diesem Artikel lernst du mehr über SPF.

        • Gehe zurück zu „Absenderadressen“.
        • Suche deine Domain unter „Domain Verifizierung“ und klicke auf das „SPF“-Symbol:


        • Gehe als Nächstes zu deinem DNS-Anbieter und erstelle einen SPF-Eintrag für deine Domain. Die genauen Schritte variieren je nach Anbieter. Befolge daher am besten deren Richtlinien.
        • Hinweis: Möglicherweise hast du oder dein Unternehmen bereits einen SPF-Eintrag erstellt. Unser System wird versuchen, den benötigten Teil einzuschließen und den vollständigen Datensatzwert unter Berücksichtigung deines vorherigen Inhalts anzuzeigen. Wenn du genau weißt, was hier zu tun ist, kannst du den vorhandenen Datensatz manuell bearbeiten und den folgenden Teil hinzufügen: include: spf.welovemails.com.
        • Wenn die Überprüfung erfolgreich ist, wird neben dem SPF-Symbol auch ein grünes Häkchen angezeigt:


        Schritt 4: DMARC einrichten

        Die Einrichtung von DMARC (Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting and Conformance) ist zwar nicht zwingend erforderlich, fügt deiner E-Mail-Kommunikation jedoch eine zusätzliche Sicherheitsebene hinzu. Weitere Einzelheiten findest du in diesem speziellen Artikel.

        • Gehe zurück zu „Absenderadressen“ im „Delivery Hub“.
        • Suche deine Domain unter „Domain Verifizierung“ und klicke auf das „DMARC“-Symbol:


        • Erstelle einen DMARC-DNS-Eintrag für deine Domain. Die Einzelheiten dieses Datensatzes hängen von den Richtlinien deiner Organisation ab. Wenn du dir bezüglich DMARC nicht sicher bist, wende dich am besten an dein IT- oder Sicherheitsteam.
        • Verwende entweder den vorgeschlagenen Datensatz oder deine eigenen Werte/Systeme.
        • Wenn die DMARC-Überprüfung erfolgreich ist, wird neben dem DMARC-Symbol ein grünes Häkchen angezeigt:


      Nun hast du alle Kriterien erfüllt und deine E-Mail-Domain ist für den Versand über Delivery Hub verifiziert. Wir wünschen viel Spaß beim Versenden deiner Kampagnen!

      iOS 15 hat mehrere neue Datenschutzfunktionen eingeführt, wie z. B. die 'Mail Privacy Protection'. Bei der Aktivierung dieses Features werden alle Bilder über Proxy-Server von Apple geladen, um die IP-Adresse des Empfängers zu verbergen.

      In unseren Tests hat das ab und zu dazu geführt, dass bestimmte E-Mail-Bilder nicht richtig geladen werden. In dem Fall bekommst du oben in der Mail App den Hinweis "Privates Laden von entfernten Inhalten nicht möglich":



      Wenn du die Bilder in deiner E-Mail nicht laden kannst, kannst du versuchen diese Funktion zu deaktivieren und die Mail nochmal zu verschicken.

      Um Mail Privacy Protection zu deaktiveren, öffne die Einstellungen-App auf deinem iPhone und gehe zu:
      Mail > Datenschutz > Mail-Aktivität schützen

      Du kannst in der Regel nur einen Link pro Bildbereich hinzufügen.



      Wenn du mehrere Aspekten eines Bildbereiches verlinken möchtest, schau dir unser Video-Tutorial an:

      Video-Tutorial:



      {YOUTUBE_zKnpE88y8Tc}

      Dieser Guide bietet dir eine Schritt-für-Schritt-Anleitung, wie du mehrere Links innerhalb eines Bildbereiches verwenden kannst.

      Wenn bei der E-Mail Konto Einrichtung das Passwort (trotz richtiger Eingabe) abgelehnt wird, muss für den gewählten E-Mail Anbieter möglicherweise ein sog. App-spezifisches Passwort eingerichtet werden.

      Wofür brauche ich ein App-spezifisches Passwort? Viele E-Mail Anbieter verlangen jetzt ein eigenes Passwort für Mail-Programme von Drittanbietern. Damit soll die Sicherheit des E-Mail Kontos erhöht werden. Das kann auch der Fall sein, wenn sonst 2-Faktor Authentifizierung nicht aktiviert ist.

      Wenn das der Fall ist, muss in den Einstellungen des E-Mail Anbieters ein App-spezifisches Passwort erzeugt werden, dass dann bei der Konto-Einrichtung in Mail Designer 365 eingegeben werden kann.

      Prüfe bitte in den Kontoeinstellungen bzw. auf den Hilfeseiten deines Mailanbieters, ob das der Fall ist und wie vorzugehen ist.

      Weitere Infos für verschiedene Anbieter

      Um Ihren E-Mail-Newsletter weiterzuleiten, bitte verwenden Sie die Funktionen: "Als Anhang weiterleiten" oder "Umleiten". Dadurch wird sichergestellt, dass das E-Mail-Design beim weiterleiten nicht verändert wird. Verwenden Sie nicht die "E-Mail Weiterleiten" Funktion, welche Sie normalerweise verwenden, um E-Mails weiterzuleiten. Bei einer normalen Weiterleitung gehen E-Mail-Vorlagen regelmäßig kaputt.

      Dies passiert, da der E-Mail Client bei der normalen Weiterleitung einen Platz einfügt um eine Nachricht zu schreiben. Diese zerstört allerdings das HTML Design und wir können das leider nicht verhindern. Daher empfehlen wir die Nutzung der Funktionen "Als Anhang weiterleiten" oder "Umleiten".

      Generell musst du dich nur einmal einloggen, wenn du die App zum ersten mal öffnest. Bitte achte darauf, dass du die aktuellste Version von Mail Designer 365 verwendest.

      Es können Probleme auftreten, wenn dein Mac deine Login-Daten nicht im Schlüsselbund speichert. Damit die App nicht mehr nach deinem Login fragt, kannst du folgendes tun:

      • Beende Mail Designer 365
      • Öffne “Schlüsselbundverwaltung.app”
      • Gib “Mail Designer” oben rechts im Suchfeld ein.
      • Hier findest du den Eintrag “Mail Designer Account.” Mach einen Doppelklick darauf, um mehr Details zu bekommen.
      • Gehe zum Reiter “Zugriff” und prüfe, ob Mail Designer 365 in der Liste “Zugriff von diesen Programmen immer erlauben” erscheint.
      • Wenn Mail Designer 365 nicht in der Liste erscheint, klicke auf “+”, suche nach Mail Designer 365 und füge die App hinzu.
      • Starte die App neu und logge dich nochmals ein, wenn danach gefragt wird.

      Deine Login-Daten sollten ab jetzt auf deinem Mac gespeichert sein. Wenn du immer noch Probleme haben solltest, kontaktiere uns bitte überr support@maildesigner365.com.
      In bestimmten Browsern, wie zum Beispiel Google Chrome, werden gemischte http- und https-Inhalte blockiert.

      Mailchimp hostet die von Mail Designer 365 exportierten Bilder aktuell über http. Wenn dein Browser gemischte http- und https-Inhalte nicht erlaubt, werden die Bilder nicht angezeigt.

      Dieses Problem ist uns bekannt und wir arbeiten gerade zusammen mit dem Mailchimp Team daran, um eine Lösung zu finden.

      Workaround
      Um das Problem zu vermeiden, kannst du deine Browser-Einstellungen aktualiseren, um gemischte Inhalte zuzulassen. Alternativ kannst du auf einen anderen Browser, wie z. B. Safari, umstellen, der gemischte Inhalte erlaubt.
      Mailchimp hat vor kurzem ein paar Änderungen durchgeführt, die für externe Dienste Kompatibilitätsprobleme bei dem Bilderupload verursacht haben.

      Was kann ich tun?
      Die aktuellste Mail Designer 365 Version bietet Support für das neue Mailchimp API. Templates, die mit dieser Version hochgeladen werden, werden nicht betroffen.

      Was mache ich mit meinen alten E-Mail-Templates?
      Falls du Hilfe mit älteren Designs brauchst, die früher zu Mailchimp hochgeladen wurden und jetzt nicht mehr funktionieren, solltest du das Mailchimp Team direkt kontaktieren, um das Problem zu melden. Wir empfehlen generell das alte Design neu hochzuladen.

      Ältere Mail Designer Versionen
      Mailchimp unterstützt ältere versionen von Mail Designer nicht mehr. Dies betrifft beispielsweise Mail Designer 2 und Mail Designer Pro 2. Werden Vorlagen, welche mit einer dieser Versionen erstellt wurden, zu Mailchimp hochgeladen ist es möglich, dass Bilder in der Vorlage fehlen.

      Um die Kompatibilität mit Mailchimp und anderen Versanddiensten sicherzustellen, solltest du auf Mail Designer 365 upgraden.
      Wie viele andere E-Mail-Clients benötigt AOL app-spezifische Passwörter, wenn du deinen AOL E-Mail-Account mit einem anderen Dienst konfigurieren willst.

      Wenn du deinen AOL-Account verwenden willst, um Mails von Mail Designer 365 aus zu versenden, müsstest du hierfür auch ein spezielles Passwort generieren. So geht's:

      1. Logge dich in deinen AOL Account ein und gehe zu deinen Account-Einstellungen
      2. Gehe zu "Account Sicherheit" und klicke "App-Passwörter verwalten."
      3. Wähle "Andere" aus dem Menü und gib einen Namen ein (i.e. Mail Designer 365)
      4. Klicke auf "Erstellen", um ein neues Passwort zu generieren.



      Das neue Passwort musst du dann statt deinem normalen Account-Passwort, dass du beim Login verwendest, eingeben, wenn du deinen AOL Account in Mail Designer 365 für den Versand einrichten willst.

      Nachfolgend haben wir dir eine Liste der bekanntesten Provider zusammengestellt und jeweils einen Link zur Anleitung, wie du DNS Einträge dort verwalten kannst.

      Wenn du deinen Anbieter nicht in der Liste finden kannst, kontaktiere gerne unseren Support und wir unterstützen dich bei der Ermittlung.

      Provider Anleitung
      1&1 IONOS https://www.ionos.de/hilfe/domains/txt-und-srv-records-konfigurieren/txt-records-hinzufuegen-aendern-oder-entfernen/
      123-reg (GoDaddy) https://www.123-reg.co.uk/support/domains/how-do-i-set-up-a-txt-record-on-my-domain-name/ (en)
      Amazon AWS Route53 https://docs.aws.amazon.com/de_de/Route53/latest/DeveloperGuide/resource-record-sets-creating.html
      Bluehost https://www.bluehost.com/help/article/dns-management-add-edit-or-delete-dns-entries (en)
      Cloudflare https://www.cloudflare.com/de-de/learning/dns/dns-records/dns-dkim-record/
      Domain.com https://www.domain.com/help/article/dns-management-how-to-update-txt-spf-records
      Domaindiscount24 (Key-Systems GmbH) https://support.domaindiscount24.com/hc/de/articles/4409774008593-Wie-erstelle-ich-einen-TXT-Record
      domainfactory GmbH https://www.df.eu/de/support/df-faq/domains/nameserver/#accordion-1384
      EuroDNS https://help.eurodns.com/s/article/wie-konfiguriere-ich-txt-eintrge?language=de
      Fasthosts https://help.fasthosts.co.uk/app/answers/detail/a_id/9 (en)
      Gandi.net https://docs.gandi.net/en/domain_names/common_operations/dns_records.html#editing-your-dns-records (en)
      GoDaddy https://de.godaddy.com/help/txt-record-hinzufugen-19232
      Google Workspace Admin https://support.google.com/a/answer/180504
      Hetzner Online GmbH https://docs.hetzner.com/de/dns-console/dns/manage-records/managing-txt-records/
      Host Europe GmbH https://www.hosteurope.de/faq/domains/verwaltung/nameserver-eintraege/
      Hostinger https://support.hostinger.com/en/articles/4469063-how-to-add-and-remove-txt-records-in-cpanel (en)
      INWX GmbH & Co. KG https://kb.inwx.com/de-de/3-nameserver/107-wie-richte-ich-einen-txt-eintrag-ein
      Microsoft https://learn.microsoft.com/de-de/defender-office-365/email-authentication-dkim-configure?source=recommendations
      Name.com https://www.name.com/support/articles/115004972547-adding-a-txt-record (en)
      Namecheap https://www.namecheap.com/support/knowledgebase/article.aspx/317/2237/how-do-i-add-txtspfdkimdmarc-records-for-my-domain/ (en)
      Netcup GmbH https://helpcenter.netcup.com/de/wiki/domain/dns-einstellungen/
      Network Solutions https://www.networksolutions.com/manage-it/dns.jsp (en)
      OVH https://help.ovhcloud.com/csm/de-dns-edit-dns-zone?id=kb_article_view&sysparm_article=KB0051668
      Key-Systems GmbH (now part of CentralNic Group) Nicht vorhanden
      InterNetworX Nicht vorhanden
      Domain.com Nicht vorhanden
      Schlund Technologies GmbH (now part of GoDaddy) Nicht vorhanden
      Reg.eu (Openprovider) https://support.openprovider.eu/hc/en-us/articles/216648808-DNS-Records (en)
      InternetX GmbH Nicht vorhanden
      Strato AG https://www.strato.de/faq/domains/was-ist-der-txt-record-und-wie-kann-ich-ihn-verwenden/
      united-domains AG https://www.united-domains.de/help/faq-article/wie-kann-ich-einen-txt-eintrag-fuer-meine-domain-hinterlegen/
      Variomedia AG https://www.variomedia.de/faq/Was-sind-TXT-Eintraege-und-wie-funktionieren-sie/article/361
      World4You Internet Services GmbH https://www.world4you.com/faq/de/domains/faq.dns-records.html
      Falls Sie oder einer Ihrer Empfänger einen Newsletter auf einem Retina Display ansehen (z.B. iPhone, Mac oder iPad), kann es passieren, dass Bilder mit geringerer Auflösung verschwommen und unscharf aussehen.

      Um dies zu verhindern, erhalten Sie beim erstellen Ihrer Newsletter die folgende Fehleranzeigen, wenn Sie ein Bild einfügen, welches eine zu niedrige Auflösung hat:




      Um sicherzustellen, dass Ihre Bilder immer auf allen Geräten optimal aussehen, sollten Sie darauf achten, immer hochauflösende Bilder zu verwenden. Eine Alternative wäre es Bilder mit geringerer Auflösung zu verkleinern, damit diese immer scharf aussehen.
      Shopify bietet eine große Auswahl an Platzhalter-Tags - auch Liquid-Variablen genannt -, die du in deinen E-Mail-Benachrichtigungen verwenden kannst.

      Du kannst reguläre Variablen, wie z. B. Store-Name, Kunden-E.Mail-Adresse, Bestellnummer, usw. in einen Mail Designer 365 Text-Layoutblock einfügen, um deine Templates speziell für Shopify anzupassen.

      Hier findest du eine Übersicht aller Benachrichtigungsvariablen von Shopify.

      Achte jedoch darauf, dass einige längere, komplexere Variablen, wie z. B. Rabatt-Eigenschaften, die über mehreren Zeilen gehen, zu Layoutproblemen führen könnten.

      Aus diesem Grund raten wir davon ab, komplexere Platzhalter in deinen Mail Designer 365 Templates einzubauen. Wenn du bereits über fortgeschrittene HTML-Kenntnisse verfügst, könntest du versuchen, den exportierten Code selbst zu bearbeiten. Für E-Mail-Designs, die außerhalb von Mail Designer 365 bearbeitet werden, können wir aber aktuell keinen Support anbieten.
      Nicht alle Schriften sind auf allen Geräten verfügbar. Aus diesem Grund unterstützt Mail Designer 365 es, Ersatzschriften zu verwenden, die ein E-Mail-Programm darstellen kann, wenn die gewünschte Schrift nicht verfügbar ist. Wir empfehlen, immer zumindest eine E-Mail-sichere Schrift als Ersatz auszuwählen.

      E-Mail-sichere Schriften sind Schriften, die auf beinahe allen gängigen Geräten vorhanden sind. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel für Ihren Text eine Schrift ausgewählt haben, die auf macOS verfügbar ist aber nicht auf iOS, dann werden Sie einen Unterschied in der Textdarstellung auf beiden Geräten erkennen. Verwenden Sie dagegen eine Schrift, die auf beiden Plattformen vorhanden sind wird der Text gleich dargestellt. Sie können außerdem Web Fonts benutzen, die vom Empfänger-E-Mail-Programm automatisch heruntergeladen werden können. Die meisten E-Mail-Programme unterstützen Web Fonts, außer Outlook.
      Sehr lange Newsletter werden in Gmail abgeschnitten. Das kann passieren, wenn die generierte HTML Datei zu groß ist. Hier sind einige Tipps, um das HTML-Dokument möglichst klein zu halten:
      • Ganz allgemein sollte versucht werden, die Anzahl der Layoutblöcke zu verringern. Jeder Block benötigt eine gewisse Struktur, die entsprechend Platz im HTML verbraucht. Durch das Verringern der Anzahl der Layoutblöcke wird dieser Speicherverbrauch reduziert.
      • Es sollte vermieden werden, Blöcke zu wiederholen, und Lösungen für das „Zusammenführen“ von Blöcken zu finden. Zum Beispiel sollten keine zwei Abstandsblöcke (oder mehr) aufeinander folgen: stattdessen sollte man nur einen Abstandsblock verwenden und dessen Höhe entsprechend anpassen.
      • Manchmal ist es möglich, die Nutzung von Abstandselementen komplett zu vermeiden. Man kann zum Beispiel zusätzlichen Platz in nahegelegene Bildbereiche einfügen, in Textbereichen auf Abstände „Vor dem Absatz/Nach dem Absatz“ in den Stilen zurückgreifen oder einfach Leerzeilen einfügen.
      • Anstatt mehrere aufeinanderfolgende Textblöcke zu nutzen kann man häufig nur einen Block nutzen und die einzelnen Absätze mittels „Stile“ anpassen.
      • Blöcke zu trennen (Änderungen vornehmen, die nur die Mobil- oder Desktopversion betreffen) sollte vermieden werden. Ein getrennter Block besteht aus zwei Blöcken, einer für Desktop- und einer für die Mobilansicht. Sie verbrauchen mehr Platz als ein Block, der sowohl in der Desktop- als auch Mobilansicht der gleiche ist.

      E-Mails sind das Lebenselixier der modernen Kommunikation, aber ihre Allgegenwärtigkeit macht sie auch zu einem Hauptziel für Cyberkriminelle, die täuschen, betrügen oder stören wollen. Um sich vor diesen Bedrohungen zu schützen und die Integrität Ihrer E-Mail-Kommunikation sicherzustellen, gibt es ein leistungsstarkes Tool namens DMARC (Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance).

      Die Herausforderung des E-Mail-Identitätsbetrugs

      Bevor wir uns mit DMARC befassen, ist es wichtig, die Herausforderungen der E-Mail-Kommunikation zu verstehen. E-Mails durchlaufen auf ihrem Weg zum Empfänger mehrere Server und Netzwerke und bieten böswilligen Akteuren zahlreiche Möglichkeiten, den Absender zu manipulieren oder sich als Absender auszugeben.

      DMARC: Ihr E-Mail-Sicherheitswächter

      DMARC steht für Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting and Conformance und ist ein umfassendes E-Mail-Authentifizierungsprotokoll zur Bekämpfung von E-Mail-Identitätsfälschungen, Phishing-Angriffen und anderem E-Mail-basierten Betrug.

      Wie DMARC funktioniert

      DMARC baut auf den Grundlagen von SPF und DKIM auf, bringt die E-Mail-Authentifizierung jedoch auf eine ganz neue Ebene:

      1. Richtlinienerklärung: Der Domänenbesitzer (der Absender) veröffentlicht einen DNS-Eintrag, der angibt, wie E-Mails von seiner Domäne behandelt werden sollen, wenn sie die SPF- oder DKIM-Prüfungen nicht bestehen. Dieser DNS-Eintrag enthält DMARC-Richtlinieneinstellungen.
      2. E-Mail-Empfang: Wenn eine E-Mail vom E-Mail-Server des Empfängers empfangen wird, führt dieser wie gewohnt SPF- und DKIM-Prüfungen durch. Wenn diese Prüfungen fehlschlagen, konsultiert der Server den DMARC-Datensatz des Absenders.
      3. DMARC-Verifizierung: DMARC weist den Server des Empfängers an, wie mit E-Mails umzugehen ist, die die SPF- oder DKIM-Prüfungen nicht bestehen. Der Absender kann diese Fehler überwachen, verdächtige E-Mails unter Quarantäne stellen oder sie direkt ablehnen.
      4. Berichterstellung: DMARC liefert wertvolles Feedback, indem es Berichte über E-Mail-Authentifizierungsaktivitäten erstellt. Mithilfe dieser Berichte können Domaininhaber ihre E-Mail-Sicherheit überwachen und verbessern.

      Die Bedeutung von DMARC

      1. Schutz vor Identitätsdiebstahl: DMARC ist ein hervorragender Schutz gegen E-Mail-Identitätsbetrug. Es stellt sicher, dass E-Mails, die angeblich von Ihrer Domain stammen, tatsächlich legitim sind, was es für Cyberkriminelle äußerst schwierig macht, sich als Sie auszugeben.
      2. Erhöhte E-Mail-Vertrauenswürdigkeit: Die Implementierung von DMARC erhöht die Vertrauenswürdigkeit Ihrer E-Mails. E-Mail-Anbieter erkennen Ihre E-Mails eher als sicher und stellen sie dem Posteingang des Empfängers zu.
      3. Reduzierte Phishing-Risiken: DMARC ist eine starke Abschreckung gegen Phishing-Angriffe. Durch die Verringerung der Erfolgsquote solcher Angriffe werden Einzelpersonen und Organisationen vor potenziellem Schaden geschützt.
      4. Reputationsmanagement: DMARC hilft, den Ruf Ihrer Domain zu schützen. Dadurch wird sichergestellt, dass Ihre legitimen E-Mails nicht durch betrügerische E-Mails verwässert werden, wodurch das Vertrauen in Ihre Marke oder Ihr Unternehmen gewahrt bleibt.

      Schlussfolgerung

      In einer Zeit, in der E-Mail-Bedrohungen weit verbreitet und ausgefeilt sind, erweist sich DMARC als ultimativer Schutzengel der E-Mail-Authentizität. Obwohl es diskret im Hintergrund agiert, ist DMARC ein wirksames Instrument im Kampf gegen Cyber-Bedrohungen. Die Implementierung wird Einzelpersonen, Unternehmen und E-Mail-Dienstanbietern dringend empfohlen, da sie einen robusten Schutz gegen E-Mail-Imitationen bietet und die allgemeine Sicherheit der E-Mail-Kommunikation erhöht. Wenn Sie das nächste Mal eine E-Mail senden oder empfangen, seien Sie sich darüber im Klaren, dass DMARC sorgfältig daran arbeitet, Sie vor E-Mail-basierter Täuschung und Betrug in der riesigen digitalen Landschaft zu schützen.

      GIFs werden von den meisten modernen E-Mail-Apps unterstützt aber manche Versionen von Outlook zeigen nur das erste Einzelbild der GIF an.

      Aktuell kommt dieses Problem in Outlook 2007, 2010 und 2013 vor. Die neuesten Versionen von Outlook 365 unterstützen GIFs mittlerweile jedoch auch.
      Ein Mail Designer 365 Team ist der erste Schritt zu einer effektiven Zusammenarbeit für E-Mail-Kampagnen. Alle Mail Designer 365 Teams profitieren von exklusiven Funktionen, die dir helfen, deinen Kampagnen-Workflow zu verbessern.

      Um ein Team einzurichten, gehe zu deinem my.maildesigner365 Account und logge dich mit deiner equinux-ID und deinem Passwort ein.

      Für neue Benutzer:innen wird automatisch ein Team erstellt, dem du sofort Mitglieder hinzufügen kannst.

      Über das Einstellungen-Symbol gelangst du zur Übersichtsseite deines Teams:



      Gehe von hier aus zum Reiter „Mitglieder“ und klicke auf „Mitglieder einladen“.



      Gib die E-Mail-Adresse(n) der Kolleg:innen ein, die du ins Team einladen möchtest, und klicke auf „Einladen“. Du kannst bis zu 10 Teammitglieder kostenlos einladen!



      Teammitglieder können deine Einladung annehmen, indem sie auf den Link in der E-Mail klicken.

      Sobald du Teammitglieder eingeladen hast, kannst du Mail Designer 365 Campaigns im vollen Schwung genießen, um E-Mail-Kampagnen zusammen zu besprechen, freizugeben und zu verschicken. Jetzt loslegen!
      Alle Apple Abos werden in iTunes verwaltet.


      Mit diesem Link kommst du direkt zu deiner Profil-Verwaltung:

      https://apple.co/2Th4vqI



      Dort findest du unter 'Abos' alle laufenden Abos und kannst die automatische Verlängerung deaktivieren.
      Manche E-Mail-Clients versuchen, Newsletter automatisch für den Dark Mode anzupassen, indem sie die Farben im Design einfach invertieren. So kann es passieren, dass dunkle Texte in Weiß dargestellt werden – auch dann, wenn der Hintergrund ebenfalls weiß ist.

      Wenn das passiert, sieht es so aus, als würden manche Abschnitte in dem Design fehlen. Aktuell kann dies bei den mobilen Apps von Gmail und Outlook vorkommen.

      Unsere Entwickler haben dieses Problem bereits bei den jeweiligen App-Herstellern gemeldet und gefragt, ob hier eine bessere Lösung für den automatischen Wechsel zwischen Light Mode und Dark Mode gefunden werden kann.

      Bis dahin ist eine mögliche Lösung, eine Farbkombination zu finden, die in jeder Situation gut lesbar ist: z.B. statt schwarzer Textfarbe ein dunkles Grau mit 25% bis 50% Helligkeit:




      Daraus wird in den betreffenden Email Apps im Darkmode ein Grau, welches man gut lesen kann:






      Weitere Informationen:
      https://litmus.com/blog/the-ultimate-guide-to-dark-mode-for-email-marketers

      Die Anatomie einer E-Mail

      Bevor wir uns mit DKIM befassen, wollen wir kurz verstehen, wie E-Mails funktionieren. Wenn Sie eine E-Mail versenden, ist es wie das Versenden eines digitalen Briefes. Es durchläuft verschiedene Server und Netzwerke, bevor es seinen beabsichtigten Empfänger erreicht. Jeder Server, den die E-Mail durchläuft, kann potenziell eine Schwachstelle darstellen, an der böswillige Akteure den Inhalt der E-Mail manipulieren oder sich als legitime Absender ausgeben könnten.

      DKIM: die digitale Signatur der E-Mail

      DKIM steht für DomainKeys Identified Mail und ist ein Sicherheitsprotokoll zur Überprüfung der Authentizität und Integrität einer E-Mail-Nachricht. Dazu wird der E-Mail eine digitale Signatur hinzugefügt, bevor sie den Server des Absenders verlässt. Diese Signatur ist wie ein Gütesiegel und versichert dem Empfänger, dass die E-Mail nicht manipuliert wurde und tatsächlich vom angeblichen Absender stammt.

      So funktioniert DKIM

      DKIM basiert auf einem Paar kryptografischer Schlüssel: einem privaten Schlüssel, der vom Absender aufbewahrt wird, und einem öffentlichen Schlüssel, der in den DNS-Einträgen (Domain Name System) des Absenders veröffentlicht wird. So funktioniert es:

      1. E-Mail-Signierung: Wenn eine E-Mail gesendet wird, verwendet der sendende Server den privaten Schlüssel des Absenders, um eine eindeutige digitale Signatur basierend auf dem Inhalt der E-Mail zu generieren. Diese Signatur wird dem Header der E-Mail hinzugefügt.
      2. Empfängerüberprüfung: Beim Empfang der E-Mail ruft der E-Mail-Server des Empfängers den öffentlichen Schlüssel ab, der mit der Domäne des Absenders verknüpft ist, aus den DNS-Einträgen.
      3. Signaturüberprüfung: Der Server des Empfängers verwendet diesen öffentlichen Schlüssel, um die digitale Signatur der E-Mail zu überprüfen. Wenn die Signatur mit dem Inhalt der E-Mail übereinstimmt und während der Übertragung nicht verändert wurde, gilt die E-Mail als authentisch.
      4. Filterung und Zustellung: Wenn die E-Mail die DKIM-Überprüfung besteht, ist es wahrscheinlicher, dass sie an den Posteingang des Empfängers zugestellt wird. Wenn nicht, wird es möglicherweise als verdächtig gekennzeichnet oder in den Spam-Ordner verschoben.

      Die Bedeutung von DKIM

      1. Schutz vor Spoofing: Einer der wichtigsten Vorteile von DKIM ist die Fähigkeit, E-Mail-Spoofing zu verhindern. Ohne DKIM können Cyberkriminelle leicht E-Mail-Header fälschen und sich als jemand ausgeben, der sie nicht sind. DKIM stellt sicher, dass die E-Mail, die Sie von einem vertrauenswürdigen Absender erhalten, tatsächlich von diesem Absender stammt.
      2. E-Mail-Integrität: DKIM schützt die Integrität Ihrer E-Mails. Es stellt sicher, dass Ihre Nachricht während der Übertragung nicht verändert wurde und stellt sicher, dass der Empfänger den Inhalt genau so erhält, wie Sie es beabsichtigt haben.
      3. Verbesserte Zustellbarkeit: Wenn Ihre E-Mails DKIM-signiert sind, vertrauen E-Mail-Anbieter ihnen eher. Dies bedeutet, dass Ihre legitimen E-Mails eine bessere Chance haben, im Posteingang Ihrer Empfänger zu landen, als dass sie in Spam-Ordnern verloren gehen.
      4. Reduziertes Phishing: Durch die Reduzierung der Wirksamkeit von Phishing-Angriffen trägt DKIM dazu bei, Einzelpersonen und Organisationen davor zu schützen, Opfer von Betrügereien zu werden, die zu Datenschutzverletzungen oder finanziellen Verlusten führen könnten.

      Schlussfolgerung

      In einer Zeit, in der E-Mail-Betrug und Phishing-Angriffe weit verbreitet sind, dient DKIM als entscheidende Verteidigungslinie. Es ist wie ein digitaler Fingerabdruck, der die Authentizität und Integrität Ihrer E-Mails gewährleistet. Auch wenn es hinter den Kulissen agiert und von den meisten E-Mail-Benutzern unbemerkt bleibt, ist DKIM ein wichtiges Werkzeug im laufenden Kampf gegen Cyber-Bedrohungen. Seine Nutzung sollte von Einzelpersonen, Unternehmen und E-Mail-Dienstanbietern gefördert und angenommen werden, um eine sicherere digitale Kommunikationsumgebung für alle zu schaffen. Wenn Sie also das nächste Mal eine E-Mail erhalten, denken Sie daran, dass DKIM möglicherweise stillschweigend daran arbeitet, Sie vor potenziellem Schaden in der riesigen digitalen Landschaft zu schützen.
      Entweder ist ein falsches oder kein Passwort für ihren Mail-Account hinterlegt (siehe E-Mail-Konten in den Einstellungen).

      Falls Sie versuchen, Ihr Design über Ihr iCloud-Konto zu versenden, und 2-Faktor-Authentifizierung für das Konto aktiv ist, müssen Sie ein anwendungsspezifisches Passwort für Mail Designer einrichten. Das selbe kann bei anderen Email-Anbietern mit 2-Faktor-Authentifizierung zutreffen.

      Auf der Support-Seite von Apple finden Sie weitere Informationen zum Einrichten eines anwendungsspezifischen Passworts.

      Bei Problemen mit dem Schlüsselbund am Mac kann es vorkommen, dass Mail Designer Anmeldedaten nicht sicher speichern kann.

      So kann das Problem gelöst werden:

      • Der einfachste Weg, um diesen Fehler zu beheben, ist ein Neustart des Rechners.

      Falls es nach dem Neustart weiterhin zu Problemen kommen sollte:

      • Beende Mail Designer
      • Öffne die Schlüsselbundverwaltung (unter Programme > Dienstprogramme)
      • Wähle den Schlüsselbund “Anmeldung”
      • Wähle Ablage > Schlüsselbund “Anmeldung” sperren
      • Anschliessend entsperre den Schlüsselbund wieder unter Ablage > Schlüsselbund “Anmeldung” entsperren

      Starten Sie anschließend Mail Designer und versuchen Sie bitte die Anmeldung erneut.

      Die Formatierung von benutzerdefinierten Platzhaltern kann abhängig von Ihrem verwendeten E-Mail-Versanddienst (ESP) variieren. Für Namen-Platzhalter verwenden viele ESPs [NAME] als Platzhalter. [NAME] wird dann durch den Namen des Empfängers ersetzt. Dies kann jedoch variieren. Bei einigen ESPs wird beispielsweise [FULLNAME] oder eine völlig andere Formatierung verwendet. Bitte fragen Sie Ihren E-mail Versanddienst nach der korrekten Formatierung.

      Für detaillierte Informationen darüber, wie Sie Platzhalter für MailChimp hinzufügen können, besuchen Sie bitte die folgende Seite:

      Detaillierte Informationen darüber, wie Sie Platzhalter für Campaign Monitor hinzufügen können, finden Sie auf folgender Seite:

      ‣ Wählen Sie "Ablage" > "Exportieren ..."

      ‣ Speichern Sie Ihre Datei.
      ‣ Dann finden Sie Ihre gespeicherte Datei an der Stelle, an der Sie sie gespeichert haben.
      ‣ Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die Datei und wählen Sie in der Menüleiste ""IHR DATEI NAME" komprimieren"

      ‣ Damit wird eine ZIP-Datei erstellt:


      Weitere Informationen zum Exportieren Ihres E-Mail-Designs als .zip-Datei finden Sie auf der folgenden Seite:


      E-Mails sind zu einem integralen Bestandteil unserer täglichen Kommunikation geworden, von persönlichen Gesprächen bis hin zu Geschäftsabschlüssen. Mit dieser Bequemlichkeit geht jedoch die ständige Gefahr von E-Mail-Betrug und Phishing-Angriffen einher. Um diese Bedrohungen zu bekämpfen und die Authentizität Ihrer E-Mails sicherzustellen, gibt es ein einfaches, aber wichtiges Tool namens SPF oder Sender Policy Framework.

      Die Schwachstellen in der E-Mail-Kommunikation

      Um SPF zu verstehen, ist ein kurzer Einblick in die Funktionsweise der E-Mail-Kommunikation erforderlich. Wenn Sie eine E-Mail versenden, durchläuft diese mehrere Server und Netzwerke, bevor sie den beabsichtigten Empfänger erreicht. Bei jedem Stopp können böswillige Akteure die E-Mail möglicherweise abfangen, ändern oder sich als solche ausgeben.

      SPF: Der Hüter der E-Mail-Authentizität

      SPF steht für Sender Policy Framework und ist ein Sicherheitsprotokoll, das als "Wächter" fungiert und Ihre E-Mail-Domäne davor schützt, von Cyberkriminellen missbraucht zu werden, um sich als Sie auszugeben. SPF hilft bei der Überprüfung der Legitimität eingehender E-Mails, indem überprüft wird, ob sie von autorisierten Servern stammen, die mit der Domäne des Absenders verknüpft sind.

      So funktioniert SPF

      Die Funktionsweise von SPF ist relativ einfach:

      1. Absender-Deklaration: Der Domaininhaber (Sie oder Ihre Organisation) veröffentlicht einen DNS-Eintrag, der angibt, welche Server berechtigt sind, in seinem Namen E-Mails zu versenden. Dieser Eintrag wird als SPF-Eintrag bezeichnet.
      2. E-Mail-Empfang: Wenn eine E-Mail vom E-Mail-Server des Empfängers empfangen wird, überprüft der Server den SPF-Eintrag der Domäne des Absenders, um festzustellen, ob der Server, der die E-Mail gesendet hat, dazu berechtigt ist.
      3. Validierung: Wenn die IP-Adresse des sendenden Servers mit einer der im SPF-Datensatz aufgeführten autorisierten IP-Adressen übereinstimmt, gilt die E-Mail als legitim und wird zur Zustellung angenommen. Wenn nicht, wird es möglicherweise als verdächtig gekennzeichnet oder abgelehnt.

      Die Bedeutung von SPF

      1. Schutz vor Spoofing: SPF spielt eine entscheidende Rolle bei der Verhinderung von E-Mail-Spoofing. Dadurch wird sichergestellt, dass E-Mails, die angeblich von Ihrer Domain stammen, tatsächlich von autorisierten Servern stammen, wodurch es für Cyberkriminelle schwieriger wird, sich als Sie auszugeben.
      2. Verbesserte E-Mail-Zustellbarkeit: Wenn Sie SPF implementieren, ist die Wahrscheinlichkeit größer, dass E-Mail-Anbieter Ihren E-Mails vertrauen, was zu besseren Zustellraten führt. Es ist weniger wahrscheinlich, dass Ihre legitimen E-Mails in Spam-Ordnern landen.
      3. Reduzierung von Phishing: Indem SPF es Cyberkriminellen erschwert, sich als vertrauenswürdige Absender auszugeben, trägt es dazu bei, Phishing-Angriffe zu reduzieren und Einzelpersonen und Organisationen vor potenziellem Schaden zu schützen.
      4. Branding und Reputation: SPF trägt dazu bei, den Ruf Ihrer E-Mail-Domain aufrechtzuerhalten. Es versichert den Empfängern, dass Ihre E-Mails legitim sind, und stärkt das Vertrauen in Ihre Marke oder Organisation.

      Schlussfolgerung

      In einer Zeit, in der E-Mail ein primäres Kommunikationsmittel ist und E-Mail-basierte Bedrohungen weit verbreitet sind, dient SPF als zuverlässiger Schutz gegen Identitätsdiebstahl und Betrug. Auch wenn es im Verborgenen arbeitet, ist SPF ein leistungsstarkes Werkzeug im Kampf gegen Cyber-Bedrohungen. Die Implementierung wird Einzelpersonen, Unternehmen und E-Mail-Dienstanbietern gleichermaßen dringend empfohlen, um die Sicherheit der E-Mail-Kommunikation zu erhöhen. Wenn Sie also das nächste Mal eine E-Mail senden oder empfangen, denken Sie daran, dass SPF intensiv daran arbeitet, Sie vor potenziellem E-Mail-Identitätsbetrug in der riesigen digitalen Landschaft zu schützen.

      Mit Mail Designer 365 kannst du einen E-Mail-Account in wenigen einfachen Schritten konfigurieren, damit du E-Mails direkt von Mail Designer 365 aus verschicken kannst.

      ‣ Wähle „Mail Designer 365 > Einstellungen > Mail-Konten“ aus der Menüleiste:

      ‣ Klicke auf „+“ um einen neuen Account hinzuzufügen.

      ‣ Gib die E-Mail-Adresse ein. Bei manchen Anbietern (z.B Gmail und Outlook) öffnet dies ein externes Login-Fenster, um deinen Account zu verifizieren. Mail Designer 365 erkennt automatisch die Einstellungen für die beliebtesten Anbieter.

      ‣ Für einen Custom-Account (z.B deine berufliche E-Mail-Adresse), musst du zudem noch dein Passwort sowie die Einstellungen des Mail-Servers eingeben. Diese bekommst du im Zweifel von deinem Administrator.

      ‣ Danach kannst du E-Mails direkt von Mail Designer 365 aus verschicken.
      Deine Rechnung kannst du in der Bestätigungsmail finden, die du nach dem Kauf von Mail Designer 365 erhalten hast. In der E-Mail gibt es einen Link, der dir Zugang zu deiner Rechnung per PDF bietet.

      Du kannst alle Rechnungen auch in den Einstellungen unter "Käufe und Pläne" in deinem my.maildesigner365.com Konto laden.

      Für Mac App Store Käufe stellt Apple direkt die Rechnung aus und verschickt sie per E-Mail an deine hinterlegte Adresse.

      Designer 365 Premium Business ist unser hochwertigster Plan für Unternehmen oder Einzelpersonen, die zeitkritische und erfolgsrelevante E-Mail-Newsletter verschicken müssen (z.B für Promo-Kampagnen von Marketing-Agenturen). Als Teil dieses Plans hast du Zugang zum Exklusiv-E-Mail-Support - wir antworten immer innerhalb von 24 Stunden nach deiner Anfrage (Montag bis Freitag).

      Mail Designer 365 Business ist unsere Plan-Alternative für alltägliche E-Mail-Newsletter, die nicht zeitkritisch sind. Dieser Plan bietet Basic-E-Mail-Support – wir antworten immer innerhalb von 72 Stunden nach deiner Anfrage.

      Du willst einen Plan kaufen oder upgraden? Klicke hier um die Preise und Angebote zu sehen.
      Jeder Text, den Sie kopieren und in Mail Designer 365 aus einer anderen Quelle als einem anderen Mail Designer 365 Dokument einfügen, erhält automatisch den Stil des Textbereichs, in dem Sie den Text einfügen. Wenn du aber deinen Textstil behalten möchtest, kannst du den Befehl "Einsetzen und Stil anpassen" verwenden.

      ‣ Kopieren Sie Text, der die Formatierung hat, die Sie behalten möchten
      ‣ Wählen Sie "Bearbeiten" > "Einsetzen und Stil anpassen" aus der Menüleiste

      Dies wird den Stil des ursprünglichen Textes beibehalten, den du kopiert hast
      Weitere Informationen zum Kopieren und Einfügen von Text finden Sie auf der folgenden Seite.


      Apple Mail unter macOS 10.14 Mojave und spätere macOS Versionen unterstützt das Versenden von Vorlagen nicht mehr, d.h. Mail Designer 365 Designs können nicht direkt in Apple Mail versendet werden.

      Dafür gibt es eine bessere Alternative: Du kannst dein E-Mail Konto direkt in Mail Designer 365 hinterlegen und darüber versenden:

      • Öffne Mail Designer 365 > Einstellungen
      • Wähle Mail Konten…
      • Klicke das +, um dein Konto hinzuzufügen account
      • Gebe deine E-Mail Kontoeinstellungen ein


      Tipp: In Apple Mail kannst du deine Servereinstellungen am schnellsten nachsehen. Du findest sie unter Apple Mail > Einstellungen > Konten > Servereinstellungen > E-Mail Ausgangsserver.

      Testmails verschicken


      Die Mail Designer 365 Testmail Funktion ist dafür gedacht, um interne Test-E-Mails an dich selbst oder an dein Team zu schicken – z. B., um zu prüfen, wie deine fertige E-Mail in dem Inbox aussehen wird. Test-Mails werden von dem Mail Designer 365 Testmail-Dienst über unsere sicheren Server verschickt.

      So funktioniert es


      Um loszulegen, klicke auf das Test Icon in der Mail Designer 365 Symbolleiste.




      Jetzt kannst du von den folgenden Testmail-Optionen auswählen:





      Die aktuellste Version deines E-Mail-Designs wird über TeamCloud hochgeladen und an die ausgewählten Empfänger:innen geschickt:



      Einzelne Mailings verschicken


      Du hast zudem über Delivery Hub die Option, dein E-Mail-Design als einzelnes Mailing zu senden. Diese E-Mail wird über deine eigene E-Mail-Adresse verschickt.

      Diese Option eignet sich für externe E-Mails (i.e. E-Mails an Kontakte, die nicht Teil deines Mail Designer 365 Teams sind) und ersetzt die bisherige Option "Über deinen E-Mail-Account versenden".

      So funktioniert es


      In dieser Ansicht kannst du E-Mail-Adressen (z. B. von Kunden) eingeben und ihnen dein Design von deiner eigenen E-Mail-Adresse schicken.




      Auf der linken Seite im Setup-Fenster kannst du deine Absenderadresse auswählen:




      Tipp: Falls du noch keine Absenderadresse eingerichtet hast, nutze hierfür diese Anleitung.

      Wenn du deine E-Mail schickst, geht sie direkt an deine Empfänger:innen über deinen E-Mail-Server:



      Gut zu wissen: Nach dem Versand kannst du ganz einfach nachschauen, ob deine E-Mail angekommen ist und geöffnet wurde, indem du auf das Statistik-Symbol klickst:




      Alt-Texte und Apple WebKit


      WebKit (Safari, Apple Mail) zeigt einen Alt-Text nur dann an, wenn er im dazugehörigen Bildbereich in eine Zeile passt:



      Wenn der Text zu lang ist, wird er nicht angezeigt:



      Weitere Probleme


      Wenn du in Mail Designer 365 an einem Design arbeitest, in dem Bildbereiche in der Desktop- und Smartphone-Ansicht gekoppelt sind, wird der Alt-Text von der Desktop-Version auch für die Smartphone-Version verwendet.

      Da die Bildblöcke in der Smartphone-Ansicht oft deutlich schmaler als in der Desktop-Ansicht sind, wirkt sich das auch auf die darstellbare Länge deines Alt-Textes aus: Er wird dann ggf. in der Desktop-Version angezeigt, ist aber für den Bildbereich in der Mobil-Version zu lang und wird deshalb auf Smartphones nicht dargestellt. Das bedeutet, dass der Alt-Text für gekoppelte Layoutblöcke noch kürzer sein muss.

      Mögliche Lösungen


      Dieses Problem ist sehr kompliziert und leider gibt es keine einheitliche Lösung, wenn es um die Textlänge geht. Die Gründe dafür sind zum einen, dass die Breite der Bildblöcke je nach Design und Layout deutlich variieren kann. Zum anderen hat jeder Buchstabe eine unterschiedliche Dickte (Breite), weshalb wir keine konkrete Aussage über die darstellbare Textlänge geben können.

      Idealerweise müsste Apple die nötigen Änderungen vornehmen, um dieses Problem zu fixen. Bis dahin ist aber die beste Lösung, Alt-Texte immer möglichst kurz und knapp zu halten und sie zudem über den Testversand zu testen.

      So kannst du sicherstellen, dass die Alt-Texte in deiner Mail passen:
      • Gehe zu Mail > Einstellungen > Anzeigen und deaktiviere "Entfernte Inhalte in Nachrichten laden".
      • Verwende den Testmail-Dienst in Mail Designer 365, um eine Testversion deiner Mail an deine E-Mail-Adresse zu schicken.
      • Öffne die E-Mail in der Mail App und überprüfe, ob in allen Bildbereichen der von dir gesetzte Alt-Text angezeigt wird. Auf deinem iPhone kannst du das gleiche machen, um auch die mobile Version zu prüfen.


      In seltenen Fällen können beim SMTP-Versand Fehler auftreten, obwohl Mail Designer mit dem SMTP-Server verbinden konnte und eventuell auch Benutzername und Passwort akzeptiert wurden.

      In dem Fall können Sie im Fehlerdialog über die Schaltfläche „SMTP Log“ das Protokoll des letzten Versandversuchs einsehen. Finder zeigt dann eine Datei, die Sie mit einem beliebigen Texteditor öffnen können.

      Dort können Sie den vom SMTP-Server gemeldeten Fehler in Rohform lesen. Das können zum Beispiel Hinweise zur Wartung oder zu Problemen mit Ihrem Email-Konto sein, wie etwas überschrittene Versandlimits.
      Mail Designer 365 unterstützt macOS 10.13 High Sierra, macOS 10.14 Mojave, macOS 10.15 Catalina, macOS 11 Big Sur, macOS 12 Monterey, macOS 13 Ventura, macOS 14 Sonoma sowie das neu angekündigte macOS 15 Sequoia.

      Diese Fehlermeldung weist auf ein Problem mit der Authentifizierung deines E-Mail Kontos hin. Hier sind ein paar Tipps, wie dieser Fehler behoben werden kann:

      • Der Benutzername ist falsch oder unvollständig. z.B. iCloud Konten funktionieren manchmal mit den "username", aber benötigen normalerweise die gesamte E-Mail Adresse für den Login.
      • Das Passwort ist falsch.
      • Wenn du TLS verwendest, probiere es mal mit STARTTLS
      • Eventuell verwendet dein Mail Server einen eigenen Port - obwohl dies ungewöhnlich ist.
      Falls du für das Versenden von E-Mails Apple Mail verwendest, kannst du dir auch die Postausgangs-Einstellungen ansehen und verifizieren, dass die Settings übereinstimmen.

      Derzeit müssen Sie externe Dienste verwenden, um E-Mail-Vorschauen für verschiedene E-Mail-Clients zu machen. Wir empfehlen, litmus.com zu versuchen ,(Nur in englischer Sprache verfügbar)um die Vorschauen Ihrer E-Mail-Newsletter für verschiedene Kunden auszuprobieren. Sie können eine Testmail an diesen Service senden. Dieser lässt die Mail auf verschiedene E-Mail-Clients rendern, erfasst die Ausgabe und zeigt dann die Vorschau an.




      Mail Designer 365 bietet eine Vorschau für mobile Geräte. Denken Sie daran, dass dies nur zum alleinigen Zweck ist, eine grobe Vorstellung davon zu geben, wie der Newsletter auf mobilen Geräten aussehen kann. Das tatsächliche Rendering kann je nach E-Mail-Client unterschiedlich sein.

      Bitte besuchen Sie unsere Website für weitere Informationen:


      Sie können ändern, ob Ihr Text automatisch mit jedem Textbereich gesperrt wird. Um die Silbentrennung auszuschalten, versuchen Sie folgendes:
      ‣ Gehen Sie zu "Ablage" > "Design-Optionen ...".

      ‣ Entfernen Sie das Häkchen von der "Worttrennung erzwingen".

      ‣ "Ok" klicken.


      Weitere Informationen zum Ein- und Ausschalten der Text-Silbentrennung finden Sie auf folgender Seite:

      Links mit Mail Designer hinzuzufügen ist ganz einfach. Mache folgendes, um Ihr Email-Adresse in deinem Newsletter zu verlinken:

      1. Schreibe deinen gewünschten Text in einem Text-Layoutblock z.B. "Kontakt."

      2. Von dem Menu auf der rechten Seite wähle "Link hinzufügen" und dann klicke auf "Email mailto".
      3. Jetzt kannst du dein Email-Adresse hinzufügen.


      Dein gewünschter Text wird jetzt als ein Link erscheinen und, wenn ein Kunde mal darauf klickt, wird ein neues Fenster geöffnet werden, in dem der Kunde dir eine Nachricht schicken kann.

      Mail Designer 365 Designs und Dateien werden auf deinem Mac gespeichert. Alte Mail Designer Vorlagen können mit folgender Anleitung aus z.B. einem Time Machine Backup widerhergestellt werden:

      • Gehe zu dem Ordner: Dein Benutzername/Library/Group Containers
      • In diesem Ordner findest du einen weiteren Ordner, der in .Mail Designer endet
      • Wähle Documents/MD365 innerhalb dieses Ordners
      • In dem Ordner MD365 sind deine Vorlagen gespeichert. Bitte diesen wiederherstellen.

      Nach der Wiederherstellung, öffne Mail Designer 365 und wähle: "Ablage" > "Einstellungen und Dokumente importieren", um die Dateien in Mail Designer 365 zu importieren.
      Tipp: Um den Speicherort deiner Designs schneller zu finden, mach einen Rechtsklick auf das gewünschte Template und wähle dann "Im Finder zeigen."
      Derzeit sind alle Vorlagen, die Sie mit Mail Designer und Mail Designer Pro erstellen, so konzipiert, dass sie zentriert sind. Dies bedeutet, dass die gesamte E-Mail nicht linksseitig oder rechtsseitig ausgerichtet werden kann. Allerdings können Sie den Text der einzelnen Textbereiche anpassen, die Sie in Ihrer E-Mail-Vorlage hinzufügen, um eine linksseitige oder rechtsseitige Ausrichtung zu haben.


      Using your emails to link out to an upcoming calendar event is a great way to ensure that attendees don't forget to add the event to their calendar.

      Below, you will find easy-to-follow instructions on how to link out to events created with Google, Apple and Outlook calendars in your Mail Designer 365 email designs.

      Google Calendar


      If you've created a Google Calendar event which you want to share with your email subscribers, you will need to create an event link to include in your email.

      Here's how:
      1. Set up your event in your Google Calendar.
      2. Click on "Options" > "Publish Event"
      3. Copy the event link to include in your email template. Important: Make sure your calendar is set to public to ensure all recipients will be able to view the event.



      Now you can insert the link into your Mail Designer 365 template; either as a text link, or attached to a call to action button:



      Apple and Outlook Calendar


      For Apple and Outlook calendars, you will need to create an .ics file for the calendar event.

      Simply set up your event in the calendar, then drag it on to your desktop to create the file:



      Now, upload the file to an online file hosting service (in this example, we will use Google Drive.) Right click the file to create a shareable link which you can insert into your email design:



      Remember to set the file to public if you are sharing it:



      You can now send a link to the calendar event to your subscribers, who can simply download the .ics file to add to their own calendar.

      Tip: This tool is another great way of creating custom add to calendar links. Fill out your event's details and select the calendar service you wish to generate a link for (i.e. Google, Office 365, Outlook or Yahoo.) You can then copy the result to use in your Mail Designer 365 design.
      Adding rounded corners to the background of a text area is not supported directly. However, to create this effect, drag a quadrilateral into an image area. You can find this shape under the "Basic Shapes" category.


      Adjust the size of the image area as well as the size of the shape to fit your needs. You can also change the color of the shape. On right side, you can adjust the corners by moving the corner radius slide.


      Then, drag a text object into the image area to create a text box effect. You can find text objects under "T" icon within the "Contents" tab. Feel free to position the text box and change its font style, font weight, font size, font color, etc. to fit your needs.


      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to create the effect of having rounded text box corners:


      To send your first email campaign, you first need to set up your email address and domain, so it's ok for Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub to send emails on your behalf.

      There are a few technical steps involved during setup. These steps are crucial, as leading email service providers will check that DKIM, SPF and DMARC authentication are configured in order to prevent spam.

      Rest assured we've done all we can to make the setup process as simple and fuss free as possible for you. We recommend that you add all three methods to your domain so that your emails reach all recipients. If you require assistance at any point, reach out to your IT admin or get in touch with our support team.

      Ready? Let's get started!

      Step 1: Add and Verify your Email Address

      Before you start, make sure that you have already set up a Mail Designer team. (If you have not done so already, check out our easy team setup guide).

      • Go to Settings > "From: addresses"
      • Under "From: addresses for Campaigns", add a new sender by entering the "From Name" and email address your campaign will be sent from


      • You'll now receive a verification email. Click the link to confirm you own the email address:




      Step 2: To avoid to get marked as spam: Set up DKIM

      For this you'll need to create a DNS entry for DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail) (more details about DKIM and why it's essential. You should definitely set up DKIM if you want to avoid your mailings ending up in the spam folder.

      • Stay in "From: addresses" and scroll down to "Domain verification". You will now see the domain for the email address you just set up
      • Now it's time to determine the DNS provider for your domain. Most likely, our system has already identified the provider and displayed it as a "Potential Provider," along with a link to the provider's guide. Tip: We've also compiled a list of links to setup guides for common providers in this article.
      • Click on the "DKIM" icon in the "Domain verified" column:


      • A DKIM record will be generated for your domain, along with the necessary type, name, and value of the record. Please use the exact information shown to set up the DNS record (including any special characters such as " or . ).


      • Depending on your DNS provider, it may take up to 48 hours for the changes to propagate. Delivery Hub will periodically perform automatic checks. Alternatively, click the refresh icon to update results in real time:


      • Once you've completed the setup, and the verification is successful, you'll see a green checkmark next to the DKIM icon:


      Step 3: To avoid to get marked as spam: Set up SPF

      Now, let's ensure your emails are properly authenticated with SPF (Sender Policy Framework), which prevents email spoofing (more details on SPF).

      • Go back to your domain under "Domain Verification" and click "SPF":


      • Next, go to your DNS provider and create an SPF record for your domain. The exact steps vary depending on your provider, so follow their guidelines.
      • Note: If you or your company have already created an SPF record, our system will try to include the required part and display the full record value respecting your previous content. If you feel confident and know what you are doing, you can also manually edit your existing record and add the following part: include: spf.welovemails.com.
      • Once the verification has successfully completed, you'll see a green checkmark next to the SPF icon:


      Step 4: Set up DMARC

      Although not mandatory, setting up DMARC (Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance) is recommended to add an extra layer of security to your emails (more details on DMARC).

      • Click on the "DMARC" icon under "Domain Verification":


      • Then, create a DMARC DNS record for your domain
      • Feel free to use the suggested record, or your own values. If you're unsure, check your organization's policies or ask your IT team
      • Just like with SPF and DKIM, once the DMARC verification has successfully completed, you'll see a green checkmark next to the DMARC icon:


      Congratulations! You've now set up and verified your from address and can start sending email campaigns to your audience.

      iOS 15 introduced new privacy features, including one big change called 'Mail Privacy Protection'. When enabled, all images are loaded via Apple's proxy servers to mask the recipient's IP address.

      In our testing, this has occasionally caused certain mail images to not load correctly at all (you should see a hint at the top of the Mail app):



      If you are unable to load the images in your email, try deactivating this feature and sending your email again.

      To deactivate Mail Privacy Protection, open the Settings app on your iPhone, and choose Mail > Privacy Protection > Protect Mail Activity

      You are only allowed to add one link per image area.



      However, if you want to create the effect of having one image with multiple links, then check out our video tutorial:

      Watch our video tutorial here:



      {YOUTUBE_zKnpE88y8Tc}

      Also, please refer to the following page for a step-by-step guide on how to create the effect of having one image with multiple links:

      If you're trying to set up your email account in Mail Designer 365 and your password is being rejected, you may need to set up an app-specific password.

      What is an app-specific password for? Many email providers now require a separate password to be used in 3rd party apps, in order to increase your overall account security. This may be required, even if you do not use 2-factor authentication to sign in to your email.

      This means that you may need to create a separate password and use that in Mail Designer 365 in order to send emails directly from Mail Designer 365.

      Please refer to your email provider's security or account settings, or visit your email provider's help pages on how to set up a 3rd party email app.

      Links for selected email providers

      Whenever you want to forward your email newsletter, please make sure to use your mail client's "Forward as Attachment" or "Redirect" feature. This ensures that the email design is forwarded and not modified. Refrain from using the forward button that you typically use to forward emails. The normal forwarding can break the email template.

      What happens when you use the normal forwarding button is that the mail client will need to modify the email newsletter, so you, the user, will be able to add your own content. This typical whenever you forward a message - the forward action will prompt the mail client to give you space to write an additional message to the person you are forwarding the email to. Unfortunately, with this process, most mail clients can break the email layout and there is nothing we can do to prevent that from happening. So when you want to forward your email template to someone, our best email design practice is to use your mail client's "Forward as Attachment" or "Redirect" feature.
      Generally speaking, you should only have to log in to Mail Designer 365 when you first install the app (to ensure this is the case, we would always recommend that you have downloaded the latest version of Mail Designer.)

      However, despite this, it can sometimes be the case that your Mac doesn't store your login details in the Keychain. To manually fix this problem and stop the app prompting you to sign in every time you open it, please do the following:

      • Quit the Mail Designer 365 app.
      • Open the "Keychain Access.app"
      • Search for "Mail Designer" using the search field in the upper right corner of the window.
      • Here you should find the entry "Mail Designer account." Double click on this entry to get details.
      • Go to the "Access Control" tab and check to see if Mail Designer 365 is located under the "Always allow access to these applications" list.
      • If you cannot see Mail Designer 365 on the list, please press the "+" underneath the list, find Mail Designer 365, and add it.
      • Restart the app and login if prompted.



      Your login details for Mail Designer 365 should now be stored on your Mac. If you are still experiencing problems, please send us your debug logs and let us know via support@maildesigner365.com.

      Quick summary of what to avoid when using Unsplash photos:


        people's faces are recognizable (unless you can get model release of those people)
        photos that show logos, trademarks, brands
        images that put people in a bad light
        photos of private property (e.g. private homes and buildings)


      Is the Unsplash license the same as the CC0 license?


      When it comes to using images that you did not take, create, or do not own, you should stay mindful of the laws and licensing types that guide images. Many image libraries are published under "CC0,” which means “no rights reserved." A CC0 license is also a way for photographers and artists to publish their work and give permission to the public to use their work for free.

      Curators who publish their works under CC0 and waive copyright of their works place them for public use. An image that has CC0 that carries this designation has “No Rights Reserved” and is free of copyright restrictions, and likely other restrictions (i.e., moral, publicity, and privacy rights). This is a very broad designation and it is clearly understood within the Creative Commons community that no work carries this designation unless it is explicitly marked as a CC0 work. As a result, anyone can use them, edit them, etc. without restriction of copyright law.

      Unsplash is similar to a CC0 license with one difference: the Unsplash license does not include the right to compile images from Unsplash and then use them to create a similar or competing service.

      While the Unsplash license give people a lot of freedom, keep these exceptions in mind before using an image:


        Are people’s faces identifiable? If they are, you will require their individual consent – and not just the consent of the artist or photographer who took the picture. Only use these photos if you are able to get model release from each person whose face is showing on the image.

        Does the photo show people in a negative way or can be interpreted in a negative way? If yes, then avoid using these photos. Otherwise, you will need to get model release from each person whose face is showing on the image.

        Does the picture show other products, trademarks, or logos? Refrain from using these types of photos because they may suggest that the other brand or product is endorsing your product or service.

        Do you see landmarks, buildings, homes, automobiles, etc. that are actually private property within the photos? If yes, avoid these pictures unless you can acquire the permission of the owner of the private property. Make sure that the photos you use do not show valuable information about other people's property like the address, license plate, etc.


      The Unsplash license and the CC0 license have these in common:


        ‣ They are both sub-licensable (so you can use them)
        ‣ They are non-revocable, which means that you are able to use them forever.
        ‣ They allow users to use the photos for free.
        ‣ They allow you to modify and/or distribute, perform the photos for free.
        ‣ They allow users to use the images for personal and commercial purposes.
        ‣ They do not require attribution, although it would be nice.



      Although you are not legally obligated to follow the list below, these are still good practice suggestions:


        ‣ You can use Unsplash photos for commercial use. However, try to edit or add to the photo creatively through image editing or other methods.
        ‣ Unsplash photos are non-revocable. However, if a photographer decides to remove his or her photo, it is good practice that you respect the photographer's wishes and refrain from using the photo.


      To get more detailed information, please make sure you read the terms and conditions of Unsplash here.
      In certain browsers - for example, Google Chrome - mixed http and https content is blocked by default. This can cause images to not be displayed.

      At the moment, Mailchimp are serving the images exported from Mail Designer 365 over http. If your browser blocks mixed http and https content on web pages, this will explain why you are unable to see the images when you preview your templates via the Preview Mode.

      We are aware of this issue and are currently working with the Mailchimp team to get it rectified.

      Workaround
      As a workaround, you can update your browser preferences to allow mixed content or switch to a different browser such as Safari, which by default allows mixed content.
      Mailchimp have recently updated their image upload API, which has resulted in some compatibility issues when uploading email designs from third party services.

      What can I do?
      The latest Mail Designer 365 version includes support for the new image upload API. Templates uploaded using this version will not be affected.

      What about older email templates?
      If you need assistance with older designs that you've previously uploaded to Mailchimp and are now not working, please contact the Mailchimp team directly to report the problem. We generally suggest to re-upload the old template.

      Older Mail Designer versions
      Mailchimp no longer supports older versions of Mail Designer, such as Mail Designer 2 and Mail Designer Pro 2. For this reason, if you try exporting a design created using an older version of Mail Designer, you may notice that images are missing from your design.

      To ensure compatibility with Mailchimp and other leading email service providers, you should consider upgrading to Mail Designer 365.
      Like many other email clients today, AOL require app-specific passwords when setting up your AOL email address in another app or service.

      If you want to use your AOL email account to send email designs via Mail Designer 365, you will need to generate a special password. Here's how:

      1. Log in to your AOL account and go to your account settings
      2. Go to the "Account Security" tab and choose "Manage app passwords."
      3. From the dropdown menu, select "Other" and give the app a name (i.e. Mail Designer 365)
      4. Click "Generate" to create a new password. This will appear on your screen



      This password you have just created is the password you will need to use to set up your AOL account in Mail Designer 365.

      We have put together a list of the best known providers including a link to the corresponding DNS setup guide.

      If you cannot find your provider in the list please do not hesitate to contact our support team for assistance.

      Domain Name DNS Setup Guide
      1&1 IONOS https://www.ionos.de/hilfe/domains/txt-und-srv-records-konfigurieren/txt-records-hinzufuegen-aendern-oder-entfernen/ (de)
      123-reg (GoDaddy) https://www.123-reg.co.uk/support/domains/how-do-i-set-up-a-txt-record-on-my-domain-name/
      Amazon AWS Route53 https://docs.aws.amazon.com/Route53/latest/DeveloperGuide/resource-record-sets-creating.html
      Bluehost https://www.bluehost.com/help/article/dns-management-add-edit-or-delete-dns-entries
      Cloudflare https://www.cloudflare.com/learning/dns/dns-records/dns-dkim-record/
      Domain.com https://www.domain.com/help/article/dns-management-how-to-update-txt-spf-records
      Domaindiscount24 (Key-Systems GmbH) https://support.domaindiscount24.com/hc/de/articles/4409774008593-Wie-erstelle-ich-einen-TXT-Record-- (de)
      domainfactory GmbH https://www.df.eu/de/support/df-faq/domains/nameserver/#accordion-1384 (de)
      EuroDNS https://help.eurodns.com/s/article/how-do-i-add-a-txt-record
      Fasthosts https://help.fasthosts.co.uk/app/answers/detail/a_id/9
      Gandi.net https://docs.gandi.net/en/domain_names/common_operations/dns_records.html#editing-your-dns-records
      GoDaddy https://au.godaddy.com/help/add-a-txt-record-19232
      Google Workspace Admin https://support.google.com/a/answer/180504
      Hetzner Online GmbH https://docs.hetzner.com/dns-console/dns/manage-records/managing-txt-records/
      Host Europe GmbH https://www.hosteurope.de/faq/domains/verwaltung/nameserver-eintraege/ (de)
      Hostinger https://support.hostinger.com/en/articles/4469063-how-to-add-and-remove-txt-records-in-cpanel
      INWX GmbH & Co. KG https://kb.inwx.com/en-us/3-nameserver/107-wie-richte-ich-einen-txt-eintrag-ein
      Microsoft https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/defender-office-365/email-authentication-dkim-configure?source=recommendations
      Name.com https://www.name.com/support/articles/115004972547-adding-a-txt-record
      Namecheap https://www.namecheap.com/support/knowledgebase/article.aspx/317/2237/how-do-i-add-txtspfdkimdmarc-records-for-my-domain/
      Netcup GmbH https://helpcenter.netcup.com/en/wiki/domain/dns-settings
      Network Solutions https://www.networksolutions.com/manage-it/dns.jsp
      OVH https://help.ovhcloud.com/csm/de-dns-edit-dns-zone?id=kb_article_view&sysparm_article=KB0051668 (de)
      Reg.eu (Openprovider) https://support.openprovider.eu/hc/en-us/articles/216648808-DNS-Records
      Strato AG https://www.strato.de/faq/domains/was-ist-der-txt-record-und-wie-kann-ich-ihn-verwenden/ (de)
      united-domains AG https://www.uniteddomains.com/faq/question/17
      Variomedia AG https://www.variomedia.de/faq/Was-sind-TXT-Eintraege-und-wie-funktionieren-sie/article/361
      World4You Internet Services GmbH https://www.world4you.com/faq/en/domains/faq.dns-records.html
      Key-Systems GmbH (now part of CentralNic Group) Not available
      InterNetworX Not available
      Schlund Technologies GmbH (now part of GoDaddy) Not available
      InternetX GmbH Not available
      If you or other recipients are viewing your newsletter on a Retina Display (e.g. iPhone, Mac or iPad), it is possible that images which are not high-quality will appear blurred and out of focus.

      For this reason, you may sometimes receive a warning message like this when inserting a low quality image into your design:




      In order to ensure that your images are displayed properly on all devices, you should always try to use images with high resolution. An alternative would be to resize lower-resolution images to be smaller so they remain crisp.

      Mail Designer 365 supports special characters, which you can add to your text to create icons for call-to-action buttons or as a way to simplify your messages.

      To add special characters:


      ‣ Open your email template if it is not already opened.
      ‣ Choose “Edit" > "Emoji & Symbols”

      You have different options from different categories like emojis, arrows, bullet points, stars, currency symbols, latin alphabet, trademark symbols, other letterlike symbols, math symbols, parentheses, pictographs, and punctuations.

      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to add emojis and special characters in Mail Designer 365:

      Shopify offer a wide range of placeholder tags that you can use in your notification emails, which they refer to as liquid variables.

      You can insert standard variables such as store name, customer email address, order number, etc. into a Mail Designer 365 text layout block to personalise your templates for Shopify.

      Find a full list of Shopify's notification variables here.

      Please note, for longer and more complex variables, such as discount properties which run over multiple lines, you may run into some difficulty with your layout.

      For this reason, we advise avoiding these where possible. If you are confident with HTML, you can try to edit the exported code yourself, however, please be aware we cannot provide support for designs edited outside of Mail Designer 365.



      When you send an email template, not every font that you choose may be available at the recipient's side. This is why you can specify a fallback font list, and we recommend that you use an email-safe font.

      Email-safe fonts are the basic fonts installed on everyone's devices. If you have selected a font that is available on macOS but not on iOS, there will be a visible difference on the corresponding devices. If both devices have the font installed, then the email template will look the same on both platforms. You can use Web Fonts which the recipient's e-mail client can downloaded on demand. Most e-mail clients except Outlook support Web Fonts.
      If your newsletter is very long, Gmail may cut off part of your content. There are a few things you can do to make the HTML document shorter:
      • In general, try to reduce the number of layout blocks used. Each layout block has a HTML structure that adds to the total size of your newsletter and by reducing the number of blocks you reduce the amount of space needed for these structures.
      • Avoid repeating blocks and try to find solutions for “merging” blocks. For example, don't add two or more consecutive spacer blocks. Instead, use just one spacer block and change its height accordingly.
      • Sometimes you can avoid using spacer blocks altogether, for example by adding the space to a nearby image block instead, using the “spacing before/after” feature in “Styles” or simply adding blank lines.
      • Instead of using several consecutive text blocks, use just one and style the paragraphs using the “Styles” feature.
      • Avoid detaching blocks (that is, avoid doing modifications that only affect the mobile or desktop version). A detached block results in two blocks in the document: one for desktop and another one for mobile, which uses more space than if the same block can be used for both mobile and desktop.

      Email is the lifeblood of modern communication, but its ubiquity also makes it a prime target for cybercriminals seeking to deceive, defraud, or disrupt. To safeguard against these threats and ensure the integrity of your email communications, there's a powerful tool known as DMARC, or Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance.

      The Challenge of Email Impersonation

      Before we dive into DMARC, it's essential to understand the challenges of email communication. Emails pass through multiple servers and networks on their way to the recipient, creating numerous opportunities for malicious actors to tamper with or impersonate senders.

      DMARC: Your Email Security Guardian

      DMARC, which stands for Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance, is a comprehensive email authentication protocol designed to combat email impersonation, phishing attacks, and other email-based fraud.

      How DMARC Works

      DMARC builds on the foundations of SPF and DKIM but takes email authentication to a whole new level:

      1. Policy Declaration: The domain owner (the sender) publishes a DNS record that specifies how email from their domain should be handled if it fails SPF or DKIM checks. This DNS record contains DMARC policy settings.
      2. Email Reception: When an email is received by the recipient's email server, it performs SPF and DKIM checks as usual. If these checks fail, the server consults the sender's DMARC record.
      3. DMARC Verification: DMARC instructs the recipient's server on how to handle emails that fail SPF or DKIM checks. The sender can choose to monitor these failures, quarantine suspicious emails, or reject them outright.
      4. Reporting: DMARC provides valuable feedback by generating reports about email authentication activity. These reports help domain owners monitor and improve their email security.

      The Significance of DMARC

      1. Protection from Impersonation: DMARC is a formidable defense against email impersonation. It ensures that emails claiming to be from your domain are indeed legitimate, making it exceedingly difficult for cybercriminals to impersonate you.
      2. Enhanced Email Trustworthiness: Implementing DMARC enhances the trustworthiness of your emails. Email providers are more likely to recognize your emails as safe and deliver them to the recipient's inbox.
      3. Reduced Phishing Risks: DMARC is a powerful deterrent against phishing attacks. By reducing the success rate of such attacks, it safeguards individuals and organizations from potential harm.
      4. Reputation Management: DMARC helps protect your domain's reputation. It ensures that your legitimate emails are not diluted by fraudulent ones, preserving trust in your brand or organization.

      Conclusion

      In an era where email threats are prevalent and sophisticated, DMARC emerges as the ultimate guardian angel of email authenticity. Although it operates discreetly in the background, DMARC is a potent tool in the fight against cyber threats. Its implementation is highly recommended for individuals, businesses, and email service providers, as it offers a robust defense against email impersonation and enhances the overall security of email communications. The next time you send or receive an email, know that DMARC is diligently working to protect you from email-based deception and fraud in the vast digital landscape.

      GIFs are supported in most modern email apps, however some Outlook versions will only display the first frame of the GIF.

      Currently, Outlook 2007, 2010, and 2013 are known to have this issue but the very latest versions of Outlook 365 now finally offer GIF support.
      Creating a Mail Designer 365 Team is the first step towards achieving effective collaboration on email campaigns. All Mail Designer 365 teams benefit from exclusive features to help improve your campaign workflow.

      To set up a team, head to your my.maildesigner365 account and sign in with your equinux ID and password.

      New users are automatically created a team which you can start adding members to straight away.

      The Settings icon takes you to your team's overview page:



      From here, go to the "Members" tab and click "Invite members."



      Enter the email address(es) of the colleague(s) you want to invite to your team and click "Invite". You can invite up to 10 team members free!



      Team members can accept your invitation by clicking on the link in the email.

      Once you've invited new team members, start using Mail Designer 365 Campaigns to discuss, approve and schedule email campaigns for your audience. Try it out free!
      All Apple subscriptions are managed in iTunes.

      This link will directly take you to your profile administration:

      https://apple.co/2Th4vqI



      You will find all running subscriptions under "Subscriptions." You can also disable the automatic extension of your subscriptions.
      Some mail clients try to automatically adapt newsletters for dark mode by inverting colors. This can cause the dark text to appear white, even if the background is also white, making it appear as though parts of your message are missing.

      This can currently happen in Gmail and Outlook mobile apps.

      We have filed bug reports with the app makers that do this and have requested a better way of coordinating when they auto-switch between light & dark mode.

      One possible solution in terms of your design is to find a color combination that will remain readable in all situations: For example, instead of black text color, a dark gray with 25% brightness.



      In dark mode, email apps display this as a readable shade of gray.



      Further reading:
      https://litmus.com/blog/the-ultimate-guide-to-dark-mode-for-email-marketers

      The Anatomy of an Email

      Before diving into DKIM, let's briefly understand how emails work. When you send an email, it's like sending a digital letter. It travels through various servers and networks before reaching its intended recipient. Each server it passes through can potentially be a point of vulnerability where malicious actors might tamper with the email's content or disguise themselves as legitimate senders.

      Enter DKIM: The Email's Digital Signature

      DKIM, which stands for DomainKeys Identified Mail, is a security protocol designed to verify the authenticity and integrity of an email message. It does this by adding a digital signature to the email before it leaves the sender's server. This signature is like a seal of approval, assuring the recipient that the email has not been tampered with and genuinely comes from the claimed sender.

      How DKIM Works

      DKIM relies on a pair of cryptographic keys: a private key kept by the sender and a public key published in the sender's DNS (Domain Name System) records. Here's how it works:

      1. Email Signing: When an email is sent, the sending server uses the sender's private key to generate a unique digital signature based on the email's content. This signature is added to the email's header.
      2. Recipient Verification: Upon receiving the email, the recipient's email server retrieves the public key associated with the sender's domain from the DNS records.
      3. Signature Verification: The recipient's server uses this public key to verify the email's digital signature. If the signature matches the email's content and has not been altered in transit, the email is considered authentic.
      4. Filtering and Delivery: If the email passes DKIM verification, it's more likely to be delivered to the recipient's inbox. If not, it may be flagged as suspicious or sent to the spam folder.

      The Importance of DKIM

      1. Protection Against Spoofing: One of the most significant benefits of DKIM is its ability to prevent email spoofing. Without DKIM, cybercriminals can easily forge email headers and pretend to be someone they're not. DKIM ensures that the email you receive from a trusted sender is indeed from that sender.
      2. Email Integrity: DKIM safeguards the integrity of your emails. It guarantees that your message hasn't been altered during transit, ensuring that the recipient receives the content exactly as you intended.
      3. Enhanced Deliverability: When your emails are DKIM-signed, email providers are more likely to trust them. This means your legitimate emails have a better chance of landing in your recipients' inboxes rather than getting lost in spam folders.
      4. Reduced Phishing: By reducing the effectiveness of phishing attacks, DKIM helps protect individuals and organizations from falling victim to scams that could result in data breaches or financial losses.

      Conclusion

      In an era where email fraud and phishing attacks are prevalent, DKIM serves as a crucial line of defense. It's like a digital fingerprint that assures the authenticity and integrity of your emails. While it may operate behind the scenes and go unnoticed by most email users, DKIM is a vital tool in the ongoing battle against cyber threats. Its use should be encouraged and embraced by individuals, businesses, and email service providers to create a safer digital communication environment for everyone. So, the next time you receive an email, remember that DKIM might be silently working to protect you from potential harm in the vast digital landscape.
      Your mail account password may be wrong or empty (see Mail Accounts in Preferences).

      If you are trying to send via your iCloud account with 2-factor authentication set up, you will need to set up an app-specific password for Mail Designer. The same may apply to other email providers with 2-factor authentication.

      Apple's support page has more information on how to set up an app-specific password.

      In some circumstances, Mail Designer may not be able to store your account login credentials in your Keychain.

      To fix this issue, please try the following:

      • The easiest way to fix this problem is to restart your Mac.

      If the problem still pops up, try this:

      • Quit Mail Designer
      • Open Keychain Access from Applications > Utilities
      • Select your login keychain
      • Choose File > Lock Keychain “login”
      • Then choose File > Unlock Keychain “login”

      Now re-open Mail Designer and try signing in again.

      Depending on your plan, Mailchimp may automatically insert a "Monkey Rewards" badge into your newsletter design after you have exported it from Mail Designer 365.

      As this is determined by Mailchimp, there is no option to remove the badge within Mail Designer 365. However, you can control where the badge is inserted by clicking a text area and selecting "Insert > Mail Chimp > Rewards" to insert the Monkey Rewards placeholder.

      For more information on how to remove the Monkey Rewards badge, visit their website.
      The formatting of the custom placeholders can differ depending on the email service provider (ESP) that you are using. For name placeholders, many ESPs will use [NAME] as the placeholder. [NAME] will then be replaced with the name of the recipient. However, this can vary. Some may require you to use [FULLNAME] or a completely different formatting. Please make sure to double-check with your email service provider.

      For detailed information of how you can add placeholders for MailChimp, please visit the following page:

      For detailed information of how you can add placeholders for Campaign Monitor, please visit the following page:


      ‣ Choose “File" > "Export…” 

      ‣ Save your file.
      ‣ Then, find your saved file in the location that you saved it to.
      ‣ Right-click the file and choose "Compress “YOUR FILE NAME”" in the menu bar:

      ‣ This will create a .zip file:


      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to export your email design as a .zip file:


      Email has become an integral part of our daily communication, from personal conversations to business dealings. However, with this convenience comes the constant threat of email-based fraud and phishing attacks. To combat these threats and ensure the authenticity of your emails, there's a simple yet crucial tool known as SPF or Sender Policy Framework.

      The Vulnerabilities in Email Communication

      Understanding SPF requires a brief insight into how email communication functions. When you send an email, it travels through multiple servers and networks before reaching its intended recipient. At each stop, malicious actors can potentially intercept, modify, or impersonate the email.

      SPF: The Guardian of Email Authenticity

      SPF, which stands for Sender Policy Framework, is a security protocol that acts as a guardian, protecting your email domain from being used by cybercriminals to impersonate you. SPF helps verify the legitimacy of incoming emails by checking if they originate from authorized servers associated with the sender's domain.

      How SPF Works

      SPF is relatively straightforward in its operation:

      1. Sender Declaration: The domain owner (you or your organization) publishes a DNS record specifying which servers are authorized to send emails on its behalf. This record is known as the SPF record.
      2. Email Reception: When an email is received by the recipient's email server, the server checks the SPF record of the sender's domain to see if the server that sent the email is authorized to do so.
      3. Validation: If the sending server's IP address matches one of the authorized IP addresses listed in the SPF record, the email is considered legitimate and is accepted for delivery. If not, it may be flagged as suspicious or rejected.

      The Significance of SPF

      1. Protection Against Spoofing: SPF plays a crucial role in preventing email spoofing. It ensures that emails claiming to be from your domain indeed originate from authorized servers, making it harder for cybercriminals to impersonate you.
      2. Enhanced Email Deliverability: When you implement SPF, email providers are more likely to trust your emails, leading to better deliverability rates. Your legitimate emails are less likely to end up in spam folders.
      3. Reduction in Phishing: By making it more difficult for cybercriminals to impersonate trusted senders, SPF contributes to reducing phishing attacks, protecting individuals and organizations from potential harm.
      4. Branding and Reputation: SPF helps maintain your email domain's reputation. It assures recipients that your emails are legitimate, strengthening trust in your brand or organization.

      Conclusion

      In an age where email is a primary mode of communication and email-based threats are prevalent, SPF serves as a reliable shield against impersonation and fraud. Although it may work silently behind the scenes, SPF is a powerful tool in the fight against cyber threats. Its implementation is highly recommended for individuals, businesses, and email service providers alike to bolster the security of email communications. So, the next time you send or receive an email, remember that SPF is working diligently to protect you from potential email impersonation in the vast digital landscape.

      Mail Designer 365 makes it easy to send emails from your own email address directly from the app. Thanks to Mail Designer’s automatic email account configuration, you will be up and running in no time.

      To get started, go to “Mail Designer 365” > “Preferences” > “Mail Accounts.”


      Then, click on the “+” in the bottom left corner to configure a new email account.
      Enter your email address and password (not required for all email services e.g. Gmail) in the space provided:



      Note: This will work for most generic email accounts (e.g. Outlook, Hotmail, Gmail, etc.) by taking you to the external login page for the respective email client. For custom/internal email accounts (i.e a work account), your network administrator may have to provide you with the information which you can enter by ticking “Enter custom server settings.”

      Click “Next” to set up your account. You will now see that your email account’s settings have been automatically detected by Mail Designer 365:



      You are now free to use your personal email address to send email designs from directly within the app.


      You can access your invoice for Mail Designer 365 via the confirmation email we sent you after you purchased your plan. In this email you will find a link to download your invoice in PDF format.

      You can also download your invoice in settings under "Purchases and Plans" of your my.maildesigner365 account.

      Mac App Store purchases are processed by Apple, you should receive your invoice by email.

      Mail Designer 365 Premium Business is our premium plan designed for businesses or individuals who use email newsletters as a critical part of their business (e.g. marketing agencies, promotional campaigns, customer service.) As part of this plan, users are entitled to exclusive priority support within 24 hours following a query (mon-fri.)

      Mail Designer 365 Business is our alternative plan option, designed for everyday email newsletters which aren't time critical. This plan offers the basic support tier (email response within 72 hours.)

      Interested in purchasing a plan or upgrading? Get your Mail Designer 365 plan here.
      Any text that you copy and paste into Mail Designer 365 from another source other than a different Mail Designer 365 document will automatically receive the style of the text area that you’re pasting it to. However, if you would like to preserve your text style, you can use the “Paste and Match Style” command.

      ‣ Copy text that has formatting you want to preserve
      ‣ Choose “Edit" > "Paste and Match Style” from the menu bar

      This will preserve the style of the original text that you copied.


      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to copy and paste text, while preserving its style:


      The version of Apple Mail from macOS Mojave (10.14) onwards, no longer supports email templates / stationery, so Mail Designer 365 is unable to send designs directly from Mail.

      But not to worry: You can add your email account directly to Mail Designer 365 to send emails from your own address:

      • Open Mail Designer 365 > Preferences
      • Choose Mail Accounts…
      • Click + to add a new account
      • Enter your email account details


      Tip: Find your email account settings in Apple Mail under Mail > Preferences > Accounts > Server Settings > Outgoing Mail Server.

      Visit the Mail Designer 365 Manual for a step-by-step guide.

      Sending test emails


      Mail Designer 365's Testmail service is designed for sending internal test emails to yourself or to your team – i.e. to preview how your finished email design will look in the inbox. Test emails will be sent from the Mail Designer 365 Testmail service via our secure servers.

      How it works


      To get started, click the Test icon in the Mail Designer 365 toolbar.




      Now choose from the following test mail options:





      The latest version of your email design will be uploaded via TeamCloud and sent to the selected recipient(s):



      Sending individual emails


      You also have the option to send your email design as a single email via Delivery Hub. This email will be sent from your own email address.

      This option is designed for external emails (i.e. sending emails to contacts who are not part of your Mail Designer 365 team) and replaces the legacy "Send via your email account" option.

      How it works


      In this view you can add one or more recipients for your email (e.g. your client's email) and send them your design from your own email address.




      On the left of the setup window, you can choose your from address:




      Tip: If you have not done so already, follow this guide to set up your "from address" for sending.

      Finally, send your email by clicking the green "Send" button. It will go directly to your recipient via your email server:



      Good to know: Following send, you can easily check if your recipient has received and opened your email by clicking the analytics icon:




      Alt text and Apple WebKit


      Email services using Apple's WebKit (Apple Mail & email clients accessed via Safari) only display image alt text when the alt text is short enough to fit in the first "line" of the image area:



      If the alt text is longer than this, Apple will display no alt text for the image area at all:



      Other issues to be aware of


      When you are working with a design in Mail Designer 365 where image areas in the desktop and mobile versions are attached, your desktop alt text will also be used for the mobile version of your email.

      As image blocks in the smartphone view aren't as wide, this means the cut-off point for your alt text will come sooner, so the alt text will need to be even shorter if the design versions are paired.

      Ways to resolve this issue


      We appreciate this is a difficult issue and unfortunately, there is no one-size-fits-all approach that can be applied to your alt text length. This is mainly due to the fact that the size of image areas can vary massively in different email designs, as well as the mobile issue mentioned above.

      Ideally, the optimal solution would be for Apple to change things behind the scenes. However, until this happens, the best workaround is to keep your alt text as short as possible and TEST TEST TEST!

      To test the length of your alt text is suitable before you send, carry out the following steps:
      • Go to Mail > Preferences > Viewing and uncheck the box by "Load remote content in messages."
      • In Mail Designer 365, use the Testmail service to send yourself a test version of your design.
      • Open the email in Mail and check through all the image areas to see if the alt texts appear. Then, do the same on an iPhone to check the mobile version.


      In rare cases, errors can occur when sending SMTP, even though Mail Designer was able to connect to the SMTP server and possibly also accepted the user name and password.

      In this case, you can view the log of the last sending attempt in the error dialog using the “SMTP Log” button. Finder will then display a file that you can open with any text editor.

      You can read the raw error reported by the SMTP server in that file. This could, for example, be information about maintenance or problems with your email account, such as exceeded sending limits.
      Mail Designer 365 supports all the latest macOS versions from macOS 10.13 High Sierra, macOS 10.14 Mojave, macOS 10.15 Catalina, macOS 11 Big Sur, macOS 12 Monterey, and macOS 13 Ventura, macOS 14 Sonoma as well as the newly announced macOS 15 Sequoia.

      This points to an error while authenticating your email account. Try checking the following:

      • The username is wrong/incomplete. For example, iCloud accounts sometimes work with "username" but most times need the whole email address as a log in.
      • The password is wrong.
      • If you're trying TLS, try STARTTLS instead.
      • Maybe your server is using a custom port - though this is unlikely.
      If you have a Mail program you use (e.g. Apple Mail) try comparing the outgoing mail settings there and use the same settings in Mail Designer.

      Currently, you will need to use outside services to render email previews for various email clients. We recommend trying litmus.com to check out the previews of your email newsletters for different clients. You can send a test mail to this service and it lets the mail render on various email clients, captures the output, and then displays the previews.




      Mail Designer 365 does provide a preview for mobile devices. Keep in mind that this is only for the sole purpose of providing a rough idea of how the newsletter may look like on mobile devices. The actual rendering may be different, depending on the email client.

      Please visit this page for further information on how to preview your design for different email clients:


      You can change whether your text is automatically hyphenated in your text areas. To turn off the hyphenation, try the following:
      ‣ Go to "File" > "Design Options."

      ‣ Remove the check mark from the "Force hyphenation."

      ‣ Click "Ok."


      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to turn on and off text hyphenation:

      Creating an email link in Mail Designer is really straightforward. Simply follow the instructions below to get started:

      1. Type your desired text in a text layout block e.g. "Email me."

      2. From the sidebar select "Add link" and choose "Email mailto" as the type of link from the drop down menu.

      3. Add your email address.


      Now your chosen text will appear as a link and when a customer clicks the link it will open a new email to you.


      Mail Designer stores all of its categories and designs on your Mac. For example, if you are using Time Machine Backup, and you want to access your Mail Designer templates please follow the following steps:

      • Navigate to the folder: Your username/Library/Group Containers
      • In this folder you will see a Folder ending in .Mail Designer
      • Navigate to Documents/MD365 within this folder
      • Restore the MD365 folder to your new Mac

      After you have restored the directory, simply open Mail Designer 365 and select "File" > "Import settings and designs" to import the documents to your new library.

      Tip: To quickly view the location of your designs, click your chosen template whilst holding "Ctrl" and then select "Show in Finder."
      Currently, all email designs that you create with Mail Designer 365 are designed to be centered. This means that the entire email cannot be left justified or right justified. However, you can customize the text of individual text areas that you add within your email template to have left, center, or right alignment.


      Email design features are exclusively available in the Mail Designer 365 app for Mac. However, if you have set up a Mail Designer 365 team, Windows and other non-Mac users can use Mail Designer 365 Campaigns on any device and in any browser to:
      • View, comment on and approve email design drafts
      • Receive test emails
      • Manage email contacts and audiences
      • Schedule and send email campaigns
      • Access post campaign analytics

      Get your team started today with a free Campaigns plan for up to 10 team members!

      Apple has created a two-factor authentication to add extra protection for your Apple ID. Two-factor authentication requires two pieces of information. So even if someone knows your password, two-factor authentication will require your password and a code from one of your trusted devices.

      Apple's support page has more information on two-factor authentication and how to enable or disable it.

      Mail Designer 365 allows you to send emails directly from within the application using the SMTP procotol.

      In order to add your email account, please open the "Mail Accounts" tab in the preferences of Mail Designer, click "+" and enter the information for the account you want to configure. After you have entered all the required information, save the changes and choose this account in the send window.

      Follow this step-by-step guide for more information.
      In order to rotate the object, hold down the Command ⌘ key and then click one of the graphics resize controls of an object or graphic element. You will see that the cursor will turn into a rotate icon. 



      This will allow you to rotate the object freely. You can rotate shapes, graphic elements, and image masks. You will be able to tell how many degrees you have rotated the object by the label that pops up during rotation:



      If you want to rotate both the text and the object, hold the Command ⌘ key and click on both the shape and the text. You will see that the two things are now selected. Click “Group” on the right side.



      Once you have grouped the two things together, hold the command key and click on the resize controls. Again, you will see that the cursor will turn into a rotate icon. Then, feel free to rotate the selected items to your liking.

      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to rotate objects:


      Anchor links do not work in most email clients and are not supported in iOS 14 and lower. For this reason, Mail Designer 365 doesn't currently offer support for this feature.

      We try to ensure that a newsletter looks and works as expected on the widest range of readers possible and will revisit anchor links, if a majority of popular email apps add support for them.
      We know the proof is in the pudding code-sample, so we've put together an HTML export example for you to explore.

      It's an unmodified export of one of our Design Ideas. Note that when you use the HTML feature yourself, you'll also have the option of setting an image URL, and image prefix for where your images will be hosted, as well as a custom folder and HTML file name.

      Download HTML sample
      Mail Designer was not able to connect to the configured SMTP server. Please open Mail Designer 365 settings and check the configured values under SMTP settings.

      Make sure the hostname and port are correct. Also check the “Security” setting.

      Click the “Test” button to let Mail Designer verify that the server accepts a connection using your settings.
      The HTML code used in Mail Designer 365 is meticulously tested by our team of developers to make sure it is compatible with the majority of email clients. This is so we can do our best to ensure that your emails will always look good.

      As we have no means of testing the custom code which customers edit themselves, we cannot guarantee that email designs with custom code will look as intended after they have been sent. For this reason, Mail Designer 365 does not support importing HTML code, as it needs to have full control of the code being used in the app.

      However, if there are certain design elements (such as layout blocks) which you wish to edit, you can do so by saving them to your desktop and editing the Content.html file. Learn more.

      Again, if you are not 100% confident in your understanding of HTML and CSS code, we would strongly advise against this, as we cannot guarantee your code will be compatible with our software and other email clients.
      If you receive the following error message when trying to send from your Gmail account:
      invalid_grant: Bad Request (-10)

      Please carry out the following steps:
      1. Go to Mail Designer 365 > Preferences > Mail Accounts.
      2. Remove your Gmail address from the list using the "-" icon.
      3. Then, click the "+" icon to re-add your Gmail account. You will be prompted to sign in with your Gmail credentials again.

      Once you have re-added your account, you should be fine to start sending emails again.
      Manually exporting your Mail Designer 365 design as a .zip file and re-uploading it to Mailchimp can cause the code to become altered, leading to designs appearing broken or different to how you intended.

      For this reason, we always recommend using our convenient direct export tool to share your email design to Mailchimp. All you need for this is the API key for your account. This step-by-step guide shows you how to retrieve this and get set up:
      You purchased VPN Tracker 365, VPN Tracker World Connect or Mail Designer 365? You can use the app on up to three personal devices per license.

      To do so, simply sign in to your account to use your plan on your Macs (or your iOS device where applicable) using just your equinux ID and password.

      You may use the software in parallel on one computer per license.

      If you want to use the software on multiple devices in parallel, or other family members or colleagues also want to use the software on their computers, you will need a separate license for each person or each parallel use.

      A VPN Tracker 10, VPN Tracker 9 or Spot Maps license can be active on one Mac at the same time. If you want to use the Software on multiple devices, you will need an separate license per device.



      To add a Mailchimp placeholder to your design which doesn't appear on the list (e.g. "Edit my Profile" or "Show Newsletter in Browser") please carry out the following steps:

      • In a text layout block, type the text you want readers to see (i.e. "Edit my Profile.")
      • Highlight your selected text, then, in the sidebar, select "Add Link" from the "Style" tab.
      • Choose link type "Custom."
      • Enter your placeholder into the space provided (e.g. *|UPDATE_PROFILE|*)




      If you are unsure of how to label your placeholders, use Mailchimp's cheatsheet to find the correct label for any merge tag they support.

      You can access the most important placeholders directly, as explained here, for other placeholders and custom merge tags.
      Mail Designer 365 Small Business and Mail Designer 365 Non Profit are both older Mail Designer 365 plans which no longer exist.

      Our current plans, Mail Designer 365 Business and Mail Designer 365 Premium Business both include regular updates, all of our newest design features, as well as compatibility with Mail Designer 365 for Teams - and even more exciting new developemts coming soon! Find out more.

      Are you looking to buy a plan? You can purchase a Mail Designer 365 Business or Mail Designer 365 Premium Business plan here.
      Newsletter campaigns as well as Direct Mails are billed using stamps.

      Sending email consumes stamps per recipient, for attachments, placeholders, scheduling, and BCC functions. The exact usage is displayed for each. For direct mail, 25 stamps are required per recipient (plus additional options), while mass campaign mailing requires 1 stamp per recipient as a base.


      Stamps are included in the following monthly plans:
      Plan Karlsfeld (free, included with each Mac Design Plan): 500 Stamps
      Plan Roma: 5.000 Stamps
      Plan Paris: 15.000 Stamps
      Plan London: 25.000 Stamps
      Plan Capetown: 50.000 Stamps
      Plan Seoul: 100.000 Stamps
      ▸ Learn more about all Campaign plans

      Stamps are also available as standalone Stamps packages
      ▸ Learn more about all Stamps packages

      Yes, it's possible to print your template by going to "File > Print…" from within the Mail Designer 365 app. Exporting to PDF can either by done in the lower left corner of the "Print" window or by selecting "File > Export as PDF…".

      In order to add different buttons with different links, you need to use a layout blocks with multiple image areas. If you need 4 links, choose a layout block with 4 image areas. If you need 5 links, choose a layout block with 5 image areas.


      Within Mail Designer 365, you have multiple choices of different layout blocks with multiple image areas. Remember, one image area only allows you to add one link. When you send your email templates, an image area with different elements will be rendered as a single image, meaning you can only add one link within one image area and the link will be applied to that entire image area.

      For the layout block, you can choose which layout you want and how many image areas there are within the layout block. Here is a layout block with 4 image areas:




      Within each image area, you can add different graphic elements and a single link. Using a layout block, you can add a button with a unique link inside each image area. The different image areas will be rendered as their own individual images, even though it is one layout block.


      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to add different buttons with different links to your Mail Designer 365 email design:

      We just recently found out about an API change, which causes pictures to no longer appear when exporting emails to MailChimp or Campaign Monitor or when using the "Send email" function in Mail Designer. The most current versions of Mail Designer 365 and Mail Designer Pro 3 already include a fix for this.

      If you already have Mail Designer 365 and you have purchased it in the equinux Store, please download the latest version at:
      http://www.equinux.com/goto/HPdownload/maildesigner365
      If you already have Mail Designer 365 and you purchased in the Mac App Store, the latest version is available as an Update in the Mac App Store. Please update install it from there.

      If you have Mail Designer Pro 3, please log in under my.equinux.com to download the most current version.

      In case you you have an older version of Mail Designer, now is a great time to make the switch to Mail Designer 365 and profit from all new features and optimisations.

      Every Mail Designer plan offers a certain number of AI credits. These credits are automatically renewed every month as part of your subscription. During the beta, we have assigned all plans a number of credits for testing purposes, the number of credits in each plan may change in the future.

      Every time you use TextScout AI features in Mail Designer, this is automatically reflected in your available AI credits.

      How many credits are used?
      How many credits a TextScout AI query will use depends on the complexity of the query itself and the number of results that TextScout was able to return. As the AI models are still being improved during the beta, the number of credits being consumed may vary.

      Teams
      If you are part of a Mail Designer 365 team with multiple plans, your credits are pooled so you can all use each others' credits.

      I've run out of credits – what now?
      Upgrade to Mail Designer 365 Business Premium to add additional credits to your account.

      Already on Business Premium? Please reach out to our support team, we'd like to hear more about your experience using TextScout AI Beta.

      When are credits refreshed?
      AI Credits are automatically reset on the first of the month. Unused credits from the previous month do not roll over.

      Mail Designer 365 allows you to lend a design to someone else who also uses Mail Designer 365 on his or her Mac. He or she can make changes and return the file afterwards to you.
      ‣ Open the email template you wish to share.
      ‣ Choose "Share" > "Lend..."

      ‣ Enter the recipient's email address and write him or her a short message.
      ‣ Click "Send."


      Remember: You cannot lend a document while on the demo version of Mail Designer 365.


      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to lend your email designs in Mail Designer 365:

      It sure does! And it does it brilliantly too!

      Mail Designer can export an HTML file containing your entire design. This opens up a whole host of great options for you, as the user, to explore:

      • Upload your design to third-party newsletter services
      • Offer recipients, with email client programs that don’t support rich HTML content, the option to view your message as a webpage in their browser
      • Create a link to your newsletter directly from your website: A great option for people that would like to see a newsletter before they subscribe

      The best thing is: It's so easy to export your design as an HTML document

      • Open your design
      • Choose “Share > HTML...” from the menu bar
      • Choose a location to save your design

      By the way: If you plan on uploading your images to a separate web server, you can enter an absolute URL prefix for images.

      MailChimp offers visual "WYSIWYG" and code-based template editing.

      However, as every HTML engine works a little bit differently, we recommend that you stick to Mail Designer for editing, as changes made with MailChimp may cause issues with the look or layout of your designs.

      If you need to make any changes, simply re-upload a new version of your design and select it for your MailChimp campaign.

      On the other hand if you are a HTML code pro, just edit the HTML code with the MailChimp editor untill it fits your needs. We ask for you understanding that we can't offer support for this.

      We do not support copy & pasting into Outlook. When you copy & paste, there is no way for us to ensure that Outlook will preserve all of the formatting from Mail Designer 365. Instead, we recommend adding your email account to Mail Designer 365 and sending your messages that way.
      ‣ Go to "Mail Designer 365" > "Preferences."

      ‣ Then choose "Mail accounts"

      Please refer to the following pages for further information on configuration and sending emails via Mail Designer 365:


      Before purchasing, we strongly suggest all customers try our free, no-obligation demo. It includes nearly all major features.

      If you need to do more in-depth testing, we recommend checking out our affordable Mail Designer 365 monthly plans. You can access all features for an entire month to make sure it's a good fit for your business.

      Once you've tested all the features you need to, you can then get a pro-rated upgrade to a yearly plan if you decide to keep the app.
      Forgot your password? No problem!

      You can reset your password for your equinux ID.

      Want to test Mail Designer 365 code with another ESP, CRM platform, or similar? We've created a HTML sample of one of our most popular Design Ideas, so you can try before you buy!

      Download HTML sample

      Please note, when you use the HTML export feature yourself, you'll also have the option of setting an image URL, and image prefix for where your images will be hosted, as well as a custom folder and HTML file name.
      Certificate issues which occur in certain browsers - for example, Google Chrome - can cause images to not be displayed due to security measures.

      Previously, Mailchimp were serving the images exported from Mail Designer 365 over http and the "view in browser" webpage was being served over https. If your browser settings were set up to not allow mixed http and https content on web pages, this will explain why you were unable to see the images.

      Mailchimp have recently resolved this issue for new images uploaded to their service. The latest Mail Designer 365 version supports these changes and is fully compatible with Mailchimp.

      If you are still experiencing this with your older designs, please contact the Mailchimp team for support.
      Mail Designer 365 needs your permission to access your previous designs and app preferences from earlier Mail Designer versions:


      1. Click on "File" > "Import settings and designs."

      2. When the migration window pops up, select "Grant access" to continue.

      3. In the next window, simply select "Grant access" again to allow Mail Designer 365 access to the design files in your Library. You do not need to select a different folder.

      4. Select from the list which settings you would like to copy over to Mail Designer 365 and then click "Import selected."

      5. Your designs and in-app preferences will then be quickly imported into Mail Designer 365.




      Mail Designer 365 supports the export of the template including MailChimp placeholders. Once uploaded to MailChimp almost all features offered by the website can be used. To make sure the layout stays intact we recommend not to use the "Edit" view of MailChimp for layout editing. Use Mail Designer 365 to make the necessary changes and export the new version to MailChimp.

      When you send an email template, not every font that you choose may be available at the recipient's side. This is why you can specify a fallback font list, and we recommend that you use an email-safe font.


      Email-safe fonts are the basic fonts installed on everyone's devices. If you have selected a font that is available on macOS but not on iOS, there will be a visible difference on the corresponding devices. If both devices have the font installed, then the email template will look the same on both platforms. You can use Web Fonts which the recipient's e-mail client can downloaded on demand. Most e-mail clients except Outlook support Web Fonts.

      Important: Mail Designer 365 will warn the user about the missing font when the user opens the document.

      If you're using the latest version of Mail Designer 365 and your Mailchimp upload fails with an "API key revoked" error, please create a new API key in your Mailchimp account.
      Create a new Mailchimp API key
      Mail Designer 365 includes layout blocks for almost every newsletter layout imaginable. But if you have specific requirements, you can even create completely customized, reusable layout blocks. All you'll need is Mail Designer 365 and HTML and CSS skills.

      Please note: You'll need to have a fairly detailed understanding of HTML and CSS layouts to create your own layout blocks.

      Mail Designer 365 uses advanced techniques to create highly compatible email layouts, so you'll need to be careful not to break email compatibility when creating your own.

      We can't provide HTML support for your custom designs or any issues that are caused by custom layout blocks so proceed with caution. (Or as our support team likes to say: With great power comes great responsibility…)

      How to create a custom layout block


      • Right click an existing layout block and choose "Save to desktop"
      • Find the "..eqrmlayoutblock" on your desktop and edit the Content.html file
      • Customize the preview image to match your new layout block
      • Drag the entire folder with your custom layout block into the Mail Designer 365 Contents panel


      Your new layout block will now show up in the app alongside the default layout blocks. Just drag it in to your design to use it.

      Don't forget to thoroughly test both the desktop and mobile versions of a design with custom layout blocks before using it for production email campaigns




      We're pleased to announce the latest Mail Designer 365 version offers support for macOS Sequoia, so you can upgrade your Mac to macOS 15 and continue using Mail Designer 365 as usual.

      Download the latest Mail Designer 365 version here.
      Mail Designer 365 offers you an array of different options when it comes to editing your newsletter background.

      You can set a color as your email background. With the help of the color picker, you can even choose a color inspired by a photo or graphic. Just use the pipette to grab the color.


      You are also welcome to use any photos, textures, or patterns from Mail Designer's stock library. We included many different categories. Simply drag and drop the thumbnails from the design sidebar into your background.



      You can even use your own photos, textures, and patterns. Just simply drag it to your template from your desktop or the Finder. If you are using a third party's photo, texture, or pattern, make sure that you have permission to use it for commercial projects. Also, don't forget to give credit to the designer/artist.

      You can create a link for an image area, so the image area will be clickable in your email. Choose a layout block with image areas.


      It’s important to note that an entire image area will be displayed as a single image in your email. It does not matter how many shapes or graphics you have within a single image area, the entire image area will be displayed as a single image. Also, you can only assign one link per image area. If you want to add multiple links for different social media accounts, you will need to choose a layout block with multiple image areas.

      First, let's go over how to assign 1 link to 1 image area (Great for linking to only 1 social media account):



      ‣ To create an image area link, choose an image area in your design. 

      ‣ Click the "Add Link" button from the Style section of the sidebar.
      ‣ Then, just enter your URL.
      ‣ The entire image area will be “hot” and can be clicked in your final message.

      ‣ A little link icon will show you for which image areas links has been embedded.
      ‣ Note: It is not possible to add a link to individual components of a single image area.


      Remember: 1 link to 1 image area. This means you can only assign 1 link to 1 social media outlet within 1 image area.

      How to assign multiple links (Great for linking multiple social media accounts):



      We’ve included several layout blocks that contain several image areas next to each other.


      You can use these blocks to create multiple image area links. For instance, if you use a layout block with 4 image areas, you can add 4 buttons with different links to 4 social media sites.


      Just make sure to add one icon per one image area. Assign one link per one icon.


      Correct vs. Incorrect




      Correct because: 4 different icons in 4 different image areas. You can add 1 link per 1 image area. Therefore, you can add 4 different links total.




      Incorrect because: 4 different icons in 1 image area. You can only add 1 link per 1 image area. Therefore, 4 icons will only lead to 1 landing page.

      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to add different buttons with different links to your Mail Designer 365 email design:



      For a video tutorial:


      In order to download more web fonts, click on a text area. Mail Designer 365 will automatically open the "Style" tab on the right side of the screen.
      ‣ Choose “Web Fonts" > "Download additional fonts…” from the font menu.



      Then, you will be able to see a preview window where all available fonts will be displayed.
      ‣ Click ”Start Download“ to download additional Web Fonts you can then use in your template.


      ‣ After you click “Start download,” a popup window will open that shows the progress of the download:


      Things to understand when it comes to web fonts...


      Although there are a wide range of fonts available when you download the additional fonts, we understand that some may still consider this as only a limited number of fonts. This is because the fonts are downloaded from Google’s directory of open source designer web fonts. We wanted to help ensure that our users are able to create designs with beautiful fonts in a legal manner. All the downloadable fonts are free and open source, which means that the fonts are accessible to everyone and are available to be used for both personal and commercial projects.

      Please refer to the following page for further information:

      The "Edit" View on Mailchimp's website is not meant for a proper preview. Please click on "Preview and Test" on the top right corner of your screen. Then, choose "Enter preview mode."


      This should give you a better and more accurate view of how great your design will actually look!

      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to accurately view your Mail Designer 365's email design once uploaded on MailChimp:

      Mail Designer 365 automatically generates a mobile version of your Newsletter from your Desktop version. This generated mobile version can then be optimized manually.

      If you are using one of our email designs or one of your previously created templates, it's possible that the mobile version was changed. This means that changes to the desktop version of your newsletter don't automatically get transferred to the mobile version. To generate a new mobile template from your desktop version, please follow these steps:

      ‣ In the Menu, please select "File" > "Design options." 
      ‣ Remove the checkmark next to "Create version for mobile devices" and press ok.
      ‣ In the Menu, please go to "File" > "Design options" again.
      ‣ Activate the checkmark next to "Create version for mobile devices" and press ok

      Once you have done this, you should be able to see the mobile modified Desktop version of your newsletter and you will be able to edit the layout blocks of the mobile view.

      Activating Mail Designer 365 is easy! Here's how to get started:

      • If you haven't already, you can download Mail Designer 365 using this link.
      • After the download has completed, launch the app and click the "Login" button in the top left-hand corner of the Design Chooser homepage.
      • Enter your equinux ID and password in the space provided. Hint: This is the login you first created when purchasing Mail Designer 365 (or any other equinux software products) in our online store.
      Different email clients will read and do different things to your email designs when forwarding them. Some email clients will put the original email in quoted text and then add the sender information to the top. Others will forward it as is. Because Mail Designer 365 has no control over how email clients behave, the advanced HTML email that you create with Mail Designer 365 may not look the same once it has been forwarded by an email app.

      Our recommendations:


      ‣ One solution is to use the "redirect" feature, which is built-in to some emails to send it to another recipient. "Redirect" is different from forwarding the email because the redirect feature usually tells the email app to leave the original email design alone.
      ‣ Or you could add a link to your email on the web within the email template. This way, people have the option of viewing the email as it is, even after the email has been forwarded.

      Please refer to the following pages for further information:

      Yes, you can use multiple text styles within a text area. However, you can only assign one text style per paragraph.


      You also have the freedom of choosing different fonts and font colors for your text within a given text area. This is not limited to one font per paragraph.


      In order to assign different fonts within a paragraph, you must first select "no style" on the right side of your screen. Then, you can select the text that you want to change and assign it with its own font, font size, font color, etc.

      Designs which have no pre-configured text style set up can sometimes have font issues in the HTML version. For example, the HTML can override any font choices made by the user and change it back to a default font.

      For this reason, we strongly suggest that you apply a pre-configured text style to all of the text layout blocks within your design. In doing this, you have more control over your design and how it appears after send/export.

      Text styles allow you to choose a preferred font, as well as several fallback options, and an email-safe font, which is universally supported. You can also use them to determine the size, color, and alignment of text.

      For more information on how to configure text styles, please refer to the Mail Designer 365 Manual, where you will find step-by-step guides under the header "Working with text."
      Mailchimp has discontinued supports for their older APIs. These APIs were previously used by Mail Designer in earlier versions. Please update to the latest version of Mail Designer 365 which provides support for Mailchimp's latest API.

      If you are using an older version of Mail Designer, e.g. Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2 or Mail Designer Pro 1-3 or Mail Designer Pro HS, please upgrade to Mail Designer 365.
      TextScout AI (beta) utilises the latest AI technology and enables Mail Designer 365 users to craft sales-boosting subject lines from just a few campaign keywords. Enter specific words and phrases, choose your desired tone, and generate perfectly-formed subject lines in seconds.

      How to access TextScout AI


      TextScout AI is available to try out in all Mail Designer 365 plans in the latest Mail Designer 365 version. The number of AI credits available to you for generating subject lines varies depending on your plan tier. Check your status using the credits indicator within the TextScout AI window.

      If you need inspiration, we have some fun tips for you to try.

      You can also check out our video for tips on animated GIFs here:


      {YOUTUBE_M9XEE2mHK1A}
      You can use your own GIFs or use one of the animations found in Mail Designer 365's content library.

      In order to add a GIF, please do the following:
      ‣ Drag a layout block with an image area into your newsletter
      ‣ Drag the GIF that you want to use into an image area
      ‣ Make sure to only add 1 GIF per 1 image area
      ‣ If you add multiple GIFs into 1 image area, only the last GIF added will work


      Don't worry if you accidentally deleted Mail Designer 365! We understand that these things happen and we've got your back.

      To reinstall Mail Designer 365, go to our website and click on the "Download" link. Once the app has downloaded onto your Mac, you can log in with your equinux ID and password and carry on designing.
      If you have received the following error message when trying to export your design from Mail Designer 365, you will need to ask Campaign Monitor for a new API key.



      In order to generate a new API key and carry on exporting designs from the app as usual, log in to your Campaign Monitor account and head to "Account settings":



      Then, go to "API keys", where you can generate a new API key:



      Once you have done this, update your new API key in the app and try your export again.

      Mail Designer 365 Crew Chat is suitable for anyone in your team involved in the email campaign workflow and feedback process. Common examples include: Marketers, sales-team, branding, copywriters, managers, agency clients, etc.

      There are a couple of things that you need to check.



      ‣ First, are you using MailChimp as your email service provider? If yes, make sure that you are not viewing your design on the "Edit" preview within MailChimp's website.
      ‣ Click "Preview and Test" on the top right corner of your screen. 
      ‣ Then, choose "Enter preview mode."

      ‣ If not, try changing the default line height of your text. The default is set at 1.5. Adjust the line height to fit your needs. Try to set the spacing to 1.0 height. Your text should no longer look jumbled up.
      You can rest assured that we continue to offer full support to our customers and have taken the necessary steps to increase our support capacity for you during this difficult time.

      Support Information
      • Our support team continues to be available for you during this time
      • We’ve updated all FAQs to cover your most common issues - checking our FAQs first might help you find the answer to your question faster.
      • The more information you include in your support request, the better. If you are experiencing a problem with a design, attaching the design file or screenshots of the issue can help us get to the bottom of this faster.
      • Support is only available for Mail Designer 365 customers. Users of earlier Mail Designer versions will need to purchase a Mail Designer 365 plan.
      • Priority is given to Mail Designer 365 Business Premium customers


      You can contact the support team at support@maildesigner365.com.
      Click the background editing mode icon on the bottom left. It will make your other contents invisible, allowing you to focus on your main email background. When choosing a background, you can see 2 different areas. One area includes the background of your text areas, which is the middle of your email design. The second area is the surrounding background area.


      Drag a photo background, image, or texture into the surrounding background area to apply it.


      This will apply your choice of background to the mail email background. You can also open the colors window and choose a color as your design background.


      If you would like to set a background for your text areas, then drag an image to the middle area of your email design.

      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to change the background of your email template with Mail Designer Pro:


      Due to compatibility issues with some very popular email clients (👋 Gmail and Outlook), animated gifs are always rendered at non-retina resolution, so they don’t break your email’s layout.

      We hope that’ll change in the future, but for now your best shot is to choose a gif that’ll look good regardless of resolution.
      Currently, Mail Designer 365 is only available for Mac (macOS) computers.
      Sometimes you may experience a delay when sending a test version of your design. This is a security feature from Amazon Web Services designed to prevent spam emails. Your test send email will be marked as delivered by our server, but it is possible that you can experience a short delay before the email appears in your inbox.

      Please note, this only applies to the test send feature, as we are sending via our server using your name as an alias. When you send the final version of your design, you should not experience any delays as you are sending via your own email address/ESP.
      Typically, the fonts only change on another person's device if you are using a font in your email template that the other person does not have installed on his/her computer. For example, if you are using the font "Chelsea Market" in your document, and the person you lent the document to does not have "Chelsea Market" installed on his/her computer, a fallback font will be displayed instead.


      Important: Mail Designer 365 will warn the user about the missing font when the user opens the document.


      If you want to make sure that the font that you use will appear on a different person's device, then we suggest using one of the email-safe fonts in your email newsletter.



      The option to format text styles in your email design may not seem to be important, but it will massively help you when you're trying to make quick changes to the text in your email.

      When you set up a text style (e.g. Body Text) any changes you make to that style will be automatically applied to any sections of text within your newsletter where that style has been applied; for example, in different layout blocks.

      If you want to make a change to the text in your design (i.e. change the color or the font) it's quicker and easier to change the format of the text style than to manually go through each layout block of your newsletter and make sure the text has been updated.

      In addition, having predefined text styles in place makes your design more reliable when it comes to sending and you are much less likely to run into display or compatibility issues.
      Dropbox changed the way their public folder behaves and they have shut down hotlinking files, which means that you are no longer able to play videos directly within the email if the video is hosted by Dropbox. Also, keep in mind that directly embedded videos do not always work properly with certain email clients. This means that some of your recipients may not be able to view the video because of the email client they are using.

      Our best practice recommendation when it comes to videos:


      We recommend linking out to the videos on another site such as YouTube or Vimeo. These videos will then open in Safari or the relevant video app. For example, if it's a YouTube video and the YouTube app is installed on the device, then the video will play right in the YouTube app on the recipient's device.
      Of course! There is a Direct Mail plug-in available for Mail Designer 365. Direct Mail has been tested by our team for Mail Designer 365 compatibility. Use Mail Designer 365 to create HTML responsive emails for Direct Mail without breaking a sweat – no HTML and CSS knowledge necessary. Our email builder software for Mac makes it easy to create a custom email template design for your email marketing goals. Now, you can design a responsive email template for Direct Mail using Mail Designer 365's email design tools. Send a Direct Mail email with an email template that you curated with a little help from our Direct Mail integration guide.

      Please refer to the following page for how to integrate Direct Mail with your Mail Designer 365 account:
      Yes you can! If you have purchased a Mail Designer 365 plan and are only part way through your subscription year, you can still cross-upgrade to a better plan via your my.maildesigner365 portal.

      On the start page, simply click on your team name, navigate to the "Store" tab and select your plan from the list. Once you've purchased your plan, it will be available for you to use yourself or assign to another member of your team.


      This points to an error while authenticating your email account. Try checking the following:

      • The username is wrong/incomplete. For example, iCloud accounts sometimes work with "username" but most times need the whole email address as a log in.
      • The password is wrong.
      • If you're trying TLS, try STARTTLS instead.
      • Maybe your server is using a custom port - though this is unlikely.

      If you have a Mail program you use (e.g. Apple Mail) try comparing the outgoing mail settings there and use the same settings in Mail Designer 365.

      Mail Designer 365 is designed for teams. When you create a team, you can assign users a personalized role according to their needs. Members can discuss designs with you in Crew Chat, send campaigns, and use Direct Mail. Your team doesn’t have to consist solely of colleagues from your company. You can also include external collaborators such as copywriters, photographers, or the client themselves.

      Here are the different team roles and their meanings:

      • External
        Ideal for: clients, external employees, and managers who want to contribute content and approve or launch campaigns. Can use TeamCloud, Crew Chat, Direct Mail, and campaigns. Cannot purchase plans or stamps for the team.
      • Member
        Ideal for: employees who work closely on emails. Can use TeamCloud, Crew Chat, Direct Mail, and campaigns. Can purchase plans or stamps for the team.
      • Project Manager
        Ideal for: administrators of your team, who don’t necessarily have to be involved in design. Can manage team members, purchase, and assign plans and licenses.
      Your admin can change membership levels at any time. To start, you might build your team with just the "Member" level.

      You can set up a new team at my.maildesigner365.com/teams/create

      All templates you want to upload to Campaign Monitor have to contain an unsubscribe link.

      To add an unsubscribe link to your template, please follow these steps:

      ‣ Choose the text area you want to insert the unsubscribe link to.
      ‣ Please choose "Insert" > "Campaign Monitor" > "Unsubscribe Link" from the top menu bar.
      You can now upload your design to Campaign Monitor.


      To create debug logs, please try the following:
      ‣ Hold the alt ⌥ key or option key on your keyboard 
      ‣ Select "Help" > "Send Debug Logs..." from the menu

      Note: If you do not hold the alt/option ⌥ key, the Help drop-down menu will say "Provide Mail Designer Feedback..." instead of "Send Debug Logs..."

      ‣ Once you have sent your debug log, Mail Designer 365 will notify you that the log has been sent successfully

      You can find your original template files in the Finder by following these steps:



      ‣ Right click the template in the Design Chooser
      ‣ Choose "Show in Finder"

      How to find your designs in a Time Machine backup
      If you've had a hardware failure and need to find your templates in a backup of your Mac, you can find your templates in this location:

      /user/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner

      Note: there will be multiple "Library" folders on your harddrive, but you need the hidden one inside your Home folder.
      Here is one way to get there:
      • Navigate to your user's home folder in the Time Machine backup (e.g. "John")
      • Right-click on your user's home folder ("John"), hold down the Alt/Option key (⌥) and select "Copy “john” as Pathname"
      • Select the menu item "Go > Go to Folder…" and a dialog will open
      • Press Cmd+V to paste the path you've just copied and add "/Library" to the end of the path and press enter
      You should now be inside the Library folder of your user account.

      Now here on, go to "Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.Mail Designer/Documents/MD365" to find your documents. You'll find folders corresponding to your categories and each will have subfolders "Contents/Resources" that have the actual documents.

      You can drag & drop them onto your Mail Designer 365 icon in the dock to copy them to your Mail Designer 365 library.
      As an email sending service, Mail Designer 365 Campaigns is required to enforce spam prevention measures, such as GDPR in the EU and CAN-SPAM in the US. By law, marketing emails must provide a way for recipients to opt out of future emails.

      For this reason, all email campaigns sent via Delivery Hub must contain an unsubscribe link.

      Further benefits of including a clear unsubscribe link:
      • Automatic unsubscribe handling (Delivery Hub will remove unsubscribed contacts for you)
      • Clean email list – your campaigns are only being sent to engaged subscribers
      • Fewer spam complaints
      • Campaign-based unsubscribe rate tracking

      How to insert an unsubscribe placeholder in your email design
      To add an unsubscribe link to your email, click inside a text area in your design (e.g. in the email footer), then go to the app menu and select Insert > Mail Designer 365 Campaigns > Unsubscribe Link:



      When you send your campaign via Delivery Hub, recipients will see the unsubscribe option in the footer of your email:



      Learn more about Delivery Hub →
      If you need to back up your Mail Designer 365 email templates (e.g. because you've bought a new Mac or need to format your computer), you have multiple options:

      ‣ If you use Time Machine on the Mac, the designs are also included in the backup by default.
      ‣ If you are manually backing up your Mac, you'll need to back up the following folder on your external hard drive:
      ~/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner
      You can access this folder by opening Finder, going to "Go" > "Go to folder" and copying and pasting in the above path.
      ‣ You can do a complete manual backup by going to "My Designs." Then, press ⌘ + a to select all the designs and then drag them to a folder on your desktop. You can then also save this folder on an external hard drive.

      As part of the free Campaigns plan included with your Mail Designer 365 design plan, a Mail Designer 365 banner is displayed in the footer of emails sent via Delivery Hub:



      These banners can be removed after switching to any paid Campaigns plan. Log in to your my.maildesigner365 account to explore the Mail Designer Campaigns plan options.

      With Mail Designer 365, you can now easily add borders to your photos.

      ‣ Select the photo that you want to add a border to
      ‣ This will automatically prompt Mail Designer 365 to open the "Style" tab on the right side of the screen
      ‣ At the bottom, find the "Border" section
      ‣ Select the type of border that you want to use
      ‣ Click on the color wheel icon and choose the color of your border
      ‣ Change the pixel size to adjust the thickness of the border


      Note: You can also add borders to shapes.

      When you send using the test feature, Mail Designer 365 sends the email via our test servers but under the alias of your email address (so you can see how the sender etc. will appear in the inbox.) This can sometimes result in your email being detected as spam, as it is coming from our test server and not a “real” email address.

      However, if your test mail lands in your spam folder, it doesn’t mean that your real email will. When you send for real, you are sending via your own address or via an ESP where you have entered your mail domain; meaning that it should show up fine in your recipient’s inbox.
      During export, Mail Designer 365 automatically applies a GIF compression to ensure that the exported file won't be too large.

      This can result in some empty or transparent frames being cut from your GIF in order to save space.

      As a workaround, a pixel can be built into the GIF and invisibly placed at any point over the entire length of the animation. This way, Mail Designer 365 won't identify the frames as empty.
      When you export your design directly from Mail Designer 365 using the Mailchimp integration tool, your images will be exported together with your template and hosted by the Mailchimp platform.

      Learn more about exporting designs to Mailchimp here.

      Yes, you can use keyboard shortcuts for your alignment needs with Mail Designer 365.


      Please refer to the following page for keyboard shortcuts for aligning different objects in Mail Designer 365:

      To only send the desktop version of your email design, try the following:

      ‣ Choose "File" > "Design Options..."

      ‣ Uncheck "Create version for mobile devices."

      ‣ Click "OK" when you are ready.


      Then, you will be able to export your email design or send via your method of choice (through Apple Mail, Campaign Monitor, MailChimp, etc).
      Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not directly support forms or surveys embedded within your email design. To make sure that your recipients are getting the optimal design that you created, we decided to leave out the HTML forms feature. Most email clients do not support HTML forms or surveys, which is why Mail Designer 365 was designed to not support HTML forms. If you were to add surveys in your email design, there is no way that we could make sure that your recipients will get a functional survey that you created, since we have no control how email clients read and interpret your newsletter.

      However, if you needed to add a form to get feedback from your recipients, then we suggest linking to an outside form maker like Google forms. You can use an image or a specific text and add a link to your form. 

      With Mail Designer 365 you can create responsive newsletters which look different depending on which device your recipient opens your email.

      On an iPhone your recipient will see the mobile version of your newsletter.
      As an iPad has a much bigger screen than an iPhone, an iPad will display the desktop version of your newsletter.

      New Mac? No problem. The latest version of Mail Designer 365 offers full support for Macs with M1 and M2 chips, as well as compatibility with the latest macOS versions, including macOS 15 Sequoia.

      Download the latest version here.
      We have a range of plan options available to suit all needs.

      A Mail Designer 365 Business plan is intended for everyday email newsletters. This plan offers you access to all the latest Design Ideas, as well as the Borders tool and Teamwork features.

      Mail Designer 365 Business Premium plans are intended for users who consider newsletters to be a critical part of their marketing strategy.
      This plan offers you all the features available in a Business plan, plus:
      • 24h priority support
      • Tables tool
      • Blend Modes
      • Duotone Filters
      • Vibrancy effects

      If you want to cross-upgrade your plan from Small Business (our legacy plan) to Business or Business Premium, you can do so by heading to my.maildesigner365.com.
      Mail Designer 365 allows you to add lists within your text areas.
      ‣ Drag and drop a text area into your email template.
      ‣ Double-click on the text area.
      ‣ Type your list. Highlight the text where you want the list to appear.

      ‣ On the right side of the screen, you will find a side bar in which you can choose the list style under "Lists."
      ‣ Choose the list style you want.

      ‣ It will automatically transform your words into a list with your chosen bullet point.


      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to create a list:

      You can change whether your text is automatically hyphenated in your text areas. To turn off the hyphenation, try the following:
      ‣ Go to "File" > "Design Options."

      ‣ Remove the check mark from the "Force hyphenation."

      ‣ Click "Ok."


      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to turn on and off text hyphenation:


      In the world of email design, things are changing constantly. For this reason, it's important to bear in mind that many features available in legacy versions of Mail Designer may no longer work and that designs created in older versions may not be in line with today's modern standards.

      This applies in particular if you decide to upgrade your Mac to a newer macOS.

      When you upgrade to a Mail Designer 365 plan, you are paying for compatibility with the latest macOS versions, as well as compatibility with all the leading email clients and email service providers. Moreover, you also have ongoing access to new Design Ideas, creative tools and cutting edge features which our development team are working on all year round.
      In the world of email design, things are changing constantly. With this in mind, it's important to bear in mind that many features available in legacy versions of Mail Designer may no longer work and that designs created in older versions may not be in line with today's modern standards.

      For this reason, we have exclusively dedicated our support and development efforts to maintaining the Mail Designer 365 service - the only Mail Designer version to offer you ongoing updates and compatibility with all future macOS versions.

      For reference, below you can find the end of support dates for all legacy versions of Mail Designer:

      Mail Designer- Support ended: September 2014

      Mail Designer 2 - Support ended: February 2015

      Mail Designer Pro - Support ended: May 2016

      Mail Designer Pro 2 - Support ended: May 2017

      Mail Designer Pro 3 - Support ended: October 2018

      Mail Designer Pro HS - Support ended: January 2019

      What this means:
      While some of these versions of Mail Designer may still work on your current Mac, should you need to get a new Mac, or upgrade to a new macOS, they will no longer be supported.

      What to do: If you are still using an older version, we strongly suggest you upgrade to a modern Mail Designer 365 plan to guarantee regular updates and consistent support throughout the lifetime of your plan.
      {S_1058}

      This error message appears when trying to send your design from an iCloud account with 2-factor authentication set up. In order to be able to send your design as normal, you will need to set up an app-specific password for Mail Designer.

      Apple's support page has more information on how to set this up.

      To delete your custom content, try the following:
      ‣ Click on the appropriate icon within the "Contents" tab to identify the location of your custom content.
      ‣ Choose this icon if you added custom content to your graphics section:

      ‣ Choose this icon if you added custom content to your GIF/animated graphics section:

      ‣ Choose this icon if you added custom content to your backgrounds and photos section:

      ‣ Choose this icon if you added a custom folder with images and graphics:

      ‣ Once you have chosen, scroll down to the "Custom" section:

      ‣ Right-click on the image or graphic that you want to delete.
      ‣ Choose "Move to Trash" from the drop-down menu.

      ‣ To remove a folder, you will need to right-click on the folder and choose "Remove."


      Yes, you can add WeVideo videos into your email design using Mail Designer 365. Follow these simple steps:
      ‣ Add a layout block with an image area.
      ‣ In the "Contents" tab, click on the "Video Placeholder" icon. You can also press Command-5.

      ‣ Drag a video placeholder into an image area.

      ‣ Paste your WeVideo link into the "Link to Video" field.

      Keep in mind:


      Unlike YouTube or Vimeo videos, generating preview images from WeVideo videos is not directly supported by Mail Designer365. You will have to provide your own preview image by taking a screenshot of the video frame you want to use as the preview image. Then drag that image onto the video placeholder. Or you can choose an image of your choice as the preview image.

      In the email newsletter, the videos that you add are treated as images with a link to the video page. Direct inline playback is no longer supported by Mail Designer 365 because most email clients do not support it.

      Note: Please remember that Mail Designer 365 does not support embedding videos directly within your email designs.

      First, please try signing out and back in again. This will tell Mail Designer 365 to re-fetch all of your account details, including your plan.

      If that's not working, double-check that the email address you have signed in with matches the email address you used to purchase.

      If this does not work and your Mail Designer 365 app does not seem to recognize this purchase, please contact support and send us some debug information:

      ‣ Hold the alt ⌥ key or option key on your keyboard 
      ‣ Select "Help" > "Send Debug Logs..." from the menu



      In Mail Designer 365, if you add multiple GIFs into a single image area, then only the latest added GIF will animate. To solve this issue, make sure to drag a layout block with multiple image areas. Afterwards, drag only one GIF per one image area.
      Don't worry, you can still import your designs.

      ‣ Go to the "File" menu
      ‣ Choose “Import settings and designs…”

      ‣ Click "Grant access" when you are ready


      This will let you import all your existing data from earlier Mail Designer versions.
      Mail Designer 365 offers you ultimate peace of mind when you're designing your email newsletters. Thanks to an array of fail-detection methods, you can be safe in the knowledge that your email will be sent error-free.

      Some fail prevention measures include...
      • Image optimisation
      • Subject line preview
      • Built in spelling & grammar checker
      • Mobile optimisation tools

      For a detailed overview of all our fail detection methods, check out this post.
      Yes, Mail Designer 365 knows many settings like SMTP server or port. You will need to configure an email account for sending to use this.

      Follow this step-by-step guide for more information on how to do this.
      Most email clients do not support this feature, which results in many bugs. Recipients may end up not seeing the video at all or the video refuses to play. This why Mail Designer 365 only supports linking to videos.
      There are currently no educational discounts available for Mail Designer 365.

      For more information on pricing, please refer to our buyer's guide, where you can choose from a range of flexible plan options depending on your needs.

      In our online store we accept a variety of payment methods:

      • Visa
      • Mastercard
      • American Express
      • PayPal*
      • Personal/Business Checks* (US Orders Only)
      • Bank Transfers* (European Union Only)

      * License will be emailed to you once your payment has cleared.

      When paying my check or bank transfer, you will receive an email with additional payment details once you have placed your order. Bank Transfer and Check orders are currently not available for Mail Designer Purchases

      Of course! Mail Designer 365 has many keyboard shortcuts that you can use when working with different objects, using the control panel, and many more.

      Please refer to the following pages for keyboard shortcuts that you can use in Mail Designer 365:

      When your email templates are rendered, an entire image area will become one image. This means that when you send your Mail Designer 365 email designs, all of the graphic elements that you add within one image area will be combined and turn into one image. As a result, the link that you add will apply to the entire image area instead of a single element.



      If you want to add multiple buttons with different links, the use layout blocks with multiple image areas. That way, you can add one button with its own link per one image area.



      Please refer to the following page for more information on text areas why a link is being applied to the entire image area instead of a graphic element:


      You can adjust the width of individual columns, if you have multiple text areas within a single layout block. You can also adjust the width of individual columns, if you have multiple image areas within a single layout block.

      However, when working with columns, you cannot adjust the number of columns within a layout block. You will need to select the appropriate layout block with the specific number of columns that you want (either 2 or 3 columns for text areas).


      You cannot switch automatically from 2 columns to 3 columns or vice versa. However, you can just add another layout block with the correct number of columns. Afterwards, just copy the text from your original layout block and then paste the text onto the new layout block.

      If you want more than 3 columns for text areas, you will need to work with a single text area and space your message accordingly. In this scenario, you will basically be simulating your own table with multiple columns.

      Compared to layout blocks with text areas, you have more options when it comes to layout blocks with image areas. You can use a layout block with up to 6 image areas in a column style.


      With this layout block, the image areas are displayed next to each other in the desktop view. However, please note that the image areas will be displayed on top of each other in the mobile view. This was designed so that recipients will easily be able to click on the images if they are linked to a landing page and so that the images are still clearly visible when the email is opened with a mobile device.

      You can import email addresses to Mail Designer 365 Campaigns using the CSV import tool. It is available at:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/addContacts

      The first three column names are Email,First Name,Last Name

      You can also add additional keys/columns/placeholders and their values per entry as you go. The importer will automatically add the placeholders to your contact database. All you need to do is define the placeholders you plan to import in the first line.

      Example:

      You want to add a favorite color and a location for each of your contacts. In order to do so, define the first row of the CSV file with the following placeholder names:

      Email,First Name,Last Name,Favorite Color,Location
      miller@example.com,Peter,Miller,blue,New York
      smith@example.com,Jody,Smith,red,San Francisco


      Good to know: You can re-import the CSV at any time with additional columns to enhance your contacts. All new placeholders will then be attached to your contacts.

      Need help? Download an example CSV file here for reference:
      Mail_Designer_365_Campaigns_Email_Import_Example.csv
      Yes you can! Mail Designer 365 recently launched a brand new table editing tool to allow you to integrate tables into your email design.

      Currently, the Tables feature is only available in Mail Designer 365 Premium Business plans. To find out more about purchasing or upgrading to a Premium Business plan, visit this page.


      We understand that some educational customers and enterprises may not be able to purchase a subscription plan.

      For those of you unable to purchase a subscription plan due to company guidelines/restrictions, you can purchase Mail Designer 365 with a 1-year term and immediately disable any renewals via my.maildesigner365.

      From the point of view of the company, that shouldn't be any different that buying a license and purching upgrades on an annual schedule.
      If you are using an older, legacy version of Mail Designer which is no longer supported - i.e. Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2 or Mail Designer Pro - you can easily upgrade to Mail Designer 365 to continue creating and sending email newsletters.

      How to buy from the Mail Designer 365 store
      1. Head to our website to view all plan options.
      2. Choose your preferred plan and click "Buy"
      3. Log in to my.maildesigner365 with your equinux ID to complete your purchase (this is the login you use for Mail Designer)
      4. Once you've purchased a plan, download the app and move it to your Applications folder.

      How to buy from the Mac App Store
      1. Find Mail Designer 365 on the App Store
      2. Choose your plan and complete your purchase to download the Mail Designer 365 app to your Mac.
      3. Open the app and log in with your equinux ID

      Now you can enjoy all the latest features and Design Ideas available in Mail Designer 365.

      Tip: Once you have upgraded, Mail Designer 365 will automatically offer to import your designs from supported older Mail Designer versions. Find out more in this FAQ.
      First open your template in Mail Designer 365. You can then insert a placeholder using the menu “Insert > Mail Designer 365 Campaigns”. From there, select “Unsubscribe Link”.
      There are two kinds of areas that can be found within layout blocks in Mail Designer 365: image areas and text areas. Here are the main difference between the two types of areas:

      Image areas can contain both text and images:








      Text areas can only hold text:







      Please refer to the following pages for more information on text areas:

      Please refer to the following pages for more information on image areas:


      Visit my.maildesigner365.com, log in to your account, and go to the "Billing" tab to change your payment method.

      Click on your current payment method in the top right corner and select "Choose another way to pay." You can now add a new credit card or alternatively, add a PayPal account. This will be used as your new default payment method for your Mail Designer 365 plan.

      The files are stored internally in Mail Designer 365's structure. These files are not available to export.

      If you've bought Mail Designer 365 in our store, you can get beta versions of Mail Designer 365. This feature is not automatically available if you bought Mail Designer 365 from the Apple Mac App Store. However, if you still wish to access the beta version, you can download Mail Designer 365 free from our website and login to your account with your equinux ID and password.

      To access the beta version, please follow these steps:
      ‣ Open Mail Designer 365 on your Mac. 
      ‣ Choose "Mail Designer 365" > "Preferences."

      ‣ Make sure to click the "Updates" tab.

      ‣ Check the "Get Early Access to beta versions" box.

      ‣ Since Beta versions are meant to test features and compatibility, Mail Designer 365 will remind you to have a backup of your app and designs:


      For checking updates, Mail Designer 365 will check for new versions on app start or you can:


      ‣ Go to "Mail Designer 365" > "Check for Updates…"


      Please refer to the following page for further information:

      Renewals can be canceled up until 10 days before their renewal date. The cancelation will take effect on the next possible renewal date. You can continue to use the software until the end of your term, at which point your subscription will end.



      To send a test email to another email address of your own, use the teamwork capabilities of Mail Designer. To do this, invite your other email address to your Mail Designer team:
      1. Open team management and invite another member.
      2. Then log out of your current Mail Designer account (top right)
      3. Now open the invitation link from the email from your second email address.
      4. Create a new account with the second email address.
      5. When you start the test send now, select the bottom option “Team”.
        This will send the test email to all members of the team, including your second email address.
      You can repeat these steps for other email addresses. Up to 10 team members or additional email addresses can be added.
      Combining different shapes and graphic elements is easy with Mail Designer 365.
      ‣ First, choose a graphic element that you want to use from the "Contents" section. 

      ‣ Then, drag the element into an image area.
      ‣ Repeat these steps with other graphic elements that you want to use for the combination.
      ‣ After you have dragged in all of the graphic elements you want to combine, then start arranging them to create the look that you want.
      ‣ You can move different elements forward or backward, depending on what kind of look you want.
      ‣ Just click on the graphic element that you want to move backwards or forwards.
      ‣ Click the appropriate button found on the left side of your screen.


      Please refer to the following page for how to combine different graphic elements:


      If you've recently upgraded to Mail Designer 365 and want to continue using your previously purchased stationery items, you can do so easily via the import feature.
      To import all of your previous settings and designs from older versions of Mail Designer, simply click on "File" > "Import settings and designs." This will restore all of your preferences as well as old design ideas, and your stationery packs.

      You can find more information about importing settings in this FAQ.

      Cross-upgrading your Small Business plan is the only way to guarantee you have access to the very best Mail Designer 365 features.

      In addition to all the latest Design Ideas, a cross upgrade to Business or Business Premium also offers you some awesome new creative tools to make your email designs even better. Find out about your plan options here.

      How to cross-upgrade:
      Cross-upgrading your plan is simple. Head to my.maildesigner365.com. On the start page, you will see your current plan. Click on "Convert to team plan." Then, select the plan you would like to cross-upgrade to.



      Once you've completed your purchase, your plan will be available for you to use or to assign to a team member.
      Yes, Mail Designer 365 allows you to enter a text for the inbox preview of your email design. The inbox preview enables you to see the little text preview of your email whenever you open the inbox of the Mail application on your iPhone.
      ‣ Click the "Inbox" button to open the optimization window. 

      ‣ Then, you can enter the subject line for your email, as well as the preview text that your recipient will see.
      ‣ On the right side, Mail Designer 365 will show you a preview.
      ‣ This will display how your recipient will see the inbox preview snippet in their inbox before even opening your email.


      Please refer to the following page for more information on the Inbox Optimization tool:


      Please update your version of Mail Designer 365. The latest version can be found here

      Older versions of Mail Designer 365 may not be compatible with Big Sur and can cause display errors. Don't worry, this update is included in with any Mail Designer 365 plan.
      Crew Chat is directly integrated in the design window and the natural next step for your Mail Designer 365 Campaigns workflow. Click to upload to Crew Chat and view your design drafts, comments, and feedback all in one place, together with your team. Learn more.
      Mail Designer Campaigns offers a tool that easily lets you import your contact lists from MailChimp into Mail Designer Campaigns.

      Here are the detailed instructions for how to import your MailChimp Contact list into Mail Designer Campaigns
      Responsive newsletters are emails which change their layout and content depending on which device they are viewed. One newsletter opened in Mail on your Mac will look different if opened on an iPhone.

      Text blocks, for example, which are arranged side by side in the desktop version will appear one below the other when viewed on an iPhone.


      With Mail Designer 365, you can create responsive newsletters. By editing images; graphics; and text objects for the mobile version, you can optimize your template for mobile devices.

      Since Mail Designer Standard templates are not responsive, it's not possible to open them through Mail Designer 365 and get the same results. You can manually import Mail Designer 2 Standard templates into Mail Designer 365 by dragging a template (or several templates) out onto your desktop. Then, drag them into the Design Chooser in Mail Designer 365. Unfortunately, we cannot guarantee that your design will remain intact because they are two completely different apps.
      Mail Designer 365 allows you to create custom preview devices, so you can preview your email template on a display with certain resolutions.

      ‣ Open your email template if it is not already opened.
      ‣ From the menu bar, choose "Mail Designer 365" > "Preferences."

      ‣ A popup window will appear.
      ‣ Click on the smartphone icon, labeled "Mobile."

      ‣ Click on the "+" icon at the bottom left of the window.
      ‣ Enter the resolution you want to use.

      ‣ Give this display option a name so you can easily find it in the preview options menu


      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to create custom preview displays in Mail Designer 365:

      With Mail Designer 365, you are not able to embed MP3 files directly within the email designs. Most email clients do not support this, which can lead to problems when your subscribers open the email. To make sure that your recipients are getting the optimal design that you created, we decided to leave out the MP3 feature.

      However, you will be able to link to your MP3 file within your email design, as long as you upload your MP3 onto a third party host. Create a CTA button or add a text link into your design. Under the "Style" section, you will be able to click "Add Link." Just type the link to your MP3.

      Mail Designer 365 TextScout AI is compatible with the latest macOS versions from macOS 10.13 High Sierra. Learn more.
      The way Mail Designer 365 handles your images varies depending on how you choose to send your finished email design.

      Sending via our Testmail service:

      When you send a test email using our Testmail service, the images in your email are hosted on our secure servers.



      Sending via Delivery Hub:

      When you send your email design via Delivery Hub, Mail Designer 365 behaves the same way as all other email clients and embeds your images in the email. In this case, your image will not need to be hosted elsewhere.



      Exporting to Mailchimp, Campaign Monitor or Direct Mail

      When you use one of Mail Designer 365's direct integrations, your images will be exported together with the email design and hosted by the respective platform.

      Sending via another external service:

      The way images are handled by external services such as email service providers varies based on the provider. Some providers will host your images for you; however, many others will require you to host your images yourself.

      Mail Designer 365 has an option to enter your web server's URL during HTML export that lets you reference images that way. Learn more.


      Refer to the documentation provided by your ESP for more information on what is required.

      iOS recognizes phone numbers and other information like addresses and dates automatically, as these information can be used in different Apps.
      You can for example tap a phone numer in order to call it or tap an address to add it to your address book.

      Because of this, these information get highlighted in emails.

      If you want to add multiple layout blocks that have similar layouts or formats, it may be easier to duplicate an existing layout block instead of choosing your font and color options once again.

      There are 3 ways you can duplicate layout blocks:



      Option 1: "Edit" > "Duplicate"


      ‣ Click the selection tab at the side of a layout block.
      ‣ Choose "Edit" > "Duplicate" from the menu bar.


      Option 2: Using the layout handle


      ‣ Click on the layout handle on the left side of the layout block. 
      ‣ Hold down the option key or the alt⌥ key on your keyboard.
      ‣ Drag the layout block that you want to duplicate.

      Now, you can drop it into position to create a copy. Afterwards, you can edit your text and choose other options accordingly.

      Option 3: Command⌘ D


      ‣ Click on the layout handle on the left side of the layout block. 
      ‣ Press Command⌘-D on your keyboard


      Please refer to the following page for a guide on how you can duplicate layout blocks:


      There are a couple of important things to keep in mind when testing Mail Designer 365 for the first time:
      • The Mail Designer 365 free download only allows you to view the app and open and edit email templates.
      • Without an active demo, you will be unable to save or send created templates.

      Activating your Mail Designer 365 demo

      To activate your free demo, please carry out the following steps:
      1. Start the Mail Designer 365 app on your Mac.
      2. Log in with your equinux ID and password or create an account.
      3. If you are starting the app for the first time, you will see a list of plan options. Here you can choose to activate your free trial.
      4. If you have previously logged in to the app, you can find the option to start your free trial in the top left corner under your name.

      Mail Designer 365 Campaigns offers multiple ways to work together as a team:

      Mail Designer 365 TeamCloud
      Save your design to TeamCloud to give other designers in your Team access, so they can edit and make changes to your design. Designs saved in TeamCloud are also automatically made available to use with Crew Chat and Delivery Hub for the rest of your team.

      Mail Designer 365 Crew Chat
      Use Crew Chat to upload your Mail Designer 365 design as a web-based preview. Team members can preview your work and post comments and feedback from any device – including iPhone, iPad, Windows, Android. It's the fastest way to get everyone's input.

      Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub
      Access your team's Mail Designer 365 designs in Delivery Hub to send as targeted email campaigns to your audience. Manage email contacts and lists, schedule and send campaigns, and benefit from detailled post campaign analytics.

      Discover Mail Designer 365 Campaigns

      To certify the domain for sending, a DNS record must be added to the domain. This can only be done by the administrator of your domain within your company. Follow these steps:

      1. Find out who in your organization is responsible for managing domain entries. Keywords for such a role include: domain management / DNS management / DNS administration.
      2. Invite the administrator to your Mail Designer project by adding them as a new participant ‘Admin’ to your project team: my.maildesigner.com > Settings > Participants > Invite Participants.
      3. Contact your administrator and ask them to complete the domain verification using the information provided under my.maildesigner.com > Settings > From: Addresses.

      Once they have completed everything correctly, a checkmark will appear under ‘Domain verified’.”
      Your plan and price are locked in as long as they keep autorenewing. But don't worry: Once a plan has lapsed, you can subscribe to one of our current plans and get all the latest features and benefits.
      Open your design and go to "File > Export archive …" to export it.

      Then, please create a new support ticket and attach your exported design file and screenshots of the areas you are having problems with. Please also be sure to include a description of the issue you are having.

      This will allow us to take a look at your design and help you troubleshoot any issues.
      To activate renewals for your account, go to your my.maildesigner365 account. On the top you will see whether your renewal is turned on or off. If you would like to change the status of your renewal, just flip the switch and you will get an email confirmation for your changed renewal state.


      When you export an email design from Mail Designer 365 as HTML, each image area within the design is exported as a new image.

      Extra design features in Mail Designer 365, such as cropping, scaling, filters, effects, and additional graphic elements mean that images are very rarely identical to the original source image when you are ready to export your design. This also applies when compressing images and turning retina image support on and off.

      For this reason, it is necessary for Mail Designer 365 to export each image area as a new image file so your design looks the way you intend it to when you come to send.
      When exporting your email design as HTML, selecting the option "Restricted Compatibility" omits the second HEAD tag in the HTML export.



      Mail Designer 365 uses the second HEAD tag to improve your design's compatibility with Yahoo Mail, however some email services think this is an error and are therefore unable to process the HTML.

      For example, if you are using Constant Contact and experiencing compatibility issues, please try this option.
      Mail Designer 365 needs unfiltered and unmodified access to these servers to function:


      • id.equinux.com
      • my.maildesigner365.com
      • data.maildesigner365.com
      • my.featurenotes.com


      If you are using a firewall or Endpoint Security Solution, please ensure access to these servers is granted and not modified.

      Mail Designer 365 may contact additional servers for some features, for example:


      • polyfill.io
      • www.gravatar.com
      • wp.com
      • api.rudderlabs.com


      To check whether links in your document are valid, Mail Designer 365 may try to contact these servers as well.
      In Mail Designer 365 it is technically possible to create an all image email design, BUT we would strongly advise against it.

      Image based email designs are problematic for a number of reasons...

      Firstly, emails which are largely image-based are larger and generally take longer to load. If your recipient is viewing your email on a poor internet connection, it's highly likely they will not see any of the image elements. This is obviously not ideal if the majority of your design is images, as the reader will be greeted by a blank screen.

      Secondly, the likelihood of your email getting caught in a spam filter increases with the amount of image elements you include. This is a safety precaution put in place by many email providers, as spam emails typically contain a high quantity of images.

      Lastly, there are some people who prefer not to receive html emails, and have set up their email provider to only show them the plain text version of an email. If your email design is all image, there will be no real text to display to your recipient if they have these preferences in place.

      To summarize, we would always recommend you use a good mix of real text and images in your email designs to ensure that you will have no problems when it comes to sending. Feel free to get creative with graphic elements and images in your designs, but don't forget to insert text where possible to cover all bases. Happy designing!
      Occasionally purchases in the Mac App Store version of Mail Designer 365 don't get recognized properly
      Please try the following steps
      • 1. Please ensure that you are using the download version from the Mac App Store. The download version from the equinux website will not be able to recognize your license.
      • 2. In the Mail Designer 365 menu please select "Restore Purchases..."
      • 3. In case your license is still not being recognized, please delete the App and reinstall it from the Mac App Store. (Don't worry, your templates and settings won't be lost)

      Afterwards your license should be recognized.
      Following send/export, all mobile responsive designs created in Mail Designer 365 will be rendered with some padding. The reason for this padding is to ensure optimal compatibility on all mobile devices and email clients.

      Oftentimes, this padding will appear more noticeable if a background color has not been set. In order to create the illusion of a full-width design, you can set the outer background to a different shade to create a subtle contrast between your email content and design background.

      In order to upload templates to your MailChimp account on your behalf, Mail Designer needs your MailChimp API key (a special kind of password).

      You can find your API key on your MailChimp. The MailChimp support pages have more information.


      To activate the mobile version of your email designs, please do the following:
      ‣ In the Menu, please select "File" > "Design options." 

      ‣ Remove the checkmark next to "Create version for mobile devices."
      ‣ Press "OK."
      ‣ Then please repeat the same steps and activate the Checkbox again.



      Once you have done this, you should be able to see the mobile modified Desktop version and you will be able to edit the layout blocks of the mobile view.

      Yes, Mail Designer 365 allows you to save your customized layout blocks!

      Please try the following:
      ‣ Make sure the "layout" is visible (Choose "View" > Show Layout") so you can see the drag handle on the layout blocks
      ‣ Then you select the "Contents" tab on the right side
      ‣ Select the "Layout blocks" section
      ‣ Click "Ready-Made"

      ‣ Select the layout blocks that you want to save
      ‣ To select multiple layout blocks, you will need to click on a layout block, hold the shift key, and then select the other layout blocks
      ‣ Drag your layout blocks into the "My Instant Blocks" section"


      Note: You have the ability to save multiple layout blocks together or to save only a single layout block.
      When you insert a placeholder into your email design via the "Insert" menu, Mail Designer 365 automatically generates a default text for the link (e.g. Unsubscribe.)

      If you want to change this text - i.e. for a different language, or different phrasing, there are two ways to do so:

      1. Enter a text of your choice, e.g. "Manage your preferences", highlight this text and go to "Add Link" in the Style menu. Here you can choose "Placeholder" from the dropdown menu and enter the relevant placeholder (i.e. "unsubscribe".)
      2. Alternatively, you can insert a placeholder via the "Insert" menu and manually overwrite the default text. With this option, make sure the placeholder link is still attached to the text (you can check this by clicking on the text and going to "Link" in the sidebar.)
      Campaigns allow you to send newsletters to large audiences from any device, including mobile. Direct Mail is for sending emails to a few hand-picked contacts, like birthday greetings, personal offers, and transactional emails, directly from the Mail Designer app on your Mac.
      macOS offers an auto save feature that automatically saves the last state of a document when closing the window. With this feature activated, you will not get asked if you want to save the last changes you made when you are trying to close the window.

      Your Mac allows you to activate the auto save feature directly via the System Preferences of your Mac:

      ‣ Open your Mac's System Preferences
      ‣ Open the "General" tab
      ‣ Untick the option "Ask to keep changes when closing documents"
      ‣ Afterwards, you need to restart your Mail Designer 365 app


      If you are currently using an older version of Mail Designer and you are concerned about losing your work if you upgrade to Mail Designer 365, don't worry! It is super easy to import all of your previous designs from an older version of Mail Designer.

      Please carry out the following steps to access your templates:

      1. Click on "File" > "Import settings and designs."

      2. When the migration window pops up, select "Grant access" to continue.

      3. In the next window, simply select "Grant access" again to allow Mail Designer 365 access to the design files in your Library. You do not need to select a different folder.

      4. Select from the list which settings you would like to copy over to Mail Designer 365 (i.e. from which version) and then click "Import selected."

      5. Your designs and in-app preferences will then be quickly imported into Mail Designer 365 exactly as they were when you last used them.



      Email design features are exclusively available in the Mail Designer 365 app for Mac. However, if you have set up a Mail Designer 365 team, Windows and other non-Mac users can use Mail Designer 365 Campaigns on any device and in any browser to:
      • View, comment on and approve email design drafts
      • Receive test emails
      • Manage email contacts and audiences
      • Schedule and send email campaigns
      • Access post campaign analytics

      Get your team started today with a free Campaigns plan for up to 10 team members!

      Campaign Monitor supports a few placeholder links, such as “Unsubscribe Link”, ”View in Web Link” (also called “Web Version”), and “Forward Link” (also called “Forward to a Friend”). Unfortunately, Campaign Monitor does not support custom styling on these links. Mail Designer text buttons are links with custom styling, and as such cannot be used with one of the aforementioned link targets when exporting to Campaign Monitor.

      Instead of text buttons that link to one of the aforementioned targets, please insert a normal placeholder link. For example, use the menu entry “Insert > Campaign Monitor > Unsubscribe Link” to add an unsubscribe link to your document.
      Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not offer any kind of spam testing service. However, if you are worried about your email being caught out by a spam filter, most ESPs do offer spam testing as part of their service.

      One fairly popular service is this one from Litmus.

      For tips on how to avoid getting caught in a spam filter, check out this blog post.
      Mail Designer 365 gives you many options to be creative when it comes to building your email designs. This includes the option to use text styles in image areas to create logos, call-to-actions buttons, and more.

      While we strongly encourage you to be as creative as possible when it comes to exploring fonts and text styles for your email designs, we also recommend using a good balance of "real text" and image elements in every design.

      When an email design has a large amount of images or image elements (such as shapes, text styles, graphics etc) the risks increase when you go to send it. Firstly, emails which are largely image-based are larger and generally take longer to load. If your recipient is viewing your email on a poor internet connection, it's highly likely they will not see any of the image elements. This is obviously not ideal if the majority of your design is images, as the reader will be greeted by a blank screen.

      Secondly, the likelihood of your email getting caught in a spam filter increases with the amount of image elements you include. This is a safety precaution put in place by many email providers, as spam emails typically contain a high quantity of images.

      To summarize, we would always recommend you to use real text where possible in order to reduce the amount of images in your email design. However, if you want to use text styles in an image area, do so with caution and only where necessary. If you can create the same effect using real text, this would always be the better option to reduce risks after sending.
      Mail Designer 365 has pre-made buttons that you can use in your email designs.
      ‣ Within the "Contents" section of Mail Designer 365, you can click on the triangle icon or press Command⌘-2 to show shapes. 
      ‣ You will have many different button options under the "Buttons" subsection.

      ‣ Drag your chosen button to an image area.
      ‣ You can edit the message by double-clicking the text of the button.


      Adding a link to your button:


      ‣ Make sure to add a link to your desired landing page by double-click the button shape. 
      ‣ When you double-click the shape, the "Style" section will open on the left side.
      ‣ Click on "Edit Link & Background."

      ‣ Under the "Link" subsection, you will be able to click "Add Link" to add the link to your landing page.


      Please refer to the following page for how to add CTA buttons:

      Please refer to the following page for a brief overview of the Contents:

      Please refer to the following page for tips on how to strategically position your call-to-action buttons:


      Blend Modes allow you to control the way image elements (e.g. images, shapes, patterns, etc.) behave when layered together.

      If you use a normal Blend Mode when placing one image element on top of another, the bottom layer will be completely covered by the top layer:



      However, there are in fact multiple ways in which you can layer image elements. You can control this by applying various Blend Modes to modify the way two layers blend with each other.

      Access Blend Modes under the "Style" menu after clicking on a design element. Here you can scroll through the different modes to find the effect which works best for your design.



      You can find more detailed information about the different Blend Modes available in Mail Designer 365 in this guide.
      If you downloaded the free demo version of Mail Designer 365 from the Mac App Store, your demo is not auto-renewing and will expire automatically at the end of your 7 day term.

      Once your demo has expired, you will need to purchase a plan to continue using Mail Designer 365. See all plan options in our store.
      Additional stamps can be purchased at any time, either through a Mail Designer Campaigns plan, which provides new stamps monthly, or through a one-time purchase of stamps:
      Monthly Stamps Plan
      One-Time Stamp Purchase
      There are numerous bugs that come with HTML 5 video tags. A large number of devices have severe issues with them. For example, in most iOS versions, iPhones and iPads will display just a black rectangle that recipients can't interact with. When you tap the area where the video is supposed to be, nothing happens. It doesn't even try to open the video in the browser or open the appropriate app. Due to these factors that are beyond our control, we decided that it is best to no longer support the HTML 5 video tags. However, you can easily add video links by dragging a video placeholder into an image area. Then, you can choose your own preview image for the video. If you are linking to a YouTube video, you can generate a preview image by clicking "Generate preview."


      Please note: Email clients are picky when it comes to the HTML they will support - things that you can safely use in almost any web-browser won't necessarily work for emails.
      We offer a free trial for the Mail Designer 365 App and a free plan for testing Mail Designer Campaings. These trials can be used to test all functionality of the app and the service, helping users identify the best fit for their needs. After this trial period, all sales are final upon subscription, in accordance with our Terms and conditions.
       
      Please be aware that we cannot process refunds in the following scenarios:
      • Non-usage of the app or service
      • Failure to cancel your account within the cancelation period
      • Lack of features or functionality on your subscribed plan
      • Purchases made in error
      • Exceptional circumstances beyond our control
      • Violations to our Terms of Use
      Sometimes text you add for the desktop version of your newsletter will be too large or too small for your mobile version. In Mail Designer 365 it's easy to modify the text size for the mobile version of your newsletter to make it just the right size.

      In our Mail Designer 365 Manual we have detailed instructions on how to modify the text size for the mobile version of your newsletter.

      MailChimp has free and paid plans. Please visit the MailChimp website for more details and exact pricing information.

      With Mail Designer 365, you can easily add a link into any text. You can also add multiple links within a text area.
      ‣ Mark the text that you would like to turn into a link. 
      ‣ Click "Add Link" from the left sidebar.

      ‣ You can now choose what type of link you want to add:

      ‣ Then enter your URL in the Link destination dialog box:

      Note: You can change the color and text options of your link using the regular font options.
      Mail Designer 365 lets you add backgrounds to several areas within your email template. When you have added a main background picture but want to have transparent backgrounds within your text blocks, then you must delete the background of different areas within the text block.
      ‣ Make sure to click on the padding area of a text block.

      ‣ Click "Delete Background" on the right side.

      ‣ Afterwards, click on the outer area of the same text block.
      ‣ Then, click "Delete Background."

      ‣ Your text block should now have a transparent effect.


      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to create transparent effects:
      We have multiple favorites that we are sure will keep your email newsletters in style. Raleway, Work Sans, and Montserrat are just a few of the font styles you can try in your next email design.

      Check out our video tutorial for more font inspiration:



      {YOUTUBE_QtbUHCMeRTs}

      Also, please refer to the following page for a step-by-step guide on how to download more fonts in Mail Designer 365:



      Yes there is! Mail Designer 365 is our brand new and updated version of Mail Designer - only available on an annual subscription basis. Subscribers have access to our best new features and benefit from regular updates.


      Most importantly, Mail Designer 365 will always be optimized for the latest mac OS version, so as long as you are subscribed, you will never have to worry about paying for an upgrade again!



      Visit our website today to purchase Mail Designer 365.



      Copying in pre-formatted text to your email design from another program such as Microsoft Word or Apple Pages can sometimes lead to difficulties in Mail Designer 365 - particularly if you don't have text styles set up. This is often due to how other programs copy text to the clipboard and can result in unwanted line breaks or other formatting issues.


      For best results, typing your email copy directly into the text layout blocks in Mail Designer 365 is most effective. Where this is not possible and you need to copy in text from elsewhere, we would recommend first copying and pasting your text into a plain text editor (such as TextEdit on the Mac) to strip any formatting before entering it into Mail Designer 365.


      If you have text styles set up already, you can use the "Paste and Match Style" option and you won't need to reformat anything.
      No. Currently, Mail Designer 365 is only available for Mac (macOS) computers.

      If you're sure that your time with us is at an end then we've made it nice and easy to remove all your info from our database so that you don't need to wait for us to do it.

      Just log in at your License Manager, click 'Edit your Account' on the left hand navigation panel and, after a tearful farewell, click 'Delete Account'.

      If you do leave then we'd like to say thank you, bye and come back soon!

      Mail Designer 365 uses a lot of web technology under the hood which could be picked up by your security software. Some security software, for example such as Avast, may therefore come into conflict with Mail Designer 365 - potentially causing the app to stop responding.

      To fix this, you could try white-listing Mail Designer 365 from the security software or exempting it from the checks. Otherwise, we recommend you get in touch with your security software's support team to find a possible solution.
      You can sign up for a MailChimp account here.

      Please refer to the following page for a step-by-step guide on how to sign up for MailChimp:


      Currently, Mail Designer 365 is only available for Mac (macOS) computers.

      Mail Designer 365 offers multiple options for sending your email designs to your audience.

      Testmail

      Mail Designer 365's Testmail service is designed for sending internal test emails to yourself or to your team – i.e. to preview how your finished email design will look in the inbox.

      Test emails will be sent from the Mail Designer 365 Testmail service via our secure servers.

      Sending external emails

      You also have the option to send your email design to external email addresses (i.e. contacts who are not part of your Mail Designer 365 team) via Delivery Hub. These emails will be sent from your own email address.

      Choose between an email campaign: Send to a list of contacts or an individual mailing: Send to individual email contacts.

      Check out this guide for more information on sending email campaigns via Delivery Hub.

      Mail Designer 365 usually starts within a few seconds. If the startup process takes longer, please check whether you have installed a virus scanner or other endpoint security software (e.g. from Sophos).

      This software can severely affect the startup process. If possible, please add an exception for Mail Designer 365 or the following directory:

      ~/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner/Documents

      The tilde (~) represents your home directory. This exception is only necessary for read operations; write operations can still be monitored.
      To cancel or manage a subscription in the App Store, open the App Store, sign in, and click on your account icon in the bottom left corner of the window.

      Then, click "View information" in the top right of the window, enter your password if prompted and scroll down until you see the subheading "Manage". Here you will be able to see how many subscriptions you have associated with your account.



      Click on "Manage" to view and edit your subscriptions on your Mac.

      You can find out more information from the Apple Support website.
      Mail Designer 365 has been developed especially for creating responisve newsletters
      Templates, which has been created with Mail Designer standard are perfect for custom layouts such as synopses and templates with your CI. Because of this, it is not possible to open Mail Designer standard documents in Mail Designer 365 and get the same results.

      Since Mail Designer Standard templates are not responsive, it's not possible to open them through Mail Designer 365 and get the same results. You can manually import Mail Designer 2 templates into Mail Designer 365 by dragging a template (or several templates) out onto your desktop. Then, drag them into the Design Chooser in Mail Designer 365. Unfortunately, we cannot guarantee that your design will remain intact.
      Yes, but not directly. You will need to add a mail account in Mail Designer 365 using your own server. It is not possible to do an HTML export and then send via Outlook because Outlook does not support this.

      This guide shows you how to configure your own email address to send directly from Mail Designer 365.
      Responsive newsletters are emails which change their layout and content depending on which device they are viewed. One newsletter opened in Mail on your Mac will look different if opened on an iPhone.

      Text blocks, for example, which are arranged side by side in the desktop version will appear one below the other when viewed on an iPhone.


      With Mail Designer 365, you can create responsive newsletters. By editing images, graphics and text objects for the mobile version you can optimize your template for mobile devices.

      Yes, absolutely! We offer a free seven-day demo for Mail Designer 365 where you can explore the benefits of the software for yourself. In the seven-day trial version you can create and save your own designs and campaigns and also send test emails to yourself.

      Please bear in mind that the full subscription version of Mail Designer 365 is required to export your designs as HTML.

      You can download the free trial version here.
      No. We have found that SendX struggles with some HTML implementations, even with official HTML standards. Therefore, it is better to choose a delivery service that supports all common HTML standards. For example, you can use the integrated mailing service of Mail Designer 365.
      With Mail Designer 365, you can choose from a variety of different video placeholders.
      This allows you to link to online videos directly within your email design. Please note that Mail Designer 365 does not support embedding videos directly within your email designs.


      After you have added a video placeholder from the Contents panel, copy the link to the video into the link field.


      Mail Designer 365 allows you to use links from Youtube and Vimeo. In addition, you can upload your own MP4 files to your server or Dropbox account and copy the public link to this file into the video placeholder.

      If you are using your own MP4 files, the video will be played directly in the email application. However, this is only true if this functionality is supported by the email client. Videos will not be played directly in the email. Instead, your subscribers will be led to the online video.

      Please note that video clips you want to use in video placeholders must be uploaded to a third-party hosting website like YouTube or Vimeo. Video files that are only available on your Mac cannot be used in your email design.
      Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not directly support forms embedded within your email design. To make sure that your recipients are getting the optimal design that you created, we decided to leave out the HTML forms feature. Most email clients do not support HTML forms, which is why Mail Designer 365 was designed to not support HTML forms. If you were to add forms in your email design, there is no way that we could make sure that your recipients will get a functional survey that you created, since we have no control how email clients read and interpret your newsletter.

      However, if you needed to add a form to get feedback from your recipients, then we suggest linking to an outside form maker like Google forms. You can use an image or a specific text and add a link to your form.
      There are exisiting tools on the market which claim to be able to convert Photoshop designs into HTML emails but the end result is essentially just an email made up entirely of images.

      In general, we recommend that customers avoid creating all-image designs, as this has a negative impact on the deliverability and loading speed of your email, as well as affecting your compatibility with various email clients. For example, some email clients do not automatically display images within emails and, if this is the case, your email will appear to readers as a blank page.

      In order to get your design noticed by your recipients, we strongly recommend that you use real text and images in your emails, as these types of designs will load quicker and also look good in all email clients. Use your Photoshop design as a reference and re-create it using Mail Designer 365's built-in layout blocks and design features.
      Mailchimp no longer supports the old APIs used by previous Mail Designer versions.

      Please update to Mail Designer 365 1.7 or later to use the latest Mailchimp 3.0 API.

      Mail Designer 365 1.7 is included with all Mail Designer 365 plans, owners of previous Mail Designer versions can purchase an upgrade plan.

      You can easily turn off the automatic renewal for your Mail Designer 365 plan in your my.maildesigner365 account.

      1. Log in to your account.
      2. Go to “Purchases & Plans” under Settings.
      3. Disable the automatic renewal for your plan.

      Important:
      By turning off automatic renewal, you may lose any existing price advantages.
      Once your current plan expires, it can’t be reactivated — however, you can purchase a new plan at the then-current price at any time.

      When you schedule a Newsletter campaign, it always gets sent with the exact version of the design you created it with. If you make changes to your design after creating your campaign, you will need to open the scheduled campaign and save it again for your changes to take effect.

      Detailed instructions for changing the design on a scheduled campaign:
      1. Open up your template in Mail Designer 365 and make the changes in your design
      2. Go to Delivery Hub and open your scheduled campaign
      3. The new version of your template will be picked automatically.
      4. Press Save to save your campaign with the new design
      5. Repeat for other scheduled campaigns using the same design


      Please remember, changing a template is only possible while a campaign is in the Scheduled State. If it has already been sent, the design cannot be changed.

      Mail Designer Campaigns does offer a link change service in case you accidentally used the wrong link in your design: How to edit a link in an email after sending
      Mail Designer 365 allows you to export your email templates as HTML files containing your design. You can reuse your design with other services or publish a copy as a webpage.
      ‣ Open your design
      ‣ Choose “Share" > "Website /HTML...” from the menu bar.

      ‣ Choose a location to save your design.
      ‣ Optional: Enter a custom name for the exported .HTML file
      ‣ Optional: If you plan on uploading your images to a separate web server, you can enter an absolute URL prefix for the images.

      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to export your email design as a webpage:


      Yes, Mail Designer 365 is a paid upgrade for everyone who is upgrading from Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2, or Mail Designer Pro. After you have purchased a Mail Designer 365 plan, all updates are covered without additional cost for the duration of your Mail Designer 365 plan.

      Mail Designer Standard and Mail Designer Pro users can find out more about what's new in Mail Designer 365 on this page.

      Every area of text in your Mail Designer 365 email design should have a dedicated text style applied. This ensures your text will be formatted correctly after you have exported your template.

      If you add a text link to your email without also applying a text style, this could result in the link not being applied correctly after export.

      If your links are not displaying correctly following export to Mailchimp or another service, please open your design in Mail Designer 365, check every text area has a text style applied, then re-export your design.

      You can find out more about text styles in the Mail Designer 365 Manual.
      Sending out an email blast via SMTP to a larger group of recipents will potentially cause problems with the new procedures put in place. This means that if you continue to use this process, your emails will most likely get blocked by the recipient email provider (Gmail, Yahoo, etc.). This will result in only a few of your recipients actually receiving the emails.

      The thing triggering these blocks of email transmissions is not the nature of the email. Even personal Christmas Greetings will potentially get blocked if sent to a large enough audience. After all, how would the email provider know what nature the content of the email is? They block emails purely based on the number of emails being sent at the same time from the same origin.

      Here is how Mail Designer Campaigns can help in this situation:
      - When you don't have your own domain email address, we replace the From Address automatically with one of our verified Domains
      - This address replacement would look as follows: Original Address - supercoolmails@yahoo.com New Address: supercoolmails.yahoo.com@sentwith.maildesigner365.com
      - Since the Domain @sentwith.maildesigner365.com is fully DKIM certified, these emails would not be blocked due to DKIM issues.

      Alternatively if you do have your own Domain, Mail Designer Campaigns allows you to DKIM verify your send address, so you can send from your own Domain without being blocked by the providers.

      Are you new to Mail Designer? Why don't you try the Mail Designer Free Demo for Mac users.
      Not all email clients have all fonts that we offer in Mail Designer available for the display of your newsletter. In order to prevent your design from getting broken on various email clients, you have the option to define fallback fonts that will be used in case the actual font you chose for your newsletter is not available. You can choose several fallback fonts to ensure that the style as close as possible.

      In our Mail Designer 365 Manual we have detailed instructions on how to set up a fallback font for your newsletter.

      Emails that contain only images are often flagged as spam because spam filters rely on text to evaluate the content's legitimacy. Without text, the filters may assume the email is hiding suspicious or harmful content, a tactic commonly used by spammers. Additionally, image-only emails can load slowly, frustrating recipients and increasing the likelihood that they will mark your email as spam.

      To improve your email's chances of landing in the inbox, follow these best practices:

      1. Avoid image-only layout blocks: Instead of using layout blocks that consist only of images, opt for blocks that combine text and images. This ensures your text gets displayed as actual text, not as part of a large image, which helps filters and recipients better understand your content.
      2. Include relevant text: Clearly explain the purpose of the email using text. This gives spam filters context to analyze and helps your audience engage with your message.
      3. Use alt text for images: Add descriptive alt text to each image. This ensures that even if the images don’t load, recipients (and spam filters) can still understand the email’s content.
      4. Maintain a good text-to-image ratio: A balanced approach, where there’s more text than images, can reduce the chances of your email being flagged as spam. The text gives spam filters more material to evaluate.
      5. Use a combination of image and text blocks: Combining both elements not only enhances readability and engagement but also prevents spam filters from interpreting your email as an attempt to hide important information in images.
      6. Use a reputable email service provider like Mail Designer 365 Campaigns: Many email service providers such as Mail Designer 365 Campaigns help optimize email structure and offer authentication protocols like SPF, DKIM, and DMARC to enhance deliverability.

      By following these guidelines and ensuring your email contains a mix of well-placed text and images, you can improve its deliverability and reduce the risk of it being sent to the spam folder.

      ‣ Download the app.
      ‣ Go to your downloads folder and find the app.
      ‣ Drag the app that you downloaded and drop it into the Applications folder.


      There are three main ways to take a screenshot on your Mac:
      • Press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "4" then click and drag the mouse cursor to capture a specific area of your screen.
      • Press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "4" and then the space bar to capture a specific window or element on your screen.
      • Alternatively, press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "3" to capture your full screen.
      You can use MailChimp placeholders in your Mail Designer 365 email designs. For example, you can use placeholders in order to personalize your mailings with the first or last name of the recipient. You can also preview the final result via the MailChimp website.

      To do so...
      ‣ Please go to the MailChimp website and log in. When you are ready, upload your design to MailChimp by creating a new campaign.
      ‣ Select the email design you just uploaded and click "Preview and Test."
      ‣ Next, click "Enter preview mode."
      ‣ Click the button for "Enable live merge tag info". You will now see your information for the placeholder you have entered.

      You can change the language of all equinux Software products by changing the language settings of your device. For instance, on the Mac, you can do the following:
      ‣ Open "System Preferences."
      ‣ Click "Language & Region."

      ‣ Change to your preferred language by dragging your selected language to the top of the list.

      ‣ Close your software. For example, with VPN Tracker, you can do so by choosing "VPN Tracker" > "Quit VPN Tracker."

      ‣ Reopen the software.


      If you need to force quit your software for any reason (e.g. your screen has frozen or the app is not responding) please do one of the following:
      • If the app you want to quit is in your dock, hold the "Option" (⌥) key and right-click on the app icon, then, select "Force Quit" from the menu.
      • You can also hold down "Option" (⌥) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "Esc" which will trigger a window with a list of apps you have running. To force quit one or more of these apps, simply select it from the list and click the "Force Quit" button.
      If you wish to uninstall Mail Designer from your Mac, you can start by removing any associated files.

      To get started, go to Finder. In the menu bar, choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..."



      Enter this path into the search box:
      ~/Library/Containers/net.tower-one.MailDesigner
      to locate and then delete.

      Following this, enter this path into the search box:
      ~/Library/Group Containers
      and delete the Mail Designer folder.

      Finally, to uninstall Mail Designer from your Mac, go to the Applications folder (or wherever you stored the app) and move it to the trash.

      This will completely remove the app and all files from your Mac. To also remove its settings, open Terminal.app (from Applications > Utilities) and enter the following command:

      defaults delete net.tower-one.MailDesigner

      Plans that are set to auto-renew may keep pricing benefits ("grandfathered pricing").

      By deactivating the auto-renewal option, you will automatically lose any of your existing price benefits (i.e. promotions or introductory offers.) This action cannot be reversed. Should you then wish to renew your plan at a later point, you will be billed at the regular plan price.

      Please be aware that your plan will also end if your payment method cannot be charged at the time of renewal (i.e. expired, lost or stolen). If you need to update your payment method, you can do so at any time in your my.maildesigner365 or my.vpntracker account.
      Making the switch from Campaign Monitor to Mail Designer 365 Campaigns? Mail Designer 365 combines flawless HTML email design with easy to use sending tools and tailor-made audiences based on smart and adaptive placeholders.

      Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub makes it super straightforward for you to import your existing email lists directly from Campaign Monitor so you can get started right away. All you need is your Campaign Monitor API key!

      Check out our simple, step-by-step guide to get started →
      Placeholders can be used to insert subscriber details or unsubscribe link into your newsletter automatically when you send it via MailChimp or Campaign Monitor.

      To use a placeholder, please try the following:
      ‣ Select a text area
      ‣ Please choose "Insert" > "MailChimp" or "Campaign Monitor"
      ‣ Choose a placeholder



      Note: A placeholder cannot be used on text within an image area, you'll need to place your cursor in a text area to use placeholders.
      HTML/CSS newsletters cannot differentiate between Windows 10 Mail and Outlook, even though Windows 10 Mail and Outlook have different behavior and render the same content differently.

      This means that it's only possible to have a newsletter render correctly in either Windows 10 Mail or Outlook 2013, not both. Due to Outlook 2013 being in more widespread use, we decided to provide correct rendering in Outlook 2013.
      We currently only offer Mail Designer 365 as an annual plan. You can purchase a plan here.
      To use the redirect function in Apple Mail, try the following:

      ‣ Choose "Message" > "Redirect"

      ‣ Type the recipient's email address
      ‣ Click the "Send" button


      For more information, please read Apple's support page here.

      Note: We always recommend that you use the "redirect" feature rather than to forward your Mail Designer 365 email design.
      Since Beta versions are meant to test features and compatibility, Mail Designer 365 will remind you to have a backup of your app and designs.

      Some kinds of software may cause issues with Mail Designer 365:

      1. Personal Firewalls
      2. Protection Software (e.g Virus Scanners, Malware Protection)

      Personal Firewalls usually ask the user, if an app should be allowed to send network traffic. It’s important to grant Mail Designer full network access. If you have already added rules for Mail Desinger, please whitelist Mail Designer.

      Protection Software often sees authentication traffic as a potential source of threat, as it isn’t able to analyze that traffic because of its very strong encryption. Please ensure Mail Designer is ignored by any protection software running on your Mac and allow this traffic to pass through.

      Here are some common examples of the types of apps mentioned above. If you are uncertain whether any of these applications may be installed on your system, try the following:

      • Open the app “Terminal”
      • Copy and paste the following command: kextstat | grep -v com.apple

      You’ll get a list of all kernel extensions that are not from Apple. Just compare that list with the identifiers in parenthesis below:

      • Little Snitch
        (at.obdev.nke.LittleSnitch)
         
      • Sophos Anti Virus
        (com.sophos.kext.oas, com.sophos.nke.swi)
         
      • Symantec Endpoint Protection / Norton AntiVirus
        (com.symantec.kext.SymAPComm, com.symantec.kext.internetSecurity, com.symantec.kext.ips, com.symantec.kext.ndcengine, com.symantec.SymXIPS)
         
      Many of our users design personalized offers, exposés, or greetings with Mail Designer 365. Alternatively, they may want to test a direct mail to a colleague before a mass mailing. This is what 'Direct Mail' is intended for.

      The Direct Mail feature is not designed for newsletters. For newsletters, please create a Mail Designer 365 campaign and send it directly to your target audience.
      Mail Designer 365 has a handy checking button that you can find on the top left.



      While you are designing and creating your newsletter, Mail Designer 365 continuously scans your email template for any issues as they occur. You will notice a number appear on the checking button in cases when Mail Designer 365 has found issues or potential errors in your email design.



      You can also click on the checking button whenever you want to check for design issues.

      Please refer to the following page for more information on the Checking feature in Mail Designer 365:


      During the export to Mailchimp, Mail Designer needs to create a temporary campaign which usually is deleted after the upload. However, in rare cases, it's possible that something went wrong and these temporary campaigns are left over. You can safely delete them without it impacting your actual campaign. They start with MailDesigner365-Temporary-.
      With the versions feature of macOS, you can access different versions of your Mail Designer 365 email designs.

      To do so, please follow these steps:
      ‣ Open one of your Mail Designer 365 email design
      ‣ Choose "File" > "Revert To"
      ‣ Select a version or click "Browse all versions"

      If you have a charge from equinux on your credit card that you do not recognize, it may be for one of the following products offered through the equinux Online Store:

      • VPN Tracker (VPN software for Mac, iPhone and iPad)
      • Mail Designer 365 (email newsletter design software for Macs)
      • tizi (iPhone and iPad accessories)

      Common scenarios

      Auto-renewing products

      VPN Tracker and Mail Designer 365 are offered as subscriptions. When a plan has been configured to auto-renew, the associated payment method will automatically be charged.

      Additional team-members added

      If multiple employees are using one of our products, they may have configured team billing. This means the associated credit card may have been charged, in order to add a new team member to an account.

      Invoices and other questions

      You can download your invoices from our website:

      If you have checked with your team and still have additional questions regarding a charge, please contact our support team. Be sure to include the details from your credit card statement and the last 4 digits of your card.

      Safari may ask for confirmation the first time you download a file from a website. So when you download an app from our website, choose "Allow" when prompted to start the download.



      Note: All of our apps are digitally signed and verified for security, so you can download with confidence.
      Apple Family sharing is not activated for our products.
      Mail Designer is warning you that the images are low resolution because Apple Pages does not copy its images in retina quality.

      To work around this, we recommend the following:
      ‣ In Apple Pages, double the size of your graphic. For example, if you had a shape that has the dimensions 100x100, please increase that to 200x200.
      ‣ Copy and paste it into an image area in Mail Designer.
      ‣ Then, select the image.
      ‣ Right-click (or Ctrl+click) on the image.
      ‣ Choose "Original Size (Retina)" from the drop-down menu. This automatically shrinks the image but becomes retina quality.




      Yes, you can easily adjust the opacity of any photo in your newsletter.

      ‣ Select the photo that you want to turn semi-transparent
      ‣ This will prompt Mail Designer 365 to open the "Style" section on the right side
      ‣ At the bottom, you will find the "Opacity" section
      ‣ Adjust the opacity slider to adjust the opacity of the photo you selected

      All templates you want to upload to MailChimp have to contain an unsubscribe link. By adding the Unsubscribe Link to your template you can ensure that your design will look correct on mobile devices and desktop clients and the MailChimp footer will be added at the end of your message.

      Add a MailChimp unsubscribe link

      To add an unsubscribe link to your template, please follow these steps:

    • Choose the text area you want to insert the unsubscribe link to.
    • Please choose "Insert" > "MailChimp" > "Unsubscribe Link" from the top menu bar.


    • Add a MailChimp Rewards badge

      You have a free MailChimp account and want to send a MailChimp campaign without the grey MailChimp Footer?
      Simply add the additional "Rewards" placeholder to your design together with the unsubscribe link and your campaign will be send without the MailChimp footer.
      You can add the "Rewards" placeholder by choosing "Insert" > "MailChimp" > "Rewards" from the top menu bar.

      Do you have a paid MailChimp account?
      In this case you don't have to add a MailChimp Rewards badge to your Mail Designer Pro document.

      If you have created a customized plain text version of your message, you'll need to add it to your MailChimp or Campaign Monitor newsletter separately.

      Simply copy Mail Designer 365's plain text version and paste it into your newsletter service's plain text section.


      Please refer to the following page for further information on plain text:


      You can easily print all of your email designs with Mail Designer Pro.
      ‣To print a document, choose ”File" > "Print…” from the top menu bar.

      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to print:

      So you've already exported your email design to MailChimp, Campaign Monitor, Direct Mail etc, and you notice a mistake in your text or something you want to adjust. It may seem like the quick and convenient option to do this within the ESP in question's HTML editor, but in reality, it's not as straightforward.

      Because HTML is so complex when it comes to emails, even the slightest change could have drastic consequences for your email design. This is why we meticulously test every line of code used in the Mail Designer 365 app, so we can ensure compatibility with practically all email clients.

      Editing text, or any other element of your design, outside of Mail Designer 365 can have an impact on your newsletter's code and cause it not to be displayed as you intended it to once you've hit send. For this reason, we strongly advise all changes to be made within the Mail Designer 365 editor to ensure compatibility.
      Yes, you can add video links into the mobile version of your Mail Designer 365 newsletter. Mail Designer 365 allows you to edit the mobile version of your email template independently from the desktop version, if you choose.
      ‣ Click on the smartphone icon on the left side to open the mobile version of your template.

      ‣ Drag a border line of an image area or text area.
      ‣ Mail Designer 365 will then give you the option to detach your mobile and desktop versions from each other.

      ‣ You can add a preview picture for your video adding a video placeholder within an image area by clicking "Contents."
      ‣ Then click the video placeholder icon:

      ‣ You will be able to add preview images with our video icons or with your own player overlays.


      Please refer to the following pages for further information on how to add video links into the mobile version:


      Mail Designer 365 gives you the option of sharing your email design with others via email. This option will send an email to a recipient with your template attached as a Mail Designer 365 document.

      ‣ Open the template you want to export.
      ‣ Choose ”Share" > "Share design document via Email...“ from the top menu bar.

      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to share your email design as an attachment:


      If you use an FTP service like Filezilla, you will need to make sure that you export your email design to a specific folder on your FTP account.

      ‣ First, open your email design in Mail Designer 365.
      ‣ Choose "File" > "Export as HTML..."

      ‣ Give your folder a specific name
      ‣ Connect to your server

      ‣ Upload your folder on your FTP account. With Filezilla, you can type the location of your folder within your Mac under "Local site."

      ‣ Or you can find the specific folder within the Filezilla window and then right click the folder. Choose upload from the drop down menu.

      ‣ Make sure all of the files are added to the folder, including the images used for the email design.
      ‣ Find the specific location path of your folder. With Filezilla, you will need to click on where your folder is within the server. The specific location path of your folder will be found under "Remote site:"

      ‣ Click the paper airplane icon on the top right of Mail Designer 365

      ‣ Choose "Website / HTML..."

      ‣ Check the box where it says "Prefix image URLS with:"
      ‣ Add the specific location path URL of your folder

      ‣ Click "Export"


      Whether you are using Filezilla or another FTP service, it is important to make sure that the location path URL of the folder is correct. Mail Designer 365 will rewrite all image paths and insert this URL in front of the image URL. This happens automatically for each image.

      If you need something changed on the invoice, please contact us via our support page.
      You also have the option of sending us a direct message.

      Note: We cannot guarantee that we will be able to make any changes after the invoice has been issued. This depends on a case-to-case basis. Thank you for your understanding.
      Due to compatibility reasons, it is not possible to directly copy HTML code from other ESPs (email service providers) such as Mailchimp into Mail Designer 365.

      However, due to the user friendly nature of Mail Designer, it is easy for you to copy elements of an external design into one of our templates and recreate your original design.
      Each campaign plan comes with monthly allocations of new Stamps. For instance, our basic plan 'Roma' includes 5,000 Stamps per month for your direct mail needs. In addition to this monthly option, you can also purchase Stamps as one-time buys, available in packages of 500, 1,500, or 4,000 Stamps.
      Mail Designer 365 version 1.7 and onwards uses Mailchimp's API 3.0. Earlier versions of Mail Designer use API 1.3, which Mailchimp announced they would be switching off on 2nd April 2019 and thus may not be able to export to Mailchimp after that date.
      Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not offer an automatic snap alignment tool for design elements. However, guide lines are a great workaround that you can use to align text and images more precisely.

      Using guide lines


      Guide lines act as a visual guide to help you align different elements within your design.
      To insert a guideline, go to "Insert" > "Horizontal/Vertical guideline":



      Drag guidelines across your design to position them where you want to align objects, then use the line as a guide to align images, shapes, text, graphics, etc. throughout your design or just in one layout block:



      To hide the guidelines once you are done aligning, click on the "Hide layout outline" icon at the top right of the page:

      To save, please try the following:
      ‣ Choose "File" > "Save"
      ‣ A pop up will appear.
      ‣ Give your email design a name.
      ‣ Choose a category or create a new category by choosing "Custom" from the drop-down menu. Then, type in the name of your new category.


      Once you save your email design, it will be saved in Mail Designer app. You can access it from the Design Chooser. You can click on "My Designs" or search for it in "My Library."


      Note: In the demo version of Mail Designer Pro 3, saving of designs is only possible after your purchase.

      Mail Designer 365 allows you to choose your own preferred language. You have several options of languages to choose from like American English, British English, etc.
      ‣ Select a text area. 
      ‣ Choose "Edit" > "Spelling and Grammar" > "Show Spelling and Grammar" from the menu bar.

      ‣ A pop up will appear that will let you choose a language.
      ‣ Just click on the "Automatic by Language."
      ‣ You can choose your preferred language from the different options from the drop down menu.


      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to choose your spell check language:

      You can change whether your text is automatically hyphenated in your text areas. To turn off the hyphenation, try the following:
      ‣ Go to "File" > "Design Options."

      ‣ Add a check mark from the "Force hyphenation."

      ‣ Click "Ok."


      Please refer to the following page for further information on how to turn on and off text hyphenation:
      With Mail Designer 365, you can choose any of the templates from the Design Ideas page as your email design starting point. Just click on any template and then click on the "Use this design" button to get started.

      You can also access any of the templates you have purchased within the "In-App Purchase Designs" found on the bottom right.

      When saving your design, you will have the option of creating different categories for your email designs. You will find them under your "My Library."

      Please refer to the following page for a brief overview of Design Ideas:


      Although there is currently no direct way to save your email template as a JPG or PNG file, we'll show you how you can still do that by following these simple steps:
      ‣ First, export your Mail Designer 365 template as a PDF file. 
      ‣ Choose “File" > "Export as PDF…”

      ‣ Save your document as a PDF file.
      ‣ Now, open your PDF file.

      ‣ Go to your menu bar at the top.
      ‣ Choose “File" > "Save As…”

      ‣ A popup window will appears, and you can choose the format you want. You can decide if you want to convert the PDF into a JPG or PNG file.

      Please refer to the following page for more information on how to convert your email design as a JPG or PNG file:



      The software we sell on our website and the version sold on the App Store offer the same design features and purchase options.

      There are only two differences:

      1. The equinux Online Store will always provide you with a proper purchase invoice, which can be useful for you if claiming the purchase against your taxes.

      2. You can access the beta version when you purchase from the equinux Online Store. When you purchase through the Mac App store, you will not have access to the beta version.
      When you use Mail Designer 365's HTML export feature, it exports separate HTML and image files. In order for the images to be displayed correctly to your recipients, they'll need to be hosted on a webserver.

      Many newsletter services take care of image hosting for you. You just upload the HTML file and images and they manage the rest.

      If you newsletter tool or service doesn't offer image hosting, you will want to upload images to your own web server. Mail Designer 365 has an option to enter your web server's URL during HTML export that lets you reference images that way.

      Can I hotlink to images from my website?

      No: Mail Designer 365 needs to adjust the dimensions of images precisely to work correctly with all email clients, so hotlinking to images on your website isn't supported. However you can export the images in your design and host them on your website's server as described above.

      If you're struggling with email deliverability—especially with Gmail users—there are proven strategies to improve sender reputation and ensure your emails land in inboxes rather than spam folders. Follow these steps to get back on track:

      Steps to Improve Email Deliverability:

      1. Warm Up Your Email Lists Gradually
        • Treat the process as if warming up a completely new account.
        • Divide your mailing into smaller batches and send them on different days. For example, start with 500 emails on Monday, 1,000 on Tuesday, 2,000 on Wednesday, and so on.
      2. Focus on Engaged Recipients First
        • Begin by sending emails only to contacts who have opened your emails recently (e.g., within the last 30 days for weekly senders).
        • Gradually increase this timeframe as your deliverability improves.
      3. Leverage Google Postmaster Tools
        • Set up Google Postmaster Tools to monitor spam rates, domain reputation, and other deliverability metrics.
      4. Create Test Gmail Accounts
        • Subscribe a test Gmail account to your email campaigns.
        • Monitor where emails land. If emails go to spam, interact with them (e.g., open, click, and reply) but do not move them out of the spam folder. This helps train Gmail’s algorithms.
      5. Adjust Based on Metrics
        • Use Google Postmaster Tools to track your spam rates. If spam rates are too high, reduce the timeframe of your engaged recipients or maintain the current level of sending until the rates stabilize.
      6. Monitor Progress
        • As Gmail deliverability improves and emails stop landing in spam, expand your email list incrementally to include less recently engaged recipients.

      How Mail Designer Campaigns Can Help:

      Mail Designer Campaigns provides several built-in features to optimize email deliverability and improve your sender reputation:

      • Professional Email Authentication: Ensure your emails are authenticated with SPF, DKIM, and DMARC, reducing the likelihood of being flagged as spam.
      • Engagement Tracking: Identify active and inactive recipients in your mailing list, allowing you focus on your most engaged contacts first.
      • Custom Domain Support: Addd your own domain to Mail Designer Campaigns to reinforce trust with email providers like Gmail.
      • Clean and Optimized Designs: Mail Designer 365 helps you to create email content that is visually appealing while avoiding spam-triggering elements, increasing inbox placement rates.
      • Advanced Segmentation: Mail Designer Campaigns allows for advanced segmentation, such as creating lists of only people who have opened the email in the past X days, and options for sending to only a portion of your subscriber list. This ensures that your emails reach the most engaged recipients first, improving overall deliverability.

      By following these best practices and leveraging Mail Designer Campaigns' tools, you can rebuild your sender reputation, enhance Gmail deliverability, and achieve more successful email marketing campaigns.

      The possibility of grandfathering pricing is exclusively available for customers using the automatic renewal option. In cases where your plan cannot be renewed due to a problem with the payment method (i.e. expired, lost or stolen), the plan will be canceled after a few tries. You are then free to re-obtain your plan at any time you wish for the then current price tier.

      In order to profit from your existing price, please ensure you update your payment method prior to the renewal date.

      You can view a copy of all your invoices in our Online Store:

      You will find the invoices for your VPN Tracker 365 purchases in the section "Invoices", here:

      http://my.vpntracker.com

      You work in accounting and need access to the VPN Tracker invoices for your company? Please ask your VPN Tracker Team manager to invite you to you company's team with the role "Accounting". Afterwards you will receive emails as soon as a new invoice is available and you can dowload this from the web portal


      You will find the invoices for your Mail Designer 365 purchases in the section "Orders", here:

      https://my.maildesigner365.com

      You will find the invoices for your tizi products in the section "Orders", here:

      http://my.tizi.tv

      Other invoices can be found at http://www.equinux.com/goto/invoice
      ‣ If you would like to save a PDF copy of your invoice, then do the following:
       Press "Command + P"  
       Choose "PDF" > "Save as PDF"

      Sometimes the VAT verification servers are temporarily not reachable, which can cause the error when trying to upgrade or purchase a Mail Designer 365 plan.

      In order to upgrade to Mail Designer 365 with your VAT, please try the following:
      ‣ Visit our  upgrade page.
      ‣ Purchase your Mail Designer 365 plan.
      ‣ Log in to your account
      ‣ Click on the button "Buying for a business?"
      ‣ Add a VAT ID
      ‣ Enter your full VAT number
      ‣ Click on "Validate VAT ID"
      Ideally, we recommend keeping your unsubscribe rate below 0.5% for optimal performance.

      Rates above 1% can be a warning sign, as only a fraction of people who want to unsubscribe will actually click the unsubscribe link—many others will mark your emails as spam instead. This means a 1% unsubscribe rate could result in 2–3% of your emails being flagged as spam by providers like Google or Hotmail. Over time, this can harm your sender reputation and cause all your emails to land in spam folders.

      To reduce your unsubscribe rate, focus on sending emails only to engaged subscribers. Start by targeting those who have opened your emails within the past 365 days, and adjust this timeframe based on your audience’s behavior. Additionally, segmenting your audience to deliver more tailored, relevant content can significantly improve engagement and reduce unsubscribes.
      To view the statistics of your email campaign in Mail Designer 365, follow these steps:
      1. Log in to my.maildesigner365.com
      2. Navigate to Campaigns and select Delivered.
      3. Select the desired campaign – the statistics will then be displayed.

      We don’t offer partial refunds. All of our 365 plans are valid for one year and you can cancel up to 10 days before the end of your term; however, if you do cancel, you will be able to continue using the software the expiration date of your plan.


      If you don’t have a warmed domain or custom email address, Mail Designer 365 offers a professional solution for sending email campaigns without the need for your own domain.

      How does it work?

      Mail Designer 365 uses its Mail Designer Delivery service, which ensures that your campaigns are sent reliably and securely from a trusted, pre-configured email domain. This avoids potential issues like deliverability problems caused by an unprepared domain or emails landing in spam folders.

      Why choose Mail Designer Delivery?

      • No Setup Hassle: You don’t need to purchase, warm up, or configure your own domain.
      • Trusted Reputation: Mail Designer’s sending infrastructure is optimized to ensure high deliverability.
      • Professional Appearance: Your emails are sent with an authenticated domain, giving a polished and professional look to your campaigns.
      • GDPR-Compliant Sending: All data is handled in compliance with GDPR, ensuring the privacy of your recipients.

      What’s the catch?

      While using a shared domain is a quick solution, a custom email domain (e.g., yourname@yourbusiness.com) is always recommended in the long term. This gives you full control and enhances your brand image. Mail Designer 365 supports this setup with tools to configure SPF, DKIM, and DMARC authentication for maximum deliverability.

      Ready to get started?

      Mail Designer 365 is perfect for sending individual emails or thousands of recipients quickly and professionally. Start your campaign with our delivery service today and reach your audience without worrying about technical setup or deliverability!

      An API key stands for an application programming interface key. The API key is similar to a password. Your email service provider may require you to enter an API Key before you can integrate it with Mail Designer. This is a way to add extra security. It requires you, the user, to enter additional authentication credential aside from your username and password.

      Email marketing isn’t dead—it has simply evolved. While it’s true that inboxes are busier than ever, email marketing remains one of the most effective ways to connect with audiences when done right. Here’s why:




      1. People value quality over quantity: Subscribers are more selective about the emails they sign up for, so it’s crucial to offer valuable, engaging, and relevant content that stands out. Generic or repetitive emails won’t cut it anymore.
      2. It’s a personal choice: Unlike unsolicited messages on platforms like WhatsApp, email gives recipients control—they’ve opted in to hear from you. For many people this makes emails far more welcome than intrusive messages on other channels.
      3. Still an ROI powerhouse: Email marketing continues to deliver one of the highest returns on investment (ROI) in digital marketing. When you focus on personalization and value, email can drive conversions better than almost any other medium.


      While automation and messaging apps like WhatsApp are growing, they serve different purposes. Instead of replacing email, they complement a well-rounded marketing strategy. So, no—email marketing isn’t dead. It’s just more competitive, and that’s a good thing because it pushes brands to be better.

      In case you want to include a "Subscribe" link in the newsletters but MailChimp only shows HTML code that you cannot embed, here's a quick way:

      In Mail Designer 365, select "Custom" as link type. Then, insert the MailChimp subscribe tag. Remember, you must insert a link and not the login form for web pages. Forms can not be embedded in mails.



      The Mail Designer manual has information on how to create your design and export it to MailChimp. Once you have sent your design to the big monkey in the sky, you can create campaigns, manage subscribers, track clicks and more with MailChimp's tools.

      There are so many different MailChimp features, that we can't describe them all in the Mail Designer manual. But don't worry: the MailChimp team have created webinars, how-to manuals, guides and tips to help you get started.

      Luckily, this is an incorrect report.

      The XCSSET malware is a trojan that replicates project files via Xcode; it targets mostly developers. To get it, you would need to download an infected Xcode project and build it. It creates fake apps and also downloads and installs payload (adware and similar things). So it does not infect existing apps.

      An interesting property of XCSSET is that it's mostly implemented in AppleScript. The generated fake apps contain a folder "Contents/Resources/Scripts" in which those AppleScript files reside. You can right-click on VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 in Finder, then click on "Show Package Contents" to check whether this Scripts folder or any AppleScript files (*.scpt) can be found; VPN Tracker 365 and Mail Designer 365 do not contain AppleScript files.
      Your account details such as address and email can be edited in the account management using the following link:
      Edit equinux ID
      We offer every customer a no-strings-attached trial period of Mail Designer 365 before purchase. The trial can be downloaded free of charge from our website. This allows users to test the vast range of features and tools included in a full plan before making any financial commitments to the software.

      For this reason, we cannot offer refunds once a plan has been purchased. This information is also clearly stated in the terms & conditions which must be accepted before completing the checkout process.
      If you want to view and manage your subscriptions on the Google Playstore, proceed as follows:
      Cancel, pause or change subscriptions on Google Play

      If you want to view and manage your subscriptions on the Apple AppStore, proceed as follows:
      View or cancel subscriptions
      For the protection of our customers, all payments in our store are processed with 3D Secure technology. 3D Secure is an additional security mechanism that works with 2-factor authorization. After entering the card details, the transaction is passed on to the credit card company and must be explicitly approved by the customer. The approval is usually done via SMS, app or email. With the explicit approval before the transaction, we can help prevent credit card fraud.

      In order to use your card with 3D Secure, it needs to be actived for your card. Please contact your bank for this. Registration is often possible on the bank's website or via your banking app. Please see the links below for more details:

      With the 3D Secure procedure, authentication communication takes place directly between your computer and your bank. We have no influence on this. If you have any problems, please contact your bank or try to pay with another card or PayPal.
      Viruses that infect existing applications are very rare on macOS, but they do exist. However, warnings that VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 are infected are very likely false-positives, meaning the tool has incorrectly identified malware in these apps that is actually not there.
      Some banks may have trouble processing credit card renewals which can cause your card to be denied.

      Generally, this can be resolved by a quick phone call to your bank. This should be your first port of call.

      Alternatively, you could also try the following:
      - Please try updating your card directly on our store page
      - Try a card issued by another bank (our store supports Mastercard, Visa and American Express)
      - Use PayPal (tip: often a problematic credit card will work when added to PayPal)

      You can manage your payment methods under http://store.equinux.com/storefront/subscriptions/.
      Especially so-called "clean up tools" that also scan for malware can report false-positives. If you suspect VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 to be infected, we recommend to upload your copy of the app to www.virustotal.com which is a free service that scans your uploaded files using several reputable virus scanners. If any of the virus scanners on this site flags the app, please contact us.

      How can I verify that my copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer has not been modified?


      All our apps are properly code-signed by Apple, so macOS can verify that the app has not been tampered with. You can check the integrity by opening Terminal.app and entering the following command:
      spctl --assess "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app"

      Please note that double quotes around the path are required because the path contains spaces. If your copy is in a different location, please replace "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" with the proper path to the app.
      The output may look like this:
      /Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app: accepted
      source=Notarized Developer ID

      If the app has been modified, an error message like this is printed:
      Mail Designer 365.app: invalid signature (code or signature have been modified)

      Please contact us if your copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 has an invalid signature.

      How can I verify that my copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 was signed by equinux?


      All our apps are properly code-signed by Apple, so macOS can verify that the app has not been tampered with. You can review this signature by opening Terminal.app and entering the following command:
        codesign -d -vv "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" 

      Please note that double quotes around the path are required because the path contains spaces. If your copy is in a different location, please replace "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" with the proper path to the app.
      The output may look like this:
      Executable=/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app/Contents/MacOS/VPN Tracker 365
      Identifier=com.vpntracker.365mac
      Format=app bundle with Mach-O universal (x86_64 arm64)
      CodeDirectory v=20500 size=81953 flags=0x10000(runtime) hashes=2550+7 location=embedded
      Signature size=9071
      Authority=Developer ID Application: equinux AG (MJMRT6WJ8S)
      Authority=Developer ID Certification Authority
      Authority=Apple Root CA
      Timestamp=1. Jun 2021 at 17:22:51
      Info.plist entries=42
      TeamIdentifier=MJMRT6WJ8S
      Runtime Version=11.1.0
      Sealed Resources version=2 rules=13 files=684
      Internal requirements count=1 size=216

      The important parts to look out for here are the lines starting with "Authority": They list the chain of trust. The last entry must always be "Apple Root CA", the entry above must either be "Developer ID Certification Authority" or "Apple Worldwide Developer Relations Certification Authority" for App Store versions. The first entry must either be "Developer ID Application: equinux AG" (VPN Tracker 365), "Developer ID Application: Tower One GmbH" (Mail Designer 365 non-App Store), or "Apple Mac OS Application Signing" (Mail Designer 365 App Store).
      Again, if you see a different entry, please contact us.
      Our prices and the currency you purchase in vary depending on which country you are purchasing from. We are headquartered in Germany and our default billing is in Euros. In order to see your final price and currency including VAT where applicable, please go to our Online Store and select your country. We are unable to accept payments in a different currency than what is displayed in the Online Store.
      When emailing a group of people, there have traditionally been several methods to do so. Examples of traditional "small group sending" include:
      • Regular email with several contacts in the To field
      • Regular email with several contacts in the BCC field
      • An email to a predefined group, such as an Outlook Group

      In recent years, email service providers have gradually increased email sending requirements. Once you approach 30 or more recipients for a single email, several problems can arise if you try to send that message using traditional email methods.
      • Your email service provider or the recipient's email service provider may raise suspicions of SPAM (unsolicited junk emails) sending, potentially leading to your account's suspension or temporary freeze.
      • Receiving an email with an extensive list of recipients often diminishes its perceived relevance to individual recipients, making it seem impersonal and more likely to be classified as junk mail.
      • Messages sent to a large number of recipients are often flagged by Junk Mail Filtering systems as Spam, increasing the risk of your message being blocked and not reaching its intended recipients.

      Especially with the latest Spam guidelines implemented by major email providers like Google and Hotmail, it's increasingly easy for your email address or domain to be blacklisted. This could result in your account being "Spam blocked," causing all your emails to be directed to recipients' spam folders. Removing this type of Spam block is a cumbersome process, so it's essential to avoid it.

      How can Mail Designer Campaigns assist you?
      • Mail Designer Campaigns enables you to fully verify your domain, ensuring optimal verification for your emails to reach recipients' inboxes.
      • If you don't have your own domain or prefer not to undergo the verification process, we can provide you with a custom address from a fully authenticated domain, significantly reducing the risk of your emails being marked as Spam.
      • We offer intelligent list management for your contact lists, allowing you to either send emails to all contacts or create targeted groups tailored to your audiences.

      In summary, recent Spam requirements have tightened regulations on small group sending. Therefore, if you regularly send emails to 10 or more people, we highly recommend using a mailing service like Mail Designer Campaigns.

      Begin your journey with Mail Designer Campaigns by uploading your contact list.
      The API integration is also compatible with from FileMaker 12 onwards, as well as with the FileMaker Go iOS app. When using attachments, at least FileMaker 18 is required.
      Yes – the Mail Designer API lets you fill placeholders in your designs and send emails automatically. For instance, you can send personalized messages to customers straight from FileMaker.

      Use the Template ID to target a specific design. You’ll find the Template ID in the Placeholder Inspector: simply select a placeholder in your design and copy the Template ID from the bottom of the sidebar.

      The API documentation can be found here:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/docs/api
      The integration of Mail Designer does not require any additional installation of FileMaker plug-ins or similar components. Technically, the integration is handled via a CURL request to the API endpoint of our Mail Designer delivery service. This is executed using the appropriate FileMaker script step.

      Thus, usage with FileMaker Go for iPhone and iPad is possible.

      By providing a FileMaker demo file, all relevant steps can be easily followed, see FAQ "How do I get started with the Mail Designer integration?"

      Yes, with Mail Designer 365 you can track whether an email was opened. The built-in Mail Designer Delivery email tracking features give you detailed statistics for every email and campaign you send.

      Whether you're using Direct Send or sending a newsletter campaign: If you send your email using the built-in delivery service in Mail Designer 365, you'll get access to detailed analytics – including open rate, click rate, and many other important metrics.

      You can view analytics for your newsletter campaigns here:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/campaigns/finished

      Detailed tracking is also available for Direct Send emails. You can find the relevant statistics here:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/direct/finished

      No matter which sending method you choose, Mail Designer 365 provides the following analytics:

      • Open rate and total opens
      • Click rate and total clicks
      • Delivery status and bounces
      • Unsubscribes (unsubscribe rate)
      • Detailed link click tracking
      • Recipient-level statistics

      This performance analysis helps you better understand the success of your email campaigns and improve your content accordingly.

      Tip: For accurate results, we recommend checking your statistics at least 24 hours after sending. This ensures your recipients had enough time to open and engage with your email.

      It’s simple: You only need two key files.

      The MailDesignerIntegrationExample file in FileMaker walks you through the required scripts step by step (.fmp12 FileMaker file):


      And in the Mail Designer 365 template, you’ll find placeholders that show how your FileMaker fields come to life directly in the design (Mail Designer file):


      Open this Mail Designer file and then go directly to File > Save to save it in your project.

      Don’t have the Mail Designer app yet?


      Create a FileMaker string with all your existing database variables so they correspond with the placeholders in your Mail Designer 365 template. Then, relay these to the FileMaker send script (cURL-based) to enable one-click emails directly from your records. It's that easy!
      To specify an email design to use with your FileMaker integration, go to:

      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/designs

      On the template you want to use, click the three dots icon and select “Mail Designer 365 API: Copy Template ID.”

      You will then use this ID to define the variable $EMailTemplateID.
      With placeholders, you can easily create target groups or personalize your emails. In third-party apps like FileMaker, you can create fields to use as placeholders in your designs. This allows you to send automated, personalized emails directly from FileMaker.

      A placeholder (e.g., “Country”) can have multiple values (e.g., “Germany”, “USA”).

      Add placeholders to your contacts to create target groups based on them (e.g., “Send newsletter only to users in the USA”).

      Or use the Mail Designer 365 app to insert these placeholders into your emails for personalization (e.g., “All of ‘Germany’ is Celebrating the Super Sale!”).

      Learn more in the handbook
      A Mail Designer 365 Design License is required to create the templates.
      A Mail Designer 365 Campaigns Plan is needed to send emails later from your Filemaker solution.
      The following steps are based on and explain the definition section of the script “Send record with Mail Designer 365.” This script is included in our freely available FileMaker demo database “MailDesignerIntegrationExample” (see link at the end of this FAQ).

      Step 1: Create the $AttributeFields Variable

      Start by creating a variable named $AttributeFieldsThis variable will contain the text string that defines the placeholder content used in your Mail Designer 365 email template. All values must be separated by commas.

      Scenario A: FileMaker Field Names Match the Email Placeholders

      Method:
      Use FileMaker field names that directly match the placeholders in your email design. Build the $AttributeFields variable by listing these field names, separated by commas.

      In Mail Designer, you simply use the field name as the placeholder.

      Format:
      $AttributeFields = "Table::Field1,Table::Field2,Table::Field3"

      Example Definition of $AttributeFields in FileMaker:
      $AttributeFields="CityHotel::GUEST_FIRST_NAME,CityHotel::GUEST_LAST_NAME,CityHotel::GUEST_EMAIL,CityHotel::BOOKING_METHOD"

      In Mail Designer 365, you can reference the values later using these placeholders:
      GUEST_FIRST_NAME
      GUEST_LAST_NAME
      GUEST_EMAIL
      BOOKING_METHOD




      Scenario B: FileMaker Field Names Do Not Match the Email Placeholders in Mail Designer

      Method:
      Build the $AttributeFields variable by manually mapping each placeholder name to the corresponding field or variable using the format:
      $AttributeFields = "PLACEHOLDER_NAME:" & FieldName_or_Variable & "," ...
      Example Definition of $AttributeFields in FileMaker:
      "BOOKING_DATE:" & RESERVATION_DATE & "," &
      "BOOKING_TIME:" & RESERVATION_TIME & "," & ...



      Scenario C: Using FileMaker Variables as Placeholders

      Method:
      If your FileMaker variable has the same name as the placeholder in Mail Designer 365, you can directly assign it like this:
      $AttributeFields = "$city,$country"
      This tells Mail Designer to use the value of $city for the placeholder named “city”.

      Example:
      The FileMaker variable $city contains “Munich”. If your Mail Designer template includes a placeholder named “city”, then define:
      $AttributeFields = "$city"
      The script will reveal the content “Munich” and pass it to Mail Designer to populate the “city” placeholder.



      The Best Scenario D: Mixing All Methods

      You can combine the approaches above into a single $AttributeFields string.

      Method:
      Mix matching field names, manually mapped fields, and variables in the $AttributeFields variable.

      Example:
      $AttributeFields = "BOOKING_DATE:" & RESERVATION_DATE & "," &
      "CityHotel::BREAKFAST_TYPE," & "$city"

      In Mail Designer 365 you can then reference them with the name BOOKING_DATE, BREAKFAST_TYPE and city
      With Mail Designer 365, that’s a thing of the past. Design updates can be made anytime directly by your marketing or design team—no developers, no coding. Your API or FileMaker solution simply references the Mail Designer template ID. Just open Mail Designer 365, make your changes (logos, texts, seasonal elements), save—and you’re done. That’s modern, efficient collaboration.
      Absolutely. The API integration (from your web scripts or a FileMaker solution) only links to the Mail Designer template ID, so you can change the design anytime—logos, texts, seasonal styles—without touching a single script. Just edit in Mail Designer 365 and save. Done.
      Yes, it’s possible. You need FileMaker 18 or later to add attachments using our API.
      All our licenses include a free 7-day trial – perfect for exploring all features at your own pace and making a well-informed decision.

      Visit our Mail Designer 365 Store.

      If you have any questions or run into any issues during the trial period, feel free to contact us at any time.
      Each Mail Designer plan includes a monthly allowance of “stamps.” One stamp is used per email sent to an individual recipient—for example, sending to an audience of 10,000 requires 10,000 stamps.

      When using the Mail Designer API, each delivery counts as 25 stamps.

      Example: The “Paris” plan includes 15,000 stamps per month, which allows for up to 600 API emails.
      Overview of the Mail Designer Delivery plans
      You need a Mail Designer 365 Design License to create email templates for your clients. You set up a separate project in Mail Designer 365 for each client and manage their templates there. If a client wants to regularly customize the templates themselves, they will also need a Design License.
      For sending emails, each of your clients requires their own Mail Designer Sending License. Every client must have their own Mail Designer 365 sending plan.
      We’re happy to assist with any questions or feedback via our support form
      No, you need to create a separate team for each client. Do not mix clients within one team — this is important to keep email history and other client-specific data clearly separated, especially for data protection reasons.
      Of course, you can be the administrator of all teams yourself.
      Create a new team for each client here:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/teams/new
      Your client will need a Mail Designer Campaign Plan, depending on how many emails they want to send. Here’s how billing works:
      1. Create a team:
      Set up a separate team in Mail Designer 365 for each client. You can assign a payment method to each team.
      2. You handle billing:
      If you want to manage billing yourself, add your own credit card to the team. You’ll receive a separate invoice for each team. You decide how much to charge your client.
      3. Client handles billing:
      If your client should pay for the Sending Plan directly, simply enter their payment details in the team settings.
      Currently, the API only supports text placeholders. Image placeholders are on our roadmap for a future release.y
      All equinux accounts support secure two-factor authentication (2FA) as an additional layer of security for your sensitive data.

      To set up 2FA for your account, log in to id.equinux.com and go to the tab Multifactor Authentication. Here you will find the QR code / authentication key needed to set up 2FA for your equinux account with your OTP solution.




      equinux 2FA supports all major authentication and password apps, including:
      • Google Authenticator
      • Microsoft Authenticator
      • Twilio Authy
      • 1Password
      • FreeOTP
      • Bitwarden
      Regularly sending booking confirmations, quotes, invoices, welcome emails? Use the API to seamlessly integrate Mail Designer 365 with your FileMaker database and send flawlessly designed transactional email templates to customers, clients, and staff – directly from FileMaker.
      The API is super versatile and lends itself to a number of professional use cases. If you are regularly sending transactional emails such as order confirmations, reservation details, welcome emails, appointment reminders, invoices, quotes, portfolios, etc., you can easily utilise the Mail Designer 365 FileMaker API to save time and send beautifully designed emails directly from your FileMaker database.

      The API documentation can be found here:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/docs/api
      Our own tests have shown that often the Filemaker script wasn’t saved before trying again. You can recognize this by the asterisk:

      Yes, we’re very familiar with this use case. That’s why we’ve created a dedicated guide on how to integrate FileMaker with Mail Designer. Check it out here:
      Mail Designer Integration for FileMaker.

      You can resize an image in two easy ways:

      Option 1: Resize directly in the design

      1. Click on the image you want to resize.
      2. Drag one of the orange corner handles to adjust the size manually.

      Tip: Hold Command (Cmd) while dragging to freely scale without keeping proportions (if desired).

      Note: The blue handle in the top-left corner adjusts the corner radius of the image, allowing you to create rounded corners.

      Option 2: Use the Size settings in the sidebar

      1. Select the image in your design.
      2. In the right-hand Image panel, under Size, enter a specific Width and Height in pixels.
      3. Make sure “Constrain proportions” is checked if you want to keep the image’s original aspect ratio.
      Image resizing settings in sidebar

      Want to crop your image instead? Check out our guide on how to crop images in Mail Designer.

      There are two main ways to change the background of a text area in Mail Designer 365:

      Use Layout Blocks with Backgrounds

      Mail Designer 365 offers layout blocks that come with built-in background colors for text areas:

      • Go to the sidebar and select the Layout tab.
      • Scroll down to the Text with image (sidebar) section.
      • Here you will find several layout blocks where the text areas have a colored background (shown as yellow in the preview).
      • Simply drag the desired block into your design to add text areas with backgrounds.

      Add and Customize a Badge

      If you want to add a background to specific parts of your existing text, you can use the Badge feature:

      • Click inside your text area where you want to add the background.
      • In the sidebar, select the Insert tab, then choose Badge.
      • Browse the badge styles and select one to apply it.
      • Once inserted, you can customize the badge’s background color, font style, border, padding, and more under the Format tab.
      • Paste or type your text inside the badge and adjust the design to your liking.



      Both methods let you create visually distinct text areas with backgrounds to enhance your email design.

      What does BCC mean in email?

      BCC stands for "Blind Carbon Copy." It allows you to send an email to multiple recipients without showing their email addresses to one another. It's a discreet way to include people in a conversation—without letting anyone else know.

      What is CC, and how is it different from BCC?

      CC stands for "Carbon Copy." Everyone listed in the CC field will receive the email—and everyone else will see that they received it. Use CC when transparency is important, or when you're looping someone in for visibility.

      • CC: Recipients are visible to everyone.
      • BCC: Recipients are hidden from each other.
      • Use CC when visibility and transparency matter.
      • Use BCC when privacy is important or to avoid reply-all chaos.

      When should I use CC vs. BCC?

      • Use CC when:
        • You want others to know who’s involved.
        • You’re keeping a colleague in the loop.
        • You’re sharing info within a team or organization.
      • Use BCC when:
        • You’re sending to a large group and want to protect privacy.
        • You’re sending a cold email and don’t want to expose other leads.
        • You’re following up discreetly or avoiding unnecessary reply-alls.

      Can I send a newsletter using BCC?

      Technically, yes—but it’s not a good idea.

      Using BCC for newsletters:

      • Can get your email marked as spam.
      • Feels impersonal and lacks personalization.
      • Offers no way to track engagement or manage subscribers.
      • Risks violating GDPR regulations.

      Instead, use a purpose-built solution like Mail Designer 365 to send professional emails the right way—with full tracking, personalization, and legal compliance.

      Why should I use BCC in emails?

      BCC is useful when you:

      • Need to keep recipient addresses private.
      • Want to send a message quietly to someone else.
      • Are emailing a large group without revealing each address.

      Pro tip: Always include at least one address in the “To” field when using only BCC—some mail servers require it!

      What should I avoid when using BCC?

      • Don't send recurring emails to large lists via BCC—use a proper mailing tool.
      • Don’t forget to comply with privacy and consent regulations.
      • Avoid using BCC in sensitive situations where full transparency is expected.

      What's the best way to send emails to many recipients?

      Skip the manual CC/BCC and go for a smarter option.

      With Mail Designer 365, you can:

      • Design eye-catching emails (no coding needed).
      • Manage and segment your audience.
      • Track performance with open, click, and bounce rates.
      • Stay 100% GDPR-compliant.

      Is using BCC for email campaigns GDPR-compliant?

      No, it’s not.

      Under GDPR:

      • You must prove consent for each recipient.
      • You need to include an unsubscribe option.
      • You must securely manage and store contact data.

      BCC doesn’t support any of this. Mail Designer 365 does—and is hosted in Germany, offering fully compliant sending infrastructure.

      Still unsure?

      Looking for a better way to send professional emails? Discover how to design stunning newsletters with Mail Designer 365 for Mac.

      Or explore how to send GDPR-compliant newsletters using the professional email features included in every plan.

      Mail Designer 365 is licensed per user. That means each person using Mail Designer 365 needs their own license.

      To prevent security issues, account sign-ins are checked by an automatic system. There are multiple possible causes that can trigger an account lock:

      • Sharing one account with other people
      • The account is being used as a "generic" account (e.g. "Lab computer 1"), instead of being personalized for one person
      To fix a locked account being shared with other people
      • Go to my.maildesigner365.com
      • Sign in with your equinux ID
      • Go to "Store" and choose "Add plans…"
      • Add additional licenses for each person that needs Mail Designer access and complete your order
      • Once you have the correct number of licenses for your team, assign the new licenses to your co-workers – check out our Team Setup Guide for step-by-step instructions

      Once you have completed these steps, please contact our support team and include your equinux ID and order confirmation number. A team member will review your details and will be able to lift the restrictions on your account.

      For any other questions, please reach out to our Mail Designer Team.

      Load more entries
      Um das Objekt zu drehen, halten Sie die Befehlstaste (cmd⌘) gedrückt und klicken dann auf eine der grafischen Größenänderungen eines Objekts oder eines grafischen Elements. Der Cursor wird dann zu einem rotierenden Symbol.



      Damit können Sie das Objekt frei drehen. Sie können Formen, grafische Elemente und Bildmasken drehen. Während Sie das Objekt drehen sehen sie gleichzeitig eine Angabe um wie viele Grade Sie das Objekt gerade gedreht haben.



      Wenn Sie sowohl den Text als auch das Objekt drehen möchten, halten Sie die Befehlstaste (cmd ⌘) und klicken Sie auf die Form und den Text. Sie werden sehen, dass die beiden Dinge jetzt ausgewählt sind. Klicken Sie auf "Gruppieren" auf der rechten Seite



      Sobald Sie die beiden Dinge zusammen gruppiert haben, halten Sie die Befehlstaste und klicken Sie auf Größe ändern. Sie werden wieder sehen, dass der Cursor sich zu einem rotierenden Symbol verändert. Jetzt können Sie die ausgewählten Objekte nach Ihrem belieben drehen.

      Weitere Informationen zum Drehen von Objekten mit Mail Designer 365 finden Sie auf folgender Seite:


      Aktuell funktionieren Anker-Links in vielen E-Mail-Apps nicht. Sie werden auch in iOS 14 und früher nicht unterstützt. Aus diesem Grund bietet Mail Designer 365 momentan keinen Support für dieses Feature.

      Sobald Anker-Links von mehr E-Mail-Apps unterstützt werden, werden wir uns das Thema nochmal ansehen.

      Wir haben einen Test-Export vorbereitet, damit du sehen kannst, wie typischer Mail Designer 365 HTML Code aussieht.

      Wir haben einen unveränderten Export einer Designideen gemacht. Natürlich kannst du beim Export die Bilderpfade, Dateiname, Präfixe usw. selbst festlegen, damit sich Mail Designer möglichst einfach in deinen Workflow integriert.

      Beispiel HTML Export laden
      Mail Designer war nicht in Lage, eine Verbindung zum eingestellten SMTP-Server aufzubauen. Bitte überprüfen Sie die Werte bei den SMTP-Einstellungen.

      Überprüfen Sie, ob der Servername und die Portnummer stimmen. Passen Sie wenn nötig die Einstellung „Sicherheit“ an.

      Nutzen Sie die „Überprüfen“ Schaltfläche, um Mail Designer mit den eingestellten Werten eine Testverbindung zu Ihrem SMTP-Server aufbauen zu lassen.
      Der in Mail Designer 365 verwendete HTML Code wird von unserem Entwicklungsteam sorgfältig getestet, um eine maximal mögliche Kompatibilität mit den meisten E-Mail-Clients herzustellen, um sicherzustellen, dass Ihre E-Mails immer gut aussehen.

      Da wir keine Möglichkeit haben, den benutzerdefinierten Code zu testen, den Kunden selbst bearbeiten, können wir nicht garantieren, dass E-Mail-Designs mit benutzerdefiniertem HTML Code nach dem Versenden so aussehen, wie dies beabsichtigt war. Aus diesem Grund unterstützt Mail Designer 365 das Importieren von HTML-Code nicht, da Mail Designer die volle Kontrolle über den in der App verwendeten HTML Code haben muss.

      Wenn Sie jedoch bestimmte Designelemente (z. B. Layoutblöcke) bearbeiten möchten, können Sie diese auf Ihrem Desktop speichern und die Datei "Content.html" bearbeiten. Mehr erfahren.

      Wenn Sie sich mit Ihrem Verständnis von HTML- und CSS-Code nicht hundertprozentig sicher sind, raten wir dringend davon ab, da wir nicht garantieren können, dass Ihr Code mit unserer Software und anderen E-Mail-Clients kompatibel ist.
      Wenn du beim E-Mail-Versand über deinen Gmail-Account die folgende Fehlermeldung bekommst:
      invalid_grant: Bad Request (-10)

      solltest du bitte folgendes versuchen:
      1. Gehe zu Mail Designer 365 > Einstellungen > Mail-Konten.
      2. Entferne deinen Gmail-Account mit dem "-" Icon von der Liste.
      3. Klicke auf das "+" Icon, um deinen Gmail-Account neu hinzuzufügen. Du wirst nun aufgefordert, dich neu in deinen Gmail-Account einzuloggen.

      Sobald du deinen Account neu hinzugefügt hast, kannst du weiterhin E-Mails versenden.
      Wenn du dein E-Mail-Design manuell als .zip Datei exportierst und zu Mailchimp hochlädst, kann der Code während dem Upload angepasst werden. Dies führt dazu, dass dein Design nicht mehr, wie in Mail Designer 365 aussieht.

      Aus diesem Grund empfehlen wir immer den direkten Export von Mail Designer 365 aus zu Mailchimp. Hierfür brauchst du nur die API Key für deinen Account. Diese Anleitung zeigt dir Schritt für Schritt, wie du deine E-Mail-Designs künftig direkt zu Mailchimp exportieren kannst.
      Du hast VPN Tracker 365, VPN Tracker World Connect oder Mail Designer 365 gekauft? Dann kannst du die Software auf bis zu drei persönlichen Geräten pro Lizenz installieren.

      Aktiviere hierfür deine Software auf deinem iMac und deinem MacBook (oder sofern zutreffend auf deinem iOS Gerät) einfach mit deiner equinux ID und dem entsprechenden Passwort.

      Du darfst die Software gleichzeitig auf einem Rechner pro Lizenz verwenden.

      Wenn du die Software auf mehreren Geräten parallel verwenden möchtest, oder mehrere Familien- oder Teammitglieder die Software verwenden möchten, benötigst du für jede Person und jeder parallele Nutzung eine eigene Lizenz.

      Eine VPN Tracker 10, VPN Tracker 9 oder Spot Maps Lizenz kann auf einem Mac aktiv sein. Solltest du die Software auf mehreren Geräten verwenden wollen, benötigst du für jedes Gerät eine eigene Lizenz.
      Um deinem Design einen Mailchimp-Platzhalter hinzuzufügen, der nicht auf der Liste steht (z.B "Profil bearbeiten" oder "Newsletter im Browser zeigen") mach mal bitte folgendes:

      • Füge deinen gewünschten Text zu einem Textlayoutblock ein (z.B "Profil bearbeiten.")
      • Den Text hervorbenen und dann auf "Link hinzufügen" in dem "Stil" Menü klicken.
      • Wähle "Custom" als Link-Stil.
      • Füge den passenden Platzhalter zu dem gegebenen Platz ein (z.B. *|UPDATE_PROFILE|*)




      Wenn du nicht genau weißt, wie du deinen Platzhalter am besten schreiben sollst, schau dir das Mailchimp Cheatsheet an, um den richtigen Platzhalter-Text zu finden.

      Du kannst die am häufigsten benutzten Platzhalter einfach in der Mail Designer 365 App finden. Mehr lernen.
      Mail Designer 365 Small Business sowie Mail Designer 365 Non-Profit sind älteren Mail Designer Pläne.

      Unsere aktuellsten Pläne - Mail Designer 365 Business und Mail Designer 365 Premium Business - bieten laufende Updates, die neuesten Features, sowie Kompatibilität mit Mail Designer 365 für Teams und noch mehr spannende Entwicklungen im Laufe des Jahres! Mehr lernen.

      Du kannst einen Mail Designer 365 Business oder Mail Designer 365 Premium Business Plan hier kaufen.
      Der Versand von Newsletter-Kampagnen sowie Direktversand werden über Stamps abgerechnet.

      Ein Versand verbraucht Stamps pro Empfänger, für Anhänge, Platzhalter, Scheduling und BCC Funktionen. Der genaue Verbrauch wird jeweils angezeigt. Beim Direktversand sind pro Empfänger 25 Stamps erforderlich (plus weitere Optionen), als Massenversand von Kampagnen als Basis 1 Stamp pro Empfänger.

      Stamps sind in diesen monatlichen Plänen enthalten:
      Plan Karlsfeld (kostenfrei, bei jedem Design Plan inkl.): 500 Stamps
      Plan Roma: 5.000 Stamps
      Plan Paris: 15.000 Stamps
      Plan London: 25.000 Stamps
      Plan Kapstadt: 50.000 Stamps
      Plan Seoul: 100.000 Stamps

      ▸ Mehr Informationen zu den Kampagnen-Plänen

      Stamps sind ebenfalls als eigenständige Stamps Pakete verfügbar
      ▸ Mehr Informationen zu allen Stamps Paketen

      Ja, es ist möglich dein Design auszudrucken, indem du "Ablage > Drucken…" in Mail Designer 365 auswählst. Das Design kann entweder aus dem Drucken-Fenster heraus als PDF exportiert werden oder durch einen Klick auf "Ablage > Als PDF exportieren…".

      Wir haben kürzlich von einer API Umstellung erfahren, welche dazu führt, dass Bilder in MailChimp, Campaign Monitor oder mit der "Email senden" Funktion in Mail Designer nicht mehr dargestellt werden können. Die aktuellsten Versionen von Mail Designer 365 und Mail Designer Pro 3 beinhaltet bereits eine Lösung für dieses Problem.

      Falls Sie Mail Designer 365 bereits haben und im equinux Store gekauft haben, bitte laden Sie sich die neueste Version unter:
      http://www.equinux.com/goto/HPdownload/maildesigner365

      Falls Sie Mail Designer 365 bereits haben und im Mac App Store gekauft haben, aktualisieren Sie Mail Designer bitte im Mac App Store.

      Falls Sie Mail Designer Pro 3 gekauft haben, bitte loggen Sie sich unter my.equinux.com ein um sich die aktuellste Version herunterzuladen.

      Falls Sie eine ältere Version von Mail Designer besitzen, ist jetzt eine ideale Zeit auf Mail Designer 365 zu wechseln und von allen neuen Funktionen und Optimierungen zu profitieren.

      Jeder Mail Designer-Plan bietet eine bestimmte Anzahl von TextScout AI Credits. Diese Credits werden automatisch jeden Monat als Teil des Abonnements verlängert. Für die Betaphase haben wir allen Plänen eine Reihe von Credits für Testzwecke zugewiesen, diese Limits können sich in Zukunft ändern.

      Jedes Mal, wenn TextScout AI-Funktionen in Mail Designer verwendet werden, spiegelt sich dies automatisch in den verfügbaren AI-Credits wider.

      Wie viele Credits werden verwendet?
      Wie viele Credits eine TextScout-Abfrage verbraucht, hängt von der Komplexität der Abfrage selbst und der Anzahl der Ergebnisse ab, die TextScout AI zurückgeben konnte. Da die KI-Modelle während der Beta-Phase noch verbessert werden, kann die Anzahl der verbrauchten Credits variieren.

      Teams
      Wenn du Teil eines Mail Designer 365-Teams mit mehreren Plänen bist, werden Credits gepoolt, so dass alle auf die gesamten Credits des Teams zugreifen können.

      Mir sind die Credits ausgegangen - was jetzt?
      Buche ein Upgrade auf Mail Designer 365 Business Premium, um deinem Konto zusätzliche Credits hinzuzufügen.

      Du hast bereits einen Business Premium Plan? Wende dich bitte an unser Support-Team.

      Wann werden Credits aktualisiert?
      AI-Credits werden am ersten Tag des Monats automatisch zurückgesetzt. Nicht verwendete Credits aus dem Vormonat werden nicht übertragen.

      Mail Designer kann nicht nur HTML exportierten, es macht es auch noch großartig.

      Mit Mail Designer kannst du deine kompletten Vorlagen ins HTML Format exportieren. Dies erlaubt großartige Möglichkeiten, um Mail Designer noch flexibler einzusetzen:

      • Importiere deine Mail Designer Dokumente bei verschiedenen Newsletter-Anbietern.
      • Stelle deinen Kunden eine HTML Alternative auf deiner Webseite zur Verfügung.

      Das beste an der Sache? Es ist ganz einfach!

      • Erstelle dein Design.
      • Wähle "Bereitstellen - HTML …" aus der Menüleiste.
      • Gib an in welchen Ordner die Dateien gespeichert werden sollen.

      MailChimp bietet einen optischen "WYSIWYG" Editor und HTML basierte Editoren an, über die das Design verändert werden kann.

      Allerdings bietet Mail Designer wesentlich mehr Freiräume, um E-Mails zu gestalten. Deshalb empfehlen wir Änderungen in Mail Designer durchzuführen und das Design wieder zu MailChimp hochzuladen.

      Sprichst du fließend HTML? Bei MailChimp ist es möglich, auch direkt den HTML Code zu bearbeiten und so das Design weiter zu bearbeiten. Leider können wir dafür keinen Support übernehmen.

      Mail Designer 365 unterstützt kein Copy & Paste nach Outlook. Wenn Sie einen Inhalt per Copy & Paste einfügen, kann nicht sichergestellt werde, dass die Formatierung aus Mail Designer 365 vorhanden bleibt. Es ist Empfehlenswert Ihre E-Mail Account in Mail Designer 365 hinzuzufügen und Ihren Nachrichten über diesen Weg zu verschicken.
      ‣ Gehen Sie zu "Mail Designer 365" > "Einstellungen."

      ‣ Wählen Sie "Mail-Konten"

      Auf den folgenden Seiten wird erklärt wie Sie E-Mail Konten im Mail Designer 365 verwalten können und E-Mails aus Mail Designer 365 versenden können:


      Wir empfehlen allen Kunden, die Demo Version von Mail Designer 365 zu nutzen, bevor man sich für den Erwerb einer Lizenz entscheidet. Hierin sind die meisten Funktionen enthalten.

      Um alle Funktionen von Mail Designer zu testen (auch jene, die in der Demoversion beschränkt oder nicht zugänglich sind), ist der Erwerb einer Monatslizenz sinnvoll. Vorteil im Vergleich zur Jahreslizenz sind die überschaubaren Kosten und die absolute Flexibilität, nach dem Test frei zu entscheiden.

      Wenn du alle Funktionen getestet hast und die App behalten willst, kannst du einfach auf einen jährlichen Plan wechseln. Die Kosten des ersten Monates werden auf deinen neuen Plan angerechnet.
      Kein Problem, besuche folgende Seite, um ein neues Passwort festzulegen:

      equinux ID Passwort zurücksetzen

      Du willst Mail Designer 365 Code mit einem anderen Versanddienst, CRM-Tool oder ähnliches testen? Du kannst unseren Test-Code verwenden, um das HTML-Export zu testen.

      Beispiel HTML Export laden

      Natürlich kannst du beim Export eines eigenen Designs die Bilderpfade, Dateiname, Präfixe usw. selbst festlegen, damit sich Mail Designer 365 möglichst einfach in deinen Workflow integriert.
      Zertifikats-Probleme, die bei bestimmten Browsern auftreten (z. B. in Google Chrome), können dazu führen, dass Bilder aus Sicherheitsgründen nicht angezeigt werden.

      Mailchimp hostete die von Mail Designer 365 exportierten Bilder bisher über http, die "View in Browser"-Seite ist jedoch eine https-Seite. Wenn dein Browser gemischte http- und https-Inhalte nicht erlaubt, wurden die Bilder blockiert.

      Mailchimp hat dieses Problem für neu hochgeladene Bilder vor kurzem behoben. Die aktuellste Mail Designer 365 Version unterstützt diese Änderungen und ist vollständig kompatibel mit Mailchimp.

      Falls dir das Problem bei deinen älteren Designs noch auffällt, solltest du das Mailchimp Team kontaktieren.
      Damit Mail Designer 365 deine Designs und Einstellungen aus frühreren Mail Designer Versionen importieren kann, führe bitte folgende Schritte durch:


      1. Klicke auf "Ablage" > "Einstellungen und Dokumente importieren."

      2. Wähle "Zugriff erlauben", um fortzufahren.

      3. In dem nächsten Fenster musst du einfach nochmal auf "Zugriff erlauben" klicken. Dadurch kann Mail Designer 365 deine Design-Dateien finden und importieren. Du musst hier keinen weiteren Ordner auswählen.

      4. Als nächstes bietet dir Mail Designer 365 Import-Optionen an. Klicke auf "Auswahl importieren."

      5. Deine Designs und App-Einstellungen werden in Mail Designer 365 importiert.







      Mail Designer 365 unterstützt den Export der Vorlagen zu MailChimp inklusive der MailChimp Platzhalter. Nach dem Export zu MailChimp kannst du fast alle Funktionen nutzen. Damit das Layout intakt bleibt, empfehlen wir die "Bearbeiten/Edit" Funktion für nachträgliche Änderungen nicht zu benutzen. Die Änderungen kannst Du in Mail Designer 365 durchführen und die neue Version exportieren.

      Nicht alle Schriften sind auf allen Geräten verfügbar. Aus diesem Grund unterstützt Mail Designer Pro es, Ersatzschriften zu verwenden, die ein E-Mail-Programm darstellen kann, wenn die gewünschte Schrift nicht verfügbar ist. Wir empfehlen, immer zumindest eine E-Mail-sichere Schrift als Ersatz auszuwählen.


      E-Mail-sichere Schriften sind Schriften, die auf beinahe allen gängigen Geräten vorhanden sind. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel für Ihren Text eine Schrift ausgewählt haben, die auf macOS verfügbar ist aber nicht auf iOS, dann werden Sie einen Unterschied in der Textdarstellung auf beiden Geräten erkennen. Verwenden Sie dagegen eine Schrift, die auf beiden Plattformen vorhanden sind wird der Text gleich dargestellt. Sie können außerdem Web Fonts benutzen, die vom Empfänger-E-Mail-Programm automatisch heruntergeladen werden können. Die meisten E-Mail-Programme unterstützen Web Fonts, außer Outlook.

      Wichtig: Mail Designer 365 wird den Benutzer über die fehlende Schriftart warnen, wenn der Benutzer das Dokument öffnet.


      Wenn du mit der neusten Mail Designer 365 Version die Fehlermeldung "API Key Revoked" siehst, erstelle bitte einen neuen Mailchimp API Key und füge den in Mail Designer 365 hinzu.
      Neuen Mailchimp API Key erstellen
      Mail Designer 365 enthält viele verschiedene Layoutblöcke für die unterschiedlichsten Layouts. Solltest du jedoch einen speziellen Layoutblock mit bestimmten Eigenschaften benötigen, kannst du einen der vorhandenen Layoutblöcke dementsprechend anpassen.
      Alles was du hierfür benötigst, ist Mail Designer 365 sowie Kenntnisse in HTML und CSS.

      Bitte beachte: Um eigene Layoutblöcke zu erstellen, benötigst du fundierte Kenntnisse in HTML und CSS.

      Mail Designer 365 verwendet fortschrittliche Technologien, um höchst kompatible E-Mail Layouts zu erstellen. Änderungen an Layoutblöcken sollten deshalb vorsichtig vorgenommen werden.

      Wir können keinen Support für Layoutblöcke anbieten, die selbst erstellt und angepasst wurden oder für Auffälligkeiten, die durch eigene Layoutblöcke verursacht werden.

      Einen eigenen Layoutblock erstellen


      • Klicke rechts auf einen vorhandenen Layoutblock und wähle "Auf dem Schreibtisch sichern".
      • Öffnen den Ordner "..eqrmlayoutblock" auf deinem Desktop und bearbeite die "Content.html" Datei.
      • Passe das Vorschaubild an, um das Layout deines Layoutblocks widerzuspiegeln.
      • Ziehe den gesamten Ordner mit deinem eigenen Layoutblock in das Inhalte Fenster von Mail Designer 365.


      Du findest nun deinen Layoutblock in der gleichen Liste wie die mitgelieferten Layoutblöcke. Ziehe deinen Layoutblock einfach in dein Design, um ihn zu verwenden.

      Vergiss nicht die mobile Version und die Desktop Version deines Layoutblocks zu testen, bevor du ihn für eine produktiv E-Mail verwendest.




      Die aktuellste Mail Designer 365 Version ist kompatibel mit dem neuen macOS Sequoia, damit du Mail Designer 365 jetzt schon auf macOS 15 nutzen kannst.

      Lade die aktuellste Mail Designer 365 Version hier herunter.
      Mail Designer 365 bietet dir viele verschiedene Möglichkeiten, wenn du den Hintergrund deines Newsletters bearbeiten möchtest.

      Du kannst eine Farbe als Hintergrund. Mit der riesigen Auswahl von Farben in der App, gibt es etwas für jedes Design. Mit Hilfe der Pipette-Funktion kannst du deinen Hintergrund auch an genauen Aspekten deines Designs anpassen.


      Du kannst auch von unserem Design-Library einen Hintergrund auswählen. Es steht dir viele einzigartige Fotohintergründe, Muster und Texturen zur Verfügung. Einfach einen Hintergrund von dem Menü ins Design ziehen.

      Deine eigene Fotos kannst du auch gerne verwenden. Einfach dein gewünschtes Bild von dem Schreibtisch oder Finder ins Design ziehen. Achte darauf, dass du das Bild frei benutzen darfst. Wenn das Bild dir nicht gehört, musst du die Genehmigung haben, bevor du es in deinem Design nutzt.

      Um weitere Web-Fonts herunterzuladen, klicken Sie auf einen Textbereich. Mail Designer 365 öffnet automatisch die Registerkarte "Still" auf der rechten Seite des Bildschirms.
      ‣ Wählen Sie "Web Schriften" > "Weitere Schriften herunterladen..." aus dem Font-Menü.



      Dann können Sie ein Vorschaufenster sehen, in dem alle verfügbaren Schriften angezeigt werden.
      ‣ Klicken Sie auf "Download starten", um weitere Web Fonts herunterzuladen, die Sie dann in Ihrer Vorlage verwenden können.


      ‣ Nachdem Sie auf "Download starten" geklickt haben, öffnet sich ein Popup-Fenster, das den Fortschritt des Downloads zeigt:


      Was man verstehen sollte, wenn es um Web-Fonts geht ...


      Obwohl es eine breite Palette an Schriften gibt, finden manche immer noch, dass es zu wenige sind. Dies liegt daran, dass die Schriftarten aus dem Google-Verzeichnis der Open-Source-Designer-Web-Fonts heruntergeladen werden. Wir wollten dazu beitragen, dass unsere Benutzer in der Lage sind, Entwürfe mit schönen Schriften in legaler Weise nutzen zu können. Alle herunterladbaren Schriften sind frei und Open Source, was bedeutet, dass die Schriften für jedermann zugänglich sind und für persönliche und kommerzielle Projekte verwendet werden können.

      Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf folgender Seite:

      Die "Edit" -Ansicht auf der Mailchimp-Webseite ist keine richtige Vorschau. Nach dem Export können in dieser Ansicht Designs unvollständig oder kaputt dargestellt werden.

      Klicke stattdessen auf "Preview and Test" in der rechten oberen Ecke des Fensters und wähle dort den "Preview Mode" aus. Dies sollte dir eine bessere Vorschau deines Designs geben.

      Mail Designer 365 generiert aus deinem Desktop Newsletter automatisch eine Mobilversion. Diese generierte mobile Version kann im Anschluss noch händisch optimiert werden.

      Wenn du eine unserer Email Vorlagen oder eines deiner bisherigen Templates verwendest, kann es sein, dass die Mobilversion verändert wurde. Dies bedeutet, dass Änderungen an der Desktop Version nicht automatisch in die Mobilversion übernommen werden. Um ein neues Mobiles Template aus deinem Desktop Newsletter zu generieren, befolge bitte folgende Schritte:
      ‣ Unter "Ablage" > "Design Optionen" das Häkchen für "Version für Mobilgeräte erzeugen" entfernen und "OK" klicken.
      ‣ Unter "Ablage" > "Mobile Optionen" das Häkchen für "Version für Mobilgeräte erzeugen" neu setzen und "OK" klicken

      Jetzt sollte dein für den Desktop erstellter Newsletter ebenfalls für Mobilgeräte sichtbar sein und du kannst die entsprechenden Layoutblöcke der Mobilversion editieren.

      Die Aktivierung von Mail Designer 365 ist einfach! Machen Sie bitte folgendes, um loszulegen:

      • Als erstes müssen Sie Mail Designer 365 herunterladen. Sie können dies über diesen Link tun.
      • Starten Sie die Mail Designer 365 App und klicken "Anmelden" im linken oberen Bereich der Startseite.
      • Geben Sie hier Ihre equinux ID und Ihr Passwort ein. Tipp:Nicht sicher? Ihr Benutzerkonto haben Sie bereits beim Kauf von Mail Designer 365 (bzw. andere equinux Software-Produkte) in unserem Online Store erstellt.
      • Sie sind jetzt bereit zum Designen - viel Spaß!
      Verschiedene E-Mail-Clients lesen und verändern Dinge in Ihren E-Mail-Designs bei der Weiterleitung. Einige E-Mail-Clients werden die ursprüngliche E-Mail in zitierten Text umwandeln und die Absenderinformationen oben drüber setzen. Andere werden es weiterleiten wie sie gekommen ist. Da Mail Designer 365 keine Kontrolle darüber hat, wie sich E-Mail-Clients verhalten, kann die erweiterte HTML-E-Mail, die Sie mit Mail Designer 365 erstellt haben, nicht unbedingt gleich aussehen, sobald sie von einer E-Mail-App weitergeleitet worden ist.

      Unsere Empfehlungen:


      ‣ Eine Lösung ist, die "Redirect" -Funktion zu verwenden, die in einigen E-Mails eingebaut ist, um sie an einen anderen Empfänger zu senden. "Redirect" unterscheidet sich von der Weiterleitung der E-Mail, da die Redirect-Funktion in der Regel der E-Mail-App mitteilt, dass sie das ursprüngliche E-Mail-Design beibehalten soll.
      ‣ Sie können auch einen Link zu Ihrer E-Mail im Web innerhalb der E-Mail-Vorlage hinzufügen. Auf diese Weise haben die Leute die Möglichkeit, die E-Mail so zu sehen, wie Sie ursprünglich war auch nachdem sie weitergeleitet wurde.

      Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf den folgenden Seiten:


      Ja, Sie können mehrere Textstile innerhalb eines Textbereichs verwenden. Sie können jedoch nur einen Stil pro Absatz zuweisen.


      Sie haben auch die Freiheit, verschiedene Schriftarten und Schriftfarben für Ihren Text innerhalb eines gegebenen Textbereichs zu wählen. Dies ist nicht auf eine Schrift pro Absatz beschränkt.


      Um verschiedene Schriftarten innerhalb eines Absatzes zuzuordnen, müssen Sie zuerst "kein Stil" auf der rechten Seite des Bildschirms auswählen. Dann können Sie den Text auswählen, den Sie ändern möchten und weisen Sie ihm eine eigene Schriftart, Schriftgröße, Schriftfarbe usw. zu.

      Mailchimp hat ältere Upload-API Versionen deaktiviert. Das bedeutet, dass alte Mail Designer Versionen nicht mehr durch Mailchimp unterstützt werden. Aktualisiere bitte auf die neuste Mail Designer 365 Version, um die neue Mailchimp Upload Funktion zu nutzen.

      Kunden von älteren Mail Designer Versionen (z.B. Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2, Mail Designer Pro 1-3 oderr Mail Designer Pro HS) können vergünstigt auf Mail Designer 365 upgraden.
      TextScout AI verwendet die aktuellsten KI-Technologien und ermöglicht es Mail Designer 365 Nutzer:innen, beeindruckende Betreffzeilen aus nur ein paar Kampagnen-Keywords zu erzeugen. Gib Wörter und Begriffe ein, wähle deinen Ton und generiere perfekte Betreffzeilen innerhalb von Sekunden.

      Wie kann ich TextScout AI ausprobieren?


      TextScout AI kann in allen Mail Designer 365 Plänen in der aktuellsten Mail Designer 365 Version getestet werden. Die Anzahl der AI-Credits, die dir zur Verfügung stehen, hängt von deinem Plan ab. Du kannst deinen Status jederzeit über die Credits-Anzeige im TextScout AI Fenster prüfen.
      Wir haben ein paar inspirierende GIF-Ideen zusammgestellt.

      Zusätzlich haben wir ein Video für animierte GIFs erstellt:


      {YOUTUBE__xs6jvzcH_g}

      Sie können Ihre eigenen GIFs verwenden oder eine der Animationen in der Inhaltsbibliothek von Mail Designer 365 verwenden.

      Um ein GIF hinzuzufügen, gehen Sie bitte wie folgt vor:
      ‣ Ziehen Sie einen Layoutblock mit einem Bildbereich in Ihren Newsletter
      ‣ Ziehen Sie das GIF, das Sie verwenden möchten, in einen Bildbereich
      ‣ Stellen Sie sicher, dass nur 1 GIF pro 1 Bildbereich hinzugefügt wird
      ‣ Wenn Sie mehrere GIFs zu einem Bildbereich hinzufügen, wird nur das zuletzt hinzugefügte GIF funktionieren
      Du hast Mail Designer 365 aus Versehen gelöscht? Keine Sorge! So kriegst du die App ganz einfach wieder zurück:

      Um Mail Designer 365 erneut zu installieren, gehe zu unserer Webseite und klicke auf den "Download" Link. Sobald die App geladen wurde, kannst du dich mit deinem equinux ID und Passwort einloggen und weiter mit deinen E-Mail-Designs machen.
      Wenn du beim Exportieren deines Designs von Mail Designer 365 die folgende Fehlermeldung bekommen hast, musst du bei Campaign Monitor einen neuen API Key anfordern.



      Um einen neuen API Key zu erstellen und deine Designs weiterhin von der App zu exportieren, logge dich in deinen Campaign Monitor Account ein und gehe zu “Account settings”:



      Gehe zu “API keys”, wo du einen neuen API Key erstellen kannst:



      Sobald du einen neuen Key erstellt hast, kannst du das entsprechend in der App aktualisieren und erneut versuchen, zu exportieren.

      Mail Designer 365 Crew Chat ist für alle im Team geeignet, die Teil des E-Mail-Workflows sind oder Feedback zu Kampagnen geben. Unter anderem sind das häufig: Marketer, das Verkaufsteam, Branding, Texter, Manager, Kunden von Agenturen usw.

      Zuerst gibt es ein paar Dinge, die du überprüfen musst.


      ‣ Verwenden Sie MailChimp als E-Mail-Dienstanbieter? Wenn ja, stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie Ihr Design nicht in der "Bearbeiten" Vorschau auf MailChimp Website anschauen.
       ‣ Klicken Sie auf "Vorschau und Test" in der rechten oberen Ecke des Bildschirms. 
      ‣ Dann wählen Sie "Vorschau-Modus eingeben".

      ‣ Wenn das nicht klappen sollte, versuchen Sie, die Standardzeilenhöhe Ihres Textes zu ändern. Die Voreinstellung ist auf 1,5 gesetzt. Passen Sie die Linienhöhe an Ihre Bedürfnisse an. Versuchen Sie, den Abstand auf 1,0 Höhe zu setzen. Ihr Text sollte nicht länger durcheinander gebracht aussehen.


      Während dieser schwierigen Zeiten bieten wir dir selbstverständlich weiterhin vollen Support an und haben zudem unsere Support-Leistung für dich noch verstärkt.

      Aktuelle Support-Informationen
      • Unser Support-Team steht dir weiterhin zur Verfügung.
      • Wir haben alle FAQs aktualisiert, um die häufigsten Anliegen direkt zu klären. Antworten auf deine Fragen kannst du in der Regel immer auf unserer FAQ-Seite finden. Schau also zuerst hier nach, um schneller eine Antwort zu bekommen.
      • Je mehr Details deine Support-Anfrage enthält, umso effizienter und schneller können wir dir helfen. Falls du ein Problem mit einem Design hast, schicke uns am besten die Design-Datei oder relevante Screenshots, damit wir schnellstmöglich eine Lösung finden können.
      • Support ist exklusiv für Mail Designer 365 Kunden verfügbar. Wenn du eine ältere Version von Mail Designer nutzt, solltest du auf einen Mail Designer 365 Plan umsteigen.
      • Mail Designer 365 Business Premium Kunden haben bei Support-Anfragen Priorität.


      Du kannst unser Support-Team via support@maildesigner365.com erreichen.
      Falls du die Rechnungsadresse oder E-Mail-Adresse für deine equinux ID ändern möchtest, logge dich hier mit deiner aktuellen E-Mail-Adresse ein. Jetzt kannst du deine neuen Kontaktdaten eingeben.
      Klicken Sie unten links auf das Symbol für das Hintergrundbearbeitungsmodus. Es wird Ihre anderen Inhalte unsichtbar machen, so dass Sie sich auf Ihren E-Mail-Hintergrund konzentrieren können. Bei der Auswahl eines Hintergrundes können Sie 2 verschiedene Bereiche sehen. Ein Bereich umfasst den Hintergrund Ihrer Textbereiche, die die Mitte Ihres E-Mail-Designs ist. Der zweite Bereich ist der umliegende Hintergrundbereich.

      Ziehe einen Fotohintergrund, ein Bild oder eine Textur in den umgebenden Hintergrundbereich, um ihn anzuwenden.

      Dies wird dann Ihr E-Mail-Hintergrund werden. Sie können auch das Farbenfenster öffnen und eine Farbe als Hintergrundbild auswählen.


      Wenn Sie einen Hintergrund für Ihre Textbereiche festlegen möchten, dann ziehen Sie ein Bild in den mittleren Bereich Ihres E-Mail-Designs.

      Weitere Informationen zum Ändern des Hintergrunds Ihrer E-Mail-Vorlage mit Mail Designer Pro finden Sie auf der folgenden Seite


      Aufgrund von Kompatibilitätsproblemen bei einigen beliebten E-Mail-Diensten (z. B. Gmail und Outlook) werden animierte GIFs nicht in Retina-Auflösung dargestellt, damit sie das Layout deiner E-Mail nicht kaputt machen.

      Wir hoffen, dies wird sich in Zukunft ändern. Im Moment ist aber die beste Lösung, eine GIF zu verwenden, die auch bei geringerer Auflösung noch gut aussieht.
      Nein, Mail Designer 365 ist nur für Macs (macOS Computer) verfügbar.
      Manchmal kann es zu Verzögerungen kommen, wenn du eine Test-Version von deinem Design versendest. Dies ist ein Sicherheitsfeature des Amazon Web Services zur Verhinderung von Spam-Mails. Deine Test-Mail wird von unserem Server als zugestellt markiert, aber es kann manchmal kurze Zeit dauern, bis die E-Mail in deiner Inbox erscheint.

      Das betrifft allerdings nur den Test-Versand, da dieser über unsere Server läuft. Wenn du die finale Version deines Designs verschickst, sollte es nicht zu Verzögerungen kommen, weil du dann ja über deine eigene E-Mail-Adresse/ESP versendest.
      Ja! TeamCloud ist mit allen Mail Designer 365 Kampagnen Plänen inbegriffen und ermöglicht es dir, deine E-Mail-Designs für User:innen und Geräte zu synchronisieren.

      Entdecke alle Fearures in Mail Designer 365 Kampagnen →
      In der Regel ändern sich die Schriften nur auf dem Gerät einer anderen Person, wenn Sie eine Schriftart in Ihrer E-Mail-Vorlage verwenden, die die andere Person nicht auf seinem Computer installiert hat. Zum Beispiel, wenn Sie die Schriftart "Chelsea Market" in Ihrem Dokument verwenden, und die Person, der Sie das Dokument verliehen haben, "Chelsea Market" nicht auf seinem Computer installiert hat, wird stattdessen eine Fallback-Schriftart angezeigt.


      Wichtig: Mail Designer 365 wird den Benutzer über die fehlende Schriftart warnen, wenn der Benutzer das Dokument öffnet.


      Wenn Sie sicherstellen möchten, dass die Schriftart, die Sie haben auch richtig auf einem anderen Gerät angezeigt werden soll, empfehlen wir Ihnen die Verwendung von E-Mail-sicheren Schriftarten in Ihrem E-Mail-Newsletter.



      Dropbox hat die Funktionsweise des öffentlichen Ordners geändert und somit Hotlinking-Dateien abgeschafft, was bedeutet, dass du nicht mehr in der Lage dazu bist, Videos direkt in der E-Mail zu abspielen, wenn das Video von Dropbox gehostet wird. Beachten Sie auch, dass direkt eingebettete Videos nicht immer richtig mit bestimmten E-Mail-Clients funktionieren. Dies bedeutet, dass einige Ihrer Empfänger möglicherweise nicht in der Lage sind, das Video zu sehen, weil der E-Mail-Client den sie verwenden dies nicht unterstützt.

      Unsere Best Practice Empfehlung, wenn es um Videos geht:


      Wir empfehlen, die Videos auf einer anderen Seite wie YouTube oder Vimeo zu verknüpfen. Diese Videos werden dann in Safari oder in der entsprechenden Video-App geöffnet. Wenn es zum Beispiel ein YouTube-Video ist und die YouTube App auf dem Gerät installiert ist, wird das Video in der YouTube App auf dem Gerät des Empfängers angezeigt.

      Natürlich. Direct Mail wurde schon von unserem Team für Mail Designer 365 Kompatibilität getestet.

      Sehe die folgende Seite an, um zu sehen, wie du Direct Mail mit Mail Designer 365 nutzen kannst:
      Ja natürlich! Wenn du bereits einen Mail Designer 365 Plan gekauft hast und dein Abo noch läuft, kannst du über das my.maildesigner365 Portal auf einen besseren Plan upgraden.

      Klicke auf der Startseite auf dein Team. Gehe zu dem Reiter "Store" und wähle deinen gewünschten Plan aus. Sobald du deinen Plan gekauft hast, kannst du ihn selbst nutzen oder einem Teammitglied zuweisen.
      Diese Fehlermeldung weist auf ein Problem mit der Authentifizierung deines E-Mail Kontos hin. Hier sind ein paar Tipps, wie dieser Fehler behoben werden kann:

      • Der Benutzername ist falsch oder unvollständig. z.B. iCloud Konten funktionieren manchmal mit den "username", aber benötigen normalerweise die gesamte E-Mail Adresse für den Login.
      • Das Passwort ist falsch.
      • Wenn du TLS verwendest, probiere es mal mit STARTTLS
      • Eventuell verwendet dein Mail Server einen eigenen Port - obwohl dies ungewöhnlich ist.

      Falls du für das Versenden von E-Mails Apple Mail verwendest, kannst du dir auch die Postausgangs-Einstellungen ansehen und verifizieren, dass die Settings übereinstimmen.


      Mail Designer 365 wurde für Teams entwickelt. Wenn du ein Team erstellst, kannst du Nutzern entsprechend ihrer Bedürfnisse eine personalisierte Rolle zuweisen.
      Mitglieder können Designs mit dir im Crew Chat besprechen, Kampagnen versenden und den Direktversand nutzen. Dein Team muss nicht ausschließlich aus Kollegen deiner Firma bestehen. Du kannst auch externe Mitarbeiter wie Texter, Fotografen oder den Auftraggeber selbst einbeziehen.
      Das sind die unterschiedlichen Team-Rollen und ihre Bedeutung:
      • Extern
        Optimal für: Auftraggeber, externe Mitarbeiter und Manager, die Inhalte beisteuern und Kampagnen freigeben oder starten wollen. Kann TeamCloud, Crew Chat, Direktversand, Kampagnen nutzen. Kann keine Pläne oder Stamps für das Team erwerben.
      • Mitglied
        Optimal für: Mitarbeiter, die eng an E-Mails arbeiten. Kann TeamCloud, Crew Chat, Direktversand, Kampagnen nutzen. Kann Pläne oder Stamps für das Team erwerben.
      • Projekt Manager
        Optimal für: Die Verwalter deines Teams, muss selbst nichts mit Design zu tun haben.
        Kann Team-Mitglieder verwalten, Pläne und Lizenzen kaufen und zuordnen.

      Dein Admin kann die Mitgliedsstufen jederzeit ändern. Zu Beginn kannst du dein Team z.B. erstmal nur mit der Stufe "Mitglied" aufbauen.

      Du kannst dein Team über my.maildesigner365.com/teams/create anlegen.

      Alle Vorlagen, die zu Campaign Monitor hochgeladen werden sollen, müssen einen Abmelden-Link besitzen.

      Um einen Abmelden-Link in dein Design einzufügen, gehe bitte wie folgt vor:

      ‣ Wähle den Textbereich, der deinen Abmelden-Link beinhalten soll.
      ‣ Bitte wähle aus der Menüleiste "Einfügen > Campaign Monitor > Abmelden".
      Du kannst nun dein Template zu Campaign Monitor hochladen.


      Um Debug-Logs zu erstellen, versuchen Sie bitte Folgendes:
      ‣ Halten Sie die Alt-Taste  ⌥ oder die Option-Taste auf der Tastatur gedrückt
      ‣ Wählen Sie im Menü die Option "Hilfe"> "Analysedaten übertragen ..."

      Wichtig: Wenn Sie den Alt / Option-Taste ⌥ nicht halten, wird in der Dropdown-Liste "Hilfe" die Option "Feedback zu Mail Designer..." anstelle von "Analysedaten übertragen ..."

      ‣ Sobald Sie Ihr Debug-Protokoll gesendet haben, wird Ihnen Mail Designer 365 mitgeteilt, dass das Protokoll erfolgreich gesendet wurde



      Sollte dein Mac ein Hardware-Problem gehabt haben oder, wenn du einfach die Dateien für deine Vorlagen benötigst, dann findest du deine Vorlagen auch direkt im Finder. Folge hierfür diesen Schritten:



      ‣ Mache einen Rechtklick auf ein Dokument im Design Chooser Fenster
      ‣ Wähle "Im Finder anzeigen"

      So findest du Designs in einem Time Machine Backup
      Wenn du auf ein Time Machine Backup zurückgreifen musst, dann findest du die Vorlagen hier:

      /user/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner

      Hinweis: Es gibt immer mehrere "Library" Ordner unter "Macintosh HD", in diesem Fall brauchen wir den versteckten Library Ordner aus dem Benutzer-Verzeichnis.

      So findest du den Ordner:
      • Wähle dein Benutzer-Verzeichnis im Time Machine Backup (z.B. "Bernd")
      • Mache einen Rechts-klick auf deinem Benutzer-Verzeichnis, drücke die Alt-Taste (⌥) und wähle "Bernd als Pfad kopieren"
      • Wähle aus der Menüleiste im Finder "Gehe zu > Gehe zum Ordner …"
      • Füge den kopierten Pfad mit ⌘+v ein, hänge ans Ende noch "/Library" an und bestätige mit Enter
      Anschliessend öffnet sich im Finder der richtige Library Ordner.

      Jetzt kannst du in den Ordner "Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.Mail Designer/Documents/MD365" wechseln.

      Dort findest du für jede Designkategorie einen eigenen Unterordner, die jeweils weitere Unterordner "Contents/Resources" enthalten. Dort befinden sich die Designdateien.

      Ziehe Sie auf das Mail Designer 365 Symbol im Dock, um sie zu Mail Designer 365 hinzuzufügen.
      Als E-Mail-Versanddienst ist Mail Designer 365 Campaigns dazu verpflichtet, Spam-Präventionsmaßnahmen wie DSGVO in der EU und CAN-SPAM in den USA durchzusetzen. Laut Gesetz müssen Marketing-E-Mails den Empfängern die Möglichkeit bieten, künftige E-Mails abzubestellen.

      Aus diesem Grund müssen alle über Delivery Hub versendeten E-Mail-Kampagnen einen Abmeldelink enthalten.

      Weitere Vorteile eines eindeutigen Abmeldelinks:
      • Automatische Abmeldeabwicklung (Delivery Hub entfernt abgemeldete Kontakte für dich)
      • Saubere E-Mail-Liste – deine Kampagnen werden nur an engagierte Abonnenten gesendet
      • Weniger Spam-Beschwerden
      • Kampagnenbasierte Abmelderate-Berechnung

      • So fügst du einen Abmeldeplatzhalter in dein E-Mail-Design ein
        Um deiner E-Mail einen Abmeldelink hinzuzufügen, klicke in einen Textbereich in deinem Design (z. B. in der E-Mail-Fußzeile), gehe dann zum App-Menü und wähle Einfügen > Mail Designer 365-Kampagnen > Abmeldelink:




        Wenn du deine Kampagne über Delivery Hub versendest, sehen die Empfänger die Option zum Abbestellen in der Fußzeile deiner E-Mail:



        Erfahre mehr über Delivery Hub →
      Wenn du deine E-Mail-Designs sichern willst, weil du z. B. einen neuen Mac gekauft hast oder deinen Rechner formatieren musst, hast du verschiedene Optionen:

      ‣ Wenn du Time Machine am Mac verwendest, sind alle deine Designs standardmäßig im Backup enthalten.
      ‣ Wenn du manuell ein Backup erstellst, musst du den folgenden Ordner auf deiner externen Festplatte sichern:
      ~/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner/
      Diesen Ordner findest du, indem du den Finder öffnest, "Gehe zu" > "Ordner" auswählst und dort den Pfad eingibst.
      ‣ Alternativ kannst du auch ein manuelles Backup durchführen, indem du in der Mail Designer 365 App zu "Meine Designs" gehst, ⌘ + a drückst und alle Designs aus Mail Designer 365 heraus in einen Ordner auf deinem Desktop ziehst. Diesen Ordner kannst du dann auf deiner externen Platte sichern.


      Als Teil des kostenlosen Kampagnenplans, der in deinem Mail Designer 365 Designplan enthalten ist, wird in der Fußzeile von E-Mails, die über Delivery Hub gesendet werden, ein Mail Designer 365 Banner angezeigt:



      Upgrade auf einen kostenpflichtigen Kampagnenplan, um die Banner auszublenden. Melde dich bei deinem my.maildesigner365 Account an, um alle Plan-Optionen zu vergleichen.

      Mit dem Mail Designer 365 können Sie Ihren Fotos jetzt einfach Rahmen hinzufügen.

      ‣ Wählen Sie das Foto aus, dem Sie einen Rahmen hinzufügen möchten.
      ‣ Dadurch wird Mail Designer 365 automatisch aufgefordert, die Registerkarte "Stil" auf der rechten Seite des Bildschirms zu öffnen.
      ‣ Unten finden Sie den Abschnitt "Rand"
      ‣ Wählen Sie den Randtyp aus, den Sie verwenden möchten
      ‣ Klicken Sie auf das Farbrad-Symbol und wählen Sie die Farbe Ihres Randes
      ‣ Ändern Sie die Pixelgröße, um die Dicke des Rahmens anzupassen


      Hinweis: Sie können auch Formen zu Rändern hinzufügen.
      Wenn du mit dem Test-Versand verschickst, verschickt Mail Designer 365 deine Mail von unserem Server mit deiner E-Mail-Adresse als Alias damit du sehen kannst, wie der Absender usw aussehen wird. Ein Nebeneffekt davon ist, dass deine Mails manchmal in dem Spam-Ordner landen können, weil die über unseren Server statt über eine "echte" E-Mail-Adresse geschickt werden.

      Wenn deine Test-Mail in dem Spam-Ordner landet, heißt es aber nicht, dass deine echte Mail auch als Spam markiert wird. Wenn du die finale Version deines Designs verschickst, versendest du über deine eigene E-Mail-Adresse/ESP. Deswegen wird die Mail wie gewöhnt in dem Inbox des Empfängers erscheinen.
      Mail Designer 365 wendet beim Export automatisch eine GIF-Komprimierung an, damit die exportierte Datei nicht zu groß wird.

      Hierbei werden auch Frames herausgeschnitten, die transparent und leer sind, um Dateigröße zu sparen.

      Umgehen lässt sich das, indem du in der GIF einen Pixel einbaust, der über die komplette Animationslänge an einer beliebigen Stelle quasi unsichtbar platziert wird. So entstehen keine für Mail Designer 365 identifizierbaren leeren Frames.
      Wenn du dein E-Mail-Design direkt aus Mail Designer 365 zu Mailchimp exportierst, werden deine Bilder zusammen mit deinem Template exportiert und von dem Mailchimp-Plattform gehostet.

      Hier erfährst du mehr über die Mailchimp-Export-Funktion.

      Um nur die Desktop-Version Ihres E-Mail-Designs zu senden, versuchen Sie Folgendes:

      ‣ Wählen Sie "Ablage" > "Design-Optionen ..."

      ‣ Deaktivieren Sie "Version für Mobilgeräte Geräte erzeugen".

      ‣ Klicken Sie auf "OK", wenn Sie bereit sind.


      Dann können Sie die Datei exportieren oder über Ihre Wahl der Methode (über Apple Mail, Kampagnenmonitor, MailChimp, etc.) senden.

      Nein. Leider unterstützt Mail Designer 365 nicht direkt Formulare, die in Ihrem E-Mail-Design eingebettet sind. Um sicherzustellen, dass Ihre Empfänger das optimale Design bekommen, das Sie erstellt haben, haben wir beschlossen, die HTML-Formular-Funktion nicht zu unterstützen. Die meisten E-Mail-Clients unterstützen keine HTML-Formulare, weshalb Mail Designer 365 auch keine HTML-Formulare unterstützt. Wenn Sie Formulare in Ihrem E-Mail-Design hinzufügen möchten, gibt es keine Möglichkeit, bei der wir sicherstellen können, dass Ihre Empfänger eine funktionale Umfrage erhalten, die Sie erstellt haben, da wir keine Kontrolle haben, wie E-Mail-Clients Ihren Newsletter lesen und interpretieren.

      Allerdings, wenn Sie ein Formular hinzufügen müssen, um Feedback von Ihren Empfängern zu erhalten, dann empfehlen wir die Verknüpfung mit einem externen Formularhersteller wie Google Formulare.   Sie können ein Bild oder einen bestimmten Text verwenden und einen Link zu Ihrem Formular hinzufügen.

      Mit Mail Designer 365 kannst du responive E-Mail Designs erstellen. So wird abhängig vom verwendeten Gerät entweder die mobile Version oder die Desktop Version deines Newsletters angezeigt.

      Liest ein Empfänger deine Nachricht auf einem iPhone wird die mobile Version des Newsletters dargestellt.
      Da ein iPad ein größeres Display besitzt, wird hier die Desktop Version deiner Nachricht angezeigt.

      Für Telekom E-Mail Adressen können folgende Einstellungen genutzt werden:


      Servername: securesmtp.t-online.de
      Port: Standard Ports
      Sicherheit: STARTTLS
      Authentifizierung: Kennwort
      Benutzername: max.mustermann@t-online.de (Ihre vollständige T-Online E-Mail Adresse)
      Kennwort: Es muss ein eigenes E-Mail-Passwort für Mail Designer 365 im T-Online Kundencenter erstellt werden.



      Passwort-Hinweis: Es muss wie oben beschrieben ein eigenes Passwort für Mailprogramme verwendet werden. Mit dem normalem Online Login Passwort klappt der Versand nicht.
      Die aktuellste Mail Designer 365 Version unterstützt Macs mit M1 und M2 Chips sowie die neuesten macOS Versionen, inkl. macOS 15 Sequoia.

      Lade die aktuellste Version hier herunter.
      Mit Mail Designer 365können Sie Listen in Ihren Textbereichen hinzufügen.
      ‣ Ziehen Sie einen Textbereich per Drag & Drop in Ihre E-Mail-Vorlage.
      ‣ Doppelklicken Sie auf den Textbereich.
      ‣ Geben Sie Ihre Liste ein. Markieren Sie den Text, in dem die Liste angezeigt werden soll.

      ‣ Auf der rechten Seite des Bildschirms finden Sie eine Seitenleiste, in der Sie den Listenstil unter "Liste" auswählen können.
      ‣ Wählen Sie den gewünschten Listenstil.

      ‣ Ihre Wörter oder Sätze werden automatisch mit den von Ihnen ausgewählten Aufzählungszeichen versehen.


      Weitere Informationen zum Erstellen einer Liste finden Sie auf folgender Seite:


      Sie können ändern, ob Ihr Text automatisch mit jedem Textbereich gesperrt wird. Um die Silbentrennung auszuschalten, versuchen Sie folgendes:
      ‣ Gehen Sie zu "Ablage" > "Design-Optionen ...".

      ‣ Entfernen Sie das Häkchen von der "Worttrennung erzwingen".

      ‣ "Ok" klicken.


      Weitere Informationen zum Ein- und Ausschalten der Text-Silbentrennung finden Sie auf folgender Seite:

      Da sich die E-Mail-Design-Welt sehr schnell weiterentwickelt, ist es wichtig, zu bedenken, dass viele Features, die in älteren Mail Designer Versionen zu finden sind, eventuell nicht mehr funktionieren könnten - insbesondere dann, wenn du auf eine neue macOS Version upgradest. Außerdem ist es möglich, dass Designs, die mit einer älteren Version erstellt werden, den aktuellen Voraussetzungen nicht entsprechen.

      Bei einem Upgrade auf Mail Designer 365 zahlst du für Kompatibilität mit den aktuellsten macOS Versionen sowie mit den beliebtesten E-Mail- und Versand-Diensten. Zudem hast du während der Laufzeit deines Plans Zugriff auf neue Designideen, kreative Tools und moderne Features, an denen das Entwicklungsteam täglich arbeitet.
      Bei der Testversion von Mail Designer 365 gibt es einiges zu beachten:

      • Mit dem kostenlosen Mail Designer 365 Download kannst du E-mail Templates nur erstellen und bearbeiten.
      • Ohne eine aktive Demo ist es aber nicht möglich, erstellte HTML Email Vorlagen zu speichern, oder zu versenden.


      Um Zugriff auf weitere Demo-Features zu erhalten, musst du zuerst die kostenlose Demo aktivieren. Während der Demo-Zeit gelten folgendes:
      • Die kostelose Demoversion läuft für sieben Tage
      • Mit der Testversion kannst du sieben Tage lang E-Mail-Vorlagen speichern.
      • Du kannst Vorlagen über den Mail Designer 365 Testmail-Service versenden.
      • Du kannst alle Kampagnen-Features testen – inklusive TeamCloud, Crew Chat und Delivery Hub – mit dem kostenlosen Kampagnen-Plan, der in deiner Demo inbegriffen ist

      Mit einer Demo Lizenz sind folgende Funktionen deaktiviert:
      • HTML Vorlagen exportieren
      • E-Mails zu einem externen E-Mail-Dienst exportieren oder damit zu versenden


      Da sich die E-Mail-Design-Welt sehr schnell weiterentwickelt, ist es wichtig, zu bedenken, dass viele Features, die in älteren Mail Designer Versionen zu finden sind, eventuell nicht mehr funktionieren könnten. Außerdem ist es möglich, dass Designs, die mit einer älteren Version erstellt werden, den aktuellen Voraussetzungen nicht entsprechen.

      Aus diesem Grund haben wir uns entschlossen, unsere Support- und Entwicklungs-Leistung nur noch exklusiv für Mail Designer 365 anzubieten. Das ist die einzige Mail Designer Version, die laufend neue Updates bekommt sowie Kompatibilität mit allen zukünftigen macOS Versionen bietet.

      Als Referenz findest du unten einen Überblick über die Support-Zeiträume aller älteren Mail Designer Versionen:


      Mail Designer - Support-Ende: September 2014

      Mail Designer 2 - Support-Ende: Februar 2015

      Mail Designer Pro - Support-Ende: Mai 2016

      Mail Designer Pro 2 - Support-Ende: Mai 2017

      Mail Designer Pro 3 - Support-Ende: Oktober 2018

      Mail Designer Pro HS - Support-Ende: Januar 2019

      Was bedeutet das für mich?
      Obwohl manche dieser Mail Designer Versionen auf deinem aktuellen Mac immer noch funktionieren, werden diese jedoch nicht mehr unterstützt, wenn du einen neuen Mac kaufst oder dein Betriebssystem aktualisierst.

      Lösung: Wir empfehlen dringend, dass Kunden mit älteren Mail Designer Versionen auf einen modernen Mail Designer 365 Plan wechseln. Dadurch bekommst du zukünftige Updates und Support für die gesamte Laufzeit deines Plans.
      Ja, Sie können WeVideo Videos in Ihrem E-Mail-Design mit Mail Designer 365 hinzufügen. Befolgen Sie diese einfachen Schritte:
      ‣ Fügen Sie einen Layoutblock mit einem Bildbereich hinzu.
      ‣ Klicken Sie auf der Registerkarte "Inhalte" auf das Symbol "Videoplatzhalter". Sie können alternativ auch Command-5 drücken.

      ‣ Ziehen Sie einen Video-Platzhalter in einen Bildbereich.

      ‣ Fügen Sie Ihren WeVideo-Link in das Feld "Link zum Video" ein.

      Denken Sie daran:


      Im Gegensatz zu YouTube- oder Vimeo-Videos wird das Erstellen von Vorschaubildern von WeVideo-Videos nicht direkt von Mail Designer 365 unterstützt. Sie müssen Ihr eigenes Vorschaubild bereitstellen, indem Sie einen Screenshot des Videorahmens nehmen, welchen Sie als Vorschaubild verwenden möchten. Ziehen Sie dann dieses Bild auf den Video-Platzhalter. Sie können auch ein Bild Ihrer Wahl als Vorschaubild auswählen.

      Im E-Mail-Newsletter werden die Videos, die Sie hinzufügen, als Bilder mit einem Link zur Videoseite dargestellt. Direkte Inline-Wiedergabe wird nicht mehr von Mail Designer 365 unterstützt, da die meisten E-Mail-Clients es nicht unterstützen.

      Wichtig: Bitte beachten Sie, dass Mail Designer 365 keine Einbettung von Videos direkt in Ihre E-Mail-Designs unterstützt.
      Versuche bitte als erstes, dich in Mail Designer 365 abzumelden und erneut wieder anzumelden.

      Wenn das Problem dadurch nicht gelöst ist, prüfe bitte, ob die E-Mail Adresse mit der du angemeldet bist, mit der E-Mail Adresse deines Kaufs übereinstimmt.

      Wenn dies nicht funktioniert, kontaktiere bitte den Support und schicke uns bitte Debug-Logs:

      ‣ Halte die Alt-Taste  ⌥ auf der Tastatur gedrückt
      ‣ Wähle im Mail Designer 365 Menü die Option "Hilfe"> "Analysedaten übertragen ..."


      Keine Sorge, Sie können Ihre Designs trotzdem importieren.

      ‣ Gehen Sie zum Menü "Ablage"
      ‣ Wählen Sie "Einstellungen und Dokumente importieren ..."

      ‣ Klicken Sie auf "Zugriff erlauben", wenn Sie bereit sind


      Auf diese Weise können Sie alle vorhandenen Daten aus früheren Versionen von Mail Designer importieren.
      Ja, Mail Designer 365 kennt viele Einstellungen wie SMTP Server oder Port. Um dies zu verwenden, musst du einen E-Mail-Account konfigurieren.

      Diese Anleitung zeigt dir, wie du einen eigenen E-Mail-Account konfigurieren kannst.

      Die meisten E-Mail-Clients unterstützen diese Funktion nicht, was zu vielen Bugs führt. Die Empfänger können am Ende das Video nicht sehen oder überhaupt das Video abspielen. Deswegen verlinkt Mail Designer 365 auf das Video im Web.
      Wir bieten aktuell keine Rabatte für Bildungseinrichtungen an.

      Weitere Informationen zu unseren flexibelen Kauf-Optionen findest du auf dieser Seite.

      Der equinux Online-Shop bietet folgende Zahlungsmöglichkeiten:
      • Kreditkarte (Bearbeitungsdauer: wenige Minuten)
        • Visa
        • Mastercard
        • American Express
      • PayPal
      • Vorkasse/Banküberweisung (Bearbeitungsdauer: bis zu 5 Werktagen)
      Bitte beachten Sie, dass die Aktivierung bei einer Zahlung per Überweisung erst möglich ist, wenn die Zahlung eingegangen ist und von uns bearbeitet wurde. Wenn die Software sofort benötigt wird, empfehlen wir eine Zahlung per Kreditkarte oder PayPal. Bestellungen per Überweisung sind aktuell für Mail Designer Käufe nicht verfügbar

      Sie können die Breite der einzelnen Spalten anpassen, wenn Sie mehrere Textbereiche innerhalb eines einzelnen Layoutblocks haben. Sie können auch die Breite der einzelnen Spalten anpassen, wenn Sie mehrere Bildbereiche innerhalb eines einzelnen Layoutblocks haben.

      Wenn Sie mit Spalten arbeiten, können Sie jedoch nicht die Anzahl der Spalten innerhalb eines Layoutblocks anpassen. Sie müssen den entsprechenden Layoutblock mit der bestimmten Anzahl von Spalten auswählen, die gewünscht sind(entweder 2 oder 3 Spalten für Textbereiche).


      Sie können nicht automatisch von 2 Spalten auf 3 Spalten wechseln oder umgekehrt. Allerdings können Sie nur einen weiteren Layout-Block mit der richtigen Anzahl von Spalten hinzufügen. Danach kopieren Sie einfach den Text aus Ihrem ursprünglichen Layoutblock und fügen den Text dann in den neuen Layoutblock ein.

      Wenn Sie mehr als 3 Spalten für Textbereiche wünschen, müssen Sie mit einem einzelnen Textbereich arbeiten und Ihre Nachricht entsprechend platzieren. In diesem Szenario werden Sie im Grunde Ihre eigene Tabelle mit mehreren Spalten simulieren.

      Im Vergleich zu Layoutblöcken mit Textbereichen haben Sie bei Layoutblöcken mit Bildbereichen noch mehr Möglichkeiten. Sie können einen Layout-Block mit bis zu 6 Bildbereichen im Spaltenstil verwenden.


      Mit diesem Layout-Block werden die Bildbereiche in der Desktop-Ansicht nebeneinander angezeigt. Beachten Sie jedoch, dass die Bildbereiche in der mobilen Ansicht übereinander angezeigt werden. Dies wurde so konzipiert, dass die Empfänger leicht auf die Bilder klicken können, wenn sie mit einer Zielseite verknüpft sind und dass die Bilder noch deutlich sichtbar sind, wenn die E-Mail mit einem mobilen Gerät geöffnet wird.

      Sie können E-Mail-Adressen mit dem CSV-Importdienstprogramm in Mail Designer 365 Campaigns importieren. Es ist erhältlich unter:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/addContacts

      Die ersten drei Spaltennamen sind Email,First Name,Last Name

      Sie können unterwegs pro Eintrag weitere Schlüssel/Spalten/Platzhalter und deren Werte hinzufügen. Der Importer fügt die Platzhalter automatisch zu Ihrer Kontaktdatenbank hinzu. Definieren Sie einfach in der ersten Zeile die Platzhalter, die Sie importieren möchten.

      Beispiel:

      Sie möchten jedem Ihrer Kontakte eine Lieblingsfarbe und einen Standort hinzufügen. Sie definieren die erste Zeile der CSV-Datei mit den Platzhalter/Spaltennamen:

      Email,First Name,Last Name,Lieblingsfarbe,Ort
      miller@example.com,Peter,Miller,blau,New York
      smith@example.com,Jody,Smith,rot,San Francisco


      Gut zu wissen: Sie können die CSV-Datei später jederzeit mit zusätzlichen Spalten erneut importieren, um Ihre Kontakte aufzuwerten. Alle neuen Platzhalter werden dann an Ihre Kontakte angehängt.

      Sie können eine Demo der CSV-Datei herunterladen:
      '>Mail_Designer_365_Campaigns_Email_Import_Example.csv
      Ja! Dank der Einführung des Tabellen-Features gibt es jetzt in Mail Designer 365 die Möglichkeit, Tabellen in E-Mail-Designs einzubauen.

      Dieses Feature ist momentan exklusiv in Business Premium Plänen verfügbar. Klicke hier, um einen Business Premium Plan zu kaufen, oder auf einen Business Premium Plan zu upgraden.
      Wir verstehen, dass nicht jeder Kunde ein Abo kaufen kann oder will.

      Wenn du keine Abos kaufen kannst, gibt es die Option, einen Mail Designer 365 Plan für ein Jahr zu kaufen und den Abo-Plan unter my.maildesigner365 auf “nicht erneuen” umzustellen.

      Aus der Sicht einer Firma, ist das im Prinzip das gleiche, wie eine Standard-Lizenz zu kaufen und jedes Jahr für Updates zu zahlen.
      Wenn du noch eine ältere Mail Designer Version nutzt, die nicht mehr unterstützt wird (z. B. Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2 oder Mail Designer Pro), kannst du einfach auf Mail Designer 365 upgraden, um weiterhin E-Mail-Newsletter zu erstellen und zu versenden.

      Im Mail Designer 365 Store kaufen
      1. Gehe auf unsere Webseite, um alle Plan-Optionen zu vergleichen.
      2. Wähle deinen gewünschten Plan aus und klicke auf "Kaufen"
      3. Logge dich mit deiner equinux ID (dein Login für Mail Designer) bei my.maildesigner365 ein.
      4. Sobald du den Plan gekauft hast, kannst du die Mail Designer 365 App herunterladen und in deinen Programme-Ordner ziehen.

      Im Mac App Store kaufen
      1. Suche nach Mail Designer 365 im Mac App Store
      2. Wähle einen Plan aus und kaufe ihn, um die App auf deinen Mac herunterzuladen.
      3. Öffne die App und logge dich mit deiner equinux ID ein.


      Tipp: Nach dem Upgrade wird Mail Designer 365 deine Designs von der älteren Mail Designer Version importieren. Mehr dazu erfährst du in dieser FAQ.
      Öffne zunächst in Mail Designer 365 deine Vorlage. Anschließend kannst du über das Menü "Einfügen > Mail Designer 365 Kampagnen" einen Platzhalter einfügen. Wähle dort "Abmelde Link".

      Hinterlegte Zahlungsmittel können bei my.maildesigner365.com unter dem Reiter "Abrechnung" aktualisiert werden.

      Klicke oben rechts auf dein aktuelles Zahlungsmittel und wähle 'Ändern.' Hier kannst du deine neuen Kartendaten eingeben oder alternativ einen PayPal Account verwenden. Dann wird bei der nächsten Zahlung automatisch das neue Zahlungsmittel berücksichtigt.

      Die Dateien werden intern in der App-Struktur von Mail Designer 365 gespeichert. Diese Dateien sind nicht zum Export verfügbar.

      Wenn Sie Mail Designer 365 von unserem Store gekauft haben, können Sie Beta-Versionen von Mail Designer 365 erhalten. Diese Funktion ist nicht automatisch verfügbar, wenn Sie Mail Desginer 365 von dem Apple Mac App Store gekauft haben. Wenn Sie aber Zugriff auf die Beta-Version haben möchten, laden Sie Mail Designer 365 kostenlos von unserer Webseite und loggen Sie mit Ihrem equinux ID und Passwort ein.

      Um Zugriff zu erhalten, machen Sie bitte folgendes:
      ‣ Öffnen Sie die Mail Designer 365 App. 
      ‣ Wählen Sie "Mail Designer 365" > "Einstellungen".

      ‣ Achten Sie darauf, dass Sie auf die Registerkarte "Updates" klicken.

      ‣ Schauen Sie unter "Beta Versionen laden".

      ‣ Da Beta-Versionen dazu gedacht sind, Features und Kompatibilität zu testen, wird Mail Designer 365 Sie daran erinnern, eine Sicherungskopie Ihrer App und Designs zu erstellen:


      Um Updates zu finden, sucht Mail Designer 365 nach neuen Versionen beim App-Start. Sie können auch folgendes machen:


      ‣ Klicken Sie auf "Mail Designer 365" > "Nach Aktualisierungen suchen ..." 


      Weitere Informationen können Sie hier finden:


      Verlängerungen können bis zu 10 Tage vor dem Verlängerungsdatum abbestellt werden. Die Kündigung erfolgt dann zum nächstmöglichen Ablaufdatum. So lange kannst du die Software weiter verwenden.



      Um eine Testmail ebenfalls an eine weitere eigene E-Mail Adresse zu verschicken, nutze die Teamfähigkeit von Mail Designer. Lade hierfür deine weitere E-Mail Adresse in dein Mail Designer Team ein:
      1. Teamverwaltung öffnen und weiteres Mitglied einladen.

      2. Logge dich dann aus deinem aktuellen Mail Designer Konto aus (oben rechts)

      3. Öffne nun den Einladungslink aus der E-Mail von deiner zweiten E-Mail Adresse.

      4. Erstelle ein neues Konto mit der zweiten Email Adresse.

      5. Wenn du jetzt in Mail Designer 365 den Testversand startest, wähle die unterste Option "Team" aus.
        Hiermit wird die Testmail an alle Mitglieder des Teams verschickt, also ebenfalls an deine zweite E-Mail Adresse.
      Du kannst diese Schritte für weitere E-Mail Adressen wiederholen. Bis zu 10 Team Mitglieder oder weitere E-Mail Adressen sind so hinzufügbar.
      Wenn du kürzlich ein Upgrade auf Mail Designer 365 durchgeführt hast und weiterhin mit deinen vorherigen Stationery-Packs arbeiten willst, kannst du das Import-Feature nutzen, um deine ursprünglichen Einstellungen und Designs von älteren Mail Designer Versionen zu importieren.

      Um dies zu machen, klicke auf “Ablage” > “Einstellungen und Designs importieren”. So werden dir deine Einstellungen, sowie vorherige Design-Ideen und Stationery-Packs wieder zur Verfügung stehen.

      Mehr Information zum Import-Feature findest du in diesem FAQ-Eintrag.
      Ein Cross-Upgrade von Small Business auf Business oder Business Premium ist der einzige Weg für Zugriff auf die besten Mail Designer 365 Features.

      Neben den aktuellsten Designideen bietet dir ein Cross-Upgrade auch viele neue kreative Tools, die deine Designs noch besser machen werden. Klicke hier, um mehr über deine Plan-Optionen zu erfahren.

      Upgraden: So geht's...
      Gehe zu my.maildesigner365.com. Auf der Startseite siehst du deinen aktuellen Plan. Klicke auf "In Teamplan umwandeln." Danach kannst du deinen gewünschten Plan auswählen und das Upgrade durchführen.



      Sobald du den Kauf bestätigt hast, ist dein Plan aktiv. Du kannst ihn direkt selbst nutzen oder ein Team erstellen und ihn einem anderen Teammitglied zuweisen.
      Bitte aktualisiere deine Version von Mail Designer 365. Die aktuellste Version findest du hier

      Ältere Versionen von Mail Designer 365 funktionieren möglicherweise nicht mit Big Sur und es können Darstellugsprobleme auftreten. Keine Sorge, dieses Update ist in jedem Mail Designer 365 Plan enthalten.
      Crew Chat ist direkt in das Design-Fenster integriert und ist so der nächste Schritt in deinem Mail Designer 365 Kampagnen-Workflow. Mit einem Klick lädst du ein Design zum Crew Chat hoch und siehst Entwürfe, Kommentare und Feedback an einem zentralen Ort – zusammen mit deinem Team.
      Mail Designer Campaigns bietet ein Tool, mit dem Sie Ihre Kontaktlisten ganz einfach aus MailChimp in Mail Designer Campaigns importieren können.

      Hier finden Sie detaillierte Anweisungen zum Importieren Ihrer MailChimp-Kontaktliste in Mail Designer Kampagnen
      Mit Mail Designer 365 können Sie keine MP3-Dateien direkt in die E-Mail-Designs einbetten. Die meisten E-Mail-Clients unterstützen das nicht, denn dies kann zu Problemen führen, wenn Ihre Abonnenten die E-Mail öffnen. Um sicherzustellen, dass Ihre Empfänger das optimale Design bekommen, das Sie erstellt haben, haben wir beschlossen, die MP3-Funktion nicht zu unterstützen.

      Allerdings können Sie eine MP3-Datei verknüpfen, solange Sie die MP3-Datei auf einem Drittanbieter-Host hochgeladen haben. Erstellen Sie eine CTA-Schaltfläche oder fügen Sie einen Textlink in Ihr Design ein. Unter dem "Stil" -Bereich können Sie auf "Link hinzufügen" klicken. Geben Sie dann einfach den Link zu Ihrer MP3-Datei ein.
      Mail Designer 365 TextScout AI ist mit den aktuellsten macOS Versionen ab macOS 10.13 High Sierra kompatibel. Mehr erfahren.
      Wie Mail Designer 365 mit deinen Bildern umgeht hängt davon ab, wie du dein fertiges E-Mail-Design verschicken möchtest.

      Testversand:
      Wenn du den Testmail-Service nutzt, um einen Testversand durchzuführen, werden die Bilder in deiner E-Mail auf unseren sicheren internen Server gehostet.



      Über Delivery Hub verschicken:

      Bei Designs, die direkt von Mail Designer 365 aus über Delivery Hub verschickt werden, werden die Bilder in der E-Mail eingebettet. In diesem Fall musst du sie nicht extern hosten.



      Designs zu Mailchimp, Campaign Monitor oder Direct Mail exportieren

      Wenn du dein E-Mail-Design direkt von Mail Designer 365 aus über die Integrations-Tools zu Mailchimp, Campaign Monitor oder Direct Mail exportierst, werden jegliche Bilder auch mit deinem Template exportiert und von dem entsprechenden Dienst gehostet.

      Designs mit einem anderen externen Dienst nutzen:

      Jeder E-Mail-Dienst verhält sich anders und viele E-Mail-Versanddienste bieten es nicht an, die Bilder deiner Vorlage zu hosten. In diesem Fall musst du sie selbst hosten.

      Bei dem HTML-Export in Mail Designer 365 kannst du die genaue URL des Ordners auf dem Webserver eingeben, in den die Bilder gehostet werden. Mehr erfahren.

      Telefonnummern und andere Informationen wie Adressen und Daten werden von iOS automatisch als Informationen erkannt, die in anderen Apps verwendet werden können.
      So können Sie bspw. durch Tippen auf eine Telefonnummer diese direkt anrufen oder eine Adresse einem Kontakt hinzufügen.

      Aus diesem Grund werden diese Informationen von iOS in E-Mails blau markiert.

      Bei der Testversion von Mail Designer 365 gibt es einiges zu beachten:
      • Mit dem kostenlosen Mail Designer 365 Download kannst du E-mail Templates nur erstellen und bearbeiten.
      • Ohne die Demo zu aktivieren, ist es aber nicht möglich, erstellte HTML Email Vorlagen zu speichern, und zu versenden.

      Deine Mail Designer 365 Demo aktivieren

      Um die kostenlose Demo zu starten, musst du folgendes machen:
      1. Starte die Mail Designer 365 App auf deinem Mac.
      2. Logge dich mit deiner equinux ID und deinem Passwort ein oder lege einen neuen Account an.
      3. Wenn du die App zum ersten mal startest, siehst du jetzt eine Liste mit Plan-Optionen. Hier kannst du deine kostenlose Demo aktivieren.
      4. Wenn du dich in der Vergangenheit schon mal eingeloggt hast, findest du die Option "Kostenlose Demo starten" oben links unter deinem Namen.

      Für die Versandzertifizierung der Domain muss ein Eintrag in den DNS-Records der Domain vorgenommen werden. Dies kann nur der Administrator deiner Domain in deiner Organisation. Gehe wie folgt vor:

      1. Finde heraus, wer in deiner Organisation für die Verwaltung von Domain-Einträgen verantwortlich ist. Stichworte für eine solche Stelle sind: Domain-Verwaltung / DNS-Verwaltung / DNS-Administration.
      2. Lade den Administrator in dein Mail Designer-Projekt ein, indem du ihn als neuen Teilnehmer „Admin“ zu deinem Projektteam hinzufügst: my.maildesigner.com > Einstellungen > Teilnehmer > Teilnehmer einladen
      3. Kontaktiere deinen Administrator und bitte ihn, die Domain-Verifizierung anhand der Angaben unter my.maildesigner.com > Einstellungen > Absenderadressen durchzuführen.

      Sobald er alles korrekt durchgeführt hat, erscheint unter „Domain verifiziert“ ein Häkchen.
      Produkte und Preisoptionen werden automatisch erneuert, auch wenn sie nicht mehr für Neukunden angeboten werden.

      Wenn ein Produkt nicht automatisch erneuert wurde, kann es nicht nachträglich reaktiviert werden. Stattdessen kann auf eines der aktuellen Produkte aus unserem Online Store gewechselt werden.
      Öffne das Design und wähle "Ablage > Exportieren als Archiv ...", um es zu exportieren.

      Danach, bitte ein neues Support Ticket erstellen und das Design anhängen. Bitte ebenfalls Screenshots des Bereiches der Probleme macht anhängen, sowie eine kurze Fehlerbeschreibung.

      So können wir das Design prüfen und bei Problemen helfen.

      Um die Verlängerung für deinen Mail Designer 365 Plan zu aktivieren, gehe zu deinem my.maildesigner365 Account. Oben auf der Seite siehst du Deinen aktuellen Renewal Status und das Verlängerungsdatum. Um den Status Deiner Verlängerung zu ändern, einfach den Schalter umlegen. Du erhältst daraufhin eine E-Mail Bestätigung mit dem geänderten Verlängerungsstatus.


      Wenn du ein E-Mail-Design aus Mail Designer 365 heraus als HTML exportierst, wird jeder Bildbereich des Designs als separate Bilddatei exportiert.

      Das Nutzen der in Mail Designer 365 verfügbaren Design-Features (z. B. Beschneiden, Skalieren, Filter, Effekte und das Hinzufügen von Designelementen wie Buttons oder Störern) verändert die Bilder in deinen Designs, sodass diese nicht mehr identisch zu den Quelldateien sind, wenn du dein Design exportieren möchtest. Dies gilt auch für das Komprimieren von Bildern und für das Aktivieren oder Deaktivieren von Retina-Bildeinstellungen.

      Aus diesem Grund ist es nötig, dass Mail Designer 365 jeden Bildbereich als eine neue, separate Datei exportiert, damit das Design auch nach dem Export wie gewünscht aussieht.
      Wenn du beim Exportieren eines E-Mail-Designs die Option "eingeschränkte Kompatibilität" auswählst, wird den zweiten HEAD Tag von dem exportierten Code entfernt.



      Mail Designer 365 nutzt den zweiten HEAD Tag, um die Kompatibilität mit Yahoo Mail zu verbessern. Jedoch empfinden ihn manche E-Mail-Dienste als ein Fehler und können den Code nicht bearbeiten.

      Zum Beispiel, wenn du Constant Contact verwendest und Kompatibilitätsprobleme bekommst, könntest du diese Lösung ausprobieren.
      Mail Designer 365 benötigt ungefilterten und unveränderten Zugriff auf diese Server, um zu funktionieren:


      • id.equinux.com
      • my.maildesigner365.com
      • data.maildesigner365.com
      • my.featurenotes.com


      Wenn Sie eine Firewall oder eine Endpoint Security-Lösung verwenden, stellen Sie bitte sicher, dass der Zugriff auf diese Server gewährt und nicht verändert wird.

      Mail Designer 365 kann für einige Funktionen zusätzliche Server kontaktieren, zum Beispiel:


      • polyfill.io
      • www.gravatar.com
      • wp.com
      • api.rudderlabs.com


      Um zu überprüfen, ob Links in Ihrem Dokument gültig sind, kann Mail Designer 365 versuchen auch diese Server zu kontaktieren.
      Manchmal werden die Käufe in der Mac App Store Version von Mail Designer 365 nicht richtig erkannt.
      Bitte versuche folgende Schritte
      • 1. Bitte achte darauf, dass du die Download Version aus dem Mac App Store verwendest, die Download Version von der equinux Website kann deine Lizenz nicht erkennen
      • 2. Im Mail Designer 365 Menü wähle "Einkäufe wieder herstellen..."
      • 3. Falls deine Lizenz weiterhin nicht erkannt wird, bitte lösche die App und installiere Sie erneut aus dem Mac App Store (keine Sorge, Vorlagen und Einstellungen gehen nicht verloren)

      Danach sollte deine Lizenz erkannt werden.
      Aus Kompatibilitätsgründen werden alle mobil responsive Designs, die mit Mail Designer 365 erstellt werden, nach dem Export mit etwas Padding dargestellt. Dieser Rand ist nötig, um optimale Kompatibilität für alle Mobilgeräte und E-Mail-Clients zu garantieren.

      Er fällt oft optisch mehr auf, wenn keine äußere Hintergrundfarbe gesetzt wurde. Um einen vollflächigen Effekt zu erzeugen, kannst du eine andere Farbe für den Design-Hintergrund verwenden und so einen leichteren Kontrast zwischen den Design-Inhalten und dem Hintergrund schaffen.

      Es wird ein Mail Chimp Account benötigt, um Mail Designer Dokument an MailChimp zu exportieren.

      Um den API Key in deinem Account zu finden, hat der MailChimp Support weitere Informationen bereitgestellt.

      Ja, mit dem Mail Designer 365 können Sie Ihre benutzerdefinierten Layoutblöcke speichern.

      Bitte versuche folgendes:
      ‣ Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das "Layout" sichtbar ist (Wählen Sie "Darstellung"> "Layout einblenden"), damit Sie den Ziehpunkt auf den Layoutblöcken sehen können
      ‣ Dann wählen Sie die Registerkarte "Inhalte" auf der rechten Seite
      ‣ Wählen Sie den Abschnitt "Layoutblöcke"
      ‣ Klicken Sie auf "Instand-Blöcke"

      ‣ Wählen Sie die Layoutblöcke aus, die Sie speichern möchten
      ‣ Um mehrere Layoutblöcke auszuwählen, müssen Sie auf einen Layoutblock klicken, die Umschalttaste gedrückt halten und dann die anderen Layoutblöcke auswählen.
      ‣ Ziehen Sie Ihre Layoutblöcke in den Abschnitt "My Instant Blocks"


      Hinweis: Sie haben die Möglichkeit, mehrere Layoutblöcke zusammen zu speichern oder nur einen Layoutblock zu speichern.
      Du kannst einen beliebigen Text schreiben und den Platzhalter-Link selbst hinzufügen, indem du den Text markierst und im Stil-Menü auf "Link hinzufügen" klickst. Dann kannst du in dem kleinen Dropdown-Menü neben dem Link-Feld "Platzhalter" auswählen und den entsprechenden Platzhalter (in diesem Fall "unsubscribe") eingeben.

      Alternativ kannst du den Platzhalter zuerst einfügen (über das Menü "Einfügen") und den Text dann durch einen beliebigen Text ersetzen. Hier musst du aber darauf achten, dass der Platzhalter nach der Text-Änderung auch noch korrekt hinterlegt ist (den Text anklicken und im Stil-Menü unter "Link" überprüfen, ob der Platzhalter gesetzt ist).
      Mit Kampagnen schickst du Newsletter an große Zielgruppen – von jedem Gerät aus, einschließlich mobiler Geräte. Der Direktversand ist für das Versenden von E-Mails an ausgewählte Kontakte, für Geburtstagsgrüße, persönliche Angebote oder kaufbezogene E-Mails, direkt aus der Mail Designer App auf deinem Mac gedacht.
      Campaign Monitor unterstützt einige Platzhalter-Links, wie zum Beispiel „Abmelden Link“ (Unsubscribe), „Im Browser Betrachten Link“ (auch „Web Version“ genannt) und „Weiterleiten Link“ (auch „Forward to a Friend“). Leider unterstützt Campaign Monitor kein benutzerdefiniertes Styling für diese Links. Text Buttons von Mail Designer sind Links mit benutzerdefiniertem Styling und können daher beim Export nach Campaign Monitor nicht mit einem der oben genannten Linkziele verwendet werden.

      Anstelle von Text Buttons, die auf eines der oben genannten Ziele verweisen, fügen Sie bitte einen normalen Platzhalterlink ein. Verwenden Sie beispielsweise den Menüeintrag „Einfügen > Campaign Monitor > Abmelden Link“, um Ihrem Dokument einen Link zum abmelden hinzuzufügen.
      Überblend-Modi ermöglichen es dir, das Verhalten von mehreren Designelementen (z.B Bilder, Formen, Texte, usw.) beim Aufeinanderlegen festzustellen.

      Der voreingestellte Blend-Modus, den wir alle schon kennen heißt, wenn ein Designelement auf ein weiteres Element gelegt wird, wird das untere Element von dem oberen so bedeckt, dass es nicht mehr sichtbar ist:



      Tatsächlich gibt es aber mehrere Wege, indem du das Interagieren und Überblenden von Designelementen kontrollieren kannst. Diese heißen Überblend-Modi und können verwendet werden, um auffällige Effekte für deine Designs zu erzeugen.

      Klicke auf das Designelement, das du anpassen willst und gehe zu „Überblend-Modus“ in dem Stil-Menü. Hier kannst du gleich alle Überblend-Modi live im Design vergleichen



      Weitere Informationen über die verschiedenen Überblend-Modi in Mail Designer 365 kannst du in diesem Guide finden.
      Die kostenlose Mail Designer 365 Demo, die von dem Mac App Store heruntergeladen werden kann, erneut sich nicht automatisch. Dieser Plan läuft automatisch nach seiner 7-Tage-Laufzeit ab.

      Sobald deine Demo abgelaufen ist, benötigst du einen Plan, um Mail Designer 365 weiterhin zu nutzen. In unserem Store findest du eine Übersicht aller Plan-Optionen.
      Mit HTML 5 "video" Tag, aber eine größere Anzahl an Geräten hat eine fehlerhafte Unterstützung. Zum Beispiel zeigen iPhone- und iPad-Geräte in den meisten Betriebssystemversionen statt dem Video nur ein schwarzes Rechteck, mit dem man nicht interagieren kann. Wenn man die Fläche, an der sich das Video befinden sollte, antippt, passiert einfach gar nichts. Aus diesem Grund haben wir uns entschieden, die Unterstützung für den HTML 5 Video-Tag zu entfernen. Man kann jedoch einfach Links auf Videos setzen, indem man Videoplatzhalter in Bildbereiche zieht. Im dortigen Platzhalter können auch bequem Vorschaubilder erzeugt werden.

      Wir bieten eine kostenlose Testversion für die Mail Designer App und einen gratis Plan für Mail Designer Campaigns an. Mit diesen Testversionen können Sie alle Funktionen der App und des Dienstes testen. Diese Testversionen erlauben es Ihnen, die beste Lösung für ihre Bedürfnisse zu finden. Nach diesem Testzeitraum sind alle Käufe laut unseren Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen endgültig und nicht erstattbar.

      Bitte beachten Sie, dass wir in den folgenden Fällen keine Rückerstattungen bearbeiten können:
      • Nichtnutzung der App oder Platform
      • Versäumnis, Ihr Konto innerhalb der Kündigungsfrist zu kündigen.
      • Fehlende Features oder Funktionen in Ihrem abonnierten Plan
      • Irrtümlich getätigte Käufe
      • Außergewöhnliche Umstände, die außerhalb unserer Kontrolle liegen
      • Verstöße gegen unsere Nutzungsbedingungen
      Manchmal ist der Text, den Sie für die Desktop-Version Ihres Newsletters verwenden, zu groß oder zu klein für Ihre mobile Version. In Mail Designer 365 können Sie die Textgröße für die mobile Version Ihres Newsletters ganz einfach ändern, um sie genau auf die richtige Größe zu bringen.

      In unserem Mail Designer 365-Handbuch finden Sie eine detaillierte Anleitung zum Ändern der Textgröße für die mobile Version Ihres Newsletters.

      MailChimp bietet kostenlose und bezahlte Funktionen an. Mehr Details zum Preismodell von MailChimp findest du auf der MailChimp Webseite.

      Das Kopieren von vorformattierten Texten aus einem anderen Programm, wie z. B. Microsoft Word oder Apple Pages, kann in Mail Designer 365 manchmal zu Problemen führen - insbesondere, wenn in Mail Designer noch keine Textstile eingerichtet worden sind. Dies liegt häufig daran, wie andere Programme Text in die Zwischenablage kopieren, und kann zu unerwünschten Zeilenumbrüchen oder anderen Formatierungsproblemen führen.


      Um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, ist es am effektivsten, deine E-Mail-Texte direkt in die Textlayoutblöcke in Mail Designer 365 einzugeben. Wenn dies nicht möglich ist und du Texte von einer anderen Stelle kopieren musst, empfehlen wir stets, den Text zuerst in einen Plaintext-Editor (z. B. TextEdit auf dem Mac) einzufügen, um jegliche Formatierung zu entfernen, bevor du ihn in Mail Designer 365 eingibst.


      Wenn du bereits Textstile eingerichtet hast, kannst du die Option "Stil einfügen und anpassen" verwenden und musst so nichts neu formatieren.

      Du möchtest deine bei uns gespeicherten Daten löschen? Das finden wir sehr schade. Datenschutz ist uns wichtig und deswegen ist das Abmelden sehr einfach.

      Melde dich einfach in deinem License Manager an. Wähle "Konto bearbeiten" auf der linken Seite (unter Konto). Anschließend siehst du ganz unten auf der Seite "Account löschen".

      Bitte beachte, dass diese Aktion nicht rückgängig gemacht werden kann und du keinen Zugriff mehr auf deine bereits gekauften Produkte haben wirst. Wir hoffen dich bald wieder zu sehen!

      Mail Designer 365 nutzt viele Web-Technologien, die von deinem Sicherheitsprogramm eventuell aufgedeckt werden könnten. Manche Programme, wie z. B. Avast, könnten deshalb in einen Konflikt mit Mail Designer 365 geraten, was möglicherweise dazu führt, dass die App nicht mehr reagiert.

      Um das Problem zu lösen, könntest du versuchen, Mail Designer 365 in dem Programm zu whitelisten oder von den Sicherheits-Checks auszuschließen. Alternativ solltest du Kontakt zu dem Support-Team von deiner Sicherheits-Software aufnehmen, um eine mögliche Lösung zu finden.
      Mail Designer 365 startet üblicherweise in wenigen Sekunden. Falls der Startvorgang länger dauert, überprüfen Sie bitte, ob Sie einen Virenscanner oder andere Endpoint Security Software (z.B. von Sophos) installiert haben.

      Diese Software kann den Startvorgang stark beeinträchtigen. Falls möglich, fügen Sie bitte eine Ausnahme für Mail Designer 365 oder folgendem Verzeichnis hinzu:

      ~/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner/Documents

      Die Tilde (~) steht dabei für Ihr Heimatverzeichnis. Die Ausnahme ist nur für Lesevorgänge notwendig, Schreibvorgänge können weiterhin überwacht werden.
      Alle In-App Abos, die über Apple gekauft wurden können direkt in dem App Store verwaltet werden. Das machst du direkt am iPhone, iPad oder am Mac in der AppStore App.

      Mit diesem Link kommst du direkt zu AppStore Verwaltung:
      AppStore Käufe verwalten

      Du kannst dich auch telefonisch an den Apple Store Customer Service wenden, den du unter 0800 2000 136 erreichst. Das Team ist von Montag bis Freitag von 9 bis 20 Uhr und Samstag von 9 bis 18 Uhr für dich da.
      Nein. Wir haben festgestellt, dass SendX mit einigen HTML-Implementierungen nicht zurechtkommt, selbst mit offiziellen HTML-Standards. Daher ist es besser, einen Versandservice zu wählen, der alle gängigen HTML-Standards unterstützt. Nutzen Sie hierfür z.B. den integrierten Versanddienst von Mail Designer 365.
      Mailchimp hat ihre Unterstützung für ältere Upload-APIs eingestellt.

      Lade bitte Mail Designer 365 1.7 oder später, um die neue Mailchimp 3.0 Upload-Schnittstelle zu nutzen.

      Mail Designer 365 1.7 ist in allen Mail Designer 365 Plänen enthalten, Kunden von früheren Mail Designer Versionen können ein Upgrade Plan erwerben.

      Du kannst die automatische Verlängerung deines Mail Designer 365 Plans ganz einfach in deinem my.maildesigner365 Account deaktivieren.

      1. Melde dich in deinem Account an.
      2. Gehe zu „Käufe und Pläne“ unter Einstellungen.
      3. Deaktiviere dort die automatische Verlängerung für deinen Plan.

      Wichtig:
      Wenn du die automatische Verlängerung ausschaltest, verlierst du möglicherweise bestehende Preisvorteile.
      Nach Ablauf deines aktuellen Plans ist keine Reaktivierung mehr möglich – du kannst jedoch jederzeit ein neues Produkt zum dann gültigen Preis erwerben.

      Wenn du eine Newsletter-Kampagne planst, wird sie immer mit der genauen Version des Designs gesendet, mit dem du sie erstellt hast. Wenn du Änderungen an deinem Design vornimmst, nachdem du deine Kampagne erstellt hast, musst du die geplante Kampagne öffnen und erneut speichern, damit deine Änderungen wirksam werden.

      Detaillierte Anweisungen zum Ändern des Designs einer geplanten Kampagne:
      1. Öffne deine Vorlage in Mail Designer 365 und mache die Änderungen in deinem Design
      2. Gehe zu Delivery Hub und öffne deine geplante Kampagne
      3. Die neue Version deiner Vorlage wird automatisch ausgewählt.
      4. Drücke Speichern, um deine Kampagne mit dem neuen Design zu speichern.
      5. Wiederhole dies für andere geplante Kampagnen, die dasselbe Design verwenden


      Bitte beachte, dass das Ändern einer Vorlage nur möglich ist, solange eine Kampagne im geplanten Zustand ist. Wenn sie bereits gesendet wurde, kann das Design nicht geändert werden.

      Mail Designer Campaigns bietet jedoch einen Link-Änderungsservice an, falls du versehentlich den falschen Link in deinem Design verwendet hast: Einen Link in einer E-Mail nach dem Versand bearbeiten
      Jeder Textbereich in deinem Mail Designer 365 E-Mail-Design braucht einen Schriftstil. So kannst du sicherstellen, dass dein Text auch nach dem Export richtig formatiert wird.

      Wenn du einen Text-Link einfügst, ohne einen Schriftstil zu verwenden, kann dies dazu führen, dass der Text nach dem Export nicht richtig verlinkt wird.

      Wenn deine Links nach dem Export zu Mailchimp oder einem anderen Dienst nicht mehr vorhanden sind, solltest du das Design nochmals in Mail Designer 365 öffnen und überprüfen, dass jedem Textbereich ein passender Schriftstil zugewiesen ist. Danach kannst du das Template neu exportieren.

      Erfahre mehr über Schriftstile im Mail Designer 365 Handbuch.
      Das Versenden eines E-Mail-Blast über SMTP an eine größere Gruppe von Empfängern kann möglicherweise zu Problemen mit den neuen DKIM Verifizierungs Verfahren führen. Das bedeutet, dass Ihre E-Mails höchstwahrscheinlich vom E-Mail-Anbieter des Empfängers (Gmail, Yahoo usw.) blockiert werden, wenn Sie weiterhin per SMTP versenden. Dies führt dazu, dass nur wenige Ihrer Empfänger die E-Mails tatsächlich erhalten.

      Der Auslöser dieses E-Mail Blockings ist nicht die Art der E-Mail. Sogar persönliche Weihnachtsgrüße werden möglicherweise blockiert, wenn sie an eine ausreichend große Zielgruppe gesendet werden. Denn woher soll der E-Mail-Anbieter wissen, welcher Art der Inhalt der E-Mail ist? E-mails werden ausschließlich anhand der Anzahl der E-Mails, die gleichzeitig vom gleichen Absender gesendet werden, blockiert.

      So kann Mail Designer Kampagnen in dieser Situation helfen:
      - Wenn Sie keine eigene Domain-E-Mail-Adresse haben, ersetzen wir die Absenderadresse automatisch durch eine unserer verifizierten Domains
      – Dieser Adressersatz würde wie folgt aussehen: Ursprüngliche Adresse – supercoolmails@yahoo.com Neue Adresse: supercoolmails.yahoo.com@sentwith.maildesigner365.com
      - Da die Domain @sentwith.maildesigner365.com vollständig DKIM-zertifiziert ist, werden diese E-Mails nicht aufgrund von DKIM-Problemen blockiert.

      Wenn Sie über eine eigene Domain verfügen, ermöglicht Ihnen Mail Designer Campaigns alternativ die DKIM-Verifizierung Ihrer Absenderadresse, sodass Sie von Ihrer eigenen Domain aus senden können, ohne von den Anbietern blockiert zu werden.

      Sind Sie neu bei Mail Designer? Warum probieren Sie nicht die Mail Designer gratis Testversion für Mac aus?
      Nicht alle E-Mail-Clients stellen für die Darstellung Ihres Newsletters alle Schriftarten zur Verfügung, die wir im Mail Designer anbieten. Um zu verhindern, dass Ihr Design auf verschiedenen E-Mail-Clients beschädigt wird, haben Sie die Möglichkeit, Ersatzschriftarten zu definieren. Diese werden verwendet, falls die tatsächliche Schriftart, die Sie für Ihren Newsletter ausgewählt haben, nicht verfügbar ist. Sie können mehrere Ersatz-Schriften auswählen, um sicherzustellen, dass der Stil so nah wie möglich ist.

      In unserem Mail Designer 365-Handbuch finden Sie detaillierte Anweisungen zum Einrichten einer Ersatz-Schrift für Ihren Newsletter.

      E-Mails, die nur Bilder enthalten, werden oft als Spam markiert, weil Spamfilter auf Text angewiesen sind, um den Inhalt auf Legitimität zu prüfen. Ohne Text könnten die Filter annehmen, dass die E-Mail versucht, verdächtige oder schädliche Inhalte zu verbergen, was eine gängige Taktik von Spammern ist. Außerdem laden E-Mails, die nur aus Bildern bestehen, oft langsamer, was die Empfänger frustriert und die Wahrscheinlichkeit erhöht, dass sie die E-Mail als Spam markieren.

      Um die Wahrscheinlichkeit zu erhöhen, dass Ihre E-Mail im Posteingang landet, befolgen Sie diese Best Practices:

      1. Vermeiden Sie Layout-Blöcke, die nur aus Bildern bestehen: Verwenden Sie anstelle von Layout-Blöcken, die nur aus Bildern bestehen, Blöcke, die Text und Bilder kombinieren. So wird sichergestellt, dass Ihr Text als echter Text und nicht als Teil eines großen Bildes angezeigt wird, was den Filtern und Empfängern hilft, Ihren Inhalt besser zu verstehen.
      2. Fügen Sie relevanten Text hinzu: Erklären Sie klar den Zweck der E-Mail mithilfe von Text. Dies gibt den Spamfiltern einen Kontext zur Analyse und hilft Ihrem Publikum, sich mit Ihrer Nachricht zu beschäftigen.
      3. Verwenden Sie Alt-Text für Bilder: Fügen Sie zu jedem Bild einen beschreibenden Alt-Text hinzu. So wird sichergestellt, dass auch dann, wenn die Bilder nicht geladen werden, die Empfänger (und Spamfilter) den Inhalt der E-Mail verstehen können.
      4. Optimieren Sie die Bildgröße: Halten Sie Ihre Bilder klein, um die Ladezeiten zu reduzieren. Das verbessert die Benutzererfahrung und verhindert Frustration, die zu Spam-Beschwerden führen kann.
      5. Halten Sie ein gutes Text-Bild-Verhältnis: Ein ausgewogenes Verhältnis, bei dem mehr Text als Bilder vorhanden ist, kann die Wahrscheinlichkeit verringern, dass Ihre E-Mail als Spam markiert wird. Der Text gibt den Spamfiltern mehr Material zur Auswertung.
      6. Verwenden Sie eine Kombination aus Bild- und Textblöcken: Die Kombination beider Elemente verbessert nicht nur die Lesbarkeit und das Engagement, sondern verhindert auch, dass Spamfilter Ihre E-Mail als Versuch ansehen, wichtige Informationen in Bildern zu verstecken.
      7. Verwenden Sie einen seriösen E-Mail-Dienstanbieter wie Mail Designer 365 Campaigns: Viele E-Mail-Dienstanbieter wie Mail Designer 365 Campaigns helfen, die E-Mail-Struktur zu optimieren und bieten Authentifizierungsprotokolle wie SPF, DKIM und DMARC an, um die Zustellbarkeit zu verbessern.

      Wenn Sie diese Richtlinien befolgen und sicherstellen, dass Ihre E-Mail eine Mischung aus gut platziertem Text und Bildern enthält, können Sie die Zustellbarkeit verbessern und das Risiko verringern, dass sie im Spam-Ordner landet.

      ‣ Laden Sie die App herunter.
      ‣ Gehen Sie zu Ihrem Download-Ordner und finden Sie die App.
      ‣ Ziehen Sie die App, die Sie heruntergeladen haben, in den "Programme" Ordner.
      Hier finden Sie eine Übersciht, wie Sie ein Bildschirmfoto am Mac erstellen können:
      • "Shift" (⇧) + "Befehltaste" (⌘) + "4" speichert einen ausgewählten Bereich des Bildschirms als Datei auf dem Schreibtisch.
      • "Shift" (⇧) + "Befehltaste" (⌘) + "4" und danach Leertaste speichert ein gewähltes Fenster als Datei auf dem Schreibtisch.
      • "Shift" (⇧) + "Befehltaste" (⌘) + "3" speichert Ihren gesamten Bildschirm als Datei auf dem Schreibtisch.

      Wenn Sie eine App sofort beenden müssen (z.B. wenn die App unresponsiv oder langsam wird) machen Sie bitte folgendes:
      • Wenn die App schon in Ihrem Dock liegt, drücken Sie die Wahltaste (⌥) und machen Sie einen Rechtsklick auf dem App-Symbol. Sie können "Sofort beenden" von dem Menü wählen.
      • Sie können auch Wahltaste (⌥) + Befehltaste (⌘) + Esc drücken, um eine Liste von aktiven Apps zu bekommen. Aus der Liste können Sie die App selektieren, die Sie beenden möchten und dann "Sofort beenden" klicken.
      Ein gleichbleibendes Preisgefüge steht exklusiv den Kunden zur Verfügung, die die automatische Verlängerungsoption verwenden.

      Wenn Sie die automatische Verlängerung deaktivieren, verlieren Sie automatisch jegliche bestehende Preis-Vorteile, wie z. B. Sonderrabatte oder Sparaktionen. Diese Aktion können Sie nicht rückgängig machen.

      Falls Sie Ihren Plan zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt wieder verlängern möchten, können Sie eine Lizenz jederzeit für den jeweils gültigen Preis erneut erwerben. Die Verlängerung eines abgelaufenen Plans ist nicht möglich.

      Bitte beachten Sie: Eine reguläre Beendigung Ihres Planes findet trotz "Automatischer Verlängerung" auch dann statt, wenn Ihr Zahlungsmittel beim Zeitpunkt der Verlängerung nicht mehr belastet werden kann (z.B. abgelaufen, gestohlen, verloren).

      In diesem Fall updaten Sie Ihre Zahlungsdaten bitte vor dem Verlängerungszeitpunkt. Dies können Sie jederzeit über Ihren my.maildesigner365 oder my.vpntracker Account machen.
      Du machst den Wechsel von Campaign Monitor zu Mail Designer 365 Kampagnen? Mail Designer 365 kombiniert schönes HTML E-Mail-Design mit benutzerfreundlichen Versand-Tools und maßgeschneiderten Zielgruppen, die sich auf smarten, flexiblen Platzhaltern basieren.

      Mit Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub kannst du problemlos deine bestehenden Kontakte direkt von Campaign Monitor importieren, damit du sofort mit dem Versand loslegen kannst. Du brauchst lediglich deinen API-Schlüssel für Campaign Monitor!

      Nutze unseren einfachen Schritt-für-Schritt-Guide, um loszulegen →
      Windows 10 Mail und Outlook 2013 können aus Sicht eines Newsletters (HTML/CSS) nicht unterschieden werden. Leider verhalten sie sich unterschiedlich und stellen den gleichen Inhalt unterschiedlich dar.

      Das bedeutet, dass es nur möglich ist, einen Newsletter entweder in Windows 10 Mail oder Outlook 2013 korrekt darzustellen, nicht in beiden. Weil Outlook 2013 weiter verbreitet ist als Windows 10 Mail haben wir uns entschieden, der korrekten Darstellung in Outlook 2013 den Vorrang zu geben.
      Um die Umleitungsfunktion in Apple Mail zu verwenden, versuchen Sie Folgendes:

      ‣ Wählen Sie "E-Mail"> "Umleiten"

      ‣ Geben Sie die E-Mail-Adresse des Empfängers ein
      ‣ Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Senden"


      Für weitere Informationen lesen Sie bitte die Support-Seite von Apple hier.

      Wichtig: Wir empfehlen immer, dass Sie die Funktion "Weiterleiten" verwenden, anstatt Ihr E-Mail-Design für Mail Designer 365 weiterzuleiten.

      Über den equinux Online Store werden folgende Software Produkte angeboten:

      • VPN Tracker (VPN Software für den Mac)
      • Mail Designer 365 (E-Mail Newsletter Design Software)
      • tizi (Zubehörprodukte für iPhone, iPad und co).
      • TV Pro, Live TV und TV Pro Mediathek Pakete

      Typische Gründe für eine Abbuchung

      Es wurde ein Laufzeitprodukt automatisch verlängert

      VPN Tracker und Mail Designer werden als Laufzeitprodukte angeboten. Möglicherweise wurde die Abbuchung durch eine automatische Verlängerung ausgelöst.

      Es wurden mit einer hinterlegten Kreditkarte weitere Benutzer hinzugefügt

      Wenn mehrere Teammitglieder ein Produkt verwenden, ist üblicherweise ein Zahlungsmittel für das gesamte Team hinterlegt. Wenn weitere Teammitglieder hinzugefügt wurden, wird das hinterlegte Zahlungsmittel verwendet.

      Rechnung und weitere Informationen

      Rechnung

      Rechnungskopien für VPN Tracker können unter my.vpntracker.com angefordert werden.

      Rechnungskopien für Mail Designer 365 können unter my.maildesigner365.com angefordert werden.

      Rechnungskopien für TV Pro Apps können unter my.tvproapp.de angefordert werden.

      Weitere Informationen

      Wenn unklar ist, welcher Mitarbeiter eine Bestellung getätigt hat, kann unser Support-Team gerne weiterhelfen. Dazu benötigen wir die vorliegenden Rechnungsinformationen und die letzten 4 Ziffern der Kreditkarte.

      Beim Download einer App von unserer Webseite bittet Safari evtl. zuerst um Bestätigung. In diesem Fall muss der Download einmalig mit "Erlauben" bestätigt werden.



      Hinweis: Unsere App-Downloads sind digital signiert und werden mit einem Sicherheits-Zertifikat zusätzlich geschützt.
      Die Apple Familienfreigabe ist für unsere Produkte nicht aktiviert.
      Ja, Sie können einfach die Deckkraft eines Fotos in Ihrem Newsletter anpassen.

      ‣ Wählen Sie das Foto aus, das halbtransparent gedreht werden soll
      ‣ Dadurch wird Mail Designer 365 aufgefordert, den Abschnitt "Stil" auf der rechten Seite zu öffnen.
      ‣ Unten finden Sie den Abschnitt "Deckkraft"
      ‣ Passen Sie den Deckkraftregler an, um die Deckkraft des ausgewählten Fotos anzupassen

      Alle Vorlagen, die zu MailChimp hochgeladen werden sollen, müssen einen Abmelden-Link enthalten. Dadurch wird eine fehlerfreie Darstellung auf mobilen Geräten sowie Desktop-Clients sichergestellt und der MailChimp Footer am Ende deiner Nachricht eingefügt.

      Einen Abmelde-Link einfügen

      Um einen Abmelden-Link in Ihr Design einzufügen, gehen Sie bitte wie folgt vor:

    • Wählen Sie Textbereich, der Ihren Abmelden-Link beinhalten soll.
    • Bitte wählen Sie aus der Menüleiste "Einfügen" > "MailChimp" > "Abmelde-Link".


    • Einen Rewards-Platzhalter einfügen

      Sie haben einen kostenlosen MailChimp Account und möchten, dass Ihre Newsletter über MailChimp ohne den MailChimp Footer verschickt werden?
      Dann fügen Sie zusätzlich zum Abmelde-Link den Rewards-Platzhalter in Ihre Vorlage ein. Wählen Sie hierfür aus der Menüleiste "Einfügen" > "MailChimp" > "Rewards".

      Wenn Sie einen kostenpflichtigen MailChimp Account verwenden, müssen Sie keinen Rewards-Platzhalter Ihrem Dokument hinzufügen.

      Wenn Sie etwas auf der Rechnung geändert haben, kontaktieren Sie uns bitte über unsere Support-Seite.

      Wichtig: Wir können nicht garantieren, dass wir Änderungen vornehmen können, nachdem die Rechnung ausgestellt wurde. Dies hängt von Fall zu Fall ab. Danke für Ihr Verständnis.
      Sie können ändern, ob Ihr Text automatisch mit jedem Textbereich gesperrt wird. Um die Silbentrennung auszuschalten, versuchen Sie folgendes:
      ‣ Gehen Sie zu "Ablage" > "Design-Optionen ...".

      ‣ Fügen Sie das Häkchen von der "Worttrennung erzwingen".

      ‣ "Ok" klicken.


      Weitere Informationen zum Ein- und Ausschalten der Text-Silbentrennung finden Sie auf folgender Seite:

      Wenn du mit E-Mail-Zustellungs-Problemen kämpfst—insbesondere bei Gmail-Nutzern—gibt es bewährte Strategien, um deine Absender-Reputation zu verbessern und sicherzustellen, dass deine E-Mails im Posteingang landen und nicht im Spam-Ordner. Folge diesen Schritten, um wieder auf den richtigen Weg zu kommen:

      Schritte zur Verbesserung der E-Mail-Zustellbarkeit:

      1. Wärmen Sie Ihre E-Mail-Listen langsam auf
        • Behandle den Prozess so, als würdest du ein völlig neues Konto aufwärmen.
        • Teile dein Mailing in kleinere Gruppen auf und sende sie an verschiedenen Tagen. Beispielsweise: Starte mit 500 E-Mails am Montag, 1.000 am Dienstag, 2.000 am Mittwoch usw.
      2. Setze den Fokus auf engagierte Empfänger
        • Starte damit, E-Mails nur an Kontakte zu senden, die deine E-Mails kürzlich geöffnet haben (z. B. innerhalb der letzten 30 Tage für wöchentliche Versender).
        • Erhöhe diesen Zeitraum allmählich, wenn deine Zustellbarkeit sich verbessert.
      3. Nutze Google Postmaster Tools
        • Richte Google Postmaster Tools ein, um Spam-Raten, Domain-Reputation und andere Zustellbarkeitsmetriken zu überwachen.
      4. Erstelle Test-Gmail-Konten
        • Abonniere ein Test-Gmail-Konto für deine E-Mail-Kampagnen.
        • Überwache, wo die E-Mails landen. Wenn E-Mails im Spam landen, interagiere mit ihnen (z. B. öffnen und klicken), aber verschiebe sie nicht aus dem Spam-Ordner. Dies hilft dabei, die Algorithmen von Gmail zu trainieren.
      5. Optimiere basierend auf deinen Metriken
        • Nutze Google Postmaster Tools, um deine Spam-Raten zu überwachen. Wenn die Spam-Raten zu hoch sind, reduziere den Zeitraum der engagierten Empfänger oder halte das aktuelle Sendevolumen bei, bis die Raten stabil sind.
      6. Überwache den Fortschritt
        • Wenn sich die Zustellbarkeit bei Gmail verbessert und E-Mails nicht mehr im Spam landen, erweitere deine E-Mail-Liste schrittweise, um weniger engagierte Empfänger einzubeziehen.

      Wie Mail Designer Campaigns helfen kann:

      Mail Designer Campaigns bietet mehrere integrierte Funktionen, um die E-Mail-Zustellbarkeit zu optimieren und deine Absender-Reputation zu verbessern:

      • Professionelle E-Mail-Authentifizierung: Stelle sicher, dass deine E-Mails mit SPF, DKIM und DMARC authentifiziert sind, um die Wahrscheinlichkeit zu verringern, dass sie als Spam markiert werden.
      • Engagement-Tracking: Identifiziere aktive und inaktive Empfänger in deiner Mailingliste, sodass du dich zuerst auf die am meisten engagierten Kontakte konzentrieren kannst.
      • Unterstützung für benutzerdefinierte Domains: Füge deine eigene Domain zu Mail Designer Campaigns hinzu, um das Vertrauen von E-Mail-Anbietern wie Gmail zu stärken.
      • Saubere und optimierte Designs: Mail Designer 365 hilft dir dabei, E-Mail-Inhalte zu erstellen, die visuell ansprechend sind und gleichzeitig Spam auslösende Elemente vermeiden, wodurch die Zustellrate im Posteingang steigt.
      • Fortgeschrittene Segmentierung: Mail Designer Campaigns ermöglicht fortschrittliche Segmentierung, wie das Erstellen von Listen nur mit Personen, die die E-Mail in den letzten X Tagen geöffnet haben, sowie die Möglichkeit, nur einen Teil deiner Abonnentenliste anzusprechen. So stellst du sicher, dass deine E-Mails zuerst die engagiertesten Empfänger erreichen, was die Zustellbarkeit insgesamt verbessert.

      Indem du diese Best Practices befolgst und die Tools von Mail Designer Campaigns nutzt, kannst du deine Absender-Reputation wiederherstellen, die Gmail-Zustellbarkeit verbessern und erfolgreichere E-Mail-Marketing-Kampagnen erreichen.

      Ein gleichbleibendes Preisgefüge steht exklusiv den Kunden zur Verfügung, die die automatische Verlängerungsoption verwenden. Wenn Ihr Plan nicht verlängert werden kann, aufgrund von einem Problem mit dem Zahlungsmittel (z.B. abgelaufen, gestohlen, verloren), wird der Plan nach mehreren Versuchen beendet. Sie können Ihren Plan danach jederzeit für den jeweils gültigen Preis erneut erwerben.

      Um von Ihrem bestehenden Preis zu profitieren, aktualisieren Sie Ihre Zahlungsdaten bitte vor dem Verlängerungszeitpunkt.
      Sie können alle Ihre Rechnungen jederzeit in unserem Online Store einsehen:

      Die Rechnungen für Ihre VPN Tracker 365 Käufe finden Sie im Bereich "Rechnungen" unter:

      http://my.vpntracker.com
      Sie arbeiten in der Buchhaltung und benötigen Zugriff auf die VPN Tracker Rechnungen Ihrer Firma? Bitte Sie den VPN Tracker Team Manager Sie in das Team der Firma mit der Rolle "Buchhaltung" einzuladen. Dann erhalten Sie eine Email sobald eine neue Rechnung bereitsteht und können diese im Web Portal herunterladen.


      Die Rechnungen für Ihre Mail Designer 365 Käufe finden Sie im Bereich "Bestellungen" unter:

      https://my.maildesigner365.com

      Die Rechnungen für Ihre tizi Produkte finden Sie im Bereich "Bestellungen" unter:

      http://my.tizi.tv

      Weitere Rechnunngen finden Sie unter:

      http://www.equinux.com/goto/invoice
      ‣ Falls Sie eine PDF Kopie Ihrer Rechnung speichern möchten, können Sie dies einfach tun, indem Sie "Command + P" drücken und anschließend die Option "Als PDF sichern" auswählen.
      Manchmal sind die VAT-Überprüfungsserver vorübergehend nicht erreichbar, was den Fehler verursachen kann, wenn Sie versuchen, einen Mail Designer 365-Plan zu aktualisieren oder zu erwerben.

      Um mit Ihrer Mehrwertsteuer auf den Mail Designer 365 zu aktualisieren, versuchen Sie bitte Folgendes:
      ‣ Besuchen Sie unsere Upgrade-Seite. 
      ‣ Kaufen Sie einen Mail Designer 365 Plan.
      ‣ Melde dich in deinem Konto an
      ‣ Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Buying for a business?"
      ‣ Eine VAT-ID hinzufügen
      ‣ Geben Sie Ihre vollständige Umsatzsteuer-Identifikationsnummer ein
      ‣ Klicken Sie auf "Validate VAT ID"
      Idealerweise empfehlen wir, Ihre Abmelderate unter 0,5 % zu halten, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen.

      Abmelderaten über 1 % können ein Warnsignal sein, da nur ein Bruchteil der Personen, die sich abmelden möchten, tatsächlich auf den Abmeldelink klickt—viele markieren Ihre E-Mails stattdessen als Spam. Das bedeutet, dass eine Abmelderate von 1 % dazu führen könnte, dass 2–3 % Ihrer E-Mails von Anbietern wie Google oder Hotmail als Spam markiert werden. Langfristig kann dies Ihren Absender-Ruf schädigen und dazu führen, dass alle Ihre E-Mails im Spam-Ordner landen.

      Um Ihre Abmelderate zu senken, senden Sie E-Mails nur an aktive Abonnenten. Konzentrieren Sie sich zunächst auf Personen, die Ihre E-Mails in den letzten 365 Tagen geöffnet haben, und passen Sie diesen Zeitraum basierend auf den Ergebnissen an. Zudem kann die Segmentierung Ihrer Zielgruppe, um relevantere Inhalte bereitzustellen, die Abmelderate deutlich senken und die Engagement-Rate erhöhen.
      Um die Statistiken Ihrer E-Mail-Kampagne in Mail Designer 365 einzusehen, folgen Sie diesen Schritten:
      1. Melden Sie sich auf my.maildesigner365.com an.
      2. Navigieren Sie zu Kampagnen und wählen Sie Zugestellt.
      3. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Kampagne aus – die Statistik wird anschließend angezeigt.

      Wenn du keine vorbereitete Domain oder eigene E-Mail-Adresse hast, bietet Mail Designer 365 eine professionelle Lösung, um E-Mail-Kampagnen ohne die Nutzung deiner eigenen Domain zu versenden.

      Wie funktioniert das?

      Mail Designer 365 nutzt den Mail Designer Delivery-Service, der sicherstellt, dass deine Kampagnen zuverlässig und sicher über eine vertrauenswürdige, vorkonfigurierte Domain versendet werden. So vermeidest du Probleme wie schlechte Zustellbarkeit oder E-Mails, die im Spam-Ordner landen.

      Warum Mail Designer Delivery wählen?

      • Kein Einrichtungsaufwand: Du musst keine Domain kaufen, aufwärmen oder konfigurieren.
      • Vertrauenswürdige Reputation: Die Versandinfrastruktur von Mail Designer ist für optimale Zustellbarkeit optimiert.
      • Professionelles Erscheinungsbild: Deine E-Mails werden mit einer authentifizierten Domain versendet und wirken dadurch professionell.
      • DSGVO-konformer Versand: Alle Daten werden in Übereinstimmung mit der DSGVO verarbeitet, um die Privatsphäre deiner Empfänger zu schützen.

      Gibt es einen Haken?

      Die Nutzung einer geteilten Domain ist eine schnelle Lösung, jedoch wird langfristig die Verwendung einer eigenen E-Mail-Domain (z. B. deinname@deinunternehmen.de) empfohlen. Das gibt dir volle Kontrolle und stärkt dein Markenimage. Mail Designer 365 unterstützt dich dabei, SPF-, DKIM- und DMARC-Authentifizierungen für maximale Zustellbarkeit einzurichten.

      Bereit loszulegen?

      Mail Designer 365 ist ideal, um deine Kampagne schnell und professionell an eine Liste von 1500+ Kandidaten zu senden. Starte noch heute mit unserem Delivery-Service und erreiche deine Zielgruppe ohne technischen Aufwand oder Zustellbarkeitsprobleme!

      E-Mail-Marketing ist nicht tot – es hat sich einfach weiterentwickelt. Es stimmt zwar, dass Posteingänge heutzutage voller sind, aber E-Mail-Marketing bleibt eine der effektivsten Möglichkeiten, mit Zielgruppen in Kontakt zu treten, wenn es richtig gemacht wird. Hier ist warum:




      • Qualität vor Quantität: Abonnenten sind wählerischer geworden, bei welchen Newslettern sie sich anmelden. Daher ist es entscheidend, wertvollen, ansprechenden und relevanten Content zu bieten, der hervorsticht. Allgemeine oder sich wiederholende E-Mails reichen nicht mehr aus.
      • Es ist eine persönliche Entscheidung: Anders als unerwünschte Nachrichten auf Plattformen wie WhatsApp gibt E-Mail den Empfängern die Kontrolle – sie haben sich bewusst entschieden, von dir zu hören. Für viele Menschen sind E-Mails dadurch weitaus willkommener als aufdringliche Nachrichten auf anderen Kanälen.
      • Immer noch ein ROI-Wunder: E-Mail-Marketing liefert weiterhin eine der höchsten Renditen im digitalen Marketing. Wenn du dich auf Personalisierung und Mehrwert konzentrierst, kann E-Mail Conversions besser vorantreiben als fast jedes andere Medium.


      Automatisierung und Messaging-Apps wie WhatsApp wachsen zwar, erfüllen jedoch andere Zwecke. Anstatt E-Mail zu ersetzen, ergänzen sie eine gut abgerundete Marketingstrategie. Also nein – E-Mail-Marketing ist nicht tot. Es ist nur wettbewerbsintensiver geworden, und das ist gut, denn es motiviert Marken, besser zu werden.

      Im Mail Designer Handbuch findest du einige Anregungen, wie du deine Designs für Mail Chimp optimal anpasst und Platzhalter verwendest.

      Alle weiteren Bearbeitungs- und Sendeoptionen werden direkt in Mail Chimp vorgenommen. Wie das genau funktioniert erfährst du vom MailChimp Team über Webinare, How-Tos, Guides und viele nützliche Tipps.

      Zum Glück stimmt das nicht.

      Die XCSSET Malware ist ein Trojaner, der Projekt-Dateien über Xcode fälscht. Hier werden meistens Entwickler angezielt. Um infiziert zu werden, müsstest du ein betroffenes Xcode-Projekt herunterladen und bearbeiten. Es erstellt gefälschte Apps und lädt zudem auch Payload (wie z. B. Adware, usw.) Deshalb werden bestehende Apps nicht betroffen.

      Eine interessante Eigenschaft von XCSSET ist, dass es meistens in AppleScript implementiert wird. Die gefälschten Apps enthalten einen Ordner: "Contents/Resources/Scripts" in dem die AppleScript Dateien liegen. Machen Sie im Finder einen Rechtsklick auf VPN Tracker 365 oder Mail Designer 365 und klicken Sie auf "Paketinhalt anzeigen", um zu überprüfen, ob Sie diesen Ordner oder jegliche anderen AppleScript Dateien (*.scpt) finden können. VPN Tracker 365 und Mail Designer 365 enthalten beide keine AppleScript Dateien.
      Ihre Kontodaten wie Ihre Adresse oder E-Mail können Sie in der Kontoverwaltung unter folgenden Link bearbeiten:
      equinux ID bearbeiten
      Wenn Sie im Google Playstore Ihre Abos ansehen und verwalten möchten, dann gehen Sie wie folgt vor:
      Abos bei Google Play kündigen, pausieren oder ändern

      Wenn Sie im Apple AppStore Ihre Abos ansehen und verwalten möchten, dann gehen Sie wie folgt vor:
      Abonnements anzeigen oder kündigen
      Alle Zahlungen in unserem Store werden, zum Schutz unserer Kunden, mit der 3D Secure Technologie abgewickelt. 3D Secure ist ein zusätzlicher Sicherheitsmechanismus, welcher per 2-Faktor Authorisierung funktioniert. Nach der Eingabe der Kartendaten, wird die Transaktion an die Kreditkartenfirma weitergegeben und muss vom Kunden explizit freigegeben werden. Die Freigabe erfolgt normalerweise per SMS, App oder Email. Durch die explizite Freigabe vor der Transaktion, können wir helfen Kreditkartenmissbrauch zu unterbinden.

      Um Ihre Karte mit 3D Secure zu nutzen, muss das Verfahren einmalig aktiviert werden. Hierfür kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre Bank. Oftmals ist die Registrierung auch auf der Bank Website oder per App möglich. Weitere Details finden Sie unter den folgenden Links:

      Bei dem 3D Secure Verfahren läuft die Kommunikation der Authentifizierung direkt zwischen Ihrem Computer und Ihrer Bank. Wir haben hierauf keinen Einfluss. Bei Problemen, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre Bank, oder versuchen alternativ mit einer anderen Karte oder per Paypal zu bezahlen.
      Viren, die bestehende Programme infizieren, sind unter macOS zwar sehr selten, sie existieren jedoch. Eine Warnung, dass VPN Tracker 365 oder Mail Designer 365 Malware enthält ist höchstwahrscheinlich eine falsch positive Diagnose und das Tool hat fälschlicherweise Malware in den Apps identifiziert, die tatsächlich nicht da ist.
      Manchmal kann es bei einzelnen Banken zu Schwierigkeiten bei der Zahlungsabwicklung kommen.

      In den meisten Fällen erledigen sich diese Probleme ganz einfach bei einer schnellen Anruf mit Ihrer Bank. Dies sollten Sie als Erstes probieren.

      Alternativ könnten Sie folgendes probieren:

      - Versuchen Sie bitte Ihre Karte direkt in unserem Store zu aktualisieren
      - Eine andere Kreditkarte nutzen (es werden Karten von Mastercard, Visa und American Express unterstützt)
      - PayPal verwenden (Tipp: Sie können auch bei PayPal Ihre Kreditkarte hinterlegen)

      Unter https://my.vpntracker.com/user/payment können Sie Ihre Zahlungsmittel verwalten bzw. ändern.
      Beim Versenden von E-mails an eine Gruppe von Personen gab es traditionell mehrere Methoden. Beispiele für den traditionellen Versand an kleine Gruppen sind:
      • Reguläre E-Mail mit mehreren Kontakten im An-Feld
      • Reguläre E-Mail mit mehreren Kontakten im BCC-Feld
      • Eine E-Mail an eine vordefinierte Gruppe, wie z. B. eine Outlook-Gruppe

      In den letzten Jahren haben E-Mail-Dienstanbieter allmählich die Anforderungen für das Versenden von E-Mails erhöht. Sobald Sie sich dem Versenden an 30 oder mehr Empfänger für eine einzelne E-Mail nähern, können bei Verwendung traditioneller E-Mail-Methoden mehrere Probleme auftreten.
      • Ihr E-Mail-Dienstanbieter oder der E-Mail-Dienstanbieter des Empfängers könnte vermuten, dass Sie SPAM (unerwünschte Junk-E-Mails) senden, was dazu führen könnte, dass Ihr Konto gesperrt oder vorübergehend eingefroren wird.
      • Das Empfangen einer E-Mail mit einer umfangreichen Liste von Empfängern verringert oft deren wahrgenommene Relevanz für individuelle Empfänger, was sie unpersönlich erscheinen lässt und die Wahrscheinlichkeit erhöht, dass sie als Junk-Mail eingestuft wird.
      • Nachrichten, die an eine große Anzahl von Empfängern gesendet werden, werden oft von Junk-E-Mail-Filterungssystemen als Spam markiert, was das Risiko erhöht, dass Ihre Nachricht blockiert wird und nicht die beabsichtigten Empfänger erreicht.

      Besonders mit den neuesten Spam-Richtlinien, die von großen E-Mail-Anbietern wie Google und Hotmail implementiert wurden, ist es zunehmend einfach, dass Ihre E-Mail-Adresse oder Domain auf eine Blacklist gesetzt wird. Dies könnte dazu führen, dass Ihr Konto "Spam-blockiert" wird, was dazu führt, dass alle Ihre E-Mails in den Spam-Ordner der Empfänger gelangen. Das Aufheben dieser Art von Spam-Blockierung ist ein mühsamer Prozess, daher ist es wichtig, sie zu vermeiden.
      Wie kann Mail Designer Campaigns Ihnen helfen?
      • Mail Designer Campaigns ermöglicht es Ihnen, Ihre Domain vollständig zu verifizieren und so die beste Zustellbarkeit für Ihre E-Mails sicherzustellen, damit sie die Posteingänge der Empfänger erreichen.
      • Wenn Sie keine eigene Domain haben oder den Überprüfungsprozess nicht durchlaufen möchten, können wir Ihnen eine benutzerdefinierte Adresse von einer vollständig authentifizierten Domain zur Verfügung stellen, wodurch das Risiko verringert wird, dass Ihre E-Mails als Spam markiert werden.
      • Wir bieten eine intelligente Listenverwaltung für Ihre Kontaktlisten, mit der Sie entweder E-Mails an alle Kontakte senden oder gezielte Gruppen erstellen können, die auf Ihre Zielgruppen zugeschnitten sind.

      Zusammenfassend lässt sich sagen, dass die neuesten Spam-Anforderungen die Vorschriften für das Versenden an kleine Gruppen verschärft haben. Wenn Sie also regelmäßig E-Mails an 10 oder mehr Personen senden, empfehlen wir dringend die Verwendung eines Mailing-Dienstes wie Mail Designer Campaigns.
      Beginnen Sie Ihre Reise mit Mail Designer Campaigns, indem Sie Ihre Kontaktliste hochladen.
      Die API-Integration ist kompatibel mit FileMaker Versionen ab FileMaker 12 sowie mit der FileMaker Go iOS App kompatibel. Bei der Nutzung von Attachments wird mindestens FileMaker 18 benötigt.
      Ja, mit der Mail Designer API kannst du zum Beispiel gezielt Platzhalter in Designs füllen und automatisiert versenden. So lassen sich beispielsweise direkt aus FileMaker personalisierte Emails and Kunden versenden.

      Nutze die Template ID, um ein bestimmtes Design anzusteuern. Du findest die Template ID im Platzhalter-Inspektor: wähle einen Platzhalter in deinem Design aus und kopiere die Template ID (ganz unten in der der Seitenleiste).

      Die API Dokumentation befindet sich hier:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/docs/api
      Die Integration von Mail Designer erfordert keine zusätzliche Installation von FileMaker-Plug-ins oder Ähnlichem. Technisch erfolgt die Integration über einen CURL-Aufruf des API-Endpunkts unseres Mail-Designer-Versandservices. Dies wird mithilfe des entsprechenden FileMaker-Skriptschritts umgesetzt.

      Somit ist eine Nutzung mit FileMaker Go für iPhone und iPad möglich.

      Mit der Bereitstellung der FileMaker-Demodatei können alle entsprechenden Schritte nachvollzogen werden. Siehe FAQ "Wie starte ich mit der Mail Designer Integration?"

      Ja, mit Mail Designer 365 kannst du genau nachvollziehen, ob eine E-Mail geöffnet wurde. Die integrierten Mail Designer Versand E-Mail-Tracking-Funktionen liefern dir umfassende Statistiken zu jeder versendeten Email und Kampagne.

      Egal ob Direktversand oder Newsletter-Kampagne: Wenn du deine E-Mail über den integrierten Versanddienst von Mail Designer 365 versendest, stehen dir detaillierte Auswertungen zur Verfügung – darunter Öffnungsrate, Klickrate und viele weitere wichtige Kennzahlen.

      Die Auswertung deiner Newsletter-Kampagnen findest du hier:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/campaigns/finished

      Auch beim Direktversand deiner E-Mails ist eine detaillierte Analyse möglich. Die entsprechenden Statistiken findest du unter:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/direct/finished

      Unabhängig vom Versandtyp bietet dir Mail Designer 365 unter anderem folgende Auswertungen:

      • Öffnungsrate und gesamt Öfffnungen
      • Klickrate und gesamt Klicks
      • Zustellstatus und Bounces
      • Abmeldungen (Unsubscribe-Rate)
      • Detaillierte Link Klick Auswertungen
      • Auswertungen auf Empfängerbasis

      Diese Performance-Analyse hilft dir, den Erfolg deiner E-Mail-Kampagne besser zu bewerten und deine Inhalte gezielt zu verbessern.

      Tipp: Für eine aussagekräftige Auswertung solltest du die Statistiken frühestens 24 Stunden nach dem Versand prüfen – so stellst du sicher, dass deine Empfänger ausreichend Zeit zum Öffnen und Reagieren hatten.

      Ganz einfach: Du brauchst zwei zentrale Dateien.

      Die MailDesignerIntegrationExample-Datei in FileMaker zeigt dir Schritt für Schritt die benötigten Skripte (.fmp12 Filemaker Datei):


      In der Mail Designer 365-Vorlage findest du Platzhalter, die dir zeigen, wie deine FileMaker-Felder direkt im Design zum Leben erwachen (Mail Designer Datei):


      Öffne diese Mail Designer Datei und gehe danach direkt auf Ablage > Sichern, um sie in deinem Projekt zu sichern.

      Du hast noch kein Mail Designer?


      Erstelle einen FileMaker String mit deinen vorhandenen Datenbank-Variablen, damit sie den Platzhaltern im Mail Designer 365 Template entsprechen. Übergebe die Werte an das FileMaker Send-Skript (cURL-basiert), um aus einem Eintrag E-Mails mit einem Klick zu ermöglichen. So einfach geht es!
      Um ein E-Mail-Design für die Verwendung mit deiner FileMaker-Integration festzulegen, gehe zu:

      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/designs

      Klicke auf das Drei-Punkte-Symbol und wähle „Mail Designer 365 API: Template-ID kopieren“.

      Diese ID wirst du dann verwenden, um die Variable $EMailTemplateID festzulegen.
      Mit Platzhaltern lassen sich einfach Zielgruppen erstellen oder deine E-Mails personalisieren. In Drittanbieter-Apps wie z.B. FileMaker kannst du Felder anlegen, die du als Platzhalter in Designs hinterlegst, um diese E-Mails automatisch und personalisiert aus FileMaker zu versenden.

      Ein Platzhalter (z.B. "Land") kann mehrere Werte annehmen (z.B. "Deutschland", "USA").

      Füge deinen Kontakten Platzhalter hinzu, um anschließend auf dieser Basis Zielgruppen zu erstellen (z.B. "Newsletter nur an Nutzer in USA").

      Oder füge in der Mail Designer 365 App diese Platzhalter in deine E-Mails ein, um sie zu personalisieren (z.B. "Ganz 'Deutschland' feiert jetzt den Super-Sale!").

      Mehr im Handbuch erfahren
      Für die Erstellung der Vorlagen ist eine Mail Designer 365 Design-Lizenz erforderlich.
      Für den Versand wird zusätzlich ein Mail Designer 365 Versandplan benötigt.
      Du musst die Absenderadresse festlegen – es können nur Adressen verwendet werden, die unter folgendem Link hinterlegt wurden:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/domains
      Die folgenden Schritte basieren auf dem Definitionsabschnitt des Skripts „Send record with Mail Designer 365“ und erläutern diesen. Das Skript ist in unserer frei verfügbaren FileMaker-Demo-Datenbank „MailDesignerIntegrationExample“ enthalten. (siehe Link am Ende dieser FAQ)

      Schritt 1: Erstelle die Variable $AttributeFields


      Beginne mit der Erstellung einer Variable namens $AttributeFieldsDiese Variable enthält den Textstring, der den Platzhalter-Inhalt definiert, der in deiner Mail Designer 365 E-Mail-Vorlage verwendet wird. Alle Werte müssen durch Kommata getrennt sein.

      Szenario A: FileMaker-Feldnamen stimmen mit den E-Mail-Platzhaltern überein


      Methode:
      Verwende FileMaker-Feldnamen, die direkt mit den Platzhaltern in deinem E-Mail-Design übereinstimmen. Erstelle die $AttributeFields-Variable, indem du diese Feldnamen kommasepariert auflistest.

      In Mail Designer verwendest du einfach den Feldnamen als Platzhalter.

      Format:
      $AttributeFields = "Table::Field1,Table::Field2,Table::Field3"

      Beispieldefinition von $AttributeFields in FileMaker:
      $AttributeFields="CityHotel::GUEST_FIRST_NAME,CityHotel::GUEST_LAST_NAME,CityHotel::GUEST_EMAIL,CityHotel::BOOKING_METHOD"

      In Mail Designer 365 kannst du später auf die Werte über diese Platzhalter zugreifen:
      GUEST_FIRST_NAME
      GUEST_LAST_NAME
      GUEST_EMAIL
      BOOKING_METHOD





      Szenario B: FileMaker-Feldnamen stimmen nicht mit den Platzhaltern in Mail Designer überein


      Methode:
      Erstelle die $AttributeFields-Variable, indem du jeden Platzhalternamen manuell dem entsprechenden Feld oder der entsprechenden Variable zuordnest, im Format:
      $AttributeFields = "PLACEHOLDER_NAME:" & FieldName_or_Variable & "," …

      Beispieldefinition von $AttributeFields in FileMaker:
      "BOOKING_DATE:" & RESERVATION_DATE & "," &
      "BOOKING_TIME:" & RESERVATION_TIME & "," & …





      Szenario C: Verwendung von FileMaker-Variablen als Platzhalter


      Methode:
      Wenn deine FileMaker-Variable denselben Namen wie der Platzhalter in Mail Designer 365 hat, kannst du sie direkt so zuweisen:
      $AttributeFields = "$city,$country"
      Dies sagt Mail Designer, dass der Wert von $city für den Platzhalter mit dem Namen „city“ verwendet werden soll.

      Beispiel:
      Die FileMaker-Variable $city enthält „München“. Wenn deine Mail Designer-Vorlage einen Platzhalter mit dem Namen „city“ enthält, dann definiere:
      $AttributeFields = "$city"
      Das Skript zeigt dann den Inhalt „München“ an und übergibt ihn an Mail Designer, um den Platzhalter „city“ auszufüllen.




      Das beste Szenario D: Kombination aller Methoden


      Du kannst die oben genannten Ansätze in einem einzigen $AttributeFields-String kombinieren.

      Methode:
      Mische übereinstimmende Feldnamen, manuell zugeordnete Felder und Variablen in der $AttributeFields-Variable.

      Beispiel:
      $AttributeFields = "BOOKING_DATE:" & RESERVATION_DATE & "," &
      "CityHotel::BREAKFAST_TYPE," & "$city"


      In Mail Designer 365 kannst du dann auf sie mit den Namen BOOKING_DATE, BREAKFAST_TYPE und city zugreifen.
      Mit Mail Designer 365 gehört das der Vergangenheit an. Designänderungen können jederzeit vom Marketing- oder Grafikteam selbst vorgenommen werden – ganz ohne Entwickler und ohne Programmierkenntnisse. Ihre API oder FileMaker-Lösung greift nur auf die Template-ID zu. Sie öffnen einfach Mail Designer 365, passen Logos, Texte oder saisonale Inhalte an und speichern – fertig. So funktioniert moderne, effiziente Arbeitsteilung.
      Ja, ohne weiteren Eingriff in deine API oder FileMaker Lösung. Deine API oder FileMaker-Lösung verweist nur auf die Template-ID aus Mail Designer – du kannst das Design jederzeit ändern: Logos, Texte, saisonale Elemente, ganz ohne Script-Anpassung. Einfach in Mail Designer 365 bearbeiten und speichern. Fertig.
      Ja, das ist möglich. Du benötigst mindestens FileMaker 18, um Anhänge über unsere API hinzuzufügen.
      Alle unsere Lizenzen beinhalten eine kostenlose 7-tägige Testphase – perfekt, um sämtliche Funktionen in Ruhe auszuprobieren und ganz flexibel zu entscheiden.
      Besuche unseren Mail Designer 365 Store. Sollten Fragen oder Probleme im Testzeitraum auftreten, kannst du uns gerne jederzeit kontaktieren.
      Jeder Versandplan bei Mail Designer enthält ein monatliches Kontingent an sogenannten Stamps. Ein Stamp entspricht einer E-Mail an einen Empfänger – etwa bei einem Massenversand an 10.000 Adressen werden entsprechend 10.000 Stamps verwendet.

      Bei Nutzung der Mail Designer API werden pro versendeter E-Mail 25 Stamps berechnet.

      Beispiel: Der Versandplan „Paris“ umfasst 15.000 Stamps pro Monat – ausreichend für bis zu 600 API-Mails.

      Überblick über die Mail Designer Versandpläne
      Du benötigst eine "Mail Designer 365 Design-Lizenz", um die E-Mail-Vorlagen für deine Kunden zu gestalten. Für jeden deiner Kunden legst du in Mail Designer 365 ein eigenes Projekt an und verwaltest dort die Vorlagen. Sollte dein Kunde die Vorlagen gerne regelmäßig selbst umgestalten, dann benötigt er ebenfalls eine Design Lizenz.
      Für den Versand benötigt jeder deiner Kunde eine eigene "Mail Designer Versand Lizenz". Jeder Kunde braucht seinen eigenen Mail Designer 365 Versandplan.
      Für Fragen und Feedback aller Art stehen wir dir gerne über unser Support-Formular zur Verfügung.
      Für Fragen und Feedback aller Art stehen wir dir gerne über unser Support-Formular zur Verfügung.
      Nein, du musst für jeden Kunden ein eigenes Team anlegen. Vermische keine Kunden innerhalb eines Teams – allein aus Datenschutzgründen ist es wichtig, dass Versandverlauf und andere kundenspezifische Daten sauber getrennt bleiben.
      Du selbst kannst natürlich Administrator in allen Teams sein.
      Erstelle ein neues Team pro Kunde über:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/teams/new
      Dein Kunde benötigt einen Mail Designer Kampagnenplan, abhängig davon, wie viele E-Mails er versenden möchte. So funktioniert die Abrechnung:
      1. Team anlegen:
      Erstelle für jeden Kunden ein eigenes Team in Mail Designer 365. Dort kannst du auch das Zahlungsmittel hinterlegen.
      2. Zahlung über dich:
      Möchtest du die Abrechnung selbst übernehmen, hinterlege deine eigene Kreditkarte. Du erhältst für jedes Team eine separate, ordentliche Rechnung. Wie viel du deinem Kunden weiterberechnest, entscheidest du selbst.
      3. Zahlung durch den Kunden:
      Alternativ kann dein Kunde direkt für den Versandplan zahlen. In diesem Fall hinterlegst du einfach die Zahlungsdaten deines Kunden im jeweiligen Team.
      Aktuell werden nur Text-Platzhalter von der API unterstützt. Bildplatzhalter sind auf unserer Roadmap für einen späteren Zeitpunkt.
      Alle equinux Accounts unterstützen die sichere Zwei-Faktor-Authentifizierung (2FA) als zusätzliche Schutzebene für Ihre Daten.

      Um 2FA für Ihren equinux Account einzurichten, loggen Sie sich bei id.equinux.com ein und gehen Sie zu dem Reiter "Zwei-Faktor-Authentifizierung". Hier finden Sie den QR-Code bzw. den Authentifizierungsschlüssel, den Sie benötigen werden, um 2FA für Ihren equinux Account in Ihrer OTP-Lösung einzurichten.




      equinux 2FA ist kompatibel mit allen wichtigen Authentifizierungs- und Passwörter-Apps, inklusive:
      • Google Authenticator
      • Microsoft Authenticator
      • Twilio Authy
      • 1Password
      • FreeOTP
      • Bitwarden
      Du versendest regelmäßig Buchungsbestätigungen, Preisangebote, Rechnungen, Willkommens-E-Mails? Nutze die API, um Mail Designer 365 reibungslos mit deiner FileMaker Datenbank zu integrieren und wunderschön gestaltete Transaktions-E-Mails an Kunden und Mitarbeiter zu verschicken – direkt von FileMaker aus.
      Die API ist vielseitig und eignet sich für mehrere professionelle Use-Cases. Falls du regelmäßig E-Mails, wie z. B. Bestellbestätigungen, Reservierungsbestätigungen, Willkommens-E-Mails, Erinnerungsmails für Termine, Rechnungen, Preisangebote, Portfolios, usw. verschickst, kannst du die Mail Designer 365 FileMaker API problemlos anwenden, um Zeit zu sparen und wunderschöne E-Mails direkt von deiner FileMaker-Datenbank aus zu versenden.

      Die API Dokumentation befindet sich hier:
      https://my.maildesigner365.com/docs/api
      Unsere eigenen Tests haben gezeigt, dass oft das Filemaker Script nicht gespeichert wurde, bevor man einen weiteren Anlauf machen. Man erkennt das an dem Sternchen:

      Ja, dieses Szenario kennen wir gut. Deshalb haben wir eine eigene Anleitung zur Integration von FileMaker mit Mail Designer erstellt. Schau sie dir hier an MailDesigner Integration für Filemaker a.

      Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten die Bildgröße zu verändern:

      Option 1: Direkt in deinem Design skalieren

      1. Klicke auf das Bild, das du anpassen möchtest.
      2. Ziehe einen der orangen Anfasser in den Ecken, um die Größe manuell zu verändern.

      Tipp: Halte Command (Cmd) gedrückt, um frei zu skalieren, ohne die Proportionen beizubehalten.

      Hinweis: Mit dem blauen Anfasser in der linken oberen Ecke kannst du den Eckenradius des Bildes verändern, z. B. für abgerundete Ecken.

      Option 2: Größe in der Seitenleiste festlegen

      1. Wähle das Bild in deinem Design aus.
      2. In der rechten Bild-Seitenleiste kannst du unter Größe eine exakte Breite und Höhe in Pixeln eingeben.
      3. Stelle sicher, dass „Proportionen beibehalten“ aktiviert ist, wenn das Seitenverhältnis erhalten bleiben soll.
      Bildgröße in der Seitenleiste ändern

      Du möchtest dein Bild lieber zuschneiden? Hier findest du eine Anleitung zum Zuschneiden von Bildern in Mail Designer.

      Es gibt zwei Hauptmöglichkeiten, den Hintergrund eines Textbereichs in Mail Designer 365 zu ändern:

      Verwenden von Layout-Blöcken mit Hintergrund

      Mail Designer 365 bietet Layout-Blöcke, die bereits mit Hintergrundfarben für Textbereiche ausgestattet sind:

      • Gehe in die Seitenleiste und wähle den Reiter Layout aus.
      • Scrolle nach unten zum Abschnitt Text mit Bild (Sidebar).
      • Dort findest du verschiedene Layout-Blöcke, bei denen die Textbereiche einen farbigen Hintergrund haben (im Vorschaubild gelb dargestellt).
      • Ziehe einfach den gewünschten Block in dein Design, um Textbereiche mit Hintergrund hinzuzufügen.

      Hinzufügen und Anpassen eines Badges

      Wenn du nur bestimmte Bereiche deines bestehenden Texts mit einem Hintergrund versehen möchtest, kannst du die Badge-Funktion verwenden:

      • Klicke in den Textbereich, wo du den Hintergrund hinzufügen möchtest.
      • Wähle in der Seitenleiste den Reiter Einfügen und dann Badge aus.
      • Durchsuche die Badge-Stile und wähle einen aus.
      • Nach dem Einfügen kannst du den Hintergrund, die Schriftart, den Rahmen, den Innenabstand und mehr im Reiter Format anpassen.
      • Füge deinen Text in das Badge ein und gestalte es nach deinen Wünschen.



      Beide Methoden ermöglichen es dir, optisch hervorgehobene Textbereiche mit Hintergründen zu gestalten und so dein E-Mail-Design aufzuwerten.

      Was bedeutet BCC in E-Mails?

      BCC steht für "Blind Carbon Copy" (Blindkopie). Damit kannst du eine E-Mail an mehrere Empfänger senden, ohne dass diese die Adressen der anderen sehen. Es ist eine diskrete Möglichkeit, Personen in eine Unterhaltung einzubeziehen – ohne dass es jemand mitbekommt.

      Was ist CC und wie unterscheidet es sich von BCC?

      CC steht für "Carbon Copy" (Kopie). Alle Empfänger im CC-Feld erhalten die E-Mail – und alle anderen sehen, wer sie erhalten hat. Verwende CC, wenn Transparenz wichtig ist oder wenn du jemanden zur Information hinzufügst.

      • CC: Empfänger sind für alle sichtbar.
      • BCC: Empfänger bleiben untereinander verborgen.
      • CC verwenden: Wenn Sichtbarkeit und Offenheit gefragt sind.
      • BCC verwenden: Wenn Privatsphäre wichtig ist oder um "Antwort an alle"-Chaos zu vermeiden.

      Wann sollte ich CC statt BCC verwenden?

      • CC verwenden:
        • Wenn alle sehen sollen, wer beteiligt ist.
        • Wenn du Kolleg:innen zur Information einbeziehen möchtest.
        • Wenn du Informationen im Team oder der Organisation teilst.
      • BCC verwenden:
        • Wenn du viele Personen anschreibst und deren Privatsphäre schützen möchtest.
        • Wenn du eine Kaltakquise-E-Mail versendest und andere Leads nicht zeigen willst.
        • Wenn du diskret nachfasst oder unnötige Rückmeldungen vermeiden willst.

      Kann ich einen Newsletter mit BCC versenden?

      Technisch ja – aber es ist keine gute Idee.

      Wenn du BCC für Newsletter nutzt:

      • Kann deine E-Mail als Spam eingestuft werden.
      • Wirkt unpersönlich und bietet keine Personalisierung.
      • Gibt dir keine Möglichkeit, Öffnungen oder Klicks zu tracken.
      • Verstößt möglicherweise gegen die DSGVO.

      Verwende stattdessen eine professionelle Lösung wie Mail Designer 365, um deine E-Mails richtig zu versenden – mit vollem Tracking, Personalisierung und rechtlicher Sicherheit.

      Warum sollte ich BCC in E-Mails verwenden?

      BCC ist hilfreich, wenn du:

      • Empfängeradressen vertraulich behandeln willst.
      • Eine Nachricht unauffällig an eine andere Person senden möchtest.
      • Eine große Gruppe anschreibst, ohne die Adressen offenzulegen.

      Tipp: Trage immer mindestens eine Adresse ins „An“-Feld ein – manche Mailserver verlangen das!

      Was sollte ich bei der Nutzung von BCC vermeiden?

      • Keine regelmäßigen Mailings über BCC an große Gruppen – nutze stattdessen ein professionelles Mailing-Tool.
      • Vergiss nicht, Datenschutz- und Einwilligungsregeln einzuhalten.
      • Vermeide BCC in sensiblen Situationen, in denen Offenheit erwartet wird.

      Was ist der beste Weg, um viele Empfänger per E-Mail zu erreichen?

      Spare dir manuelles CC/BCC und wähle eine smarte Lösung.

      Mit Mail Designer 365 kannst du:

      • Professionelle, ansprechende E-Mails gestalten – ganz ohne Code.
      • Deine Empfängerliste verwalten und segmentieren.
      • Öffnungs-, Klick- und Bounceraten nachverfolgen.
      • 100 % DSGVO-konform bleiben.

      Ist die Nutzung von BCC für E-Mail-Kampagnen DSGVO-konform?

      Nein, ist sie nicht.

      Laut DSGVO:

      • Musst du die Einwilligung aller Empfänger nachweisen können.
      • Muss ein Abmeldelink vorhanden sein.
      • Müssen Kontakte sicher gespeichert und verarbeitet werden.

      All das unterstützt BCC nicht. Mail Designer 365 hingegen schon – und das mit einem Hosting in Deutschland und vollständig DSGVO-konformer Versand-Infrastruktur.

      Immer noch unsicher?

      Du möchtest professionelle E-Mails versenden? Entdecke, wie du mit Mail Designer 365 für Mac beeindruckende Newsletter gestaltest.

      Oder erfahre, wie du DSGVO-konforme Newsletter versendest – mit den professionellen Versandfunktionen, die in jedem Plan enthalten sind.

      Mail Designer 365 wird pro-Nutzer:in lizenziert. Das bedeutet, dass jede Person die Mail Designer 365 nutzt eine eigene Lizenz braucht.

      Um die Kontosicherheit zu gewährleisten, werden Kontoanmeldungen von einem automatischen System überprüft. Es gibt mehrere mögliche Ursachen, die eine Kontosperre auslösen können:

      • Ein Konto wird mit anderen Personen geteilt
      • Das Konto wird als "generisches" Konto verwendet (z. B. "Laborcomputer 1"), anstatt für eine Person personalisiert zu sein.
      Um ein gesperrtes Konto, das für andere Personen freigegeben wird, zu reparieren

      Wenn Sie diese Schritte durchgeführt haben, wenden Sie sich bitte an unser Support-Team und nennen uns Ihre equinux-ID sowie Ihre Bestellbestätigungsnummer. Ein Teammitglied überprüft Ihre Daten und kann die Einschränkungen für Ihr Konto aufheben.

      Bei weiteren Fragen wenden Sie sich bitte an unser Mail Designer Team .

      Weitere Einträge laden